JP7707989B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery to determine whether a player will win or not when a certain start condition is met, and when a player wins, the game pays out a certain gaming medium to the player in response to the fulfillment of a certain winning condition.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to generate at least a predetermined first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and some are configured to be able to win a winning game in the second gaming state and to generate the second gaming state again in succession (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295672 A

For gaming machines such as those listed above, in order to increase interest in the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is a gaming machine comprising: launching means capable of launching a gaming ball; a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down; judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the entry of the gaming ball into the start entry area; display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when the gaming ball enters the start entry area; variable entry means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter and a first state in which the gaming ball can enter from the second state when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means; and update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, and in a specific gaming state in which the specific information can be updated by the update means, a specific display is made when the specific information becomes a specific update state, The gaming machine is configured to generate a predetermined profit state when a profit state generating condition is established after the specific display, and includes an announcement control means for executing a predetermined announcement mode display with a first announcement mode display or a second announcement mode display different from the first announcement mode display as a notification mode display. The gaming machine is configured to generate a specific profit when a game ball launched by the launching means enters the variable ball entry means in the first state and a predetermined game condition is established. In a predetermined gaming state before the occurrence of the predetermined profit state, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, it is configured such that it is more disadvantageous to a player to subsequently execute a first predetermined gaming operation than to execute a second predetermined gaming operation. In the case where the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the announcement control means controls the specific information to be in the predetermined updated state. and executing the first notification mode display at a predetermined timing a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and executing the second notification mode display at a specific timing after the predetermined timing and before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, the notification switching is configured to be executable when the gaming state becomes the predetermined gaming state, and when the specific judgment result is reached in the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine is configured to execute the predetermined notification mode display with the second notification mode display for the specific judgment result, and to prompt the player to execute the second predetermined gaming operation, and the gaming machine is configured to at least display different between the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display between the predetermined timing and the specific timing when executing the notification switching, and to display the second notification mode display from the gaming machine. The display device is configured to execute a predetermined game operation notification display that notifies the player that a predetermined game operation may be executed based on the player's judgment rather than a game operation instruction display to the player from the start of the game, and is configured to set, in a predetermined memory area, predetermined period information which is information corresponding to the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the predetermined updated state based on at least the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry area, and is configured so that the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing can be changed based on the type of the predetermined period information, and is configured so that, when the player executes the first predetermined game operation while the player is being urged to execute the second predetermined game operation, the player can obtain a lower profit than when the player executes the second predetermined game operation while the player is being urged to execute the second predetermined game operation.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine includes launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the entry of the gaming ball into the start entry area, a display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when the gaming ball enters the start entry area, a variable entry means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to enter and a first state in which the gaming ball can enter from the second state when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, and an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, and the gaming machine performs a specific display when the specific information becomes a specific update state in a specific gaming state in which the specific information can be updated by the update means, and displays the specific display. and a notification control means for executing a predetermined notification mode display in a first notification mode display or a second notification mode display different from the first notification mode display as a notification mode display, and this gaming machine is configured to generate a specific benefit when a gaming ball launched by the launching means enters the variable ball entry means in the first state and a predetermined gaming condition is established, and is configured such that when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means in a predetermined gaming state before the occurrence of the specific benefit state, it is more disadvantageous to the player to subsequently execute a first specific gaming operation than to subsequently execute a second specific gaming operation, and when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the notification control means controls the specific information to be in the specified updated state rather than the specific information being in the specified updated state. The gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing a notification switching for switching the notification mode display so as to execute the first notification mode display at a predetermined timing before a predetermined period of time, and to execute the second notification mode display at a specific timing after the predetermined timing and before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, the notification switching is configured to be executable when the gaming state becomes the predetermined gaming state, and when the specific judgment result is reached in the predetermined gaming state, the gaming machine is configured to execute the predetermined notification mode display with the second notification mode display for the specific judgment result, and to prompt the player to execute the second specified gaming operation, and the gaming machine is configured to at least display different between the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display and to display a different notification mode from the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing when the notification switching is executed, and The display is configured to execute a predetermined game operation notification display that notifies the player that a predetermined game operation can be executed based on the player's judgment, not a game operation instruction display to the player, configured to set in a predetermined storage area predetermined period information that is information corresponding to the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state based on at least the entry of a game ball into the start ball entry area, configured to change the period from the initial state until the specific information reaches the specific timing based on the type of predetermined period information, configured to be able to obtain a lower profit when the player executes the first predetermined game operation in a state where the player is prompted to execute the second predetermined game operation than when the player executes the second predetermined game operation in a state where the player is prompted to execute the second predetermined game operation. This has the effect of suitably increasing the attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. This is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine, and is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. This is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 1 jackpot random number table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 2 jackpot random number table. This is a diagram showing a schematic example of a special chart 2 jackpot type table. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a small prize type table for special chart 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a small prize type table for special chart 2. This is a list that explains, for each game state, the trigger for transitioning to that game state, the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol, the probability of a hit for a normal symbol, the encouraged mode of ball launch, the main winning destinations, the change time of the first special symbol, the change time of the second special symbol, and whether or not right-hitting is possible. This is a diagram showing the firing mode in each game state and the transition destination of the game state based on the type of jackpot won, etc. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a reserved number table for special drawing 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a reserved number table for special drawing 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of Table A of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of Table B of the stop pattern table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a C table of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a D table of the stop pattern table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of an E table of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an F table of the stop pattern table. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a miss of special chart 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a small win of special chart 1. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a special chart 2 miss, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a special chart 2 big win/small win. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win opening table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a small prize opening table. This shows the drive pattern of the large prize opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid when the small prize type ``Time-saving B (small prize A)'' or ``Time-saving C (small prize A)'' is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the detection mode of the large prize opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the large prize flag, and is a timing chart when a ball passes through the specific area. This shows the drive patterns of the large prize opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid when the small prize type ``Time-saving B (small prize A)'' or ``Time-saving C (small prize A)'' is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the detection modes of the large prize opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the large prize flag, and is a timing chart when the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area. This shows the drive pattern of the large prize opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid when the small prize type ``Time-saving D (small prize B)'' is won in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, the detection mode of the large prize opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the large prize flag, and is a timing chart when a ball passes through the specific area. 1A is a diagram showing a typical example of a normal winning random number table, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a typical example of a normal winning time table, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a typical example of a normal electric role release table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a time-saving end condition table. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device. FIG. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of a first pending information storage area, a second pending information storage area, and an execution information storage area. This table summarizes the difference in the average number of balls acquired for each game state when a small jackpot type "Time-saving B (small jackpot A)" or "Time-saving C (small jackpot A)" is won in "normal game state A," and when a right-hand play is performed when the small jackpot is won to generate a jackpot, and when a right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won, the game returns to "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special pattern again, and the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing a transition to the "normal pattern low probability time-saving state." FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a break-even number table. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable display data table. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an additional data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a time-saving counting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a relief arrival counting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a specific area device opening/closing control process executed by an MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the processing performed by the MPU in the main control unit when the large prize opening is opened during a small win. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the large prize opening executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a normal change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a normal electric utility control process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a base value process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the special command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the special diagram 2 command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a rescue-related command receiving process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the variable performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the display special diagram 1 stop type command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display processing when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 1A is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing the pending ball number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the demo command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing variable performance command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a confirmation command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a character-based command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing rear image-related command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a pending image setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing detailed image transfer processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device when a small win on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A", where (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the rescue counter in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) when the small win on special chart 1 is won, the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the rescue counter in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period) when the small win on special chart 1 is won, the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a break-even number table in the second embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the display special diagram 1 stop type command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display processing when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the second embodiment. 13 shows the progress of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the second embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). The diagram shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the “normal game state A” of the second embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the rescue counter 203r in the “normal game state A” is “551” (i.e., the ambiguous notification period) when a small win on special chart 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a). The figure shows the transition of the presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the third embodiment, (a) is a figure showing a state in which the special symbol 1 small win is won during the period (i.e., the ambiguous notification period) in which the value of the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "524 to 563 spins" and the opening of the small win game is being executed, (b) is a figure showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed continuously from the state of (a), and in the state of (a), FIG. 1 shows a state in which the content of the right-hit notification display has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state shown in FIG. 2; (c) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is still in progress from the state shown in FIG. 2, and the content of the right-hit notification display has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state shown in FIG. 2; (d) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is still in progress from the state shown in FIG. 2, and the content of the right-hit notification display has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state shown in FIG. A flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. The figures show the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the fourth embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d from the state of (b), the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the state returns to the "normal game state A", and the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a flowchart showing rear image command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the fifth embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), (b) is a diagram showing a state from the state of (a) in which the variable display of the special pattern that was being executed has won a small win on special chart 1, the variable presentation has ended, and the third pattern has stopped, and (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (b). 13 shows the transition of the presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when the special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the sixth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops; (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a); (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d from the state of (b), the small win state ends without transitioning to the big win state, and the game returns to the "normal game state A", and the special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "550" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops; and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). This shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the sixth embodiment, where (a) shows the state in which, from the state of Figure 106 (d), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the state returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops, and (b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a). A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table of the number of times a relief condition is satisfied in the seventh embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. This is a table summarizing the difference in the average number of balls acquired for each game state when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" of the seventh embodiment, the average number of balls acquired when right-hand play is performed when the small jackpot is won to generate a jackpot, and the average number of balls acquired when right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won, the game returns to "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol again, and the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing a transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state." This is a table summarizing the difference in the average number of balls acquired for each game state when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" of the seventh embodiment, the average number of balls acquired when right-hand play is performed when the small jackpot is won to generate a jackpot, and the average number of balls acquired when right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won, the game returns to "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol again, and the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached, causing a transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state." FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a break-even number table in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a rescue condition satisfaction count lottery process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a base value process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rescue-related command receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display processing when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 shows the transition of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A" of the eighth embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which a small win on special chart 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third pattern stops when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "550" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing a state in which a notification is given from the state of (b) that the ball has passed through a specific area 65d due to the player's right-handed play, and (d) is a diagram showing a transition from the state of (c) to a big win state. 13 shows the transition of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when a special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" of the ninth embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the special chart 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends and the third pattern stops, and (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of (c). A flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a sub-rescue counter display process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. 13 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the "normal gaming state A" of the tenth embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the third pattern has stopped when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal gaming state A" is at "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the next first special pattern has started from the state of (a), (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the third pattern has stopped from the state of (b), and (d) is a diagram showing the state in which the variable display of the next first special pattern has started from the state of (c). 128 shows the progression of the presentation on the third pattern display device 81 when the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the "normal game state A" of the tenth embodiment, where (a) shows the state from the state of FIG. 128(d) where the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the third pattern has stopped, and (b) shows the state where the variable display of the first special pattern has started to be executed when the rescue counter 203r is "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period). A front view of the game board in the eleventh embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figs. 1 to 89. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, transition to a game state that is predefined and advantageous to the player, thereby granting the player a profit. In the advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met by the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In these gaming machines, the suggestions given to the player regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions during a specified period of time are not sufficiently satisfactory, and there is a demand for further improvement in the content of the suggestions.

Specifically, for example, if the suggestion for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state is uniform over a given period of time, it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. In addition, it is difficult or impossible for the player to obtain the interest that arises from changing the suggestion depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can generate a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal game state A," the gameplay is provided with the option of whether or not to generate a big win with the small win, with the aim of enriching the gameplay variation and providing the player with a gaming machine that can notify the player of a hitting method that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, and a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. The system includes a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode, a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a game ball entering the start ball entry area, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having numerous nails and winning holes (ball entry holes) 63, 64, 71, etc. is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 3.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 5). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described below. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button that allows the player to select the performance content in the preview display executed in the variable display of the third pattern (hereinafter, the variable display of the third pattern is referred to as the "variable performance").

The variable presentation is a presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described below, and is executed when a ball shot into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning hole (for example, the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 (see FIG. 3) described below), and after the pattern (the third symbol described below) changes for a predetermined period of time, the result of the lottery held for that winning hole (whether it is a jackpot or not) is presented to the player based on the combination of patterns that are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, a stage refers to a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described below, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "town stage," "sky stage," and "island stage." The above-mentioned variable presentations and various presentations such as the "reach display" executed during the variable presentations are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The "reach display" refers to the display just before the "jackpot display" indicating the occurrence of a jackpot in the variable presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. Specifically, it refers to the state in which the third symbols in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4) described later stop at the same symbol, and the center symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) has not yet stopped and continues to vary.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into a single element that constitutes the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, a single element that constitutes the effect is referred to as a "variable element"), a variable element of a "super reach" that is developed and executed from the variable element of the "normal reach" and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the variable element of the "normal reach", and a variable element of a "special reach" that is similarly developed and executed from the variable element of the "normal reach" and has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the variable element of the "super reach".

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no variable performance is taking place (i.e., during a demo display) or during a "high-speed variable" element in which the third symbol changes so quickly that it is invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the following order: "town stage" → "empty stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → ... Also, immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when a variable element of a "normal reach" is started in the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, if the variable element of the "normal reach" develops into a variable element of a "super reach" or a variable element of a "special reach", a selection screen for the variable element of the "super reach" or the variable element of the "special reach" may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the variable element of the "normal reach".

Specifically, the selection screen displays multiple candidates that can be selected as the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach", and the selected candidate is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed. Then, the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" are determined based on the performance candidate that was selected when the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" developed, and the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach" are executed by the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, it may be configured as an operation lever that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or changed, or the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the variable elements of the "Special Reach" may be determined.

In addition, the frame button 22 is configured to be positioned on the front side of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the side, but the position of the frame button 22 may be any position that allows the player to press it. For example, it may be positioned on the top side of the upper tray 17, or it may be positioned near (on the top or side of) the lower tray 50 described below.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light emission mode by turning on or blinking in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot is hit or a specified "reach display" is activated, and serve to enhance the presentation effect during play. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination sections 29-33 incorporating light-emitting means such as light-emitting diodes (Light Emitting Diodes, hereafter abbreviated as "LEDs").

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or a "reach display" is activated, the built-in LEDs of the illumination units 29-33 light up or flash to indicate that a jackpot is being hit or that a "reach display" is being displayed, which is one step away from a jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the top left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, and has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 3) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 to create a more dazzling appearance.

The ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary. In this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is arranged, which is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there is built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5), a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the shooting of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51, and the ball is shot into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

A base display device 401 is disposed on the main board that constitutes the main control device 110, and is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen when looking at the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. The base display device 401 normally displays a base value (the number (proportion) of balls paid out (awarded) for every 100 balls fired in normal play mode), while in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it displays a probability setting value. The base display device 401 is also configured to be able to display error history.

The main board constituting the main control device 110 is also provided with a setting key 501 that is used to change the set probability setting value or check the set probability setting value, and an error display button 502 that is used to display the error history on the base display device 401. The setting key 501 and error display button 502 are provided protruding from the main board through holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel, etc., without opening the board box 100.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 5). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 503. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the specific configuration of the game board 13 will be explained with reference to Figure 3. First, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general winning hole 63 in which a predetermined number of prize balls can be obtained as a bonus when a ball enters the hole, a variable winning device 65 that opens when a jackpot of the third symbol occurs, a first starting hole 64 as a start detection area that triggers the drawing of a first special symbol, which is one of the third symbols (so-called special symbols), a second starting hole 71 that triggers the drawing of a second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, a through gate 67 that triggers the drawing of a second symbol (so-called normal symbol), a normal electric role 72 that allows a ball to enter the second starting hole 71 when it is open, a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, etc., and a variable display unit 80 having the like, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning hole 63, the first start hole 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second start hole 71, the normal electric device 72, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center part of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be explained below, mainly with reference to Figure 3.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an approximately circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) on the front of the game board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 3), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is attenuated (hereinafter, the act of launching a ball with force such as hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is referred to as "right-handed play", while the act of launching a ball and passing the left side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is referred to as "left-handed play"). In the first embodiment, in left-handed play, the ball can or easily enters the first starting hole 64, while the ball is difficult or unable to enter the second starting hole 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67. Also, in right-handed play, the ball can or easily enter the second starting hole 71, the variable winning device 65, and the through gate 67, while the ball is difficult or unable to enter the first starting hole 64.

In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is fixed by being driven into the base plate 60. The arc member 70 is formed on the inner surface of the base plate 60 to connect the rails.

At the upper right side of the play area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 3), a special symbol display device 37 is provided, which is equipped with a status LED group 37a consisting of multiple LEDs that are light-emitting means, a special LED group 37b, and a right-hit notification lamp 37c. The special symbol display device 37 displays the changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol in response to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 5), which will be described later (hereinafter, the changes in the displays of both special symbols will be referred to as "dynamic displays"), and also displays the play status of the pachinko machine 10.

The status LED group 37a indicates, by its lighting state, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been displayed as a variable display among the balls that have entered (entered) the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 described below. The number of jackpot rounds (hereinafter, rounds may be simply referred to as "R") and error displays are also indicated by the lighting state of the status LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

Note that a "round" in a jackpot refers to the time from when the large prize opening plate 65a, which opens and closes the variable prize winning device 65 as a movable device described later in order to divide the number of winning balls in a jackpot, is opened until it is closed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the large prize opening plate 65a began to open, or when 10 balls win while the large prize opening plate 65a is open.

The special LED group 37b is made up of a total of 12 LEDs, consisting of an upper LED group 37b1 made up of six LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also made up of six LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays a first special symbol that indicates the result of a first lottery game that is executed based on a ball entering the first start hole 64, which serves as a start detection area. The lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays a second special symbol that indicates the result of a second lottery game that is executed based on a ball entering the second start hole 71.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group 37b1 are lit up one by one in sequence, starting from the top LED and followed by the lower LEDs, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first starting hole 64 provided in the center of the surface of the game board 13 has elapsed, and then displays a stopped pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

The lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the lower LED group 37b2 are lit one by one in sequence, starting from the top LED and continuing down, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning at the second starting hole 71 provided on the right side of the game board 13 has elapsed, after which a stop display is displayed with a pattern indicating the judgment result (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 types of stop patterns, depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

For either LED group 37b1, 37b2, if the result of the judgment is a miss, only the leftmost LED is displayed as lit, if the result of the judgment is a big win, each LED group is displayed as lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the big win, and if the result of the judgment is a small win, each LED group is displayed as lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the small win. Details of the stop patterns of each LED group will be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, a hit/miss judgment (a hit lottery) is performed on whether or not a ball that enters the second starting hole 71 is a hit, and if a hit/miss judgment determines that a hit is a hit, the type of hit is also judged according to the winning hole 71 that entered, and the variable winning device 65 as a movable device is opened and closed according to the type of hit. Also, if a hit/miss judgment in the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern determines that a hit is a small hit, the variable winning device 65 and the specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5) described later are opened and closed, respectively. Then, if a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see FIG. 5) described later with the opening of the specific area solenoid 65f provided in the variable winning device 65, the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed as a hit game according to the type of small hit in the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

In the first embodiment, the type of jackpot determined is a "10-round time-saving jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "time-saving A")" in which the variable winning device 65 opens 10 times based on winning at the second starting hole 71 (see Figure 8).

In the first embodiment, the types of small wins that are determined based on winning the first start port 64 as the start detection area include a "1-round small win without time reduction (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "small win A")" in which the variable winning device 65 opens once, a "5-round large win with time reduction (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "time reduction B")" in which the variable winning device 65 opens five times as a movable device, and a "7-round large win with time reduction (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "time reduction C")" in which the variable winning device 65 opens seven times (see FIG. 9(a)). In addition, based on winning the second start port 71, there are a "1-round small win without time reduction (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "small win B")" in which the variable winning device 65 opens once, and a "10-round large win with time reduction (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "time reduction D") in which the variable winning device 65 opens ten times (see FIG. 9(b)).

Here, "normal game state" refers to a game state that is not a "normal high probability time shortening state" or a "normal low probability time shortening state" (hereinafter, "normal high probability time shortening state" and "normal low probability time shortening state" may be collectively referred to as "time shortening state"), in which the probability of winning a jackpot and small win for each special symbol is a fixed probability, the probability of winning a normal symbol is lower than in the "normal high probability time shortening state" (same as the "normal low probability time shortening state"), and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is short. In other words, the "normal game state" is a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot and small win are equal to the "time shortening state", while the probability of winning a normal symbol is lower than in the "normal high probability time shortening state", and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is also short.

Details will be described later, but in the "normal game state", if a so-called right-hand play is performed, it is not a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 71 (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 71 may be referred to as the "winning assistance state"), but is the most disadvantageous game state for the player. In the "normal game state", if a ball shot in a right-hand play is detected (for example, the ball passing through the through gate 67, etc.), a predetermined alarm (for example, a voice output of "Please return to left-hand play" or a display of "Please return to left-hand play" on the third pattern display device 81) is output to indicate to the player and hall personnel that a non-recommended game is being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the continued execution of non-recommended right-hand play in the "normal game state", and to realize game play according to the game specifications.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of generating two "normal game states": a "normal game state A" in which right-hand play is prohibited and left-hand play is encouraged, and in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily performed, and a "normal game state B" in which right-hand play is not prohibited and there are still reserved balls remaining for the dynamic display of the second special symbol after the end of the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" (see FIG. 10).

The "normal game state A" is a game state which is entered when there are no reserved balls of the second special pattern remaining at the end of the "time-shortened state" after initialization by clearing the RAM, or when the "normal game state B" ends (i.e., after all remaining reserved balls of the dynamic display of the second special pattern have been executed), and as described above, right-handed play is prohibited, and it is configured to allow left-handed play to allow the ball to enter the first starting hole 64 (see Figure 10).

"Normal game state B" (hereinafter, "normal game state A" and "normal game state B" may be collectively referred to as "normal game state") is a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot for special symbols and the probability of winning a jackpot for normal symbols are the same as in "normal game state A", but after the end condition of the "time-shortened state" is met, reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remain. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation), so in "normal game state B", "normal game state B" continues until the lottery results for the dynamic display of the second special symbol stored in the "time-shortened state" are displayed for all reserved balls. As described above, in this "normal game state B," the probability of winning the normal pattern is low, and the opening time (projection time, drive time) of the normal electric role 72 is short, so that the ball cannot enter the second start hole 71, but right-hand play is not prohibited, and even if a ball is detected by the through gate 67 as the start detection area by right-hand play, the above-mentioned alarm sound and alarm display are not executed. And, in this "normal game state B," if all reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special pattern do not win a big win or a small win, the game is configured to transition to "normal game state A."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the probability of winning the special symbol is in a low probability state, if a jackpot state (including a jackpot state based on a small jackpot win) does not occur a predetermined number of times in succession in the dynamic display (in the first embodiment, "800 times"), as a rescue measure for the player, a function (so-called ceiling function) is installed that generates a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the winning probability of the normal symbol are in a low probability state, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time (projection time, driving time) of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened (hereinafter, when the probability of winning the special symbol is in a low probability state, entering the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" without a jackpot state occurring a predetermined number of times in succession in the dynamic display is referred to as "rescue condition establishment", and the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in which the "rescue condition establishment" occurs when the probability of winning the special symbol is in a low probability state may be referred to as the "number of rescue condition establishment times").

Next, the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" refers to a state in which the probability of winning each special symbol is low, like the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" described later, but the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the variable display time of the normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as "variable display") is shortened, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is lengthened (hereinafter, the increase in the probability of winning the normal symbol, the shortening of the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the lengthening of the opening time of the normal electric role 72 may be referred to as the "high probability time shortening function"). In this "normal symbol high probability time shortening state," the normal electric role 72 located on the right side of the second starting hole 71 when viewed from the front is more likely to be in an open state, and the ball shot in right-handed play is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71.

In other words, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is the same as in the "normal game state", but a hit with a normal symbol is more likely to be derived in a shorter time than in the "normal game state", and the open state of the normal electric role 72 is longer. Therefore, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", it is easier to make a ball shot by right-handed play enter the second starting hole 71, so it is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 ball/entry) based on the entry into the second starting hole 71 and play while minimizing the decrease in the number of balls in hand.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal high probability time shortening state" is configured to be able to generate a number of states (in the first embodiment, "normal high probability time shortening state A" and "normal high probability time shortening state B") with different end conditions for the "normal high probability time shortening state" (described later in the time shortening end condition table 202m in FIG. 24). Then, until one of the time shortening end conditions is met, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is in a high probability state. Note that when the time shortening end condition is met, the reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remain, so the "normal high probability time shortening state" is configured to transition to the above-mentioned "normal game state B".

"Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" is a game state that occurs after the end of a jackpot when a jackpot type or a small jackpot type that is granted the "high probability time-reduction function" is won, and is a state in which the "high probability time-reduction function" is granted mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once. Then, it transitions to "Normal Game State B" mainly on the condition that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once. In addition, "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" is judged to have met the termination condition of "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed seven times, or when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a total of eight times, and it transitions to "Normal Game State B".

Therefore, when the game transitions to the "regular high probability time shortening state A", the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "once" during the "regular high probability time shortening state A", and in the "regular game state B" to which the game transitions after the "regular high probability time shortening state A" ends, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "four times" based on the remaining reserved number, so that the game is configured so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "five times" in total.

Here, as will be described in detail later, the probability of a big win for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0.02/100 to 0.04/100, and the probability of a small win is 15.5/100 (see Figure 7 (b)). On average, this means that a big win (a big win based on winning a small win) can occur about once every six spins.

Therefore, when the game transitions to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A", the probability of hitting the jackpot in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" or "Normal Game State B" (i.e., the so-called "consecutive win" probability) is configured to be approximately 57%.

"Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B" (hereinafter, "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State A" and "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B" may be collectively referred to as "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State") is a game state that occurs after the end of a big win or small win that is granted the "high probability time reduction function", and is a state in which the "high probability time reduction function" is granted mainly until the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed five times. Then, it transitions to "Normal Game State B" mainly on the condition that the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed five times. In addition, "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B" is judged to have completed the termination condition of "Normal High Probability Time Reduction State B" when the dynamic display of the first special pattern is executed seven times, or when the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed a total of 12 times, and transitions to "Normal Game State B".

Therefore, when the game transitions to the "regular high probability time shortening state B", the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "five times" during the "regular high probability time shortening state B", and in the "regular game state B" to which the game transitions after the "regular high probability time shortening state B" ends, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "four times" of the remaining reserved number, so that the game is configured so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed "nine times" in total.

As mentioned above, the probability of a big win for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0.02/100 to 0.04/100, and the probability of a small win is 15.5/100 (see Figure 7(b)). On average, the system is configured so that a big win (a big win based on winning a small win) can occur about once every six spins.

Therefore, when the game transitions to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B", the probability of hitting the jackpot in "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" or "Normal Game State B" (i.e., the so-called "consecutive win" probability) is configured to be approximately 78%.

In other words, when comparing "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" and "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B", it is configured so that a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small jackpot) is more likely to occur when transitioning to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B", and it becomes possible to play in a row, resulting in the possibility of winning more balls.

In addition, when it is detected that a ball has been released by left-handed play in the "normal high probability time reduction state" or the "normal low probability time reduction state" (for example, detection of a ball entering the first starting hole 64), a specified alarm (for example, a voice output of "Please hit to the right" or a display of "Please hit to the right") is output to inform the player and hall staff that a non-recommended play is being played. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress the continued playing of non-recommended left-handed play in the "normal high probability time reduction state" or the "normal low probability time reduction state", and to realize playability according to the game specifications.

Next, the "normal low probability time shortening state" is a state in which the probability of winning each special symbol is low, similar to the "normal game state" and the "normal high probability time shortening state", and the probability of winning with the normal symbol is low, similar to the "normal game state", while the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long, similar to the "normal high probability time shortening state" (hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning with the normal symbol is low, while the variable display time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long, may be referred to as the "low probability time shortening function". Also, the "high probability time shortening function" and the "low probability time shortening function" may be collectively referred to as the "time shortening function"), so that the ball shot by right-handed play is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71.

In other words, in the "normal low probability time shortened state", the probability of winning with special symbols and the probability of winning with normal symbols are the same as in the "normal game state", but a win due to the variable display of normal symbols is more likely to be derived in a shorter time than in the "normal game state", and the open state of the normal electric role 72 is longer. Therefore, in the "normal low probability time shortened state", it is easier to get a ball shot by right-handed play to enter the second starting hole 71, so it is possible to play while obtaining prize balls (for example, 1 ball/winning ball) based on the entry into the second starting hole 71 and minimizing the decrease in the number of balls in hand.

This "regular low probability time shortening state" is configured to transition to the "regular low probability time shortening state" if no jackpot occurs a predetermined number of times ("800 times" in the first embodiment) in the low probability state of the special pattern after the end of a jackpot, that is, if misses continue to be extracted while the dynamic display is performed a predetermined number of times in the low probability state of the special pattern, or if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g when a small jackpot is won and a jackpot state does not occur.

In addition, the "normal low probability time shortening state" shortens the variable display time of the normal symbols and lengthens the opening time of the normal electric role 72 from the start of the "normal low probability time shortening state" until the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment). After the dynamic display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, the "normal low probability time shortening state" is configured to transition to the above-mentioned "normal game state B".

As mentioned above, the probability of a big win of the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be executed when playing with a right-hand hit in the "normal low probability time shortened state" is 0.02/100 to 0.04/100, and the probability of a small win is 15.5/100 (see FIG. 7(b)). On average, a big win (a big win based on winning a small win) can occur about once every six spins. Also, when a small win is won, a big win can be generated by passing the ball through the specific area 65d during small win play.

Therefore, when playing with a right-hand hit in the "normal low probability time shortened state", there is a high probability that a jackpot will occur before the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed 100 times as a gaming condition. In other words, when the state transitions to the "normal low probability time shortened state", the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed.

Then, if a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small jackpot) occurs with the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal low probability time shortened state", the game transitions to the "normal high probability time shortened state B", which is a so-called "consecutive wins" state, making it easier to win large amounts of balls.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a miss continues to be extracted while the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times in the low probability state of the special symbol, or if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g when a small jackpot is won and a jackpot state is not generated, the machine is configured to transition to a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" and then to a "consecutive jackpot" state in which a large number of balls can be won.

In addition, when the "regular low probability time shortening state" transitions to the "regular game state", it is configured not to transition to the "regular low probability time shortening state" again. On the other hand, when the "regular low probability time shortening state" occurs based on the satisfaction of a rescue condition, and the time shortening end condition based on the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed is satisfied in the "regular low probability time shortening state" and the state transitions to the "regular game state", it may be configured so that the state can transition to the "regular low probability time shortening state" again when the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied.

Here, each jackpot type will be explained. The jackpot type "Time-saving A" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, in which the jackpot opening/closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, which acts as a movable device, is open from the first round to the tenth round. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, this jackpot type "Time-saving A" can be selected, and it is configured to transition to "Normal symbol high probability time-saving state B" after the jackpot ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the random number value for a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and the machine is configured so that a jackpot cannot be won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. This is because only a jackpot based on a small jackpot can occur in the "normal game state A" where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily performed, that is, in a game state where a rescue condition can be established.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the case where the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or "Time-saving C (small win A)" described later is won in the "normal game state A" (hereinafter, the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or "Time-saving C (small win A)" may be referred to as "special chart 1 small win"), depending on the number of remaining spins until the rescue condition is met at that time, the right-hand hit game is executed when the special chart 1 small win is won as the control judgment result, the ball is passed through the specific area 65d as the profit-granting condition, and a jackpot game is generated as the awarded value. Rather than executing the right-hand hit game when the special chart 1 small win is won and not passing the ball through the specific area 65d, the jackpot game is not generated, and the game returns to the "normal game state A" as it is, and a game ball is borrowed or a game ball in hand is used again. It is configured so that the expected value of balls that can be obtained may be higher by executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of times the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, and transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" as the granted benefit (hereinafter, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A", executing a right-hand hit game to pass the ball through the specific area 65d to generate a jackpot game may be referred to as the "right-hand hit game method when a small win is won". Also, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A", not executing a right-hand hit game to generate a jackpot game, returning to "normal game state A" to continue left-hand hit game, executing the dynamic display of the first special symbol until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" may be referred to as the "left-hand hit game method when a small win is won").

Here, if a random number value that results in a jackpot is set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and if a jackpot type can be won when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed in "normal game state A", there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the first special symbol will win the jackpot type while trying to achieve the rescue condition by executing the left-hand hit game method when a small jackpot is won. And, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the jackpot type, unlike the win of a small jackpot type, the jackpot game will start unconditionally regardless of the game method.

When configured in this way, even if the player avoids the occurrence of a jackpot based on winning a small jackpot by playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won in accordance with the right-handed notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 and uses up his or her balls to hit left-handed in order to achieve the rescue condition, there is a risk that a jackpot will occur before the rescue condition is met the number of times, causing the consumed balls to go to waste.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a that corresponds to the first special symbol, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured so that a jackpot cannot be won.

Next, the small prize type will be explained. The small prize type "Time-saving B" that can be selected in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a small prize and a big prize with a maximum total number of rounds of 5 rounds, and the variable prize device 65 as a movable device is opened during the small prize game of the first round, and the specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5) described later is driven along with the opening of the variable prize device 65 of the first round, and the specific area 65d is opened. Then, during the small prize game, a right-hand hit game is performed to cause a ball to enter the variable prize device 65, and when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area 65d as the update end state, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 is opened from the second round to the fifth round as a big prize game. After the small win or big win of this small win type "Time Shortening B" ends, if the small win type "Time Shortening B" is won in the "normal game state", the game will transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state A", and if the small win type "Time Shortening B" is won in a state other than the "normal game state" (i.e., the "time shortening state"), the game will transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B".

Next, the small prize type "Time-saving C" refers to a small prize and a big prize with a maximum total number of rounds of 7, in which the variable prize device 65 as a movable device is opened during the small prize game of the first round, and the specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven along with the opening of the variable prize device 65 of the first round, and the specific area 65d is opened. Then, when a right-hand hit game is performed during the small prize game to cause a ball to enter the variable prize device 65, and the ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area 65d, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 is opened from the second round to the seventh round as a big prize game. After the small win or big win of this small win type "Time-saving C" ends, if the small win type "Time-saving C" is won in the "normal game state", the game will transition to "Normal high probability time-saving state A", and if the small win type "Time-saving C" is won in a state other than the "normal game state" (i.e., the "time-saving state"), the game will transition to "Normal high probability time-saving state B".

On the other hand, even if the small prize type "Time-saving B" is won, if the right-hand play is not performed during the small prize play of the first round and the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g, the variable prize-winning device 65 of the second to fifth rounds is not opened and the big prize play is not awarded. Similarly, even if the small prize type "Time-saving C" is won, if the right-hand play is not performed during the small prize play of the first round and the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g, the variable prize-winning device 65 of the second to seventh rounds is not opened and the big prize play is not awarded. (Hereinafter, this phenomenon may be referred to as the small prize type "small prize A"). And, since the big prize play is not being executed after the small prize type "small prize A" ends, the game state returns to the time of winning the small prize type "small prize A", and the dynamic display of the next special pattern is made executable as a game condition.

By configuring it in this way, when the control judgment result is a small win type "Time-saving B" or a small win type "Time-saving C" (i.e., a special chart 1 small win), a right-hand hit is performed during the first round of small win play, and the occurrence of a big win game as a benefit awarding value can be controlled by whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 65d as a benefit awarding condition.

Therefore, for example, if you win a small prize on special chart 1 in "normal game state A," you will transition to a big prize if you play right during the first round of small prize play and pass the ball through the specific area 65d, but if you do not play right during the first round of small prize play and do not pass the ball through the specific area 65d, you will not transition to a big prize game and will return to "normal game state A" again.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special 1 small jackpot is won as a result of the control judgment in "normal game state A", right-hand play is performed during the small jackpot play of the first round, and the ball passes through the specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, generating a jackpot game as a prize value, and transitioning to "normal high probability time reduction state A" is made, and when the number of times the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, is reached and transition is made to "normal low probability time reduction state" as a prize is granted, the latter is configured so that the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher in the latter case where the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached and transition is made to "normal low probability time reduction state" (details will be described later in FIG. 27).

Therefore, if, in "normal game state A", a special symbol is dynamically displayed one spin before the rescue condition is met and a small special symbol wins, a right-hand hit is performed during the small win to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 65d and generate a big win, transitioning to "normal symbol high probability time shortened state A", rather than performing right-hand hit play during the small win to not generate a big win, returning to "normal game state A", and executing the dynamic display of the special symbol for only one spin to reach the rescue condition and transitioning to "normal symbol low probability time shortened state".

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small special symbol 1 win is won as a result of control judgment in the "normal game state A", depending on the number of spins remaining until the number of times the rescue condition is met as the update end state at that time, it is possible to return to the "normal game state A" without generating a jackpot game by not executing a right-hand hit game when the small special symbol 1 win is won and not allowing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d, and to borrow a game ball or use a game ball in hand to again dynamically display the first special symbol until the number of times the rescue condition is met as the update end state, and to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" as the awarded benefit, so that the expected value of the balls that can be won may be higher. (Hereinafter, the period during which the expected value of balls that can be obtained by returning to "normal game state A" without performing right-hand play when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won, continuing left-hand play until the rescue condition is met and transitioning to the "normal low probability time shortened state" is higher than the expected value of balls that can be obtained by generating a jackpot game when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A" may be referred to as the "rescue priority notification period." Also, the right-hand hit notification effect when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period may be referred to as the "rescue priority notification effect." Furthermore, the period during which the expected value of balls that can be obtained by returning to "normal game state A" without performing right-hand play when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," continuing left-hand play until the rescue condition is met and transitioning to the "normal low probability time shortened state" is higher than the expected value of balls that can be obtained by generating a jackpot game when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won in The period during which the expected value of balls that can be obtained when a jackpot game is generated when a small jackpot is won on the special pattern 1 is higher than the expected value of balls that can be obtained when the game is transitioned to the "normal pattern low probability time shortened state" is sometimes referred to as the "jackpot priority notification period". Also, the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on the special pattern 1 during the jackpot priority notification period is sometimes referred to as the "jackpot priority notification effect". Furthermore, the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special pattern that switches between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period is sometimes referred to as the "break-even number". Note that the break-even number is uniquely determined when the gaming machine is manufactured, so the number of branching times can be set in advance in the gaming machine (voice lamp control device 113).)

When a special chart 1 small jackpot is won at a certain number of spins in "normal game state A", which of the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won, or the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won, will result in a higher expected number of balls to be won? This is determined by the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 with regard to the balls to be won (i.e., the probability of a big jackpot, the probability of a small jackpot, the number of winning balls, etc.), the status of the game pins (i.e., the base value, which will be described later), the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met, etc.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the small jackpot opening time when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed (the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met).

Specifically, when a special chart 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment in "normal game state A", if the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher when a right-hit play method is executed when a small win is won, the right-hit notification effect when the small win is won is configured to perform a first notification mode that strongly suggests right-hit play and emphasizes the occurrence of a big win (i.e., a big win priority notification effect) (see Figure 89 (b)).

On the other hand, when a special chart 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment in "normal game state A", if the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher when a left-hand play method is executed when a small win is won, the right-hand play notification effect when the small win is won is configured to perform a second notification mode that does not strongly suggest right-hand play compared to the big win priority notification effect and does not emphasize the occurrence of a big win (i.e., a rescue priority notification effect) (see Figure 89 (d)).

If the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 in "normal game state A" were to consist of only one effect, and the only suggestion to play right and generate a jackpot were to be uniformly executed, there is a high possibility that the player would blindly accept the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a small jackpot is won, play right and generate a jackpot.

However, depending on the number of spins required to achieve the rescue condition when a small win is won, the expected number of balls that can be won by playing left-handed when a small win is won may be higher, so there is a risk that the expected number of balls that can be won by playing a big win when that small win is won may be lower.

Therefore, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won during "normal game state A", the player can determine the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, and judge whether or not to play right during the small win game to generate a big win. This allows the player to guess which hitting method will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won, creating new gameplay and increasing the interest of the game. The details of this right-hit notification effect will be described later in Figures 28, 70, and 89.

In addition, when a small win other than the special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", and when a big win is won, right-hit play is executed for both small wins and big wins, and the player who generates the big win is configured to have a higher expected value of the balls that can be won, so the right-hit notification performance in "normal game state A" other than when a special chart 1 small win is won is configured with the same performance.

Next, the small win type of "Time Reduction D" is a small win and a big win with a maximum total number of 10 rounds, and the variable winning device 65 is opened during the small win game of the first round, and the specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5) described later is driven with the opening of the variable winning device 65 of the first round, and the specific area 65d is opened. Then, when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area 65d, the large winning opening opening plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened from the second round to the tenth round as a big win game. After the small win and big win of this "Time Reduction D" are over, it is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time reduction state".

On the other hand, even if the player wins the "Time-saving D" small prize, if the specific area switch 65g does not detect a ball during the first round of small prize play, the variable prize-winning device 65 will not be opened for the second to fifth rounds, and the big prize play will not be awarded (hereinafter, this phenomenon may be referred to as "small prize B"). After the "small prize B" ends, the big prize play is not being played, so the game returns to the play state when the small prize type "small prize B" was won.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the specific area switch 65g is configured to be able to detect the passage of the ball at all times, but the specific area switch 65g may be configured to be enabled and disabled. Specifically, for example, the specific area switch 65g may be set to enable ball passage detection only during a small win game or only while the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on, until a predetermined period has elapsed since the large prize opening solenoid 65b was turned on, and the specific area switch 65g may be set to disable ball passage detection at times other than the above-mentioned example, to prevent the occurrence of a large win game state based on the passage of the ball into the specific area 65d at times other than the above-mentioned example. In this case, if the ball passes through the specific area switch 65g at times other than the above-mentioned example, that is, when the specific area switch 65g is in an invalid state, it may be configured to execute an abnormality detection process such as an error notification, since the ball has passed through the specific area 65d due to the occurrence of some abnormality (for example, fraudulent activity, etc.).

Here, the display modes of the special LED group 37b for each big win type and each small win type will be explained. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 31 display patterns corresponding to the small win type "time-saving B", and 32 display patterns corresponding to the small win type "time-saving C", for a total of 64 display patterns.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one display pattern corresponding to a miss, one display pattern corresponding to the small win type "Time-saving D", and 62 display patterns corresponding to the big win type "Time-saving A", for a total of 64 display patterns.

The right-hit notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp for indicating a game state in which right-hit play is encouraged. This right-hit notification lamp 37c is not lit in the "normal game state" in which left-hit play is encouraged and right-hit play is not encouraged, but is lit in the "normal symbol high probability time-shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time-shortened state" in which right-hit play is encouraged, or during small win play or big win play. The player can recognize whether or not the state is such that right-hit play should be performed by checking this right-hit notification lamp 37c or the right-hit play suggestion display on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A", the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the opening time when the small win on special chart 1 is won is changed, but the right-hit notification lamp 37c is configured to always be lit during the opening time. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that it is possible to win one of the prize balls by executing a right-hit game when the small win is won.

The game area of the game board 13 is provided with multiple general winning holes 63 through which 3 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable performance of the third pattern according to the game state while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device, triggered by a ball entering the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71 (hereinafter, the ball entering the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71 may be referred to as a "start winning"), and a second pattern display device 83 consisting of an LED that can perform a variable display of a normal pattern triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 (hereinafter, the second pattern display device 83 may be referred to as the "normal pattern display device 83" for convenience of explanation). In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 5) described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns Z1 to Z3 (see Figure 4), left, center, and right, are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of multiple symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is used in common for the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and while the display of the game status associated with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the special symbol display device 37 as a result notification device, the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is used to perform a decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37. Note that instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or an LED.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute the dynamic display of the second special pattern preferentially (so-called special pattern 2 priority change) when both the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the dynamic display of the second special pattern are on hold. That is, when the dynamic display of the first special pattern is being executed based on a start winning at the first start port 64, and the dynamic display of the first special pattern is on hold based on a start winning at the first start port 64, and further, when a start winning occurs at the second start port 71, the dynamic display of the second special pattern that has won later can be executed before the dynamic display of the first special pattern that has won earlier.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained with reference to Figure 4. Figure 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, where Figure 4(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the area division settings and the effective line settings of the display screen, and Figure 4(b) is a diagram that shows an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is made up of a total of 11 main designs, including 10 main designs numbered "0" to "9" and one main design with the words "challenge design" written on it (see Fig. 89(c)). Each main design is made up of a rear design of a wooden box with the numbers "0" to "9" added above it, and the main designs with odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", "9") have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main designs with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green on the lower right side of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs. Furthermore, the main pattern, which has the words "challenge pattern" written on it, is configured to appear only in pattern row Z2, and the words "challenge pattern" are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box (see Figure 89 (c)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the result of the lottery for any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a big win or a small win, a variable presentation in which the same main symbols line up is performed, and a big win or small win occurs after the variable presentation ends. For example, if the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" is won during the big win priority notification period (see FIG. 28) in the "normal game state A," a variable presentation is performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "0," "2," "4," "6," and "8" line up. In addition, if you win the small prize type "Time-saving B (small prize A)" during the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 28) of "Normal game state A", a variable performance will be performed in which main patterns with the numbers "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" will stop in the left pattern column Z1 and the right pattern column Z3, and a main pattern with the letters "Challenge pattern" will stop in the center pattern column Z2.

Furthermore, in the "normal game state A" big win priority notification period (see FIG. 28), if the player wins the small win type "Time-saving C (small win A)" which has more big win rounds than the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)", a variable presentation is performed in which the main patterns with the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are aligned. In addition, in the "normal game state A" rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 28), if the player wins the small win type "Time-saving C (small win A)", a variable presentation is performed in which the main patterns with the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" stop in the left pattern column Z1 and the right pattern column Z3, and a main pattern with the letters "challenge pattern" may stop in the center pattern column Z2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met), the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win.

Therefore, during the period when the average number of balls that can be won by using the left-handed play method when a small jackpot is won (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), when a small jackpot is won on the special chart 1, the same main pattern with the numbers "1" to "9" that the player can recognize as a jackpot is not displayed on each pattern row, but rather the main pattern with the word "challenge pattern" is stopped in the middle pattern row Z2.

By configuring it in this way, if a special chart 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period, it is not necessarily better to play right-hand during the small win to generate a big win, but it is possible to suggest the option of continuing in "normal play state A" without playing right-hand during the small win.

As described above, the right-hit notification effect that is executed when the special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" is also configured to execute different right-hit notification effects depending on the period during which the small win is won, so the player can determine whether or not to execute a right-hit game during the small win game by distinguishing the main pattern displayed in each pattern row and the content of the right-hit notification effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, all main symbols are configured to be able to appear when the "reach display" variation effect is executed in the "normal game state A" when the small win type "time-saving C" that can become a 7R jackpot by generating a jackpot state is won. Specifically, for example, even if the small win type "time-saving C" is won, the "reach display" variation effect may be executed with the same main symbols with the numbers "2" or "8" added. By configuring it in this way, for example, the content of the game value that can be awarded cannot be determined at the time the variable presentation is executed; in other words, the player cannot tell whether he has won the small prize type "Time-saving B (small prize A)" with a maximum number of rounds of 5R, or the small prize type "Time-saving C (small prize A)" with a maximum number of rounds of 7R. After announcing that a small prize has been won in the variable presentation of the "reach display", an advancement presentation is performed to notify that the small prize type "Time-saving C (small prize A)" has been won, thereby enriching the variety of the game and increasing the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into three parts vertically, with the lower two-thirds being made up of a main display area Dm which displays the third pattern in a variable manner and a cockpit display area Db which displays the number of reserved balls, etc., and the remaining upper one-third being a secondary display area Ds which displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right. The left pattern row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, the center pattern row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2, and the right pattern row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

The third patterns described above are displayed in a specified order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable performance is performed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Note that the arrangement of the numbers may be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, the numbers of the main patterns may be arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, while the numbers of the main patterns may be arranged in ascending order in the center symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and during the variable presentation corresponding to the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. If the third symbols are stopped and line up in a combination of big win symbols (combination of the same main symbols) on the active line L1, a big win video or small win video is displayed as a big win or small win for the special symbols set (displayed) for each game state.

The sub-display area Ds is horizontally elongated and positioned above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three equal small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 is an area that displays a character or preview image as a notification mode. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of anticipation that a big win or small win will result from the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

The cockpit display area Db is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71 corresponding to the special pattern set for each game state and for which the variable display (variable performance) has not yet been executed.

The small area Ds3 to the right of the secondary display area Ds is configured to display a fourth pattern display area 87 for special pattern 1 as a notification mode that can change in sync with the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls, a fourth pattern display area 88 for special pattern 2 as a notification mode that can change in sync with the dynamic display of the second special pattern and the number of reserved balls, and a right hit instruction 89 for the main display.

The fourth pattern display area 87 for special pattern 1 is composed of a reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1, which displays the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern in numbers, and a variable area 87b for special pattern 1, which can change in synchronization with the execution of the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern.

The reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 is configured to be able to display the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern in the range of "0" to "4" as a number pattern. Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 displays "0", it indicates that the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is 0, when the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 displays "1", it indicates that the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is 1, when the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 displays "2", it indicates that the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is 2, when the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 displays "3", it indicates that the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is 3, and when the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 displays "4", it indicates that the reserved number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is 4.

In other words, the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern display area 87 for special pattern 1 is displayed to match the reserved ball number of the dynamic display of the first special pattern in the status LED group 37a of the special pattern display device 37 described above, and is displayed to match the reserved ball number of the reserved pattern display area Db1 described below in the "normal game state A" in which the dynamic display of the first special pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The special pattern 1 variable area 87b is a display area for showing the execution and results of the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and is configured so that the display color of the square pattern can be changed. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special pattern is being executed, the display color of the square pattern in the special pattern 1 variable area 87b changes rapidly in the order of white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again from white → red → ... while the dynamic display of the first special pattern is being executed. Then, when the dynamic display of the first special pattern stops, the square pattern in the special pattern 1 variable area 87b is displayed in a display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

In more detail, when the square pattern in the special pattern 1 variable area 87b stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special pattern was a miss, and when the square pattern in the special pattern 1 variable area 87b stops in blue, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special pattern was a small win. In other words, the square pattern in the special pattern 1 variable area 87b is displayed to correspond to the display content of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special pattern display device 37 described above, and is configured to be synchronized with the display content of the main display area Dm in the "normal game state A" in which the dynamic display of the first special pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The fourth pattern display area 88 for special pattern 2 is composed of a reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2, which displays the reserved number of the dynamic display of the second special pattern in numbers, and a variable area 88b for special pattern 2, which can change in synchronization with the execution of the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern.

The reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 is configured to be able to display a number pattern in the range of "0" to "4" to indicate the reserved number of dynamic displays of the second special pattern. Specifically, when the reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 displays "0", it indicates that the reserved number of dynamic displays of the second special pattern is 0, when the reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 displays "1", it indicates that the reserved number of dynamic displays of the second special pattern is 1, when the reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 displays "2", it indicates that the reserved number of dynamic displays of the second special pattern is 2, when the reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 displays "3", it indicates that the reserved number of dynamic displays of the second special pattern is 3, and when the reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 displays "4", it indicates that the reserved number of dynamic displays of the second special pattern is 4.

In other words, the reserved number display 88a for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol display area 88 for special symbol 2 is displayed to match the reserved ball number of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the status LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and is displayed to match the reserved ball number of the reserved symbol display area Db2 described below in all game states in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The special symbol 2 variable area 88b is a display area for showing the execution and results of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and is configured to be able to change the display color of the square symbol, similar to the special symbol 1 variable area 87b. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display color of the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b changes rapidly in the order of white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again from white → red → ... while the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol stops, the square symbol in the special symbol 2 variable area 88b is displayed in a display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square pattern in the special pattern 2 variable area 88b stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special pattern was a miss, when the square pattern in the special pattern 2 variable area 88b stops in red, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special pattern was a big win, and when the square pattern in the special pattern 2 variable area 88b stops in blue, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special pattern was a small win. In other words, the square pattern in the special pattern 2 variable area 88b is displayed so as to correspond to the display contents of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special pattern display device 37 described above, and is configured to be synchronized with the display contents of the main display area Dm in all game states in which the dynamic display of the second special pattern is displayed in the main display area Dm.

The right-hit instruction 89 for the main display is always displayed in sync with the right-hit notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37, and is always displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" in which right-hit play is encouraged, or during small win play or big win play.

In addition, since the main display right hit instruction 89 is important display information that suggests to the player how to hit, it is configured to be displayed in the foreground (foreground layer) and takes priority over other display contents executed during play on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the third pattern of each pattern row displayed in the center part of the main display area Dm and the super reach performance).

As shown in FIG. 4(b), for example, in the "normal game state A" on the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, videos are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and displays indicating that the state is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual and launch modes that are encouraged depending on the game state are suggested to the player. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes, as a limited performance, a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of his headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears, and a preview performance is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a ball enters the first starting hole 64 while the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device) is displaying a changing performance (dynamic display) of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, or if a ball enters the second starting hole 71 while the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) is displaying a changing performance (dynamic display) of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, the number of times the ball has entered (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to a maximum of four times in each case. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special pattern display device 37, and is also displayed in the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern display area 87 for special pattern 1 or the reserved number display 88a for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern display area 88 for special pattern 2, and further, the variable presentation of the corresponding special pattern according to the game status is also displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d of the reserved pattern display area Db1 of the cockpit display area Db.

The first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d each display one reserved pattern (in the normal display mode, a "○" pattern (white circle pattern)) for each reserved ball (one reserved ball count) of the first or second special pattern that is set to be displayed according to the game status, and the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first or second special pattern that is set to be displayed (priority display) according to the game status is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1a, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern that is set to be displayed according to the game status is one, and when a total of two reserved patterns, one each in the first and second reserved pattern display areas Db1a and Db1b, is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern that is set to be displayed according to the game status is two. When a total of three reserved patterns are displayed in the first to third reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1c, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is three, and when a total of four reserved patterns are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is four. Also, when no reserved pattern is displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern set to be displayed according to the game state is zero and there is no reserved variable performance.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only one of the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol can be executed, and the lottery game for the second special symbol can be executed preferentially, but it may be configured to execute the lottery game for the special symbols according to the order of winning (so-called winning order change), and it may be configured to execute the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the lottery game for the second special symbol simultaneously. Furthermore, it may be configured to display the variable presentation of the first special symbol and the variable presentation of the second special symbol simultaneously on the third symbol display device 81.

In the center of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution pattern display area Db0 in which an execution pattern indicating that a variable performance is being performed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This execution pattern display area Db0 is provided in the center of the cockpit display area Db, i.e., to the right of the first reserved pattern display area Db1a, and is configured to display an execution pattern that is larger than each of the reserved patterns displayed in the reserved pattern display areas Db1a to Db1d. In addition, in this execution pattern display area Db0, the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1a is shifted (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern.

The execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased when the variable performance executed in the main display area Dm ends, and the displayed reserved pattern is moved and displayed as the reserved pattern on the lower side with the erasure of the execution pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved patterns of the first special pattern in the "normal game state A", if the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special pattern, the reserved pattern displayed in the first reserved pattern display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display area Db0. In addition, the reserved pattern displayed in the second reserved pattern display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the first reserved pattern display area Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved pattern displayed in the third reserved pattern display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the second reserved pattern display area Db1b. In addition, the reserved pattern displayed in the fourth reserved pattern display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved pattern in the third reserved pattern display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on the ball entering the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved patterns in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special pattern display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, each of which corresponds to the maximum number of reserved first special patterns and second special patterns, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will continue. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. This through gate 67 has a through hole (not shown) provided in the vertical direction for the ball to pass through. When a ball passes through this through gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole turns on, and when this is turned on, a winning lottery for a normal symbol is performed by the main control device 110. Note that this through gate 67 only triggers the lottery for the variable display of the normal symbol, and is configured not to pay out prize balls or the like even if a ball passes through it. Note that a normal winning port that can obtain the lottery trigger for a normal symbol may be provided, and the lottery trigger for a normal symbol may be obtained and a predetermined prize ball may be paid out.

A normal electric device 72 is disposed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. This normal electric device 72 is mainly composed of a retractable plate 72a and a normal electric device solenoid (not shown) that drives the retractable plate 72a.

In the first embodiment, the main control device 110 (see Figure 5) normally maintains the inlet/outlet plate 72a of the normal electric device 72 submerged within the surface of the game board 13, and a ball flowing down from the upper side of the second start port 71 when viewed from the front (the through gate 67 side) passes through the inlet/outlet plate 72a which is submerged within the surface of the game board 13, and flows down to the bottom of the board (the variable winning device 65 side) without being detected by the second start port switch 71a which serves as a start detection area. When a winning combination is achieved with the normal symbol variable display, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the inlet/outlet plate 72a of the normal electric combination 72 is driven to a state in which it protrudes from the surface of the game board 13 for a predetermined time, and the ball flowing down from the upper side (through gate 67 side) of the second start hole 71 as viewed from the front rolls from right to left on the upper surface of the inlet/outlet plate 72a protruding from the surface of the game board 13, and is detected as winning by the second start hole switch 71a. This allows the ball to flow into the second start hole 71, and the ball that is played with a right hand and flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is easily able to win the second start hole 71, i.e., the winning assistance state is established.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the normal electric device 72 is open and the inlet/outlet plate 72a is protruding from the surface of the game board 13, it is configured so that it takes about one second for the ball flowing down from the upper side (through gate 67 side) of the second start port 71 when viewed from the front, to roll all the way from the right end to the left end on the top surface of the inlet/outlet plate 72a and be detected as a winning ball by the second start port switch 71a.

On the other hand, as will be described in detail later, in the "normal game state ("normal game state A" and "normal game state B")," the number of times that the normal electric role 72 is set to open when a normal symbol is won is one, and the opening time is regulated to be "0.1 seconds" by the normal electric role opening table 202k (see FIG. 23(c)).

In other words, when playing right-hand in the "normal game state", even if the variable display of the normal pattern wins and the normal electric role 72 is in an open state and the in/out board 72a protrudes from the surface of the game board 13, the normal electric role 72 is closed before the ball that flows down from the upper side (through gate 67 side) of the second start hole 71 rolls from the right end to the left end on the top surface of the in/out board 72a and is detected as a winning entry by the second start hole switch 71a. Therefore, the ball that was rolling on the top surface of the in/out board 72a flows down below the normal electric role 72 as the in/out board 72a is in a submerged state, and is configured not to be detected as a winning entry by the second start hole switch 71a.

Here, if the opening mode of the normal electric feature 72 in the "normal game state" is configured so that a ball can enter the normal electric feature 72 by playing right when the normal electric feature 72 opens (for example, the opening time is "1.0 second"), a right-hand play will be performed in "normal game state A" to cause the normal symbol to win, and the opening of the normal electric feature 72 will cause the second start switch 71a to detect the winning, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol will be executed.

As mentioned above, the dynamic display of the second special pattern is configured so that a small win or a big win can occur on average about once every six spins. Therefore, even in "normal game state A," the dynamic display of the second special pattern can be in a state in which a small win or a big win is likely to occur, resulting in a game result that differs from the payout rate based on the game specifications that were initially set, which may cause unexpected disadvantages to the game hall.

Therefore, by configuring the normal electric role 72 as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it is possible to configure it so that when a right-handed play is performed in the "normal game state", it is more difficult to win than the normal electric role 72 in a conventional pachinko machine. Also, when a ball shot in a right-handed play is detected in the "normal game state A" (for example, detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67, etc.), a predetermined alarm (for example, a voice output of "Please return to left-handed play" or a display of "Please return to left-handed play" on the third pattern display device 81, etc.) is output to indicate to the player and hall personnel that a non-recommended game is being played, thereby suppressing the continued execution of non-recommended right-handed play in the "normal game state A", and making it possible to realize game play according to the game specifications.

In addition, by arranging the second start port switch 71a in a position close to the left end of the retractable plate 72a, when the maximum number of winning balls (e.g., 10 balls) that can be won in one opening of the normal electric role 72 at a specific time is reached, the retractable plate 72a can be instantly put into a retracted state, making it difficult to win more than the maximum number of winning balls.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (e.g., 70/100), and it is made more difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol than in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", making it more difficult to make the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 protrude (open state), and making it more difficult to win in the second starting hole 71 than in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state". On the other hand, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", the probability of winning the normal symbol is set to a high probability state (e.g., 99/100), and it is easier to win in the variable display of the normal symbol than in the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", making it easier to put the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 into a protruding state (open state), and making it easier to win at the second starting hole 71.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the variable display leads to a hit with a high probability (i.e., 99%), so in the "normal pattern high probability time shortened state" where the normal pattern is in a high probability state, most of the balls fired in right-hand play are configured to be able to enter the second start hole 71. On the other hand, in the "normal play state" among the low probability states of the normal pattern, the variable display can lead to a hit with a low probability (i.e., 70%), but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is short, so it is configured so that the balls fired in right-hand play are unlikely to enter the second start hole 71. Also, in the "normal pattern low probability time shortened state" among the low probability states of the normal pattern, the variable display can lead to a hit with a low probability (i.e., 70%), and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long like the "normal pattern high probability time shortened state", so it is configured so that the balls fired in right-hand play can enter the second start hole 71.

As a result, in the "normal high probability time shortened state" and the "normal low probability time shortened state", it is possible to play while making the ball shot with a right-handed shot enter the second starting hole 71, and by paying out prize balls based on the balls entering the second starting hole 71, the player can play while minimizing the decrease in his or her own balls compared to the "normal game state".

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning a normal symbol from the "normal game state" as in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state", the time for which the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 as a movable device sinks (opens) or the number of times the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 sinks (opens) in one hit may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state", the time for which the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 sinks may be made longer than in the "normal game state", or the number of times the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 sinks in one hit may be made more than in the "normal game state". Also, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state", at least two of the following may be performed simultaneously: increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol, lengthening the time for which the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 sinks, and increasing the number of times the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 sinks.

The normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on a predetermined symbol (a "circle" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 72 provided on the right side of the second starting hole 71 as viewed from the front is activated for a predetermined period of time, and when it stops on a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (a "x" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 72 is deactivated (maintained closed).

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reservation lamp 84 described above (hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the second pattern reservation lamp 84 may be referred to as the "normal pattern reservation lamp 84"). There are four normal pattern reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the number of lit normal pattern reservation lamps 84.

The variable display of the normal symbols may be performed by switching on and off a number of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the normal symbol reserved lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first starting hole 64 is provided, through which a ball can enter. Game nails and the like are planted around the first starting hole 64 so that about six balls (so-called S1 = 6) shot in left-handed play enter the first starting hole 64 per minute. When a ball enters the first starting hole 64 as a start detection area, a first starting hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first starting hole switch is turned on, causing the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) to draw a lottery for a first special symbol. Then, a dynamic display according to the lottery result is displayed by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 as a result notification device, and a variable performance based on the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 as a movable device according to the game state. The first starting hole 64 is also one of the winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

On the right side of the front view of the variable display unit 80, a second starting hole 71 is provided, into which a ball can enter only when the normal electric role 72 is in an open state. When the normal electric role 72 is in an open state, game nails are planted around the second starting hole 71 so that about 90 balls shot in a right-handed play enter the hole per minute. As described above, when the normal electric role 72 is in an open state, the second starting hole switch 71a is configured to easily detect the winning, and when the second starting hole switch 71a is turned on, a lottery is performed for a jackpot of the second special symbol by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5). Then, a display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 as a result notification device, and a variable performance based on the second special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. The second starting hole 71 is also one of the winning holes from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters the hole.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. This variable winning device 65 is provided with a large winning opening opening plate 65a that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 surface, a large winning opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 5) that can drive the large winning opening opening plate 65a to open and close, a large winning opening switch 65c provided in the variable winning device 65, a specific area 65d, and an outlet 65h for discharging balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65. The specific area 65d is also composed of a specific area opening plate 65e that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 surface, a specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5) that can drive the specific area opening plate 65e to open and close, and a specific area switch 65g that can detect balls passing through the specific area 65d.

The large prize opening opening plate 65a is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is configured to be able to change between a protruding state and a immersed state, thereby changing the direction in which the balls flow down. That is, the large prize opening opening plate 65a is configured to maintain a protruding state (i.e., a closed state) from the game board 13 in the normal state, and to roll the upper surface of the large prize opening opening plate 65a to make the balls flowing down from the upstream side of the variable prize winning device 65 (the right side when viewed from the front of the variable prize winning device 65) flow down to the downstream side of the variable prize winning device 65 (the left side when viewed from the front of the variable prize winning device 65), thereby preventing the flow of balls into the variable prize winning device 65. Then, when a small prize or a large prize is won with the first special pattern or the second special pattern, the large prize opening opening plate 65a is driven to be immersed in the game board 13 by the large prize opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 5) for a predetermined time, and the balls can flow into the variable prize winning device 65.

The balls that flow into the variable prize winning device 65 are detected by a large prize winning switch 65c that serves as a start detection area provided within the variable prize winning device 65, and then flow down to a specific area 65d that is also provided within the variable prize winning device 65. When the balls are detected by the large prize winning switch 65c, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening mode of the variable winning device 65 as a movable device is configured to differ depending on the type of special symbol that wins the small prize. Specifically, when the small prize type "Time-saving B (small prize A)" or the small prize type "Time-saving C (small prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the number of times that the variable winning device 65 opens in one round is set to 6, the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds", and the interval time until the next opening after the variable winning device 65 is closed (i.e., the closing time) is set to "1.2 seconds" (see FIG. 19). In other words, the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 due to the small prize of the first special symbol is set to "0.6 seconds". On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol results in a small win of the "Time-saving D (small win B)" type, the number of times the variable winning device 65 opens in one round is set to 10, the opening time is set to "0.1 seconds" as in the small win of the first special symbol, and the interval time until the next opening after the variable winning device 65 is closed is set to "1.2 seconds" (see FIG. 19). In other words, the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 due to the small win of the second special symbol is set to "1.0 second."

Therefore, when the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or "Time-saving C (small win A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 is shorter than when the small win type "Time-saving D (small win B)" is won in the dynamic display of the second special pattern. This is because, as described above, during the rescue priority notification period in "normal game state A", if the special pattern 1 small win is won, right-hit play is not performed and the game may return to "normal game state A" without generating a jackpot game.

In more detail, if the player does not play right-hand when the special chart 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" and returns to the "normal game state A" as it is, the player will suspend ball firing during the execution time of the small jackpot game as a condition for the profit to be awarded, and will have to wait for the end of the small jackpot game. Therefore, if the release time when the special chart 1 small jackpot is won is set to a long time, the period during which ball firing is suspended will also be long, which may cause stress to the player and may also lead to a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won, the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area 65d by performing a right-hand hit game is set, and even if a right-hand hit game is not performed when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won, the period during which the ball's release is interrupted is not too long.

On the other hand, since the total opening time of the variable winning device 65 when the special symbol 1 small jackpot is won is configured to be short, some players may have trouble performing a right-hand hit while the variable winning device 65 is open, and may not be able to pass the ball through the specific area 65d, resulting in a jackpot being generated against their will. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the opening time when the special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" is set long (i.e., "10 seconds"), and the right-hand hit play is notified sufficiently during the opening time, making it difficult for such a failure to occur. In addition, in the case of a small jackpot with either the first or second special symbol, the maximum number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 in one round is set to "10" (see FIG. 19).

The specific area opening/closing plate 65e, which is disposed in the variable winning device 65 downstream of the large winning port switch 65c, is formed in a horizontally long plate shape and is configured to be able to change between a protruding state and a immersed state, thereby changing the flow direction of the balls. That is, the specific area opening/closing plate 65e is configured to maintain a protruding state (i.e., a closed state) from the game board 13 surface in the normal state, and roll the upper surface of the specific area opening/closing plate 65e to make the balls flowing down from the upstream side of the specific area 65d (the left side of the specific area opening/closing plate 65e when viewed from the front) to the discharge port 65h side in the variable winning device 65 (the right side of the specific area opening/closing plate 65e when viewed from the front), thereby preventing the balls that have flowed into the variable winning device 65 from flowing into the specific area 65d. Then, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, after the initial opening of the large prize opening plate 65a based on a small prize win with the first or second special symbol), the specific area opening plate 65e is driven to sink into the surface of the game board 13 by the specific area solenoid 65f (see FIG. 5), allowing balls to flow into the specific area 65d (specific area switch 65g side).

In other words, if a small jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the specific area opening/closing plate 65e opens at the same time as the large prize opening opening/closing plate 65a starts to open, and the specific area 65d is opened in a state in which balls can flow into the variable prize-winning device 65. Therefore, if a small jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, playing with the right hand will allow balls to flow into the specific area 65d.

The ball that flows into the specific area 65d is detected by a specific area switch 65g provided in the specific area 65d, and then flows down to the outlet (not shown) provided downstream. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g, a jackpot game is started in the same way as when a jackpot is generated with the second special symbol (a so-called one-type two-type mixed machine). The type of jackpot that occurs when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g is determined according to the value of a small jackpot type counter CK (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. Note that the specific area switch 65g is configured not to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if a small win occurs during the dynamic display of the first or second special pattern, right-hit play is not executed, and if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 65g, the big win game is not started and the game state returns to the state when the small win was won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the drawing of the second special symbol on the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit to show the jackpot stopping symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stopping symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, three of the same symbol (such as "777")), thereby indicating that a jackpot game has occurred. Also, if a small jackpot is won in the drawing of the first or second special symbol, and the ball passes through a specific area 65d within the variable winning device 65 as a movable device based on the small jackpot while the variable winning device 65 is open, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 as a result notification device is lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a display indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area 65d (for example, "V acquired"), thereby indicating that a jackpot game has occurred. After that, depending on the type of jackpot (in the case of a jackpot based on a small jackpot, the small jackpot type), the large prize opening opening plate 65a provided on the variable prize winning device 65 is opened (driven to sink into the surface of the game board 13), and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot game) in which the ball is more likely to enter the large prize opening. In this special game state, the large prize opening opening plate 65a, which is normally closed (protruding from the surface of the game board 13), is opened until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have entered).

When the large prize opening plate 65a is opened, it closes after a predetermined time has elapsed since opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and after closing, the large prize opening plate 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the large prize opening plate 65a is configured to be repeated up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state (large win state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as a grant of game value (game value) by having the ball enter the variable winning device 65. Note that, during a large win game, if a right-hand play is not performed while the large prize opening plate 65a is open and the ball does not enter the variable winning device 65, the large prize opening round ends when "30 seconds" have elapsed since the opening of the large prize opening plate 65a, and the large prize opening plate 65a is closed. Therefore, if no ball enters the variable winning device 65 for ten rounds, the big win ends without any winning ball being generated, and the dynamic display of each special symbol begins.

The left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 are provided with attachment spaces K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment spaces K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is further provided with an outlet 66. Any balls that do not enter any of the winning holes (ball entry holes) 63, 64, 65, 71 are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with numerous nails to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged. Note that balls that enter each winning hole 63, 64, 65, 71 are also guided to the ball discharge path and discharged outside the pachinko machine 10, just like the balls that pass through the outlet 66.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 has a read-only memory (ROM) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a random access memory (RAM) 203 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the lottery for the big win, the setting of the dynamic display and variable presentation of each special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery for the display results of the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 also stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a small jackpot type table 202c, a reserved number table 202d, a stop pattern table 202e, a fluctuation pattern table 202f, a jackpot release table 202g, a small jackpot release table 202h, a normal jackpot random number table 202i, a normal fluctuation table 202j, a normal electric role release table 202k, and a time-saving end condition table 202m. The main control device 110 executes the above main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Now, referring to FIG. 6, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device, the setting of the variable performance of the third pattern display device 81, the lottery of the display result of the variable display on the normal pattern display device 83, and the like. In addition, in the explanation of the various counters, we will also explain the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the various control timings, and the transition of the game state, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 24.

The jackpot random number counter C1 used to draw the jackpot or small jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used to select the type of stop of the jackpot pattern, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the variable type counter CS1 used to select the variable pattern, and the small jackpot type counter CK used to select the type of stop of the small jackpot pattern are used for the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special pattern display device 37, and the variable presentation setting of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the normal symbol winning counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the normal symbol winning counter C4.

Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to "0" after reaching a maximum value at a specific time.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of "2 milliseconds", which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 39), and the updated values are appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a specified area of the RAM 203. Details will be described later, but the RAM 203 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the first special pattern, and a second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) related to the second special pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the small win type counter CK in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first start port 64 as the start detection area, and the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the small win type counter CK in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second start port 71.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 9999") and to return to "0" at a predetermined time after it reaches a maximum value (e.g., "9999" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 9999"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 has completed one cycle of update, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take on values of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of "0 to 9999". This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, when the ball enters the first start hole 64 as the start detection area (start winning), it is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved area of one of the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start hole 64 (first special pattern). Also, when the ball enters the second start hole 71 (start winning), it is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved area of one of the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start hole 71 (second special pattern).

The random number value at which the jackpot random number counter C1 becomes a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In other words, a jackpot is determined when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e matches the random number value that becomes a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the second special symbol.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a that corresponds to the first special symbol. This is because only a jackpot based on a small jackpot can occur in the "normal game state A" where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, that is, in a game state where a rescue condition can be established.

Now, referring to FIG. 7, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1") corresponding to the first special symbol stored in ROM 202, and FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2") corresponding to the second special symbol stored in ROM 202.

As described above, in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set regardless of the setting value. On the other hand, in the special chart 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the number of jackpot random numbers is set differently for each setting value. Also, the system is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required to shift for each setting is compensated for from the number of miss random numbers corresponding to misses. In other words, when increasing the number of jackpot random numbers to shift for each setting, the system is configured so that the number of miss random numbers is reduced and the reduced amount is assigned as the number of jackpot random numbers. In this way, by varying the number of jackpot random numbers depending on the game state, the probability of a jackpot is changed for each setting.

On the other hand, for each special symbol, the number of small win random number values is set to be the same for each setting value. That is, the number of small win random number values for the first special symbol is configured to be the same for each setting value. Similarly, the number of small win random number values for the second special symbol is configured to be the same for each setting value. In this way, by making the number of small win random number values the same for each special symbol for each setting value, the award rate of game value that takes into account only small win play at all setting values for each special symbol becomes equal.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers for each setting of the second special symbol is compensated for by the number of miss random numbers at all setting values. Also, the number of small win random numbers for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured not to change for each setting. In other words, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to a setting change is compensated for by reducing the number of miss random numbers and allocating the reduction to the jackpot random number, and the number of small win random numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is made the same for each setting of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the payout rate for each setting value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of steps when designing the game specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is compensated for by the most frequent random number other than the jackpot random number (i.e., the losing random number) that can be obtained when it is easiest to stay in play, among the jackpot random number counter C1 as game information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the setting from the number of times that a losing role, which is the most common role in the variable presentation of the second special pattern, appears. Therefore, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is made difficult to detect by limiting the setting discrimination element to the appearance rate of the jackpot, which has a lower probability of appearing than the losing role. As a result, even if the setting is low (i.e., setting value 1, etc.), the player can continue playing without being able to detect the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from a setting change is compensated for by the number of losing random numbers in the jackpot random number counter C1 that correspond to losing combinations that do not award game value to the player.

Unlike the big win and small win roles, the losing role is a role that does not provide a game value, and is therefore provided for each pachinko machine 10, and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp (not shown) that displays the game results of the pachinko machine 10. If the number of big win random numbers corresponding to the big win game, which is likely to be clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, and the number of small win random numbers corresponding to the small win game are both changed for each setting, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily guessed by the player by glancing (checking) the data lamp at the occurrence rates of the two elements of the big win game and the small win game. As a result, for example, if the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, the setting value "1") is discovered by the player, the player may not play the pachinko machine 10, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 may decrease.

Therefore, by configuring the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers resulting from a change in the setting of the probability setting value to be compensated for by the number of losing random numbers in the jackpot random number counter C1 that correspond to losing combinations that do not give the player any game value and are not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp, the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 can be made difficult to detect from the occurrence rate of small wins, with the setting discrimination factor for the player being limited to the occurrence rate of a combination based on one random number value. Therefore, by limiting the discrimination factor for the probability setting value to the occurrence rate of a combination based on one random number value, for example, even with a low setting with a low ball payout rate (i.e., a setting value of "1", etc.), the player can continue playing without being able to detect the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), in the special pattern 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set regardless of the set value. In other words, regardless of the set value, it is configured so that a jackpot (a jackpot based on the jackpot type) cannot occur in the dynamic display of the first special pattern.

In more detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met), the left-hand play method when a small win is won is configured to increase the average number of balls that the player can win. And when the left-hand play method is executed when a small win is won, right-hand play is not executed when a small win is won in normal times, and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 65d, so that a jackpot is not generated, and the game returns to the "normal game state A" and left-hand play is continued, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" as the granted benefit.

Here, if a random number value that results in a jackpot is set in the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the first special symbol, and if the jackpot type can be won in "normal gaming state A", there is a possibility that the dynamic display of the first special symbol will win the jackpot type while trying to achieve the rescue condition by playing the left-hand hit gaming method when a small jackpot is won.

And when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big win type, unlike a small win type, the big win game will start regardless of the player's playing method, so there is a risk that the balls that would have been consumed to achieve the rescue condition by playing left-handed when a small win is won and avoiding the big win by playing left-handed.

Furthermore, if a player continues playing with a left-handed hit in accordance with the suggestion to hit right when a small jackpot is won during normal play (in this case, the rescue priority notification (see FIG. 89(d))), aiming to achieve the rescue condition, a jackpot occurs in the middle of the game, which may cause the player to become skeptical of the pachinko machine 10 and cause the player to stop playing the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the random number value that results in a jackpot is not set in the jackpot random number table 202a that corresponds to the first special symbol.

In addition, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in a small win in the special pattern 1 big win random number table 202a1 is 33, and the values "0 to 32" are specified (set) in the special pattern 1 big win random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a small win in the first special pattern with a set value of "1" is set to 33/10000 = 0.33/100 (i.e., 0.33%).

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be misses in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9967 values other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and the value "33 to 9999" is specified (set) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the miss probability of the first special pattern in the first special pattern with a set value of "1" is set to 9967/10000 = 99.67/100 (i.e., 99.67%).

Next, when the setting value is "2", just like when the setting value is "1", the random number value that will result in a jackpot is not set.

When the setting value is "2", the number of random numbers (small win random numbers) that result in a small win in the special pattern 1 big win random number table 202a1 is 33, the same as when the setting value is "1", and the values "0 to 32" are specified (set) in the special pattern 1 big win random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a small win in the first special pattern with the setting value "2" is set to 33/10000 = 0.33/100 (i.e., 0.33%).

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9967 values other than the small win random number values, and these values "33 to 9999" are specified (set) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the loss probability of the first special pattern in the first special pattern with a set value of "2" is set to 9967/10000 = 99.67/100 (i.e., 99.67%).

Next, when the setting value is "3", just like when the setting value is "1" or "2", the random number value that will result in a jackpot is not set.

When the setting value is "3", the number of random numbers (small win random numbers) that result in a small win in the special pattern 1 big win random number table 202a1 is 33, the same as in the case of the setting value "1" and the setting value "2", and the values "0 to 32" are specified (set) in the special pattern 1 big win random number table 202a1. In other words, the probability of a small win in the first special pattern with the setting value "3" is set to 33/10000 = 0.33/100 (i.e., 0.33%).

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will be misses in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9967 values other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and the value "33 to 9999" is specified (set) in the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. In other words, the miss probability of the first special pattern in the first special pattern with the set value "3" is set to 9967/10000 = 99.67/100 (i.e., 99.67%).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a jackpot based on the jackpot type cannot occur, and only a jackpot based on the small jackpot type can occur.

By configuring it in this way, in the "normal game state A" where the dynamic display of the first special symbol is primarily performed, that is, in a game state where the rescue condition can be met, it is possible for only a jackpot to occur based on a small jackpot win.

Then, in the case where a small win on special symbol 1 is won as a result of the control judgment in "normal game state A", right-hand play is not executed, and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 65d, so that a big win as a given value is not generated, and the state returns to "normal game state A" where left-hand play is continued, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, which is the update end state, and a transition is made to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" as a given benefit.

As a result, when a special chart 1 small win is won during "normal game state A", the player can determine the content of the right-hit notification effect executed on the third pattern display device 81 and judge whether or not to play right during the small win to generate a big win. This allows the player to guess which hitting method will increase the expected number of balls that can be won, creating new gameplay and increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the number of values (jackpot random value values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is two, and the values "0, 1" are specified (set) in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special pattern in the second special pattern with the set value "1" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02/100 (i.e., 0.02%), the same as the first special pattern.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small win random number values) that result in a small win in the special pattern 2 big win random number table 202a2 is 1550, and the values "2 to 1551" are specified (set) in the special pattern 2 big win random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a small win in the second special pattern with a set value of "1" is set to 1550/10000 = 15.50/100 (i.e., 15.50%).

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8448 values other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and the value "1552 to 9999" is specified (set) in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special pattern with the set value "1" is set to 8448/10000 = 84.48/100 (i.e., 84.48%).

In other words, when the setting value is "1", the increase in the number of winning random numbers in Special Chart 2 is compensated for by reducing the number of losing random numbers, which have the highest probability of appearing during play.

In this way, the probability of a small win for the second special symbol is set to a number that is much easier to select than the probability of a big win. In other words, in lottery play with the second special symbol, the settings are such that the numbers are more likely to be selected in the order of miss → small win → big win, and when a big win occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be executed in the "time-shortened state" and "normal play state B", the proportion of big wins based on winning the small win game is configured to be high.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is three, and the values "0 to 2" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol with a set value of "2" is set to be 3/10000 = 0.03/100 (i.e., 0.03%), the same as the first special symbol.

When the setting value is "2", the number of random numbers (small win random numbers) that result in a small win in the special pattern 2 big win random number table 202a2 is 1550, just like when the setting value is "1", and the values "3 to 1552" are specified (set) in the special pattern 2 big win random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a small win in the second special pattern with the setting value "2" is set to 1550/10000 = 15.50/100 (i.e., 15.50%).

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8447 values other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and the value "1553 to 9999" is specified (set) in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special pattern with the set value "2" is set to 8447/10000 = 84.47/100 (i.e., 84.47%).

In other words, at the setting value "2", the increase in the number of winning random numbers in special chart 2 is compensated for by reducing the number of losing random numbers, which have the highest probability of appearing during play.

Therefore, the setting value "2" in the special chart 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same probability of small win as the setting value "1" (both 15.50%), but the probability of jackpot is slightly improved (0.02% → 0.03%), so it can be said that this setting makes it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 4, and the values "0 to 3" are specified (set) in the special 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol with a set value of "3" is set to be 4/10000 = 0.04/100 (i.e., 0.04%), the same as the first special symbol.

When the setting value is "3", the number of random numbers (small win random numbers) that result in a small win in the special pattern 2 big win random number table 202a2 is 1550, the same as in the case of setting values "1" and "2", and the values "4 to 1553" are specified (set) in the special pattern 2 big win random number table 202a2. In other words, the probability of a small win in the second special pattern with a setting value of "3" is set to 1550/10000 = 15.50/100 (i.e., 15.50%).

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 8446 values other than the jackpot random number value and the small jackpot random number value, and the value "1554 to 9999" is specified (set) in the special pattern 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. In other words, the loss probability of the second special pattern with the set value "3" is set to 8446/10000 = 84.46/100 (i.e., 84.46%).

In other words, at the setting value "3", the increase in the number of winning random numbers in Special Chart 2 is compensated for by reducing the number of losing random numbers, which have the highest probability of appearing during play.

Therefore, the setting value "3" in the special chart 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same probability of small win as the setting value "2" (both 15.50%), but the probability of jackpot is slightly improved (0.03% → 0.04%), so it can be said that this setting makes it easier for jackpot games to occur than the setting value "2".

In the first embodiment, the special chart 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 does not set the random number value that will result in a jackpot regardless of the setting value, but it may be configured to set a random number value that will result in a jackpot for each setting value, similar to the special chart 2 jackpot random number table 202a2.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will continue. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and to return to "0" after reaching a maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)).

Then, when the ball enters the second starting hole 71, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved area, which is the same as the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 71.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the random number value for a jackpot is not set in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 regardless of the set value, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol cannot result in a jackpot (see FIG. 7). Therefore, the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 do not have a storage area for the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value) or a random number that results in a small jackpot (small jackpot random number value), that is, if the random number is a miss (miss random number value) as a result of the control judgment, the variation pattern in the variation performance and the type of the stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a miss. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a small jackpot (small jackpot random number value), the variation pattern in the variation performance and the type of the stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a small jackpot. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (jackpot random number value) that results in a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern and stop type in the fluctuation presentation will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same reserved area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as game information in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 8, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the game state is associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot type is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, and there is a jackpot type "Time-saving A" in which the state transitions to a "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than in the "normal game state" until the special symbol is displayed a specified number of times (mainly the dynamic display of the second special symbol 5 times in the first embodiment).

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in FIG. 8, when a jackpot occurs in any game state, the jackpot type "Time-saving A" is associated with the value "0 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2.

In other words, in the lottery for determining whether the second special symbol will be won or lost in all game states, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reserved area can be selected from the jackpot type table 202b, and the jackpot type "time-saving A" can be selected regardless of the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Therefore, if a jackpot is won with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type "Time-saving A" will be won with a probability of 99/99. In other words, if a jackpot is won with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, only the jackpot type "Time-saving A" can be selected.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will continue. The small win type counter CK determines the type of small win (large win content) that is awarded when a small win is won and the ball passes through a specific area 65d during the small win game. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99") and to return to "0" at a predetermined time after reaching a maximum value at a specific time (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the small win type counter CK is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)).

Then, when the ball enters the first starting hole 64, it is stored in the small win type counter storage area 203d5 of the first reserved area, which is the same as the first reserved area in which the big win random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the first starting hole 64 as the start detection area. Also, when the ball enters the second starting hole 71, it is stored in the small win type counter storage area 203e5 of the second reserved area, which is the same as the second reserved area in which the big win random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided in correspondence with the second starting hole 71.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value) or a random number that results in a small jackpot (small jackpot random number value), that is, if it is a random number that results in a miss (miss random number value), the variation pattern in the variable performance and the type of the stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those at the time of a miss. Also, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), the variation pattern in the variable performance and the type of the stop pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those at the time of a jackpot. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one of the reserved areas in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a small win (small win random number value), the fluctuation pattern and stop type in the fluctuation performance will be those for a small win. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type for that small win are determined according to the small win type indicated by the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the same reserved area.

As described above, the value of the small win type counter CK as game information in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the small win type is determined based on the small win type counter CK and the small win type table 202c stored in the ROM 202. This small win type table 202c is provided with a special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 referenced in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2 referenced in the second lottery game of the second special symbol.

Now, referring to Figure 9, we will explain the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 and the special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2. Figure 9(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic example of the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and Figure 9(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic example of the special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2 corresponding to the second special symbol also stored in the ROM 202.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that when a small win is won in the lottery game of each special symbol, the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 3) as a movable device is opened and a specific area 65d within the variable winning device 65 is opened at a timing according to the type of each special symbol. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area 65d during the small win game, a big win game according to the value of the small win type counter CK is started.

As shown in Figures 9(a) and 9(b), the small win type table 202c is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol, which are further divided according to the game state, and the small win type according to the type of special symbol and the value of the small win type counter CK are associated with each other depending on whether or not the specific area 65d was passed during the small win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small prize types "small prize A" and "small prize B" are provided, each with a maximum number of rounds of 1 round, while when the ball passes through the specific area 65d, "time-saving B" with a maximum number of rounds of 1+4 rounds, "time-saving C" with a maximum number of rounds of 1+6 rounds, and "time-saving D" with a maximum number of rounds of 1+9 rounds are provided.

Specifically, in the lottery game for the first special symbol, in the "normal game state (mainly, "normal game state A")" in which the "time-saving function" is not activated, if a small prize is won, the small prize type will be "small prize A" for small prize play only when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, while the small prize type will be "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" when the ball passes through the specific area 65d, and after the big prize game involving passage through the specific area 65d, the "high-probability time-saving function" is granted, mainly for the period until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "once." In addition, in the "normal high probability time-shortening state" and "normal low probability time-shortening state", if a small win is won, the small win type "small win A" will be generated for small win play only if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, while the small win type "time-shortening B" or "time-shortening C" will be generated if the ball passes through the specific area 65d, and after the big win play associated with passing through the specific area 65d, the "high probability time-shortening function" is granted mainly until the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed "five times".

In the "normal high probability time shortened state" and "normal low probability time shortened state" in this embodiment, right-hand play is recommended, and while it is possible to win the second starting hole 71 and dynamically display the second special pattern, it is difficult to win the first starting hole 64, making it difficult to dynamically display the first special pattern.

Next, in the lottery game of the second special symbol, if a small win is won in all game states, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win type is "small win B" for small win play only, while when the ball passes through the specific area 65d, the small win type is "time-saving D", and after the big win game associated with passing through the specific area 65d, the "time-saving function" is granted mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "five times".

In addition, although details will be described later, when the number of times the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state" ("800 times" in the first embodiment), the "low probability time reduction function" is granted as the "normal pattern low probability time reduction state" until the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed "100 times" (see FIG. 24).

Therefore, after a big win in which a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A" and the ball passes through specific area 65d, the "high probability time-saving function" is granted mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "once", while, when the number of times that the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state" is reached, the "low probability time-saving function" is granted mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed "100 times".

In other words, in the "normal game state (mainly, "normal game state A")," the "normal low probability time shortened state" to which the player enters when the rescue condition is met the number of times is configured to increase the probability of winning a jackpot (including a jackpot based on winning a small jackpot) with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, compared to the "normal high probability time shortened state" to which the player enters after winning a jackpot when the special symbol 1 small jackpot is won and the ball passes through specific area 65d.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher in the "normal game state" where the player enters the "normal game state" when the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached than in the "normal game state" where the player enters the "normal game state" after winning a special game state 1 small jackpot and the ball passes through the specific area 65d, and then enters the "normal game state with high probability of winning, time-reduced state A" where the player enters the "normal game state" after winning a special game state 1 small jackpot and the ball passes through the specific area 65d. Details of the expected value of the balls that the player can win in each case will be described later in FIG. 27.

In the special chart 1 small win type table 202c1 and the special chart 2 small win type table 202c2, each small win type is associated with a possible value of the small win type counter CK that determines the small win type.

In the example of the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 shown in Figure 9 (a), in all game states, when a small win of the first special symbol occurs, the value of the small win type counter CK "0 to 99" is associated with "small win A", "time reduction B" or "time reduction C" depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

In other words, in the lottery for determining whether the first special symbol will win or lose, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a value that results in a small win, the small win type associated with the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the small win type counter storage area 203d5 of the same first reserved area is determined from the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1. For example, depending on whether or not a specific area has been passed, if the value of the small win type counter CK is "7", "time reduction B" is determined as the small win type, and if the value of the small win type counter CK is "95", "time reduction C" is determined as the small win type.

Therefore, if the player wins a small prize with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small prize type "small prize A" will be won with a probability of 100%. Also, if the player passes through the specific area 65d, the small prize type "time-saving B" will be won with a probability of 50.0%, and the small prize type "time-saving C" will be won with a probability of 50.0%.

Next, in the example of the special symbol 1 small win type table 202c1 shown in FIG. 9(b), in all game states, when a small win of the second special symbol occurs, the value of the small win type counter CK, "0 to 99", is associated with "small win B" or "time-saving D" depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

In other words, in the lottery for determining whether the second special symbol will win or lose, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the second reserved areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a value that results in a small win, the small win type associated with the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the small win type counter storage area 203e5 of the same second reserved area is determined from the special symbol 2 small win type table 202c2, and for example, regardless of the value of the small win type counter CK, the small win type is determined to be "small win B" or "time-saving D" depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

Therefore, if a small win is won with the dynamic display of the second special pattern, there is a 100% chance that the small win type of "small win B" or "time-saving D" will be won, depending on whether or not the specific area 65d has been passed through.

Here, referring to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the game mode in each game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and the transition conditions and transition destinations of the game state in each game state will be described. FIG. 10 is a list that explains the transition trigger to the game state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destination, the variation time of the first special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol, and the right-hand hit possibility in each game state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the launch mode in each game state and the transition destination of the game state based on the type of jackpot won. Note that FIG. 11 also shows the transition of the game state when playing in a non-recommended launch mode, but for convenience of explanation, the explanation will be omitted here. Also, the electric support count described in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 is the number of times that the dynamic display of the second special symbol that can be mainly executed by right-hand hit play is executed, and the time-saving end conditions will be described in detail later in FIG. 24.

As shown in FIG. 10, the trigger for transition to "normal game state A" is when the game is in the initial state at the time of factory shipment, when the RAM is cleared, when the small win type "small win A" is won with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in "normal game state A" (i.e., when the ball is not passed through the specific area 65d during a small win game), or when all dynamic displays of the second special symbols that were reserved in "normal game state B" are executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10, in the "normal game state A", as described above, the probability of a big win for special symbols is low, and the probability of a hit for normal symbols is also low. Furthermore, in the "normal game state A", left-handed play is encouraged, and balls shot in the left-handed play mainly enter the first starting hole 64. The time period during which the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 changes is in the range of "5 seconds to 210 seconds", and the time period during which the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 changes is in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds" (see FIGS. 12 to 17 described later). In addition, in this "normal game state A", when a right-handed play is performed, the firing mode is detected by the through gate 67, etc., and a right-handed play prohibition notification is executed by the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5) or the like to suppress the firing in the right-handed play based on the detection.

Then, the trigger for transitioning to the "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" is when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed in the "Normal Game State A" to win the small win type "Time-Shortened B" or the small win type "Time-Shortened C" (i.e., when the ball passes through the specific area 65d during a small win game) (see FIG. 11).

In this "normal high probability time shortened state A", as described above, the probability of a big win for special symbols is low, while the probability of a hit for normal symbols is high. Furthermore, in the "normal high probability time shortened state A", right-hand play is encouraged, and a ball shot in this right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71 where the high probability time shortening function is activated. The time for the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 to change is "70 seconds" or "80 seconds", while the time for the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 to change is in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 12 to 17 described later). Note that in this "normal high probability time shortened state A", right-hand play is encouraged, so the right-hand hit prohibition notification is not executed.

Then, the trigger for transitioning to "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B" is when either the jackpot type "Time-Shortened A" or the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened D" is won in any game state, or when the small jackpot type "Time-Shortened B" or "Time-Shortened C" is won in the "time-shortened state" (i.e., "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A," "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State B," or "Normal Low Probability Time-Shortened State") (see Figure 11).

In this "normal high probability time shortened state B", as described above, the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is low, while the probability of a hit with a normal symbol is high. Furthermore, in the "normal high probability time shortened state B", right-hand play is encouraged, and a ball shot in this right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71 where the high probability time shortening function is activated. The time for the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 changes in the range of "15 seconds to 190 seconds", while the time for the dynamic display of the first special symbol 1 changes in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see Figures 12 to 17 described later). Note that, since right-hand play is encouraged in this "normal high probability time shortened state B", the right-hand hit prohibition notification is not executed.

Then, the transition to "normal game state B" is triggered when the time-saving end condition is met in "normal high probability time-saving state A" (i.e., when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed 7 times, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 1 time, or the first and second special symbols are dynamically displayed 8 times in total), or when the time-saving end condition is met in "normal high probability time-saving state B" (i.e., when the first special symbol is dynamically displayed 7 times, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 5 times, or the first and second special symbols are dynamically displayed 12 times in total), and there is still a reserved ball for the second special symbol (see FIG. 11).

In addition, if the time-saving end condition is met in the "normal low-probability time-saving state" (i.e., if the first special symbol is dynamically displayed 100 times, the second special symbol is dynamically displayed 100 times, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed 100 times in total), the game can also transition to the "normal game state B". However, as described above, when playing with the right hand in the "normal low-probability time-saving state", the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to cause a jackpot to occur on average about once every six spins. Therefore, in the "normal low-probability time-saving state", the probability of a jackpot occurring before the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times is high, and the next jackpot is essentially guaranteed, making it a game state in which it is difficult to transition to the "normal game state B". Therefore, the relevant transition trigger is not shown in Figures 10 and 11.

In this "normal game state B", as described above, the probability of a big win for the special symbol is low, and the probability of a hit for the normal symbol is also low. Furthermore, in "normal game state B", the game is waiting for the result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol remaining as a reserved ball, so the right-hand hit notification lamp 37c (see FIG. 3) is not lit and left-hand hit play is encouraged, but the third symbol display device 81 and the like are not encouraging any firing mode. And, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the game transitions to "normal game state A", so the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed, and the change time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 is in the range of "15 seconds to 190 seconds" (see FIG. 12 to FIG. 17 described later).

Next, the trigger for transitioning to the "normal low probability time shortened state" is when the jackpot state does not occur a predetermined number of times (800 times in the first embodiment) in a low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, i.e., when misses continue to be extracted while a predetermined number of dynamic displays are performed in the low probability state of the special pattern, or when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d when a small jackpot is won (see FIG. 11).

In addition, in the "normal low probability time shortening state", as described above, the probability of winning the special symbol is low, and the probability of winning the normal symbol is also low, but the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is long (see FIG. 23). Furthermore, in the "normal low probability time shortening state", right-hand play is encouraged, and the ball shot in the right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71 where the low probability time shortening function is activated. And, the change time of the dynamic display of the 1 of the second special symbol is in the range of "15 seconds to 190 seconds", while the change time of the dynamic display of the 1 of the first special symbol is in the range of "2 seconds to 190 seconds" (see FIG. 12 to FIG. 17 described later). In addition, since right-hand play is encouraged in this "normal low probability time shortening state", the right-hand hit prohibition notification is not executed even if the ball passes through the through gate 67.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won as a result of control judgment in the "normal game state A", a right-hand hit is performed during the small jackpot game of the first round, causing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, generating a jackpot game and transitioning to the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state A". In contrast, in the "normal game state A", the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied, which is the end of the update state, and the state transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" as a profit-granting state. In this case, the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher when the state transitions to the latter "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see FIG. 27).

Therefore, if a small special symbol 1 win is won in "normal game state A", depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met at that time, it may be better to return to "normal game state A" without generating a big win game when the small special symbol 1 win is won, and then execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol again until the rescue condition is met, and transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" to increase the expected number of balls that can be won.

For this reason, in conventional pachinko machines, when a small prize type that can generate a big prize game is won (i.e., when a small prize type that allows the ball to pass through a specific area is won), the ball is shot during the small prize game to enter the variable prize device, and the ball is shot toward the variable prize device so that the ball passes through the specific area to generate a big prize game. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the content of the right-hit notification performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 during the small prize opening time is configured to differ depending on the number of times the special pattern is executed (the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met) when the special pattern 1 small prize is won in "normal game state A".

Specifically, when the expected number of balls that can be obtained is higher when playing with a right-hand hit when a small jackpot is won (i.e., when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the jackpot priority notification period), the right-hand hit notification presentation is configured to strongly suggest right-hand play and emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot as the first notification mode (see FIG. 89(b)).

On the other hand, when the expected value of the balls that can be obtained is higher with the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won (i.e., when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 during the rescue priority notification period), the right-hand play notification effect is configured to perform a second notification mode that does not strongly suggest right-hand play and does not emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot (i.e., rescue priority notification effect) compared to the jackpot priority notification effect (see FIG. 89(d)). Details of the right-hand play notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A" will be described later in FIG. 28, FIG. 70, and FIG. 89.

Returning to FIG. 6, we will continue to explain the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by "1" within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and when it reaches the maximum value (i.e. "99"), it returns to "0" at a predetermined time.

In the first embodiment, the general presentation mode of the variable presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of a jackpot or a miss is selected based on the number of pending variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "long") in which a relatively long variable time is likely to be selected for each presentation mode, a middle pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "middle") in which a shorter variable time than the long pattern is likely to be selected, and a short pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "short") in which a shorter variable time than the middle pattern is likely to be selected are prepared.

Specifically, one of ten presentation modes may be selected: a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode in which no "reach display" occurs; a "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode; a "normal reach" presentation mode in which only the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed as a "reach display;" a "super reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "super reach;" a "special reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "special reach;" a "normal reach (promotion)" presentation mode in which a promotion presentation is performed after the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed; a "super reach (promotion)" presentation mode in which a promotion presentation is performed after the variable elements of a "super reach;" a "special reach (promotion)" presentation mode in which a promotion presentation is performed after the variable elements of a "special reach" are executed; and a "special variation" presentation mode in which a fixed presentation is executed in a specified game state.

Here, each of the presentation modes will be explained in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode may be collectively referred to as "non-reach" presentation modes) are presentation modes in which the same third pattern does not stop in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first, and a "reach display" does not occur after a "high-speed change" variable element that shuffles each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 at high speed is performed in the third pattern display device 81, in which the three pattern rows Z1 to Z3 change as a special pattern change display.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" refers to, for example, a variable element in which the third symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed during the third symbol fluctuation presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81. In this "high-speed fluctuation," the third symbol is fluctuated so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display contents of the third symbol, and a presentation is executed in which the stopped results of the previously stopped and displayed fluctuation presentation are randomly mixed up (shuffled).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed except for certain presentation modes (the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode).

The "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element refers to a variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a slow speed that is visible to the player after the "fast-speed fluctuation" variable element in the third symbol fluctuation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81. In this "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is displayed in order while the player is made to recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the two symbol rows that are displayed first (for example, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4)), it is considered that a "reach display" has occurred and the variable element of "normal reach" is developed, while if different third symbols stop in the two symbol rows that are displayed first, Z1 and Z3, the remaining symbol row Z2 is displayed in a stopped state and the variable performance is terminated. Details of each variable element, including the "fast-speed fluctuation" variable element and the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, followed by the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, with each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stopping in order, and different third symbols stopping on the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first, and the remaining one symbol row Z2 stopping, and the first variable presentation ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 stops simultaneously, and different third symbols stopping on the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the two symbol rows that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode), the other symbol rows Z2 also stopping, and the first variable presentation ends.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "reach display" in which, in the presentation of the third pattern variation in the third pattern display device 81, the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed immediately after the same third pattern stops in the two pattern rows Z1 and Z3 that are displayed first, and the "reach display" does not develop into other "reach displays", i.e., variable elements of the "super reach" or "special reach".

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are executed.

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" develop into the variable elements of a "Special Reach."

Among the presentation modes, the "Normal Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode is one of the presentation modes of the "Reach Display" in which, after announcing that a small win has been won in the variable element of the "Normal Reach" (i.e., any of the same third symbols among "0", "2", "4", "6" or "8" stops in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the same third symbol stops in the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 and a third symbol with the letters "Challenge Symbol" stops in the middle symbol row Z2), a variable element of the "Promotion Presentation" is executed in which any of the same third symbols with the numbers among "1", "3", "5", "7" or "9" stops in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable element of the "Promotion Presentation" is executed after a small win has been announced in the variable element of the "Super Reach."

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable element of the "Promotion Presentation" is executed after a small win has been announced in the variable element of the "Special Reach."

Among the presentation modes, the "special variation" presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be selected when the final dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed in the "normal high probability time shortened state", and as a limited presentation, a notification presentation is executed on the third pattern display device 81 by executing a right-hand hit game to store reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern, and then a notification is given as to whether the variation presentation is successful or not.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, when the ball enters the first start hole 64, the value is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start hole 64 as the start detection area. Also, when the ball enters the second start hole 71, the value is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start hole 71.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202e that references the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to differ depending on whether the variable performance is successful, the current game state, and the number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently on hold. In other words, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202e are provided, and are configured to be selected depending on the number of variable performances (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently on hold, etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variable presentation, first, based on the reserved number table 202d provided in the ROM 202, one of the stop pattern tables 202e is selected that corresponds to the success or failure of the variable presentation, the current game state, and the current number of variable presentations (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202e and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a presentation mode that is a rough mode of the variable presentation is selected. After that, based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable presentation is determined.

The multiple stop pattern tables 202e are set so that the range of random numbers of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the presentation mode is selected differs for each stop pattern table 202e. The reason for providing multiple stop pattern tables 202e is to change the selection ratio of the presentation mode of the variable presentation depending on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the game status, and the number of reserved balls. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode is changed depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the acquired third symbol, (2) whether the current game status of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state", "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", or "normal game status", and (3) how many reserved balls there are for the reserved variable presentation.

The first reason for this is to change the expectation of a jackpot for each presentation mode. That is, by configuring the stop patterns, i.e., the ratio of selection of the "non-reach" presentation mode, the "normal reach" presentation mode, the "super reach" presentation mode, and the "special reach" presentation mode, to be different between when the jackpot lottery is won and when it is lost, the expectation of a jackpot is changed for each presentation mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" presentation mode or the "normal reach" presentation mode is configured to be easily selected.

By configuring it in this way, the "Super Reach" presentation mode and the "Special Reach" presentation mode can be made to be presentations that are easy to hit, while the "Normal Reach" presentation mode and the "Non-Reach" presentation mode can be made to be presentations that are difficult to hit or that do not result in a hit, making it possible to differentiate the likelihood of a hit for each presentation mode. Therefore, when a presentation that is easy to hit appears in a variable presentation, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a hit occurring while that presentation that is easy to hit is being performed, increasing the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, the device is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) that is the general content of the variable performance based on the stop pattern table 202e that makes it easy to select a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, when the obtained lottery result is a miss, the device is configured to select a performance mode (stop pattern) of the variable performance based on the stop pattern table 202e that makes it difficult to select a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when the lottery result of the third symbol is notified to the player in the variable performance, if a performance that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable performance is likely to produce a jackpot, and if a performance that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable performance is unlikely to produce a jackpot. By setting a difference in the expected value of a jackpot for each performance mode (stop pattern), the interest in the game can be increased during the execution of the variable performance.

The second reason is to minimize the number of wasted balls (so-called overflow winnings resulting in no special symbol being drawn) that result from a ball entering the first starting hole 64 when the number of waiting times for the first special symbol variable performance has reached its upper limit, or a ball entering the second starting hole 71 when the number of waiting times for the second special symbol variable performance has reached its upper limit.

To be more specific, the number of waiting times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol variable performance is set to a maximum of four times, and the variable performance is executed for at least a certain time, so that in the game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second starting hole 71 in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected, the ball will frequently enter the second starting hole 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has been reached, and even if the ball enters the second starting hole 71 as a condition for the profit award, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. Also, in the "normal game state", if a variable performance with a long variable time is selected when the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol has been reached, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is not consumed during the execution of the variable performance, so that even if a ball enters the first starting hole 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. When this happens, the player will determine that they will not gain any gaming value by putting the ball into the first starting hole 64, and will stop shooting balls and suspend play until the variable performance is over and they can obtain the reserved balls again. If play is suspended, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will have an impact on the business of the amusement parlor.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202e, which tends to select a short variable time, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls for the third pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is likely to be reached, or in a number of reserved balls that is close to (or equal to) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to suppress balls from entering the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has been reached.

The third reason is that the execution time is set long to delay the end of the variable performance, thereby maintaining the state in which the variable performance is being executed for a long time. To be more specific, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small (none), the next variable performance cannot be started unless a new ball is inserted into either the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71 within the variable time of the variable performance being executed, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If the third pattern display device 81 does not perform a variable performance even though the player is playing by firing a ball, the player cannot get the excitement of the lottery for a big win that the player is looking for, and loses interest in the game. In addition, because the third pattern display device 81 does not perform a variable performance, the player may recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is one in which it is difficult to insert a ball into the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71, and may judge that it is a machine in which it is difficult to obtain game value, and may stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202e, which is likely to select a long variable presentation time, when the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is small. This makes it difficult for a situation to occur in which the variable presentation is not being performed in the third pattern display device 81, and makes it possible to maintain the execution state of the variable presentation in the third pattern display device 81 for a long time.

The fourth reason is that by setting the execution time of the variable display of the first special symbol to be short in the game state in which right-hand play is performed, the execution period of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the game state in which right-hand play is performed is shortened. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, right-hand play is recommended in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", and when the normal electric role 72 is in the open state by the right-hand play, it is possible for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is easily executed. And the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured so that a big win (small win) can occur at a rate of about once every six rotations on average.

On the other hand, during right-hand play, it is difficult to enter the first starting hole 64, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured so that a big win (small win) can only occur about once every 300 spins on average. Therefore, during right-hand play, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute compared to the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and is a dynamic display that is difficult to cause a big win (small win). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol that is a miss in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" and the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" is executed, the performance mode of the variable performance is selected based on the stop pattern table 202e that is likely to select a short variable time.

As a result, in the "normal high probability time shortened state" and "normal low probability time shortened state," the execution period of the dynamic display of the first special pattern, which is a losing symbol, is shortened, allowing the player to focus only on the changing presentation of the dynamic display of the second special pattern, which is more likely to result in a big or small win, and reducing the dragging of the game.

Here, the details of the reserved number table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the reserved number table 202d1 for special symbol 1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIG. 12(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the reserved number table 202d2 for special symbol 2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a first special symbol variation performance is performed based on a ball entering the first starting hole 64, the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 1 table 202d1 is referenced based on the success or failure of the variation performance, the game state at that time, and the total number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol variation performance at that time, and one of the stop pattern tables 202e1 to 202e5 is selected. Also, when a second special symbol variation performance is performed based on a ball entering the second starting hole 71, the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 table 202d2 is referenced based on the success or failure of the variation performance, the game state at that time, and the total number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol variation performance at that time, and one of the stop pattern tables 202e1 to 202e6 is selected. Then, the general performance mode of the variation performance is determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202e1 to 202e6 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in reserved number table 202d1 for special symbol 1 in FIG. 12(a), when a miss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is "1 to 3", table A 202e1 (see FIG. 13(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. Also, when a miss is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is "4", table B 202e2 (see FIG. 13(b)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected. On the other hand, when a small win type "Time-saving C" is extracted in the "normal game state", table C 202e3 (see FIG. 14(a)) of stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, when extracting the small win type "Time-saving B" in the "normal game state," table D 202e4 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, when a miss is extracted in the "normal high probability time shortened state" or the "normal low probability time shortened state", the E table 202e5 (see FIG. 15(a)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Also, when a small win is extracted in the "normal high probability time shortened state" or the "normal low probability time shortened state", the D table 202e4 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d2 for special symbol 2 in FIG. 12(b), when a miss is extracted in "normal game state A" and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "1 to 3", table A 202e1 (see FIG. 13(a)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected. Also, when a miss is extracted in "normal game state A" and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is "4", table B 202e2 (see FIG. 13(b)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected. On the other hand, when a big win or small win is extracted in "normal game state A", table C 202e3 (see FIG. 14(a)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, for the fifth spin of the second special symbol in "normal high probability time shortening state A" or "normal high probability time shortening state B", regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls, the F table 202e6 (see FIG. 15(b)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected. Also, for the first to fourth spins of "normal high probability time shortening state B", when a miss is extracted in "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal game state B", regardless of the number of reserved balls, the A table 202e1 (see FIG. 13(a)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected. On the other hand, for the first to fourth spins of "normal high probability time shortening state B", when a big win or small win is extracted in "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal game state B", regardless of the number of reserved balls, the D table 202e4 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected.

The stop pattern table 202e may be configured to differ according to the number of reserved balls even when a losing first special symbol is extracted in the "normal gaming state" and when a losing second special symbol is extracted in the "normal gaming state A". For example, when a jackpot is won and there are a large number of reserved balls, the stop pattern table 202e in which a relatively short variation pattern is likely to be selected may be configured to be selected.

In this case, for example, in each performance mode in which a "reach display" is executed, a performance mode in which only the time of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds is selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a variable performance is started with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special pattern being 4, even if the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed for 5 seconds, a "reach display" may occur in that variable performance at the time when the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends (the time when it is recognized as a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element). Therefore, even if a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, by configuring so that a performance mode in which a "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is executed, it is possible to make it unclear at the time when the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed whether the variable performance will be a big hit or a miss.

Next, each stop pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13(a) is a diagram showing an example of the A table 202e1 of the stop pattern table 202e, FIG. 13(b) is a diagram showing an example of the B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 14(a) is a diagram showing an example of the C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e. FIG. 14(b) is a diagram showing an example of the D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e, FIG. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of the E table 202e5 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of the F table 202e6 of the stop pattern table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), in table A 202e1 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98", "99".

In addition, in table A 202e1, the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 are not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the promotion presentation mode, and the "special change" presentation mode, and it is set so that none of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the promotion presentation mode, and the "special change" presentation mode are selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13(b), in table B 202e2 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98, 99".

In addition, in table B 202e2, no value is assigned to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the promotion presentation mode, and the "special change" presentation mode in the stop pattern selection counter C3, and it is set so that none of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the promotion presentation mode, and the "special change" presentation mode are selected.

That is, in table A 202e1, the selection rates are set to be 75% for the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode. In addition, in table B 202e2, the selection rates are set to be 75% for the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

In other words, in table A 202e1, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected, and in table B 202e2, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode. On the other hand, in table A 202e1 and table B 202e2, each "reach display" is configured to be selected at the same rate.

Therefore, since A table 202e1 and B table 202e2 are selected so that only the "non-reach" presentation mode is different, that is, the long presentation mode or the middle presentation mode, A table 202e1 is more likely to have a relatively long variable presentation time than B table 202e2. In other words, B table 202e2 is more likely to have a shorter variable presentation time than A table 202e1.

In this way, in the "normal game state A" where left-handed play is encouraged, if a losing lottery result is extracted, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is selected based on the number of reserved balls for the pending variable presentation. For example, if there are many reserved balls for the variable presentation, a "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode with a relatively short variable presentation time is selected. This makes it possible to increase the efficiency of variable presentation execution by shortening the execution time of the variable presentation and increasing the number of times the variable presentation is executed when there are many reserved balls for the variable presentation.

Also, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is small, a "non-reach (long)" performance mode, which has a longer variable performance time than the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode, is selected in order to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first starting hole 64 (second starting hole 71). This allows the "non-reach (long)" performance mode, which has a longer variable performance time than when the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode is selected, making it easier to ensure the time for the ball to enter the first starting hole 64, and by increasing the possibility of a new start winning occurring during the execution time of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, the situation in which the variable performance is being executed can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, when selecting the presentation mode for a losing variable presentation, the stop pattern table 202e selected based on the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is configured to be different, but the same presentation mode is selected for determining the variable presentation based on the ball's entry into the first starting hole 64 or the second starting hole 71 and for determining the variable presentation based on the start of the variable presentation based on the ball's entry.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a miss variable effect, either A table 202e1 or B table 202e2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls for the variable effect, but the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode are set to be the same for A table 202e1 and B table 202e2.

In other words, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" or "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode in the "non-reach" presentation mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable presentation, and the only difference is the time of the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation," but the substantially same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the presentation mode selected at the start of the winning and the presentation mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same (same type) presentation modes, even if the game state transitions (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as a "reserved change notice" is made based on the presentation mode selected at the start of the winning, the content of the variable presentation executed will be substantially the same (same type), and a presentation that does not cause any discrepancy with the content of the pre-reading notice can be executed in the variable presentation that is the subject of the pre-reading notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14(a), in the C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "2", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "3" to "20", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "21" to "50", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach (promotion)" presentation mode is set to "51, 52", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach (promotion)" presentation mode is set to "53" to "69", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach (promotion)" presentation mode is set to "70" to "99".

The C table 202e3 is a stop pattern table 202e that is selected when a small win occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal gaming state A", and since a "reach display" always occurs, it is set so that the "non-reach" presentation mode and the "special variation" presentation mode are not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14(b), in D table 202e4 of stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "4", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "40" to "99".

The D table 202e4 is a stop pattern table 202e that is selected when a small win occurs with the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal gaming state A" and when a big win occurs with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Since a "reach display" always occurs, the D table 202e4 is set so that the "non-reach" presentation mode, the promotion presentation mode, and the "special variation" presentation mode are not selected.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14(a) and FIG. 14(b), even if a small win or a big win that can generate a big win state is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the selectable stop pattern table 202e is configured to be different. That is, when a big win state is reached, a maximum of 10 rounds of balls can be won, and when a big win type "time-saving A" that transitions to "normal high probability time-saving state B" after the big win is won, the C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e is referenced, and when a small win type "time-saving C" that transitions to "normal high probability time-saving state A" after the big win is reached, a maximum of 5 rounds of balls can be won, and when a small win type "time-saving C" that transitions to "normal high probability time-saving state A" after the big win is won, the D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e is referenced.

Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed in the "normal game state A", is won as a small win, more balls can be won by playing a jackpot, and the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot is also likely to be a "consecutive win" state, only when the player wins a jackpot that transitions to the "normal high probability time shortened state B", in which the "consecutive win" state is likely to occur, the "normal reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode, the "super reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode, and the "special reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode can be selected.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that notifies the player that a small win has been won in the variable element of "Normal Reach", "Super Reach" or "Special Reach" (i.e., the same third symbol among "0", "2", "4", "6" or "8" stops in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the same third symbol stops in the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 and a third symbol with the word "challenge symbol" stops in the middle symbol row Z2), and then the variable element of "Promotion Presentation" is executed to notify the player that a big win has been won (i.e., the same third symbol among "1", "3", "5", "7" or "9" stops in each symbol row Z1 to Z3), and to increase the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15(a), in E table 202e5 of stop pattern table 202e, the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is allocated only to the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode ("0" to "99"), and the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 is not allocated to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode, the "reach display" presentation mode, and the "special variation" presentation mode. Therefore, when a miss is extracted for the first special symbol in the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", it is set to always be the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode.

As described above, in the "normal high probability time shortening state" and the "normal low probability time shortening state", in order to prevent the game from dragging on by executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is executed in priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, earlier, the E table 202e5 is configured to select a fixed and small number of seconds for the fluctuation time of 1 in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and to select the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode without fail when a miss is extracted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the F table 202e6 of the stop pattern table 202e, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the "special variation" presentation mode ("0" to "99"), and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach" presentation mode and the "reach display" presentation mode. Therefore, the fifth spin of the second special symbol in the "normal high probability time shortening state A" and the "normal high probability time shortening state B" is always set to be the "special variation" presentation mode.

In addition, during the first rotation of the second special symbol in "regular high probability time shortening state A" and the fifth rotation of the second special symbol in "regular high probability time shortening state B", that is, during the final execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol in "regular high probability time shortening state A" and "regular high probability time shortening state B", a right-hand hit is performed to execute a notification effect in the third symbol display device 81 so as to store reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and then, in order to notify the success or failure of the variable effect, the F table 202e6 is configured to select all "special variable" performance modes so that the variable time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is fixed and selected.

Therefore, as shown in Table C 202e3 and Table D 202e4, in the variable presentation when a jackpot is won, the selection rate is highest in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode ("Special Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode > "Super Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode > "Normal Reach (Promotion Presentation)" presentation mode), and as shown in Table A 202e1 and Table B 202e2, in the variable presentation when a loss occurs, the selection rate is highest in the order of "Normal Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Special Reach" presentation mode. Therefore, the jackpot expectation probability when each "reach display" appears is configured so that the likelihood of a jackpot display result appearing is highest in the order of "Special Reach" presentation mode > "Super Reach" presentation mode > "Normal Reach" presentation mode. This allows the player to know the degree of expectation of a big win by the presentation style of the variable performance, and the player can feel the excitement of winning the big win depending on the presentation style of the variable performance executed.

As described above, by determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation to be executed based on the type of special pattern, whether the variable presentation is successful, the game status at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable presentation at that time, it is possible to select a presentation mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable presentation by shortening the execution time of the variable presentation and increasing the number of times the variable presentation is executed based on the situation in which the game is being played.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is large (for example, "4"), when the "reach display" is selected, a stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the "high-speed change" performance element of each "reach display" is shortened. Also, the performance mode may be selected based on the total reserved number of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Furthermore, when the number of reserved balls for the variable performance is large, a stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the "slow change" performance element is omitted in each performance mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202e in which the selection rate of each performance mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable performance may be provided. However, when the selection rate of each performance mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable performance, when a pre-reading notice such as a "reserved change notice" is performed, the number of reserved balls at the time of deciding to execute the pre-reading notice may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable performance that is the target of the pre-reading notice. In such a case, a process is required to maintain consistency between the contents of the pre-reading notice and the contents of the variable performance, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by "1" in the range of "0 to 9", for example, and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, when the ball enters the first start hole 64, the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first start hole 64 as the start detection area. In addition, when the ball enters the second starting hole 71, the value of the variable type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 71.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation time (rough variation pattern) of the variation performance. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the detailed variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202f stored in the ROM 202 in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202e and the stop pattern selection counter C3. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, and also determine whether or not to execute the preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation presentation and determines only the variation time. By configuring it in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance lottery required to execute the variation presentation, so the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation presentation can be reduced. In addition, the main control device 110 does not need to prepare commands for all variation patterns of the variation presentation, so the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can increase the freedom to select the variable presentation by determining the detailed variable presentation pattern based on the variable time (rough variable presentation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variable presentation at any time in response to the changes, and an appropriate presentation can be executed according to the game state.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202f will be described with reference to Figs. 16 and 17. In this pachinko machine 10, the variation pattern table 202f is prepared as follows: a variation pattern table 202f1 for special symbol 1 miss, which is used when the first special symbol misses; a variation pattern table 202f2 for special symbol 1 small win, which is used when the first special symbol hits a small win; a variation pattern table 202f3 for special symbol 2 miss, which is used when the second special symbol misses; and a variation pattern table 202f4 for special symbol 2 big win/small win, which is used when the second special symbol hits a big win or a small win.

16(a) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table 202f1 for a special 1 miss stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table 202f2 for a special 1 small win stored in the ROM 202. Also, FIG. 17(a) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table 202f3 for a special 2 miss stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table 202f4 for a special 2 big win/small win stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, each variation pattern table 202f1 to 202e4 is grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the presentation modes when a miss occurs are categorized as follows: "E0: Non-reach Long", which is referenced when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is determined; "E1: Non-reach Middle", which is referenced when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is determined; "E2: Non-reach Short", which is referenced when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is determined; "E3: Normal Reach", which is referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is determined; "E4: Super Reach", which is referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is determined; "E5: Special Reach", which is referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined; and "E9: Special Fluctuation", which is referenced when the "Special Fluctuation" presentation mode is determined.

In addition, the presentation modes during big wins and small wins are divided into "E3: Normal Reach", which is referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E4: Super Reach", which is referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E5: Special Reach", which is referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined, "E6: Normal Reach (Promotion)" which is referenced when the "Normal Reach (Promotion)" presentation mode is determined, "E7: Super Reach (Promotion)" which is referenced when the "Super Reach (Promotion)" presentation mode is determined, "E8: Special Reach (Promotion)" which is referenced when the "Special Reach (Promotion)" presentation mode is determined, and "E9: Special Fluctuation" which is referenced when the "Special Fluctuation" presentation mode is determined.

The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then associated with each of these divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special pattern is not a value that results in a small win (small win random number value), that is, when it is a value that results in a miss, the reserved number table 202d1 for special pattern 1 is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202e based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserved area and the above stop pattern table 202e. Then, a group (group) to be referenced in the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 is determined based on the selected presentation mode. In the group (group) of the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserved area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation presentation reserved in that reserved area.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for special symbol 1 failure, which is referenced when the first special symbol fails, "E0: Non-reach long" has one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time; hereinafter, it is of course possible to replace "fluctuation pattern" with "fluctuation time") prepared for "E0: Non-reach long" with a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds": "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'low-speed fluctuation'", and only "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'low-speed fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 that is referenced when the first special pattern variation performance is executed, the "'Fast variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow variation' variation element" is associated with all possible values ('0 to 9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode in the first special pattern variation performance, the "'Fast variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow variation' variation element" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Here, we will explain each variable element that constitutes the variable pattern. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable performance, and one variable performance is composed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements provided are a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, a "re-fluctuation" variable element, a "promotion performance" variable element, and a "special fluctuation" variable element.

The "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at a high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance when the "non-reach (long)" performance mode is selected (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"); when the "non-reach (middle)" performance mode is selected, this is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (medium)"); when the "non-reach (short)" performance mode is selected, this is performed for "2 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). Note that when this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element described later is started (executed), or the variable performance ends as it is.

The "slow fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that starts after the execution of the "fast fluctuation" variable element for "10 seconds" and scrolls the third symbol visibly to show whether or not a "reach display" will occur. This "slow fluctuation" variable element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected, but is executed "5 seconds" after the "fast fluctuation" variable element when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, or "special reach" presentation mode is selected.

In other words, in the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode or the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, each pattern row of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to stop rapidly (so-called "perfect stop") without going through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. Note that when this "low-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, the variable presentation may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern including a "10-second" "high-speed variation" variable element and a "5-second" "slow-speed variation" variable element. Also, the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern of only a "5-second" "high-speed variation" variable element. Furthermore, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is configured with a variation pattern of only a "2-second" "high-speed variation" variable element.

The "normal reach" variable element is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the result of the fluctuation of the remaining symbol rows when the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "reach forming symbol") is displayed stopped in the two symbol rows that stop first in the "slow fluctuation" variable element. This "normal reach" variable element is performed "5 seconds" after the "slow fluctuation" variable element when the "normal reach" presentation mode, etc. is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which a "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "super reach", a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "special reach", a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed first and then a "re-variation" variable element is executed, and a pattern in which the variable element evolves into a "promotion effect" variable element after the "jackpot display" is displayed.

The "Super Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining pattern rows continue to change, and a predetermined presentation (for example, a "battle presentation") is performed on the third pattern display device 81 to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" variable element is performed "40 seconds" after the "Normal Reach" variable element is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the "Super Reach" variable element, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "Miss Display" is displayed directly, a pattern in which the "Big Win Display" is displayed directly, a pattern in which a "Re-Variation" variable element is executed after a temporary "Miss Display" is displayed, and a pattern in which the "Big Win Display" appears and then develops into a "Promotion Presentation" variable element.

The "Special Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining pattern rows continue to change, and the third pattern display device 81 performs a special effect (for example, a "race effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variable element is performed for "160 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed and then "re-varies," and a pattern in which the variable element of the "promotion effect" develops after the "jackpot display" is displayed.

It is configured so that after the variable elements of the "normal reach" are executed, they develop into the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach". However, instead of this configuration, when the reach forming symbol stops after "slow fluctuation", it may be configured so that it develops directly into the variable elements of the "super reach" or the variable elements of the "special reach" without going through the variable elements of the "normal reach". It may also be configured so that the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed after the variable elements of the "super reach" are executed.

The "re-change" variable element is a variable element that develops and is executed after a "miss display" appears once in any of the "reach displays", causing a "jackpot display" to appear. This "re-change" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after any of the "reach displays".

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, there are two patterns available: after the execution of the "re-variation" variable element, a "jackpot display" appears, and after the "jackpot display" appears, the variable element develops into a "promotion effect" variable element.

The "re-change" variable element is configured to occur only when a big win or small win is won. In other words, in the case of a "miss display", the "re-change" variable element is configured not to be executed. This is because the "re-change" variable element is a variable element that changes the "miss display" that is temporarily stopped to one of the "big win displays", so if it is executed in the case of a "miss display" that has not won a big win, a discrepancy in the presentation will occur. Therefore, this "re-change" variable element is configured to be selected only in the special chart 1 small win variable pattern table 202f2 and the special chart 2 big win/small win variable pattern table 202f4 (see Figures 16(b) and 17(b)), and not selected in the miss variable pattern tables 202f1 and 202f3 (see Figures 16(a) and 17(a)).

By configuring it in this way, when a variation pattern in which the "re-variation" variable element is executed is selected and a jackpot (a jackpot based on winning a small jackpot), the third pattern display device 81 executes a variation presentation similar to that in the case where a variation pattern resulting in a "miss display" is selected until just before the "re-variation" variable element is executed, and then the "re-variation" variable element is executed, thereby informing the player that he or she has won a jackpot (a jackpot based on winning a small jackpot).

As a result, even if a variable effect that shows a "miss" is being executed, there is a possibility that a big win (a big win based on a small win) has been won, and the player can maintain a sense of anticipation until the variable effect being executed ends, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The variable element of the "promotion effect" is an element that develops and is executed after the "jackpot display" appears in any of the "reach displays". This "promotion effect" variable element is executed "10 seconds" after any of the "reach displays" or "re-change" variable elements.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after the variable element of the "promotion performance" is executed.

In addition, the variable element of this "promotion effect" is configured to occur only when the dynamic display of the first special pattern in "normal gaming state A" wins the small win type "time-saving C." In other words, if the dynamic display of the first special pattern in "normal gaming state A" is a "miss display" or a "small win display," the variable element of the "promotion effect" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of the "promotion effect" is a variable element that changes a temporarily stopped and displayed "small win display" (any of the same third symbols among "0", "2", "4", "6" or "8" stopped in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or the same third symbol stops in the symbol rows Z1 and Z3 and a third symbol with the word "challenge symbol" stopped in the middle symbol row Z2) to any of the "big win displays" (any of the same third symbols among "1", "3", "5", "7" or "9" stopped in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). For this reason, if it is performed in the case of a "miss display" or "small win display" that has not won a big win, a discrepancy in the performance will occur.

The variable element of this "promotion effect" is a variable element that changes the maximum 5 rounds of the jackpot (jackpot based on winning a small jackpot) in the dynamic display of the first special pattern to a maximum 7 rounds of the jackpot (jackpot based on winning a small jackpot). For this reason, even if a small jackpot and a jackpot occur at the same time as a small jackpot or a jackpot in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, which both allow for a maximum of 10 rounds of balls to be won, a discrepancy in the effect will occur.

Therefore, the variable elements of this "promotion effect" are configured to be selected only in the variable pattern table 202f2 for small wins on special chart 1 (see FIG. 16(b)), and not in the variable pattern tables 202f1 and 202f3 for losses and the variable pattern table f4 for big wins and small wins on special chart 2 (see FIG. 16(a), FIG. 17(a) and FIG. 17(b)).

The variable element of the "special variation" is the variable element selected when the final dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal high probability time shortened state" is executed, and is performed "70 seconds (when all lottery results are obtained)" or "80 seconds (when a big win or small win is obtained)" from the start of the variable presentation of all lottery results of the final dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal high probability time shortened state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special variation" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which the "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the successful pattern of the "big win/small win display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which the variable element of the "re-variation" is executed after a temporary "miss display" is displayed.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for special chart 1 misses, "E1: Non-reach/Middle" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with "only the fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (medium)'" with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds".

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: Non-reach/middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)'", and only "only fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)'" are set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 that is referenced when the first special pattern variation performance is executed, "only the "high-speed variation (middle)" variation element" is associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode in the first special pattern variation performance, "only the "high-speed variation (middle)" variation element" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, "E2: Non-reach/Short" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with "only the fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)'" with a total fluctuation time of "2 seconds".

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: Non-reach/short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only the fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'", and it is set so that only "only the fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 that is referenced when the first special pattern variation performance is executed, "only the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element" is associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode in the first special pattern variation performance, "only the "high-speed variation (short)" variation element" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for special chart 1 misses, "E3: Normal reach" has one fluctuation pattern prepared: "Frequency fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds".

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach", and only "Fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 that is referenced when the first special pattern variation performance is executed, the "variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed variation" + variable element of "normal reach"" are associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" presentation mode in the first special pattern variation performance, the variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed variation" + variable element of "normal reach" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for special chart 1 misses, "E4: Super Reach" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds": "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach", and only "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach"" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern table 202f1 that is referenced when the first special pattern variation performance is executed, "'High-speed variation (long)' variable element + 'low-speed variation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element + 'super reach' variable element" are associated with all possible values ('0-9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "Super Reach" presentation mode in the first special pattern variation performance, the variation pattern that is always selected is "'High-speed variation (long)' variable element + 'low-speed variation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element + 'super reach' variable element."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f1 for Special Chart 1 misses, "E5: Special Reach" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with a total fluctuation time of "180 seconds": "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Normal reach" + fluctuation element of "Special reach", and only "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Normal reach" + fluctuation element of "Special reach"" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Reach 1 Miss Variation Pattern Table 202f1 that is referenced when executing the variation performance of the first special symbol, "variation elements of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" are associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "Special Reach" presentation mode in the variation performance of the first special symbol, "variation elements of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" are always selected as the variation pattern.

The variation pattern when the first special symbol is a miss is determined by the presentation mode as it is, so the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. Also, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, multiple variation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selecting whether or not to display a preview, etc.).

Next, referring to FIG. 16(b), the special chart 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referred to when the first special symbol is a small win, will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that results in a small win, the special chart 1 reserved number table 202d1 is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202e based on the game state at that time and the reserved ball number at that time, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202e. Then, based on the selected performance mode, a group (group) to be referenced in the special chart 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2 is determined. In the group (group) of the special chart 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reserve area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reserve area.

In the special chart 1 small win fluctuation pattern table 202f2, for "E3: normal reach", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation elements + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach", and "3 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "re-fluctuation".

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'low-speed variation' variation element + 'normal reach' variation element" is set to be selected 30%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'low-speed variation' variation element + 'normal reach' variation element + 're-variation' variation element" is set to be selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a small win on Special Chart 1, the fluctuation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + "Normal reach' variable element + "Re-fluctuation' variable element" is likely to be selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + "Normal reach' variable element" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a small win can be expected from any of the fluctuation patterns.

Next, in the special chart 1 small win fluctuation pattern table 202f2, for "E4: Super Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are prepared: "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "70 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 3" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach", and "4 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach" + fluctuation factor of "Re-fluctuation".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" variation elements" is set to be selected 40%, and the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Re-variation" variation elements" is set to be selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a small win on Special Chart 1, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element + "Re-fluctuation" variable element is likely to be selected (60% of the total). In addition, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a small win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 1 Small Win Fluctuation Pattern Table 202f2, for "E5: Special Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "180 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "190 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E5: Special Reach" is "0 to 4" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Special reach", and "5 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Special reach" + fluctuation factor of "Re-fluctuation".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" variation elements" is set to be selected 50%, and the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-variation" variation elements" is set to be selected 50% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when a small win occurs with the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" fluctuation elements and the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which small wins can be expected equally with either fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special chart 1 small win fluctuation pattern table 202f2, for "E6: normal reach (promotion effect)", two selectable fluctuation patterns are prepared: "Fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "promotion effect"," with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-fluctuation" + "promotion effect"," with a total fluctuation time of "50 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E6: Normal reach (promotion effect)" is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation elements of 'Normal reach' + fluctuation elements of 'Promotion effect'", and "3 to 9" for "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation elements of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation elements of 'Normal reach' + fluctuation elements of 'Re-fluctuation' + fluctuation elements of 'Promotion effect'".

In other words, when the "Normal reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation effect is executed, the variation pattern of "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Promotion effect" variation elements" is set to be selected 30%, and the variation pattern of "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion effect" variation elements" is set to be selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Normal reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode that can be selected when the first special symbol wins the small win type "Time-saving C", the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion effect" is likely to be selected (70% of the total). Also, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Promotion effect" variation elements" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows the player to expect to win the small win type "Time-saving C" from any of the variation patterns.

Next, in the special chart 1 small win fluctuation pattern table 202f2, for "E7: Super Reach (promotion effect)", two selectable fluctuation patterns are prepared: "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Promotion effect"," with a total fluctuation time of "80 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion effect"," with a total fluctuation time of "90 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E7: Super Reach (promotion effect)" is "0 to 3" for "Fluctuation factors of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factors of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation factors of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation factors of 'Super Reach' + fluctuation factors of 'Promotion effect'", and "4 to 9" for "Fluctuation factors of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factors of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation factors of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation factors of 'Super Reach' + fluctuation factors of 'Re-fluctuation' + fluctuation factors of 'Promotion effect'".

In other words, when the "Super Reach (promotion effect)" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 small win variation pattern table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation effect is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variable elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variable elements + 'Normal reach' variable elements + 'Super reach' variable elements + 'Promotion effect' variable elements" is set to be selected 40%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variable elements + 'Slow-speed variation' variable elements + 'Normal reach' variable elements + 'Super reach' variable elements + 'Re-variation' variable elements + 'Promotion effect' variable elements" is set to be selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode that can be selected when the first special symbol wins the small win type "Time-saving C", the variation pattern "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element + "Re-fluctuation" variable element + "Promotion Effect" variable element" is likely to be selected (60% of the total). Also, by configuring the variation pattern "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal Reach" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element + "Promotion Effect" variable element" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows the player to expect to win the small win type "Time-saving C" from any of the variation patterns.

Next, in the special chart 1 small win fluctuation pattern table 202f2, for "E8: Special reach (promotion effect)", two selectable fluctuation patterns are prepared: "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Promotion effect" with a total fluctuation time of "200 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion effect" with a total fluctuation time of "210 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 16(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E8: Special reach (promotion effect)" is "0 to 4" for "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Promotion effect" fluctuation elements", and "5 to 9" for "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion effect" fluctuation elements".

In other words, when the "Special Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Promotion Effect" variation elements" is set to be selected 50%, and the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-variation" + "Promotion Effect" variation elements" is set to be selected 50% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach (Promotion Effect)" presentation mode selected when the first special symbol wins the small win type "Time-saving C", the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" + "Promotion Effect" variation elements and the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation" + "Promotion Effect" variation elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which the small win type "Time-saving C" can be equally likely to be won in either variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 17(a), the special pattern 2 miss variable pattern table 202f3, which is referred to when the second special pattern is a miss, will be described. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area in which the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special pattern is a value that is not a jackpot (jackpot random number value) or a small win (small win random number value), that is, if it is a miss value, the special pattern 2 reserve number table 202d2 is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202e based on the game state at that time and the reserved ball number at that time, and select the performance mode based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202e. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special pattern 2 miss variable pattern table 202f3 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In the group (group) of the special chart 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, the variation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the variation pattern for the variation performance held in that holding area.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special symbol 2 failures, which is referenced when the second special symbol fails, "E0: Non-reach long" has one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time; hereinafter, it is of course possible to replace "fluctuation pattern" with "fluctuation time") prepared for "E0: Non-reach long" with a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" consisting of "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in FIG. 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'low-speed fluctuation'", and only "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'low-speed fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 that is referenced when the second special pattern variation performance is executed, the "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + "variation element of low-speed variation"' is associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode in the variation performance of the second special pattern, the variation pattern "variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + "variation element of low-speed variation" is always selected.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special chart 2 misses, "E1: Non-reach/Middle" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with "only the fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (medium)'" with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds".

In the example shown in FIG. 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: Non-reach/middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)'", and it is set so that only "only fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (medium)'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 that is referenced when the second special pattern variation performance is executed, "only the "high-speed variation (middle)" variation element" is associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" presentation mode in the second special pattern variation performance, "only the "high-speed variation (middle)" variation element" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special chart 2 misses, "E3: Normal reach" has one fluctuation pattern prepared: "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds".

In the example shown in FIG. 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach", and only "Fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach"" is set to be selectable.

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 that is referenced when the second special symbol variation performance is executed, the "variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed variation" + variable element of "normal reach"" are associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" presentation mode in the variation performance of the second special symbol, the variable element of "high-speed variation (long)" + variable element of "slow-speed variation" + variable element of "normal reach" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special chart 2 misses, "E4: Super Reach" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds": "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Super reach" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in Figure 17 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach", and it is set so that only "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach"" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3 that is referenced when the second special pattern variation performance is executed, "'High-speed variation (long)' variable element + 'low-speed variation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element + 'super reach' variable element" are associated with all possible values ('0-9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "Super Reach" presentation mode in the second special pattern variation performance, the variation pattern that is always selected is "'High-speed variation (long)' variable element + 'low-speed variation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element + 'super reach' variable element."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special chart 2 misses, "E5: Special Reach" has one fluctuation pattern prepared with a total fluctuation time of "180 seconds": "Fast fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "Special reach" fluctuation element.

In the example shown in Figure 17(a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Normal reach" + fluctuation element of "Special reach", and it is set so that only "Fluctuation element of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "Normal reach" + fluctuation element of "Special reach"" can be selected.

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Reach 2 Miss Variation Pattern Table 202f3 that is referenced when the variation performance of the second special symbol is executed, "variation elements of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" are associated with all possible values ("0-9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "Special Reach (Middle)" presentation mode in the variation performance of the second special symbol, the variation pattern selected is always "variation elements of "High-speed variation (long)" + "Slow-speed variation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach"."

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special chart 2 misses, "E9: Special fluctuation" has one fluctuation pattern prepared: "Only the fluctuation elements of 'Special fluctuation'" with a total fluctuation time of "70 seconds."

In the example shown in Figure 17 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only the fluctuation elements of 'special fluctuation'", and it is set so that only "only the fluctuation elements of 'special fluctuation'" can be selected.

In other words, when the "special variation" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 2 miss variation pattern table 202f3, which is referenced when executing the variation presentation of the second special pattern, "only the variation elements of the "special variation"" are associated with all possible values ("0 to 9") of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the case of the "special variation" presentation mode in the variation presentation of the second special pattern, "only the variation elements of the "special variation"" are always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 17(b), the special chart 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4, which is referred to when the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the big win random number counter C1 stored in a reserve area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special pattern is a value that results in a big win or a small win, the special chart 2 reserved number table 202d2 is referenced to select the stop pattern table 202e based on the game state at that time and the reserved ball number at that time, and the performance mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area and the above stop pattern table 202e. Then, the group (group) to be referenced in the special chart 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4 is determined based on the selected performance mode. In the group (group) of the special chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation performance held in that holding area.

In the special chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, for "E3: normal reach", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "slow-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation elements + "re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuation factor of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factor of 'low-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'normal reach'", and "3 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factor of 'slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'normal reach' + fluctuation factor of 're-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4, which is referenced when the second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'low-speed variation' variation element + 'normal reach' variation element" is set to be selected 30%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'low-speed variation' variation element + 'normal reach' variation element + 're-variation' variation element" is set to be selected 70% of the time.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol is hit or hit, the variation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "re-fluctuation" variable element is likely to be selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the variation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a big win or small win can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, for "E4: Super Reach", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "70 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 3" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach", and "4 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Super reach" + fluctuation factor of "Re-fluctuation".

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Pattern 2 Big Win/Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f4, which is referenced when the variation presentation of the second special pattern is executed, the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" variation factors" is set to be selected 40%, and the variation pattern of "Fluctuation factors of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" + "Re-variation" variation factors" is set to be selected 60% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a big or small jackpot, the variation pattern "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal Reach' variable element + 'Super Reach' variable element + 'Re-fluctuation' variable element" is likely to be selected (60% of the time). In addition, by configuring the variation pattern "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal Reach' variable element + 'Super Reach' variable element" to be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a big or small jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, for "E5: Special Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are prepared: "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "180 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "190 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in "E5: Special Reach" is "0 to 4" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Special reach", and "5 to 9" for "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "Normal reach" + fluctuation factor of "Special reach" + fluctuation factor of "Re-fluctuation".

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Pattern 2 Big Win/Small Win Presentation Pattern Table 202f4, which is referenced when the second special pattern presentation is executed, the selection ratio is set to 50% for the "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Fluctuation factor of "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" fluctuation factors, and 50% for the "Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Special reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation factors.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a big or small jackpot, the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Special Reach" fluctuation elements and the fluctuation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" + "Super Reach" + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a big or small jackpot can be expected equally with either fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the Special Chart 2 big win/small win fluctuation pattern table 202f4, for "E9: Special fluctuation", two fluctuation patterns are available for selection: "Only the fluctuation elements of 'Special fluctuation'" with a total fluctuation time of "70 seconds" and "Fluctuation elements of 'Special fluctuation' + 'Re-fluctuation' fluctuation elements" with a total fluctuation time of "80 seconds", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 17(b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 4" for "only the fluctuation element of 'special fluctuation'" and "5 to 9" for "the fluctuation element of 'special fluctuation' + the fluctuation element of 're-fluctuation'".

In other words, when the "special variation" presentation mode is selected in the special pattern 2 big win/small win variation pattern table 202f4, which is referenced when the variation presentation of the second special pattern is executed, the variation pattern of "only the variation elements of 'special variation'" is set to be selected 50% of the time, and the variation pattern of "variable elements of 'special variation' and 're-variation'" is set to be selected 50% of the time.

Therefore, in the "special variation" presentation mode selected when the second special symbol hits a big or small win, the variation pattern of "only the variable elements of the 'special variation'" and the variation pattern of "variable elements of the 'special variation' + variable elements of the 're-variation'" are selected equally (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a big or small win can be expected equally with either variation pattern.

Returning to Figure 6, we will continue the explanation. The regular map hit counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and returns to "0" after it reaches a maximum value (i.e. "99"). Also, when the regular map hit counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the regular map hit counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 39).

The value of the regular map hit counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is stored in one of the regular map reserve areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is shifted to the regular map reserve ball execution area 203i in the order in which it was stored in the regular map reserve ball storage area 203h, and a hit determination is made for the value of the regular map hit counter C4 stored in the regular map reserve ball execution area 203i.

The value of the random number that results in a normal symbol winning is set by the normal symbol winning random number table 202i stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, 70/100 in a low probability state, 99/100 in a high probability state, etc.), and a win is determined when the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i of the RAM 203 matches the value of the random number that results in a win set by the normal symbol winning random number table 202i. Then, the normal symbol variable table 202j is referenced according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (for example, 15 seconds when the time-saving function is not activated, 0.1 seconds when the time-saving function is activated, etc.), and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a "○" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (normal symbol). After that, the normal electric role opening table 202k is referenced according to the game status, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is set (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time when the time-saving function is not activated, 5.8 seconds x 1 time when the time-saving function is activated, etc.), and during this opening time, the entrance and exit plate 72a of the normal electric role 72 is opened, during which time the ball can enter the second starting hole 71.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal winning counter C4 stored in the normal winning reserve area does not match the value of the random number that is set as a winning number by the normal winning random number table 202i, it is determined to be a loss. Then, the normal winning variable table 202j is referenced according to the game state to set the variable display time, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, the "X" symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (normal symbol). The normal winning random number table 202i, the normal winning variable table 202j, and the normal electric role opening table 202k will be described later in FIG. 23.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will continue. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (I/O) values, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on at a predetermined time (including the power supply turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 39) when the power supply is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 37) when the power supply is turned on as a game condition. Note that the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 59) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved ball count counter 203a, a second reserved ball count counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a regular reserved ball count counter 203g, a regular reserved ball storage area 203h, a regular reserved ball execution area 203i, a low probability of time-saving flag 203j, a high probability of time-saving flag 203k, a special time-saving 1 counter 203m, a special time-saving 2 counter 203n, a total time-saving counter 203o, a jackpot flag 203p, a rescue counter 203r, and a rescue-set flag 203s.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the first special pattern (the variable presentation of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device, up to a maximum of four times, based on the ball entering the first starting hole 64 detected during a timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds.

This first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning is detected in the first start hole 64 and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S305 in FIG. 41). Meanwhile, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern is executed (see S508 in FIG. 43).

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81) up to a maximum of four times based on the start winning at the second start port 71 detected during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds.

Like the first reserved ball counter 203a, the second reserved ball counter 203b is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning is detected in the second start hole 71 and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern increases, the counter is incremented by 1 up to a maximum value of "4" (see S309 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern is executed (see S505 in FIG. 43).

The value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) or the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command as a game condition (see S312 in FIG. 41). The first reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected in the first start hole 64 and the first reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, and the second reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the second reserved ball number counter 203b in the second start hole 71 is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the reserved ball number itself of the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display (variable performance) of each special pattern without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, by sending the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected in the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71, even if the reserved ball number of the dynamic display (variable performance) of each special pattern managed in the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the reserved ball number of the actual dynamic display (variable performance) reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the next received first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command.

In the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 sends the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command includes not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b that has been incremented by 1, but also the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small jackpot type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 6) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b.

In other words, when a start winning occurs, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small jackpot type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the main control unit 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control unit 113 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command.

The audio lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command before a change performance based on each value is executed, and determines what the change performance will be (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change performance is executed. Then, based on the results of this read-ahead judgment, it is possible to decide whether to execute various performances, and to determine the content and execution time (timing) of the "reserved change notice" performance.

The first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable performance and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. may be sent separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separate from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command may be generated at the timing of the ball entering the first start hole 64 or the second start hole 71, and commands similar to the variable pattern command and stop type command based on the ball entering (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command may be reused to facilitate program creation.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a memory for storing the values of the big win random number counter C1, the small win type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning in the first start hole 64 as the start detection area. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of each counter C1, C3, CK, and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data (counter values C1, C3, CK, and CS1) corresponding to one start winning of the first special pattern can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small jackpot type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning in the second start hole 71. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has won (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of each counter C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data (counter values C1 to C3, CK, and CS1) corresponding to one start winning of the second special pattern can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is a memory for storing data (the values of counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1) to be referenced when starting an execution, or when processing the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol during execution, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the settings for the variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance of the first or second special symbol, it shifts the oldest data corresponding to the start winning among the data corresponding to the start winning (counter values C1-C3, CK, CS1) stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above to this reserved ball execution area 203f in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable performance. Note that in the first embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring again to FIG. 6, the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described in detail. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display and variable presentation settings of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, etc.

As described above, the jackpot lottery for the first or second special pattern, and the dynamic display and variable presentation of the special pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 use a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a small jackpot type counter CK used to determine the small jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and a variable type counter CS1 used to determine the variable pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when the ball enters the first start port 64 (start entry), which serves as the start detection area, and the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when the ball enters the second start port 71 (start entry).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a small win type counter storage area 203d5 that stores the value of the small win type counter CK.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) in the same manner as the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Each of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a small win type counter storage area 203d5 that stores the value of the small win type counter CK, in the same manner as the first reserved ball storage area 203d.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, the variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4, and the small jackpot type counter storage areas 203d5, 203e5 are all stored together in one reserved ball storage area 203d, 203e, but multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores up to four pieces of data (the values of each counter C1, C3, CK, CS1) acquired when a ball enters (start winning) the first start hole 64, which serves as the start detection area. In this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest start winning in the first start hole 64 is stored, and the first reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start winning in the first start hole 64.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e also stores up to four pieces of data (the values of the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1) obtained when a ball enters the second start port 71 (start entry), and in this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1-4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1-4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 71 is stored, and the second reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 71.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. This reserved ball execution area 203f, like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a small win type counter storage area 203f5 that stores the value of the small win type counter CK.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the special symbol variable performance, if data (the values of the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to each of the areas 203f1-203f5 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when it is time to start executing the variable performance, if no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e and data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the MPU 201 shifts the data stored in the first reserved first area to each of the areas 203f1-203f5 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referenced in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 44), and a jackpot lottery is held based on the reference data and the game status, and a fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the special symbol display device 37, which serves as a result notification device, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation presentation of the special pattern based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the special pattern 1 stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If it is determined that data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the big win type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the big win type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4, and the random number value in the small win type counter storage area 203e5 of the second reserved first area is shifted to the small win type counter storage area 203f5.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the second reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e where data is stored (reserved).

Here, the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e will be explained. For example, assume that the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is "4" when the start decision of the variable performance is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this state, when the data of the second reserved 1st area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one less. In other words, the data of the second reserved 2nd area is shifted to the second reserved 1st area, the data of the second reserved 3rd area is shifted to the second reserved 2nd area, and the data of the second reserved 4th area is shifted to the second reserved 3rd area.

For example, if the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second reserved area 2 to the second reserved area 1, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the second reserved areas (3rd to 4th) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, each data in the second holding area (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create a program.

On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the timing for starting execution of the variable performance arrives, the MPU 201 then determines whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If the result of the determination is that data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the variable type counter storage area 203f4, and the random number value in the small win type counter storage area 203d5 of the first reserved first area is shifted to the small win type counter storage area 203f5.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number 1 smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the first reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d where data is stored (reserved).

Here, the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d will be explained. For example, assume that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when the start decision of the variable performance is made, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In this state, when the data of the first reserved 1st area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data of the first reserved 2nd area is shifted to the first reserved 1st area, the data of the first reserved 3rd area is shifted to the first reserved 2nd area, and the data of the first reserved 4th area is shifted to the first reserved 3rd area.

For example, if the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when the decision to start the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the first reserved second area to the first reserved first area, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, each data in the first holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), which makes it easier to create a program.

In this way, data regarding the dynamic display of the first special pattern to be executed and data regarding the dynamic display of the second special pattern to be executed are stored separately, and when data regarding the dynamic display of the second special pattern is stored, the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed as a priority, and when data regarding the dynamic display of the second special pattern is not stored and the dynamic display of the first special pattern is stored, the dynamic display of the first special pattern is executed. By configuring in this way, the dynamic display of the second special pattern is executed as a priority over the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and by performing dynamic display based on each data, it is possible to execute the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the dynamic display of the second special pattern.

Returning to FIG. 5, we will continue the explanation. The regular reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the variable display of regular patterns performed by the regular pattern display device 83 up to a maximum of four times, based on the passage of balls through the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds.

This regular reserved ball counter 203g, like the reserved ball counters 203a and 203b, is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the regular pattern increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S406 in FIG. 42). On the other hand, the regular reserved ball counter 203g is decremented by one each time a variable display of a regular pattern is executed (see S705 in FIG. 56).

The regular reserved ball storage area 203h is a memory for storing the regular winning counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c when the ball passes through the through gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the value of the regular winning counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c and stores it in the regular reserved ball storage area 203h. The regular reserved ball storage area 203h has four reserve areas (regular reserved areas 1 to 4) so that data corresponding to one reserved ball of a regular pattern (value of the regular winning counter C4) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 6).

The regular symbol reserve ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing data (the value of the regular symbol winning counter C4) to be referenced when starting execution or when processing the winning lottery or variable display of a regular symbol that is currently being executed.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts one of the data (the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i in order to execute processes such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Note that in the first embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring again to FIG. 6, the details of the regular reserved ball storage area 203h and the regular reserved ball execution area 203i will be described. The regular reserved ball storage area 203h and the regular reserved ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform processes such as the lottery for winning regular symbols and the setting of the variable display of the regular symbol display device 83.

As described above, the normal symbol winning counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used for the normal symbol winning lottery and for setting the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h stores the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

The regular map reserve ball storage area 203h is made up of four reserve areas (regular map reserve areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserve areas (regular map reserve areas 1 to 4) is provided with a regular map random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the regular map counter C4.

This regular map reserved ball storage area 203h stores up to four pieces of data (the value of the regular map per counter C4) obtained when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and in this case, data is stored in the empty areas of the four reservation areas (regular map reserved areas 1 to 4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 that is older in time is stored, and the regular map reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest ball passing through the through gate 67 in time.

On the other hand, the regular reserved ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. This regular reserved ball execution area 203i is provided with a regular random number counter storage area (not shown) that stores the value of the regular reserved ball counter C4, just like the regular reserved ball storage area 203h.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts the data stored in the first normal symbol reserve area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203h to this normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i.

Then, the data shifted to the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i is referenced in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 56), and based on the reference data and the game status, a winning lottery is performed and the content of the variable display is determined. In the normal symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, it shifts the random number value in the normal symbol hit random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol reserve first area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203h to the normal symbol hit random number counter storage area (not shown) in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area 203i.

When the shifting of data to the regular map reserved ball execution area 203i is completed, the regular map reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the regular map reserved ball storage area 203h to the area (1st to 3rd) with an area number one smaller. Note that in the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the regular map reserved areas (1st to 4th) in which data is stored (reserved) in the regular map reserved ball storage area 203h.

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area in the regular reserved ball storage area 203h. For example, when the start of variable display of regular patterns is determined, the value of the regular reserved ball counter 203g is "4", and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the regular reserved ball storage area 203h. In this state, when the data of the regular reserved area 1 is shifted to the regular reserved ball execution area 203i and the regular reserved area 1 becomes vacant, the MPU 201 shifts the data of the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the areas (1st to 3rd) with area numbers one smaller. In other words, the data of the regular reserved area 2 is shifted to the regular reserved area 1, the data of the regular reserved area 3 is shifted to the regular reserved area 2, and the data of the regular reserved area 4 is shifted to the regular reserved area 3.

For example, if the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g is "2" when a decision is made to start variable display of regular patterns, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the regular reserved second area to the regular reserved first area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the regular reserved areas (third to fourth) in which no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present or not, each data in the general map reservation areas (2nd to 4th) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (reserved) in the general map reservation areas (2nd to 4th), which makes it easier to create programs.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The time-saving low probability flag 203j is a flag for indicating that the state is a "normal pattern low probability time-shortened state" when it is on, and that the state is a low probability state of the normal pattern, while the variable display time of the normal pattern is shortened, and the opening of the normal electric role 72 is prolonged. This time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to off as an initial value when the RAM is cleared when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 37). In the first embodiment, when the rescue setting flag 203s is off (see S5401: No in FIG. 47) and the dynamic display of the special pattern reaches the rescue condition establishment count (in the first embodiment, "800 times") in the low probability state, the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to on to transition to the "normal pattern low probability time-shortened state" (see S5406 in FIG. 47). Thereafter, in the time-saving counting process executed in the variable stop process executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol stops, when the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m described below is no longer greater than "0", when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is no longer greater than "0", or when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0", and the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to ON (see S5310: No in FIG. 46), or at the beginning of the winning process in the event of a jackpot win, it is set to OFF (see S602 in FIG. 48).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving low probability flag 203j as game information is turned on, the special symbol is in a low probability state, and the normal symbol is also in a low probability state, and the normal symbol winning random number table 202i is referenced to draw a winning lottery for the normal symbol, but the normal symbol variable table 202j is referenced to set the variable display time of the normal symbol as the shortened state of the normal symbol, and the normal electric role opening table 202k is referenced to set the extended opening state of the normal electric role 72, and the opening drive of the normal electric role 72 is performed.

The time-saving high probability flag 203k is a flag for indicating that the state is "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" when it is on, that is, that the normal symbol is in a high probability state, that the variable display time of the normal symbol is in a shortened state, and that the normal electric role 72 is in a prolonged opening state. This time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to OFF as an initial value when the RAM is cleared when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 37). Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, at the end of the jackpot, the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to ON regardless of the type of jackpot that was won (see S6601 in FIG. 55). Thereafter, in the time-saving counting process executed in the variable stop process, which is the process when the dynamic display of the special symbols is stopped, when the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m, which will be described later, is no longer greater than "0", when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is no longer greater than "0", or when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is no longer greater than "0", and the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to ON (see S5310: Yes in FIG. 46), or at the beginning of the winning process when a jackpot is won (see S602 in FIG. 48), the flag is set to OFF.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the time-saving high probability flag 203k as game information is turned on, the normal symbol winning random number table 202i is referenced to determine the high probability state of the normal symbol, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variable table 202j is referenced to determine the shortened state of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol opening table 202k is referenced to determine the extended opening state of the normal electric role 72, and the opening drive of the normal electric role 72 is performed.

Next, the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is a counter for determining the end condition 1 of the "time-saving function", and is a counter for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed after the end of a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and for determining the time-saving end condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving end condition depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed is set to be different at the time of a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and when the set number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the "time-saving function" being executed is terminated, and the state transitions from the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state".

The initial value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). In addition, in the winning process, the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m is cleared to "0" as an initialization process at the time of a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 48). Then, in the jackpot end process, regardless of the type of jackpot or the type of small jackpot that was won, the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "7" (see S6604 and S6607 in FIG. 55). In addition, in the low probability state of the special pattern, when the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is established (in the first embodiment, "800 times"), and when the rescue setting flag 203s as the game information described later is not set to on, the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "100" (see S5404 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed once in the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" (see S5302 in FIG. 46).

When the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m becomes "0" (S5303: No in FIG. 46), it is determined that the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the first special pattern is executed is met, and the time-saving high probability flag 203k or the time-saving low probability flag 203j that is on is set to off (see S5311 or S5312 in FIG. 46), and the "time-saving function" is ended.

The value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m may be configured to be subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first special pattern is executed once. When configured in this way, it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met when the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "7").

Next, the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is a counter for determining the end condition 1 of the "time-saving function", and is a counter for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed after the end of a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and for determining the time-saving end condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving end condition depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed is set to be different at the time of a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and when the set number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the "time-saving function" being executed is terminated, and the state transitions from the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state".

The initial value of the special time-saving counter 203n is set to "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). In addition, the value of the special time-saving counter 203n is cleared to "0" during the winning process as an initialization process at the time of a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 48). Then, in the jackpot end process, if the jackpot type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" is won during the "normal game state", the value of the special time-saving counter 203n is set to "1" (see S6608 in FIG. 55), and at the end of the jackpot other than when the jackpot type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" is won during the "normal game state", the value of the special time-saving counter 203n is set to "5" (see S6605 in FIG. 55). In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied ("800 times" in the first embodiment), and when the rescue setting completed flag 203s, which will also be described later, is not set to on, the value of the special symbol 2 time reduction counter 203n is set to "100" (see S5404 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the value of the special symbol 2 time reduction counter 203n is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state" (see S5306 in FIG. 46).

When the value of the special pattern 2 time-saving counter 203n becomes "0" (S5307: No in FIG. 46), it is determined that the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the second special pattern is executed is met, and the time-saving high probability flag 203k or the time-saving low probability flag 203j that is on is set to off (see S5311 or S5312 in FIG. 46), and the "time-saving function" is terminated.

The value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n may be configured to be subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once. When configured in this way, it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met when the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n reaches a predetermined value (for example, "5" or "1").

Next, the total time-saving counter 203o is a counter for determining one of the end conditions of the "time-saving function", and is a counter for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed after the end of a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and for determining the time-saving end condition. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time-saving end condition according to the number of times the special symbol is executed is set to be different at the time of a jackpot and when a rescue condition is met, and when the set number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the "time-saving function" being executed is terminated, and the state transitions from the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" to the "normal game state".

The total time-saving counter 203o is set to an initial value of "0" by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Also, in the winning process, the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is cleared to "0" as an initialization process at the time of a jackpot (see S603 in FIG. 48). Then, in the jackpot end process, if the jackpot type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" is won during the "normal game state", the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "8" (see S6609 in FIG. 55), and at the end of a jackpot other than when the jackpot type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" is won during the "normal game state", the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "12" (see S6606 in FIG. 55). In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the number of times the dynamic display is executed reaches the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied ("800 times" in the first embodiment), and when the rescue setting completed flag 203s, which will also be described later, is not set to on, the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "100" (see S5404 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in the "normal symbol high probability time-saving state" or the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" (see S5304 and S5308 in FIG. 46).

When the value of the total time-saving counter 203o becomes "0" (S5305: No or S5309: No in FIG. 46), it is determined that the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the special pattern is executed is met, and the time-saving high probability flag 203k or the time-saving low probability flag 203j that is on is set to off (see S5311 or S5312 in FIG. 46), and the "time-saving function" is ended.

The value of the total time-saving counter 203o may be configured to be subtracted by 1 each time the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed once. When configured in this way, it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met when the value of the total time-saving counter 203o reaches a predetermined value (for example, "12" or "8").

The jackpot flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not a jackpot state is generated based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d.

This jackpot flag 203p is set to OFF as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g provided in the specific area 65d that can be opened during a small jackpot game, the jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (see S6209 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, in the winning process (see FIG. 48) described later, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (see S608: Yes in FIG. 48), the jackpot flag 203p is set to OFF (see S609 in FIG. 48). After the jackpot flag 203p is set from ON to OFF, a jackpot game according to the jackpot type or the small jackpot type is started.

The rescue counter 203r is a counter for counting whether or not to transition to a "normal low probability time shortening state" based on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (i.e., "800 times") in a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, when the value of the rescue counter 203r as game information reaches the value stored in the rescue condition establishment count storage area 203q, the game state is configured to transition to a "normal low probability time shortening state".

This rescue counter 203r is set to "0" as an initial value during the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, in a low probability state of a special symbol, i.e., in the "normal game state" or the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state", the rescue counter 203r is incremented by one in the rescue achievement counting process as an update process within the fluctuation stop process (S513) each time a dynamic display of a special symbol is executed once as a game condition (see S5402 in FIG. 47). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of this rescue counter 203r reaches the value stored in the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q (i.e., "800 times"), the values of the special chart 1 time-saving counter 203m, the special chart 2 time-saving counter 203n, and the total time-saving counter 203o are set to "100", and the low probability time-saving flag 203j is set to ON (see S5404 and S5406 in FIG. 47), and the state transitions to the "normal chart low probability time-saving state".

On the other hand, even in the "normal game state", if the rescue setting flag 203s described below is on, that is, if the game state is such that the ceiling function has been activated at least once after a jackpot game, the rescue counter 203r is configured not to be updated when the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed (see S5401: Yes in FIG. 47).

Therefore, the rescue counter 203r as game information is configured to be updatable only in a specific game state, i.e., in the "normal game state" when the rescue setting flag 203s is off.

This rescue counter 203r is cleared to "0" at the beginning of the winning process when a jackpot is won (see S603 in FIG. 48). This allows the number of times the rescue condition is met to be reset each time a jackpot occurs, and when a period in which a jackpot is not won in the dynamic display of special symbols reaches a predetermined period after a jackpot game, a "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" can be generated as a rescue measure for the player.

The value of the rescue counter 203r as game information may be updated by subtracting 1 each time the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed once, or by other methods. When the method for updating the value of the rescue counter 203r is subtraction, the rescue counter 203r is set to the value of the rescue condition fulfillment count drawn in the rescue condition fulfillment count drawing process at the time of initial setting of the RAM 203 after power-on and at the end of the jackpot.

Furthermore, the timing for updating the value of the rescue counter 203r does not have to be when the dynamic display of the special pattern is stopped, but may be configured to update the value when the dynamic display of the special pattern starts (see FIG. 44) or when the pattern determination time in the update state ends (see S503 in FIG. 43).

In addition, the timing of transition to the "normal low probability time shortened state" may be determined in advance, such as the end of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the end of the pattern determination time, or the start of the dynamic display of the special pattern that is executed after the value of the rescue counter 203r reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met.

The rescue setting flag 203s is a flag for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the rescue condition establishment count once after a jackpot game. This rescue setting flag 203s is set to OFF as an initial value during the startup process of the pachinko machine 10 (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, when the dynamic display of the special symbol does not transition to the jackpot state a predetermined number of times (i.e., "800 times") in a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, when the value of the rescue counter 203r as game information reaches the value stored in the rescue condition establishment count storage area 203q (i.e., "800 times"), the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON after the jackpot game, assuming that the ceiling function has been activated once (see S5405 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the rescue setting flag 203s is set to OFF at the beginning of the winning process when a jackpot is won (see S602 in FIG. 48).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the rescue setting flag 203s is set to on, that is, if the ceiling function has been activated even once after a jackpot game, the ceiling function is configured not to be activated again, and by referring to the rescue setting flag 203s, the ceiling function that is activated after a jackpot game can be limited to one time.

In addition, when the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON, the rescue counter 203r is configured not to be updated when the dynamic display of a special symbol as a game condition is executed (see S5401: Yes in FIG. 47).

In other words, a game state in which the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON is not a game state in which the rescue counter 203r as game information can be updated, i.e., it is not a "normal game state" in which the rescue setting flag 203s is OFF, and is not a specific game state as an update state.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores a jackpot opening table 202g that is referenced to control the opening of the jackpot opening plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, which is a movable device, when a jackpot is won in the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Now, referring to FIG. 18, the jackpot opening table 202g will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot opening table 202g stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot opening table 202g is referenced when a jackpot of the first or second special symbol occurs, and the opening mode of the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 (number of rounds, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of prizes, number of prize balls) and the game state to which the game transitions after the jackpot ends are specified based on the jackpot type or small prize type that generated the jackpot of each special symbol.

First, the jackpot opening table 202g is divided into opening modes based on the type of jackpot that is won when a jackpot is selected based on the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 (hereinafter, the first start port 64 and the second start port 71 may be collectively referred to as "start ports 64, 71") which is easier to win in each game state, and the type of small win that is won when a small win is selected.

Specifically, the opening manner of the large prize opening opening plate 65a is specified for "normal game state A" which is referenced when the small prize type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" is won in "normal game state A" and for "normal high probability time-saving state/normal low probability time-saving state/normal game state B" which is referenced when the large prize type "time-saving A" or the small prize type "time-saving B", "time-saving C" or "time-saving D" is won in "normal high probability time-saving state", "normal low probability time-saving state" or "normal game state B".

As shown in FIG. 18, in the "normal game state A" of the jackpot opening table 202g, when the small jackpot type "time-saving B" is won and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) is opened for four rounds on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area 65d during the opening of the variable winning device 65 in the first round. The opening time of the jackpot is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". After the jackpot game ends when the small jackpot type "time-saving B" is won in the "normal game state A", the "normal high probability time-saving state A" is configured to be transitioned to. In addition, the OP time when any of the small win types is won on the big win opening table 202g means the time it takes to transition to a big win game (second round) if the ball passes through the specific area 65d in a small win game (first round).

Next, in the "normal game state A" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the small jackpot type "time-saving C" is won and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) is opened for six rounds on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area 65d during the opening of the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, the opening time of the jackpot is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the jackpot game ends when the small jackpot type "time-saving C" is won in the "normal game state A", it is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time-saving state A".

Next, in the "normal game state A" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the small jackpot type "time-saving D" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for nine rounds on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area 65d during the opening of the variable winning device 65 in the first round. Then, the opening time of the jackpot is set to "30 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, in the "normal game state A", after the jackpot game of the small jackpot type "time-saving D" ends, it is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time-saving state B".

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, if the jackpot type "time shortening A" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 as a movable device is repeatedly opened and closed for 10 rounds. Then, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "10 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, in the "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state", or "normal game state B", after the jackpot play of the jackpot type "time shortening A" ends, it is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B".

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the small jackpot type "time shortening B" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for four rounds on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. Then, the opening time of the jackpot is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time of one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". In addition, in the "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal game state B", after the end of the jackpot game of the small jackpot type "time shortening B", it is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B".

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the small jackpot type "time shortening C" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for six rounds on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. Then, the opening time of the jackpot is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". In addition, in the "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state", or "normal game state B", after the end of the jackpot game of the small jackpot type "time shortening C", the game is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B".

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the small jackpot type "time shortening D" is won, and the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) as a movable device is opened for nine rounds on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area 65d while the variable winning device 65 is open in the first round. Then, the opening time of the jackpot is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1 second", and the ED time is set to "30 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". In addition, in the "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state", or "normal game state B", after the end of the jackpot game of the small jackpot type "time shortening D", the game is configured to transition to the "normal high probability time shortening state B".

In this way, in a "casual" state where right-hand play is maintained and jackpots with special symbols occur frequently and consecutively, the OP time, IT time, and ED time for a jackpot of any type are set shorter than the OP time, IT time, and ED time for the first jackpot in the "normal play state", thereby shortening the overall consumption time of jackpots during the "casual" state and shortening the time to reach the next jackpot in the "casual" state. This makes it possible to shorten the time until the next jackpot occurs in the "casual" state, preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to the long time it takes to reach the next jackpot despite being in the "casual" state, while allowing consecutive jackpots to occur early to give the player a sense of exhilaration and increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, by making the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the first jackpot in the "normal game state" longer than the OP time, IT time, and ED time of the jackpot in the "consecutive" state, it becomes possible to execute a wide variety of effects during that time. By configuring it in this way, for example, during the OP time and ED time of the first jackpot, it is possible to execute an effect that explains how to play the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a suggestion of the firing mode, a suggestion to prevent forgetting to remove a card inserted in the card sandwich, an explanation of the future game state, etc.), or a congratulations on the first jackpot from the "normal game state", making it easier for the player to understand how to play the pachinko machine 10, and making the player realize that they have finally won a jackpot, thereby contributing to increasing the player's interest.

The opening manner of the jackpot opening plate 65a at the time of a jackpot based on the type of jackpot (OP time, IT time, ED time, number of times, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning balls, number of winning balls, and transition game state) is not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) may be different for each type of jackpot, the maximum opening time may be changed for each type of jackpot, or the maximum number of winning balls may be changed. By making the number of winning balls different for each type of jackpot won, it is possible to create differences in the game value that is directly awarded according to the type of jackpot won.

In addition, it is not necessary to transition to a different game state for each type of jackpot, and multiple types of jackpots may be configured to transition to a common game state. Furthermore, the OP time and ED time may be configured to be different, or the IT time may be set to a time longer than the OP time or ED time. Also, the minimum opening time for one round may be set to a time shorter than the IT time, OP time, or ED time. Furthermore, at least one of the OP time, IT time, or ED time may be set to the same time for each type of jackpot.

Next, the small win opening table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the small win opening table 202h stored in the ROM 202. The small win opening table 202h is referenced when a small win occurs with the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and the opening mode of the large win opening plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 (number of openings in one round, opening time, interval time, ending time, maximum opening time, maximum number of winning balls, number of winning balls) is specified based on the type of small win when the small win occurs with each special pattern.

This small prize opening table 202h is divided into opening modes based on the game state when a small prize is won, the type of special symbol, and the type of small prize. Specifically, the opening mode of the large prize opening plate 65a is specified for "normal game state A", which is referenced when a small prize is won in "normal game state A", and for "normal high probability time shortening state/normal low probability time shortening state/normal game state B", which is referenced when a small prize is won in "normal high probability time shortening state", "normal low probability time shortening state" or "normal game state B".

As shown in FIG. 19, in the "normal game state A" of the small prize opening table 202h, when the small prize type "small prize A" is won, the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 as a movable device is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds", and the ED time is set to "5 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the small prize play of the small prize type "small prize A" is finished, since the ball has not passed through the specific area 65d, it transitions to the "normal game state A".

Next, in the "normal game state A" of the small prize opening table 202h, if the small prize type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize-winning device 65 as a movable device is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "10 seconds", and the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the small prize game of the small prize type "time-saving B" or "time-saving C" ends, it transitions to the big prize game (4 rounds or 6 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d. In addition, if the ball passes through the specific area 65d when the small win type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won, the time does not transition to the ending time for the small win game, but to the opening time for the big win game ("10 seconds" (see FIG. 18)). Therefore, no ED time is set when the ball passes through the specific area 65d when the small win type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won.

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the small prize opening table 202h, if the small prize type "small prize A" is won, the large prize opening plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 as a movable device is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds", the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds", and the ED time is set to "5 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the small prize play of the small prize type "small prize A" ends, the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, so the game returns to the game state at the time of the small prize win.

Next, in the case of winning the small prize type "Time Shortening B" or "Time Shortening C" in the "Normal High Probability Time Shortening State/Normal Low Probability Time Shortening State/Normal Game State B" of the small prize opening table 202h, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 as a movable device is opened six times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds", and the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the small prize game of the small prize type "Time Shortening B" or "Time Shortening C" ends, it transitions to the large prize game (4 rounds or 6 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d.

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the small prize opening table 202h, if the small prize type "small prize B" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 as a movable device is opened 10 times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds", the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds", and the ED time is set to "5 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the small prize play of the small prize type "small prize B" ends, since the ball has not passed through the specific area 65d, the game state transitions to the game state when the small prize is won.

Next, in the "normal high probability time shortening state, normal low probability time shortening state, normal game state B" of the small prize opening table 202h, if the small prize type "time shortening D" is won, the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 as a movable device is opened 10 times during one round, the OP time is set to "5 seconds", and the IT time is set to "1.2 seconds". In addition, the maximum opening time for one opening is set to "0.1 seconds", the maximum number of winning balls in one round is set to "10 balls", and the number of prize balls paid out based on one winning is set to "10 balls". Then, after the small prize play of the small prize type "time shortening D" ends, it transitions to the big prize play (9 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small prize is won with the dynamic display of the first special pattern (i.e., when the small prize type "small prize A", "time reduction B" or "time reduction C" is won), the number of times that the large prize opening/closing plate 65a opens (i.e., "6 times") is less than the number of times that the large prize opening/closing plate 65a opens (i.e., "10 times") when a small prize is won with the dynamic display of the second special pattern (i.e., when the small prize type "small prize B" or "time reduction D" is won).

As described above, if a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the rescue priority notification period in "normal game state A," the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher when playing using the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

When a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during this rescue priority notification period, a right-hit notification effect (i.e., rescue priority notification effect) that does not strongly suggest right-hit play and does not emphasize the occurrence of a jackpot is performed during the opening time of the small jackpot (see FIG. 89(d)). If the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d during a small jackpot game, the player will temporarily suspend ball shooting and wait for the small jackpot game to end. Therefore, if the opening time when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won is set to a long time, the period during which ball shooting is suspended will also be long, which may cause stress to the player and may lead to a decrease in operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won, the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area 65d by performing a right-hand hit game is set, and even if a right-hand hit game is not performed when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won, the period during which the ball's release is interrupted is not too long.

In addition, if a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period of the "normal game state A" (see FIG. 28), the expected value of balls that can be won by playing using the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won is configured to be higher. And, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period, a right-hit notification performance that strongly suggests right-hit play and emphasizes the occurrence of a jackpot is performed as the first notification mode during the opening time of the small jackpot (see FIG. 89(b)).

In other words, if a player wins a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A," the player will have to decide during the OP time during which the right-hit notification performance is performed whether to use the right-hit play method when a small jackpot is won, or the left-hit play method when a small jackpot is won.

Here, if the OP time when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A" is set to be short (for example, "3 seconds"), even if the right-hit notification effects in each period (big jackpot priority period or rescue priority notification period) are different, the player may not be able to fully recognize the differences in the right-hit notification effects or the suggested contents of each notification effect, and may make the wrong decision on how to play. Also, because the OP time is short, there is a risk that the player will not be able to fully decide whether to play with a right-hit play method when a small jackpot is won, or with a left-hit play method when a small jackpot is won.

For this reason, by setting the OP time when a small win is won on Special Chart 1 in "Normal Game State A" longer (i.e., "10 seconds"), the player can check the right-hit notification effect that is executed during that OP time and determine whether or not to play right during the small win.

In addition, when a small win is won other than when the special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" (i.e., when the small win type "small win B" or "time-saving D" is won in the "normal game state A", or when the small win type "small win A", "time-saving B", "time-saving C", "small win B" or "time-saving D" is won in the "normal chart high probability time-saving state", "normal chart low probability time-saving state" or "normal game state B"), the expected value of the balls that can be won by passing the ball through the specific area 65d during the small win game is configured to be higher, and only the right-hit notification 1 is executed during the small win OP time, so the OP time when the small win is won is set to a uniform "5 seconds".

20 to 22, the opening and closing state of the large prize opening plate 65a by the large prize opening solenoid 65b based on the small prize winning of each special pattern, the ball detection state at the large prize opening switch 65c, the opening and closing state of the specific area opening and closing plate 65e by the specific area solenoid 65f, the ball detection state at the specific area switch 65g, and the setting state of the large prize flag 203p (see FIG. 5) based on the detection of a ball at the specific area switch 65g will be described. FIG. 20 shows the driving pattern of the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f, the detection state of the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, and the setting state of the large prize flag 203p when the small prize type "Time-saving B (small prize A)" or the small prize type "Time-saving C (small prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and is a timing chart when a ball passes through the specific area 65d. FIG. 21 shows the driving pattern of the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f, the detection state of the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, and the setting state of the large prize flag 203p when the small prize type "Time reduction B (small prize A)" or the small prize type "Time reduction C (small prize A)" is won in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and is a timing chart when the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d. Furthermore, FIG. 22 shows the driving pattern of the large prize opening solenoid 65b and the specific area solenoid 65f, the detection state of the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, and the setting state of the large prize flag 203p when the small prize type "Time reduction D (small prize B)" is won in the dynamic display of the second special pattern, and is a timing chart when the ball passes through the specific area 65d.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the "normal game state A", if the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or the small win type "Time-saving C (small win A)", the OP time is set to "10 seconds". Then, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on for "0.1 seconds" six times during one round of small prize play, and the large prize opening opening plate 65a is displaced from a closed state to an open state as a result of this turning on. Then, while the large prize opening opening plate 65a is open, the ball shot in the right hit game flows into the variable prize winning device 65 and is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c.

When a small win is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on immediately after the large prize opening solenoid 65b starts to be turned on, and the specific area opening/closing plate 65e is displaced from a closed state to an open state. Then, even after the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on to allow balls to flow into the specific area 65d, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on multiple times (six times in the first embodiment) to open the large prize opening opening/closing plate 65a, so that the balls that flow into the variable prize device 65 flow down to the specific area 65d. Then, when the ball that has flowed down to the specific area 65d is detected by the specific area switch 65g, the big prize flag 203p is set on in response to the detection, and the game state transitions from a small prize game state to a big prize game state as a granted benefit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21, in the "normal game state A", if the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins the small win type "time reduction B (small win A)" or the small win type "time reduction C (small win A)" and the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 65d, the OP time, the timing of turning on the large prize opening solenoid 65b, and the specific area solenoid 65f will be the same as in FIG. 20. And, if a right-hand hit game is not performed while the large prize opening opening plate 65a is open, the ball does not flow into the variable prize opening device 65 and is not detected by the large prize opening switch 65c and the specific area switch 65g, so the big prize flag 203p remains off, and the game state at the time of winning the small prize is returned to without transitioning to the big prize game state as an updated state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22, in the "time-saving state", if the dynamic display of the second special symbol wins the small prize type "time-saving D (small prize B)", the OP time is set to "5 seconds". Then, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on for "0.1 seconds" 10 times during one round of small prize play, and the large prize opening opening plate 65a is displaced from a closed state to an open state as a result of this turning on. Then, while the large prize opening opening plate 65a is open, the ball shot in the right-hand play flows into the variable prize device 65 and is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c.

When a small win occurs during the dynamic display of this second special symbol, the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on immediately after the large prize opening solenoid 65b starts to be turned on, and the specific area opening/closing plate 65e is displaced from a closed state to an open state. Then, even after the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on to allow balls to flow into the specific area 65d, the large prize opening solenoid 65b is turned on multiple times (10 times in the first embodiment) to open the large prize opening opening plate 65a, so that the balls that flow into the variable prize device 65 flow down to the specific area 65d. Then, when the balls that flow down to the specific area 65d are detected by the specific area switch 65g, the detection causes the large prize flag 203p to be set on.

Next, the details of the normal winning random number table 202i, the normal winning fluctuation table 202j, and the normal electric role release table 202k will be described with reference to Figures 23(a) to 23(c). First, Figure 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the normal winning random number table 202i stored in the ROM 202.

As described above, the normal symbol winning random number table 202i is divided into two types: one for the "normal symbol low probability state" used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of normal symbols (period when it is not in a "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" (including during a jackpot of a special symbol)) in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a "normal symbol high probability time shortening state" in which the probability of a normal symbol winning is higher than in the "normal symbol low probability state". The number of winning random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different between the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state", the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol is changed between the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state".

As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the normal symbol hit counter C4 that will result in a win in the "normal symbol low probability state" is 70, and the values "30 to 99" are specified (set) in the normal symbol hit random number table 202i. In other words, the probability of a normal symbol hit in the "normal symbol low probability state" (i.e., "normal game state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state") is 70/100, and it is set so that a hit is easily derived in the variable display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the number of values of the normal symbol hit counter C4 that will result in a hit in the "normal symbol high probability state" is 99, and the values "1 to 99" are specified (set) in the normal symbol hit random number table 202i. In other words, the probability of a hit with a normal symbol in the "normal symbol high probability state" (i.e., the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state") is 99/100, and it is set so that a hit is almost always derived in the variable display of the normal symbol.

By changing the probability of winning or losing the normal symbol depending on the game state, it is possible to create a difference between a situation in which the normal electric role 72 is easy to open and a situation in which it is more difficult to open than the easy situation. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, by making the situation different depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "normal game state" where left-handed play is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal electric role 72 is difficult to open. Furthermore, even if it is opened, the normal electric role 72 opens only for a short time, so that even if a ball is shot in right-handed play, it is more difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 71 than in the "normal symbol high probability state". Furthermore, the first starting hole 64 is not equipped with a device that assists in winning, such as the normal electric role 72, and furthermore, a through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow area of the ball shot in left-handed play, so that the time-saving function does not make it easier for the ball shot in left-handed play to enter the first starting hole 64. In other words, in the "normal game state", even if a right-handed ball is played, the right-handed ball is unlikely to enter the second starting hole 71, and the ball shot in the left-handed game must also enter the first starting hole 64 without using the time-saving function, and is configured to enter the first starting hole 64 by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. In the "normal game state", it is more preferable to configure it so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the timing when the ball can enter the second starting hole 71 in the "normal game state" by providing multiple types of variable display time of the normal symbol and opening patterns of the normal electric role 72, making it difficult to enter the second starting hole 71. In addition, in the "normal game state", if a right-handed game is played, an error may be notified due to the ball passing through the through gate 67, suggesting to the player and the employees of the game facility that this is a game mode that is not recommended, and thus suppressing the player from playing with the right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23(b), the details of the normal symbol variation table 202j for determining the variable display time of the normal symbol will be described. FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the normal symbol variation table 202j stored in the ROM 202.

The normal symbol variable table 202j is divided into two types: one for the "normal game state" referenced in the "normal game state", and one for the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state/normal symbol low probability time shortened state" referenced in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state". The variable display time of the normal symbol set for the "normal game state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state/normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different in each game state, the time at which the result of the normal symbol win/lose is derived in each game state is changed.

As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols set in the "normal game state" is stipulated in the normal symbol variable table 202j to be "15 seconds." In other words, the time from when the variable display of the normal symbols starts in the "normal game state" to when the stopped symbols are derived is set to be "15 seconds" without fail.

The normal pattern variable display time set in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is stipulated in the normal pattern variable table 202j to be "0.1 seconds". In other words, the time from when the variable display of the normal pattern starts to when the stopped pattern is derived in the "normal pattern high probability time shortening state" or "normal pattern low probability time shortening state" is always set to be "0.1 seconds".

This allows the variable display time of the normal symbols to be changed according to the game state, thereby changing the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric role 72 is opened. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, a win occurs due to the variable display caused by the passing of the through gate 67, and the normal electric role 72 is opened based on the win, and whether or not the ball that passed through the through gate 67 can flow directly into the second start hole 71 can be made to differ depending on the game state. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbols for each game state, the winning mode of one ball into the through gate 67 and the second start hole 71 can be made to differ, and different playability can be created for each game state.

In particular, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, making it easier to win, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is also long, so that while the ball is rolling on the top surface of the normal electric role 72, the normal electric role 72 is in an open (immersed) state, and a ball shot by right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71. In other words, a ball hit from the right in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" is configured to easily enter the second starting hole 71 and difficult to enter the variable winning device 65.

In addition, among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, in the "normal low-probability time-shortened state," it is more difficult to win a prize than in the "normal high-probability time-shortened state," but since the variable display time of the normal symbol is short and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 is also long, it is configured so that a ball shot by right-hand play can enter the second starting hole 71. In other words, a ball shot to the right in the "normal low-probability time-shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to enter the second starting hole 71 and difficult to enter the variable winning device 65.

Next, the normal electric role release table 202k will be described with reference to FIG. 23(c). FIG. 23(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the normal electric role release table 202k stored in the ROM 202. The normal electric role release table 202k is referenced when a normal symbol is hit, and the release (immersion) time and number of times the normal electric role 72 is released are specified based on the game state at the time when the normal symbol is hit.

The normal electric role release table 202k is divided into groups based on the game state in which the normal symbol was drawn. Specifically, the release mode (release time) of the normal electric role 72 is changed for the "normal game state" referred to in "normal game state" and the "normal high probability time shortened state/normal low probability time shortened state" referred to in "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or "normal symbol low probability time shortened state".

As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal gaming state", the number of times that the normal electric role 72 is set to be opened when a normal symbol is won is one, and the opening time is regulated to be "0.1 seconds" by the normal electric role opening table 202k. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "normal gaming state", the normal electric role 72 is set to be opened for "0.1 seconds" x 1 time = "0.1 seconds".

In addition, the normal electric role opening table 202k specifies that the opening time of the normal electric role 72, which is set when a normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", is "5.8 seconds" and the number of openings is one. In other words, when a normal symbol is won in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" or the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state", the normal electric role 72 is configured to be opened for "5.8 seconds" x 1 time = "5.8 seconds".

By changing the opening mode of the normal electric role 72 according to the game state, it is possible to vary the length of time that the normal electric role 72 is open. As a result, when a ball passes through the through gate 67, the game state can vary whether the situation makes it easy for the ball to enter the second start hole 71 because the normal electric role 72 is open for a long period of time, or makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second start hole 71 because the normal electric role 72 is open for a short period of time, creating different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, the normal symbol is in a high probability state, the variable display time is short, and the opening period of the normal electric role 72 is long, so that the ball shot by right-hand play is more likely to enter the second starting hole 71.

In addition, in the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" among the game states in which right-hand play is encouraged, although the normal symbol has a low probability of appearing, the variable display time is short and the opening period of the normal electric role 72 is long, making it easier for the ball launched by right-hand play to enter the second starting hole 71.

Therefore, a ball hit to the right in the "normal high probability time shortening state" or "normal low probability time shortening state" is likely to enter the second starting hole 71, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern is likely to accumulate, so the fluctuation shortening function is likely to operate, and the dynamic display of the second special pattern is likely to be executed efficiently.

In this way, by providing game states that combine high or low probability states of special symbols, high or low probability states of normal symbols, and long or short variable display times and opening times of normal electric roles 72, it is possible to change the playability of each game state, provide a wide variety of games, and increase the interest of the game.

The probability of winning the variable display of the normal pattern and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio is acceptable as long as the probability of winning the normal pattern is easier in the "normal pattern high probability time shortened state" than in the "normal game state", etc. For example, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "normal game state" may be set to about 1/100 so that it is difficult to win, the probability of winning the normal pattern in the "normal pattern high probability time shortened state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2, or a configuration may be made such that a win is not possible in the low probability state of the normal pattern. Also, any time is acceptable as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "normal pattern high probability time shortened state" than in the "normal game state", etc. For example, the variable display time of the normal pattern in the "normal game state" may be set to a long time of "30 seconds" or more (for example, "100 seconds"), or a short time of less than "10 seconds" (for example, "1 second").

In addition, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric role 72 are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, the opening time of the normal electric role 72 may be any opening time as long as the "normal high probability time shortened state" is more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state", etc. For example, the opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal game state" etc. may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), and the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). In addition, the opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal high probability time shortened state" etc. may be a long time of "5.8 seconds" or more (for example, "10 seconds"), or a short time of less than "5.8 seconds" (for example, "1 second"). Furthermore, the number of times of opening of the normal electric role 72 in the "normal high probability time shortened state" etc. may be a large number of times (for example, "5 times") more than "1 time".

Next, the time-saving end condition table 202m will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the time-saving end condition table 202m stored in the ROM 202. The time-saving end condition table 202m is referenced at the end of a jackpot game in which the first special symbol or the second special symbol is dynamically displayed (when the game state transitions) or when a rescue condition is established, and the end conditions of the "time-saving function" that is granted according to the game state at the time the jackpot is won are stipulated for each game state.

The time-saving end condition table 202m in the first embodiment is divided according to the game state. Specifically, the end conditions of the "time-saving function" are set for "normal game state A" which is referenced when a jackpot is won in the "normal game state", for "normal high probability time-saving state/normal low probability time-saving state/normal game state B" which is referenced when a jackpot is won in the "normal high probability time-saving state", "normal low probability time-saving state" or "normal game state B", and for "when a rescue condition is met" which is referenced when a rescue condition is met.

The "time-saving function" of the first embodiment is configured to end when a jackpot game is derived for any of the special symbols, or when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions shown below is met. Specific time-saving end conditions include the "special symbol 1 time-saving count," which indicates the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed after the jackpot ends, the "special symbol 2 time-saving count," which indicates the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed after the jackpot ends, and the "total time-saving count," which indicates the total number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed after the jackpot ends.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, right-hand play is recommended in the "normal low probability time-shortened state" or "normal high probability time-shortened state" in which the "time-shortened function" is active, and since the dynamic display of the second special pattern is likely to be executed by winning the second starting hole 71 by right-hand play, the machine is configured so that the time-shortened end condition based on the "special pattern 2 time-shortened number of times" is likely to be met.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the small win type "Time Shortening B" or "Time Shortening C" is executed in "Normal Game State A", the "Number of Time Shortenings for Special Chart 1" is set to "7 times", the "Number of Time Shortenings for Special Chart 2" is set to "1 time", and the "Total Number of Time Shortenings" is set to "8 times".

Next, when the big win type "Time Shortening A" or the small win type "Time Shortening D" is executed in the "Normal High Probability Time Shortening State", "Normal Low Probability Time Shortening State", or "Normal Game State B", the "Special Time Shortening Count for Special Pattern 1" is set to "7 times", the "Special Time Shortening Count for Special Pattern 2" is set to "5 times", and the "Total Time Shortening Count" is set to "12 times". In the "Normal High Probability Time Shortening State" and "Normal Low Probability Time Shortening State" in this embodiment, right-handed play is recommended, and since it is difficult to win the first starting hole 64, it is configured so that the small win type "Time Shortening B" or "Time Shortening C" based on the dynamic display of the first special pattern is difficult to win.

In addition, when the number of times that the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state" ("800 times" in the first embodiment) is reached, the "normal low probability time reduction state" which is the awarded benefit is set to "100 times", "100 times" for the "special time reduction number 1", "100 times" for the "special time reduction number 2", and "100 times" for the "total time reduction number".

In this way, by setting the time-saving end condition (the number of times of time-saving for special chart 2 is "1 time") when the small jackpot type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won in the "normal game state (mainly "normal game state A")" to a number less than the time-saving end condition (the number of times of time-saving for special chart 2 is "100 times") when the "normal game state A" transitions to the "low probability time-saving state", when the special chart 1 small jackpot is won as a control judgment result in the "normal game state A", a right-hand hit play is performed during the small jackpot play of the first round, and the ball passes through the specific area 65d as a profit-granting condition, generating a jackpot game as a grant value, and transitioning to the "normal high probability time-saving state A" and transitioning to the "normal low probability time-saving state" as a grant benefit when the number of times of rescue conditions are reached as the update end state, it is possible to configure the expected value of the balls that the player can win to be higher in the latter case where the number of times of rescue conditions are reached and transitioning to the "normal low probability time-saving state" is made.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will continue. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (I/O) values, etc. are stored. The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 39) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 37) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 59) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors, including switches (e.g., the large winning port switch 65c, etc.) for detecting balls that have entered each winning port 63, 64, 65, 71, balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the outlet 66, a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, a setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value by being pressed in the "setting change mode", a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in the RAM 203, and a base display device control circuit 402 for controlling the display of the base display device 401 based on drive and control signals from the MPU 201.

Also, the output side of the input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84, the large prize opening solenoid 65b for driving the large prize opening opening plate 65a of the variable prize device 65 to open and close forward around the lower edge of the plate 65a, the normal electric solenoid (not shown) for driving the plate 72a of the normal electric role 72, and other solenoids 209. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and sets the display contents of the base display device 401 as one of the results of the execution of various processes.

The payout control device 111, which controls the awarding of profits, drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 59) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker, not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display modes of the effects performed by the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable effects, the right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won, which will be described later, and the "hold change notice."

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are each connected to the input/output port 225. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and that commands cannot be sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to each other.

The audio and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22 to indicate the end of update, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the back image of the "Super Reach" performance mode, etc., and instructs the display control device 114 to have the third pattern display device 81 display a display based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the display of the third symbol change effect on the third symbol display device 81, the right-hit notification effect when a small win is won (described below), and the "hold change notice" based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and details of the display content of the right-hit notification effect when a small win is won will be described later with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 89, respectively.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 59). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main control device 110 and connected to the input/output port 205. The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the seven-segment displays (see FIG. 2) of the base display device 401 based on drive and control signals from the MPU 201 to provide various displays related to the base value.

The base value is the number (ratio) of balls paid out (awarded) per 100 balls during normal play excluding jackpot and time-saving modes. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each time the number of out balls guided from the play area to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls shot into the play area, in other words, the number of balls used in play; hereafter referred to as the "total number of outs") reaches 60,000, the base value for those 60,000 balls is measured and stored.

The base display device 401 displays the base value (hereinafter referred to as the "real-time base value") measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the base value measured the previous (most recent) time the total number of outs reached 60,000, the base value measured the time before that (the time before last) when the total number of outs reached 60,000, and the base value measured the time before that (the time before last) when the total number of outs reached 60,000, which are switched every specified period (5 seconds in this embodiment). By displaying the base values from multiple past times in addition to the real-time base value, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been any misconduct, and it is also possible to predict to a certain extent the time when such misconduct occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 25, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a small jackpot type table 222c, a stop pattern table 222d, a fluctuation pattern table 222e, and a break-even count table 222f as fixed value data. These tables 222a to 222e are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the small jackpot type table 202c, the stop pattern table 202e, and the fluctuation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute a read-ahead process based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in response to a start winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, and based on the jackpot random number table 222a, jackpot type table 222b, small jackpot type table 222c, stop pattern table 222d and fluctuation pattern table 222e.

Then, this look-ahead process determines what type of effect the pending variable effect that was the subject of the look-ahead process will result in (whether it will be a jackpot, whether it will be a "reach display", etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and controls are performed to determine whether to execute various effects, and to determine the effect content (and execution time (timing)) of the "pending change notice" that changes the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4).

The RAM 223 is provided with at least a special chart 1 change start flag 223a, a special chart 2 change start flag 223b, a sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c, a sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, a second reserved information storage area 223f, an execution information storage area 223g, a sub rescue counter 223i, a sub rescue set flag 223j, and a break-even count storage area 223k.

The special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is a flag that indicates that the variation performance of the first special symbol should start when it is in the ON state. This special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is set to OFF as the initial value when the power is turned ON, and is turned ON when the special symbol 1 stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 63). It is then turned OFF when the variation performance of the first special symbol is set (see S1302 in FIG. 66).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 performs a setting process (see S1306 to S1308 in FIG. 66) for the first special symbol variable performance to execute the variable performance of the first special symbol on standby when the variable performance of the first special symbol on standby exists, in response to the turning on of the special symbol 1 variable performance start flag 223a.

The special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is a flag that indicates that the variation performance of the second special symbol should start when it is in the ON state. This special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b is set to OFF as the initial value when the power is turned ON, and is turned ON when a special symbol 2 stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1255 in FIG. 64). Then, it is turned OFF when the variation performance of the second special symbol is set (see S1310 in FIG. 66).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 performs a setting process (see S1314 to S1316 in FIG. 66) for the variable performance of the second special pattern to execute the variable performance of the second special pattern on standby when the variable performance of the second special pattern on standby exists, in response to the turning on of the special pattern 2 variable start flag 223b.

The sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to a maximum of four reserved balls (waiting times) for the first special pattern variable performance (dynamic display) that can be executed by the third pattern display unit 81 (special pattern display unit 37) and is reserved in the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on a command (reserved ball number command) sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a first reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 in response to a ball entering the first starting hole 64, which adds additional reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect and increments the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the incremented value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 contained in the first reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect reserved in the main control device 110) in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 62).

In addition, when the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is subtracted in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a special pattern 1 change pattern command and a special pattern 1 stop type command corresponding to the first special pattern change presentation transmitted from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the first special pattern change presentation in response to the reception of these commands, subtracts (updates) the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c by 1 (see S1305 in FIG. 66). In this way, the voice lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c according to the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the first reserved ball count counter 203a, so that the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c can be updated in synchronization with the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

The sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to a maximum of four reserved balls (waiting times) for the variable presentation (dynamic display) of the second special pattern that can be executed by the third pattern display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) and is reserved in the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d.

Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a second reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 in response to a ball entering the second starting hole 71, which adds to the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern and increments the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the incremented value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 contained in the second reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110) in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in FIG. 62).

In addition, when the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is subtracted in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a special pattern command and a special stop type command corresponding to the second special pattern variable presentation transmitted from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the variable presentation of the second special pattern in response to the reception of the command, subtracts (updates) the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d by 1 (see S1313 in FIG. 66). In this way, the voice lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d according to the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the second reserved ball count counter 203b, so that the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d can be updated in synchronization with the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d is used to display the reserved patterns and the executed patterns in the third pattern display device 81 in a gaming state in which the variable presentation of each special pattern is encouraged. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d in response to receiving the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 62), and updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d in response to receiving the special pattern 1 variation pattern command and the special pattern 1 stop type command, or the special pattern 2 variation pattern command and the special pattern 2 stop type command (see S1305 or S1313 in FIG. 66). In order to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d corresponding to the special pattern encouraged according to the game state, the display control device 114 transmits the display first reserved ball number command or the display second reserved ball number command.

When the display control device 114 receives the first reserved ball number command for display or the second reserved ball number command for display, it controls the drawing of images so that the reserved patterns corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution pattern indicating the variable performance currently being executed, are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see Figure 4 (b)) of the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c changes its value in synchronization with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d changes its value in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(b)) of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 related to the encouraged special pattern. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls that are reserved for the variable performance of the encouraged special pattern according to the game status.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is an area for storing information for performing the variation effect of the reserved first special symbol, i.e., the values of the big win random number counter C1, small win type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the first special symbol obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the first reserved ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a variable presentation of the first special symbol using the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222e stored in the ROM 222.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is an area for storing information for performing the variable presentation of the reserved second special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 related to the variable presentation of the second special symbol obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon start winning and transmitted by the second reserved ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a variable presentation of the second special symbol using the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The execution information storage area 223g is an area for storing information on the variable presentation of the first or second special pattern being executed by at least the special pattern display device 37 and being executed by the third pattern display device 81 depending on the game status, that is, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, small jackpot type counter CK, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon start winning in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start executing the variable performance of the first or second special symbol, it shifts the information for performing the variable performance (the values of counters C1 to C3, CK, CS1, etc.) stored in the first pending information storage first area of the first pending information storage area 223e or the second pending information storage first area of the second pending information storage area 223f described above to this execution information storage area 223g in order to execute the settings for the variable performance of the first or second special symbol.

The sub-rescue counter 223i, like the rescue counter 203r in the main control device 110, is a counter for counting the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in a low probability state of the special symbol.

This sub-rescue counter 223i is set to "0" at the start of the RAM initial value setting process and the winning process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1010 in FIG. 60 and S1403 in FIG. 69). Then, when a rescue counter command sent from the main control device 110 is received, the corresponding information is stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i (see S1280 in FIG. 65).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", the value of the sub rescue counter 223i at the time of the small win is compared with the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k described below to determine whether the win belongs to a big win priority notification period or a rescue priority notification period, and to determine the content of the right-hit notification performance to be performed during the OP time when the small win is won.

The sub-rescue set flag 223j, like the rescue set flag 203s in the main control device 110, is a flag for determining whether or not the dynamic display of the special symbol has reached the rescue condition establishment count once after a jackpot game.

This sub-rescue setting flag 223j is set to OFF at the start of the RAM initial value setting process and the winning process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1010 in FIG. 60 and S1404 in FIG. 69). Then, when a rescue setting command sent from the main control device 110 is received, the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is set to ON (see S1278 in FIG. 65).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the right-hit notification display process (see FIG. 70) that is performed when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A," the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is determined to determine the content of the right-hit notification display.

For example, if the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is on, the number of times the rescue condition has been met since the previous big win (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power is turned on) has been reached, and the game state cannot transition to the "normal low probability time shortened state." In this case, the expected number of balls that can be won is higher if a right-hit play method is selected when a small win is won, so the right-hit notification performance is configured to strongly suggest right-hit play and emphasize the occurrence of a big win (see Figure 89 (b)).

The break-even count storage area 223k is one of the discrimination conditions for determining the content of the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A", and is an area (memory area) that stores the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that is the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

This break-even number storage area 223k is set to the break-even number (in the first embodiment, "543 times") during the RAM initial value setting process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1021 in FIG. 60).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", the break-even count storage area 223k is referenced (see S1505 in FIG. 70), and compared with the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i, a command for the right-hit notification effect to be executed in the right-hit notification effect of the small win is set (see S1506 or S1509 in FIG. 70).

Now, referring to FIG. 27, the expected number of balls obtained in each state will be described in the case where a jackpot is obtained when a small jackpot type "time-saving B (small jackpot A)" or a small jackpot type "time-saving C (small jackpot A)" is obtained in "normal game state A", and where a jackpot is not obtained in the small jackpot game and the game returns to "normal game state A" and the game dynamically displays the special symbols until the number of times the rescue condition is met. FIG. 27 is a table summarizing the difference in the average number of balls obtained in the case where a small jackpot type "time-saving B (small jackpot A)" or a small jackpot type "time-saving C (small jackpot A)" is obtained in "normal game state A", and the average number of balls obtained in the case where a right-hand play is performed to generate a jackpot when the small jackpot is obtained, and the game is returned to "normal game state A" without performing a right-hand play when the small jackpot is obtained, the game dynamically displays the special symbols again, and the game transitions to the "normal jackpot low probability time-saving state" after the number of times the rescue condition is met.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the break-even number table 222f (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, is set based on the break-even number as a predetermined time calculated from the table in FIG. 27. Then, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal gaming state A", the break-even number table 222f is referenced, the break-even number is compared with the number of spins when the small jackpot is won, and the content of the right-hit notification presentation to be performed during the OP time when the small jackpot is won is determined.

As shown in the case of No. 1 in FIG. 27, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A" and the number of spins (value of sub rescue counter 223i) at the time of winning the small win is "500 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win by the end of the consecutive wins when playing the small win game with a right-handed hit and passing the ball through specific area 65d to win the jackpot is approximately 4000 balls (the average number of balls won in this case is "α").

The end of a winning streak here means that when a small win of type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" is won in "Normal Game State A", right-hand play is started to transition to a big win state, and then the state goes through the "Normal Game State with High Probability Time-saving State (Normal Game State with High Probability Time-saving State A and Normal Game State with High Probability Time-saving State B)" and "Normal Game State B", before returning to "Normal Game State A" again (see Figure 11).

On the other hand, if the right-hand play is not performed when the small win is won and the big win is not generated, the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins when the small win is won is "500 spins", so the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met is "300 spins".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the balls shot in left-handed play are configured to enter the first starting hole 64 at about 6 balls per minute (so-called S1 = 6), so if left-handed play is continued, the time required until the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached (i.e., until the remaining "300 spins" are executed) is about 50 minutes ("Time (minutes) until the number of times the rescue condition is met" column in FIG. 27). Therefore, the number of balls shot in about 50 minutes of left-handed play is about 5,000, and since the base value of the "normal play state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be "30", the number of balls paid out as prize balls during this period is about 1,500. In other words, the number of balls consumed by left-handed play for about 50 minutes (when about 5,000 balls are shot) is about 3,500 ("Number of balls used until the number of times the rescue condition is met" column in FIG. 27).

In addition, when the number of times that the rescue condition is met is reached and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time shortened state," the average number of balls that the player can win by the end of the winning streak will be approximately 7,000 balls (the "average number of balls won when rescue condition is met" column in Figure 27).

Here, the number of balls consumed from when the special 1 small prize is won in the "normal game state A" until the number of times the rescue condition is met without generating a big prize in the small prize is about 3500 balls, so the average number of balls acquired when the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached and the "normal low probability time shortening state" is transitioned from the time of the special 1 small prize winning, is about 3500 balls (the average number of balls acquired in this case is "β") from the "average number of balls acquired when the rescue condition is met (7000) - the number of balls used until the number of times the rescue condition is met (3500)" (the "average number of balls acquired (β)" from the time of winning the small prize A to the end of the consecutive win" column in Figure 27). In addition, the time from the time of the special 1 small prize winning until the number of times the rescue condition is met and the "normal low probability time shortening state" is transitioned to and the consecutive win ends is about 70 minutes (the "average time consumed (minutes) from the time of winning the small prize A to the end of the consecutive win" column in Figure 27).

Therefore, in case No. 1, the average number of balls won by playing with the right hand when a small jackpot is won is about 4,000 (α), and the average number of balls won by playing with the left hand when a small jackpot is won is about 3,500 (β), so the difference in the average number of balls won for 2 (α-β) is about 500 (see the "Difference (α-β)" column in Figure 27).

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins" and a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured so that the average number of balls that the player can win is approximately 500 balls more than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Similarly, in case No. 2, if the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "542 spins" and a small jackpot is won for special symbol 1, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player about 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 3, if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "543 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured so that the average number of balls that the player can win is about 2 less than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 4, if a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured so that the average number of balls that the player can win is approximately 667 fewer balls than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", if the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of winning the small win is within 542 rotations, the right-hand play method at the time of winning the small win is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method at the time of winning the small win.

On the other hand, if the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol when a small jackpot is won is 543 or more, the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A," the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win, "543 rotations," is stored as the break-even number for a predetermined period in the break-even number table 222f described later (see FIG. 28).

Next, the break-even number table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the break-even number table 222f stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the break-even number table 222f is set based on the table of expected balls acquired for each state in FIG. 27. When a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", the voice lamp control device 113 compares the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won with the break-even number specified in the break-even number table 222f, and determines the content of the right-hit notification performance to be executed during the OP time of the small win game.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the first embodiment, the break-even number table 222f has the break-even number set as a predetermined time period to "543 spins," the jackpot priority notification period set to "0 to 542 spins," and the rescue priority notification period set as a specific time period set to "543 to 800 spins."

Therefore, if the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "0 to 542 spins", i.e., if a small win on special symbol 1 is won as a result of the control judgment during the jackpot priority notification period, a jackpot priority notification display is performed as the first notification mode (see FIG. 89(b)). If the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "543 to 800 spins", i.e., if a small win on special symbol 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period as a specific time, a rescue priority notification display is performed as the second notification mode (see FIG. 89(d)).

Here, in conventional pachinko machines, when a small prize type that can generate a big prize game is won (i.e., when a small prize type that allows the ball to pass through a specific area is won), the ball is shot during the small prize game to enter the variable prize device, and the third pattern display device or the like is configured to perform an effect in which the ball is shot toward the variable prize device so that the ball passes through the specific area to generate a big prize game.

However, in the case of such conventional pachinko machines, when a small jackpot is won, only one notification effect is executed in the right-hand hit notification effect, resulting in little variation in gameplay. Also, depending on the gameplay state, there is a risk that the expected number of balls that a player can win may decrease.

Therefore, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", it is possible to determine whether the right-hit play method when a small win is won or the left-hit play method when a small win is won will result in a larger average number of balls by checking the content of the right-hit notification presentation executed during the OP time of the small win game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first pending information storage area 223e, the second pending information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g.

The first pending information storage area 223e has four areas, the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a fluctuation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored, and a small win type counter storage area 223e5 in which the value of the small win type counter CK is stored.

The second pending information storage area 223f, like the first pending information storage area 223e, has four areas, the first to fourth second pending information storage areas. Each of the first to fourth second pending information storage areas includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223f2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a fluctuation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored, and a small win type counter storage area 223f5 in which the value of the small win type counter CK is stored.

Furthermore, the execution information storage area 223g includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently executed first or second special pattern variable performance is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, a variable type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored, and a small jackpot type counter storage area 223g5 in which the value of the small jackpot type counter CK is stored.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the first special symbol or second special symbol variable performance currently being executed. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the first reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances, the first reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the second oldest reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances, the first reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the third oldest reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances, and the first reserved information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable performance that is the fourth oldest reserved in time among the reserved first special symbol variable performances.

The second reserved information storage first area of the second reserved information storage area 223f is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that was reserved first in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special pattern, the second reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that was reserved second oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special pattern, the second reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that was reserved third oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special pattern, and the second reserved information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the second special pattern variable performance that was reserved fourth oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special pattern.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the small jackpot type counter CK, and the variable type counter CS1 from the first reserved ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the extracted values of each counter C1, C3, CK, and CS1 in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, the variable type counter storage area 223e4, and the small jackpot type counter storage area 223e5 of the corresponding first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 that correspond to the reserved ball number included in the first reserved ball number command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball number command is X (1≦X≦4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol reserved at that time is X, and the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command correspond to the variable effects of the first special symbol that were reserved Xth in time among the variable effects of the reserved first special symbol, so the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first reserved information storage Xth area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved Xth area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In other words, the same values as the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first reserved Xth area of the main control device 110 are stored in the first reserved information storage Xth area.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the small jackpot type counter CK, and the variable type counter CS1 from the second reserved ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the extracted values of each counter C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, the variable type counter storage area 223f4, and the small jackpot type counter storage area 223f5 of the corresponding third reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 that correspond to the reserved ball number included in the third reserved ball number command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1≦Y≦4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol reserved at that time is Y, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command correspond to the variable effects of the first special symbol that was reserved Yth in time among the variable effects of the reserved second special symbol, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the first reserved information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main control unit 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved Y area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In other words, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second reserved Y area of the main control unit 110 are stored in the second reserved information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 1 change pattern command and the special pattern 1 stop type command, which indicate the start of the change performance of the first special symbol, from the main control device 110, it executes a process of shifting the information stored in the first pending information storage area 223e to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, if pending information regarding the first special symbol exists, the execution of the change performance of the first special symbol that was reserved first in time is started, and the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage first area corresponding to the change performance of the first special symbol that was reserved first are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the change performance of the first special symbol that is currently being executed.

When the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g, the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage third area.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special pattern 2 change command and the special stop type command, which indicate the start of the second special symbol change performance, from the main control device 110, it executes a process of shifting the information stored in the second reserved information storage area 223f to the execution information storage area 223g. In other words, if there is reserved information regarding the second special symbol, the execution of the change performance of the second special symbol that was reserved first in time is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second reserved information storage first area corresponding to the change performance of the second special symbol that was reserved first are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the change performance of the second special symbol that is currently being executed.

And when the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second pending information storage first area. The values of the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1-C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g stores the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 and the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 and the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, respectively. In other words, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the variable performance of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and being reserved in the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the first reserved information storage area 223e, and the second reserved information storage area 223f.

When the voice lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (not shown), it grasps the number of variable effects of the first or second special symbols reserved from the sub-first reserved ball counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d (reserved ball count). Then, based on the reserved ball count, it reads ahead the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the areas in which the variable effects of the first or second special symbols are reserved among the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, and determines whether or not the variable effects will result in a jackpot, the duration of the change, etc. For example, if the value of the sub-1 reserved ball counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub-2 reserved ball counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable performance is 1 and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable performance is 0, so the values of the counters C1, C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first reserved information storage first area are read ahead and a judgment is made. Also, if the value of the sub-1 reserved ball counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub-2 reserved ball counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable performance is 0 and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable performance is 4, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second reserved information storage fourth area are read ahead and a judgment is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are sent in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 cannot access the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. In contrast, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a first reserved information storage area 223e and a second reserved information storage area 223f, and the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the variable performance of the first special pattern and the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 are also stored in the sound lamp control device 113, so that the sound lamp control device 113 can execute the read-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first reserved information storage area 223e and the second reserved information storage area 223f. In other words, when a variable presentation of the reserved first special symbol and/or second special symbol is executed, the result of the variable presentation (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) can be determined before the variable presentation is executed, and the execution of various presentations can be decided.

The above-mentioned shift process in the first reserved information storage area 223e or the second reserved information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g, moves (shifts) data only for the areas corresponding to the reserved variable performance among the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, based on the number of reserved balls when the special chart 1 variable pattern command and the special chart 1 stop type command or the special chart 2 variable pattern command and the special chart 2 stop type command are received (the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d before the update based on the reception of the special chart 1 variable pattern command and the special chart 1 stop type command or the special chart 2 variable pattern command and the special chart 2 stop type command).

For example, when the special chart 1 variation pattern command and the special chart 1 stop type command are received, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update is "4", and data is stored in all areas of the first reserved information storage area 223e (first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4). In this case, the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, the data in the first reserved information storage area 3 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 2, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 4 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update when the special chart 1 variation pattern command and the special chart 1 stop type command are received is "2", the data of the first reserved information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, and the data of the first reserved information storage second area is shifted to the first reserved information storage first area, and the data shifting is completed. As described above, in this embodiment, the data shifting process is not performed for the first reserved information storage third and fourth areas where no variation performance is reserved, so that the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present, each data in the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4 may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller (execution information storage area 223g or the first pending information storage areas 1 to 3 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 3). In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (pending) in each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 or the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4, making it easier to create programs.

Referring back to Figure 25, the explanation will continue. RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to those commands is performed.

The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 62) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the special pattern change presentation and continuous preview presentation on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation mode of the variation performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 differs for each game state, and the ball launch mode encouraged for each game state is shown to the player. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state A" in which left-handed play is encouraged, the character display "left-handed play" encouraging left-handed play is displayed in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, while each variable pattern composed of Arabic numerals varies by vertical scrolling and is displayed to form only one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. Also, in the "normal high probability time shortening state" or "normal low probability time shortening state" in which right-handed play is encouraged, the main display right-handed play instruction 89 encouraging right-handed play is displayed in the upper right area of the main display area Dm, while each variable pattern composed of Chinese numerals varies by vertical scrolling and is displayed to form one effective line (so-called single line) in the main display area Dm. In this way, by clearly differentiating the display mode of the variable symbols in each game state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game state, while also making it easier for the player to recognize the game mode (firing mode) required to perform the encouraged game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114 receives a command from the voice lamp control device 113 instructing the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113. The output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, program ROM 232, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different probability of winning a jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the program ROM 232 and work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third pattern display device 81 based on commands input from the voice lamp control device 113.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores image data for each sprite, such as the patterns (background patterns and decorative patterns) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is configured with an inexpensive NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a large storage capacity in a small area in order to store a large amount of image data. In the first embodiment, a 2 gigabyte NAND type flash memory 234a is used. This allows a large number of images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to be stored, making it possible to diversify the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and increasing the interest of the game.

The nature of the NAND flash memory 234a is such that bad block data to which data cannot be written occurs. Therefore, the character ROM 234 is provided with a known arbitration circuit 234b (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) that converts data addresses so that data can be read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the bad data blocks. This arbitration circuit 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a inside the character ROM 234 and avoids access to the bad data blocks. This allows the MPU 231 to easily access the character ROM 234 without considering the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 36) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the first embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 as a game condition every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image, and also executes display processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing and display processing of an image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are connected to image controller 237, and image data required for image drawing by image controller 237 is read from character ROM 234 by MPU 231 before drawing, and transferred to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. At this time, whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 (and further, to which address to store) is determined by MPU 231 according to the contents of the image, based on a program or table stored in program ROM 232.

Furthermore, when the image controller 237 draws an image, it does not use image data from the character ROM 234, but instead uses image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to perform the image drawing process. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the image controller 237 draws the image using image data that has been stored in advance in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234, so that image drawing can be performed immediately without being affected by the slow read speed of the character ROM 234. Therefore, the desired image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the desired time.

Here, while the NAND flash memory 234a makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the initial setting process (main process (see FIG. 71)) when the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing process while using image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident (not expanded) in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image, but when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

Whether image data required for image controller 237 to draw an image is stored in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 (and further, at what address it is stored) is determined by MPU 231 according to the contents of the image based on a program or table stored in program ROM 232, and when instructing image controller 237 to draw an image, it also instructs where the required image data is stored (either in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, and at what address). Based on instructions from MPU 231, image controller 237 reads the required image data from a specified address in resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. This allows image controller 237 to concentrate on drawing the image.

In addition, when the image controller 237 receives an instruction to draw an image from the MPU 231, it may be configured to determine the storage destination (whether it is stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and at what address) of the data of the image required for drawing from the type of image required for drawing. In this case, when the MPU 231 stores image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 may determine the type of image displayed by the stored image data (or the address of the character ROM 234 where the corresponding image data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data based on a control signal from the MPU 231, and store the type of image (or the address of the character ROM 234 where the corresponding image data is stored) and the storage destination of the image data in a RAM (not shown) provided in the image controller 237 in association with each other. Then, the image controller 237 may determine the storage destination of the image data required for the image based on the information stored in the RAM. The image controller 237 determines where to store the image data, thereby reducing the processing load on the MPU 231.

The image controller 237 is provided with a buffer RAM 237a. This buffer RAM 237a functions as a buffer memory for transferring data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, and is configured with a static RAM (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM") having a storage capacity (e.g., 132 kilobytes) equivalent to one block of the NAND type flash memory 234a provided in the character ROM 234, and is configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 transfers an image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, it reads one block of data from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not being used.

If the buffer RAM 237a is not provided and image data is transferred directly from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the read speed of the character ROM 234 is slow because it is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a. Therefore, while transferring image data of the desired size, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, which is composed of a dynamic RAM (Dynamic RAM, hereinafter referred to as "DRAM") with one input/output port (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "one-port type"), will have that one port occupied by the image data transfer from the character ROM 234, and will not be able to access other data for a long time. As a result, the image controller 237 will not be able to read image data from the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 to draw an image or transfer drawn image data to the third pattern display device 81, and image display on the third pattern display device 81 may be delayed. Furthermore, even if multi-port type (type with multiple input/output ports) DRAM is used for the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, there is a risk that the control using the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 in the image controller 237 will be restricted, and that control may become complicated.

In contrast, this pachinko machine 10 has a buffer RAM 237a configured from a high-speed SRAM in the image controller 237, so that image data that is read out over a long period of time from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred in a short time from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, while image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of that image data.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specific address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short period of time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long period of time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the time when the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

As mentioned above, the resident video RAM 235 is composed of a single-port DRAM, and is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Data corresponding to the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, data corresponding to images that are frequently displayed, and data corresponding to images that should be displayed immediately among images determined to be displayed by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) are transferred from the character ROM 234 and made resident in this resident video RAM 235.

The resident video RAM 235 is provided with at least a power-on main image area 235a, a power-on variable image area 235b, a rear image area 235c, a third design area 235d, a character design area 235e, an error message image area 235f, a reserved design area 235g, a cockpit image area 235h, a secondary display image area 235i, and a text design area 235j.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 (see FIG. 30) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the display control device 114 is performing the initialization process at power-on. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 (see FIG. 30(b) and FIG. 30(c)) which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 first transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a, and to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b (see S2002 and S2003 in FIG. 71).

Now, referring to Figure 30, the power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283 will be described. Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram explaining the power-on image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a, and then transfers image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image 282 shown in FIG. 30(a).

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, which are the instruction commands to start the variation, from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 alternately displays the power-on stop image 283a with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image 282 as shown in FIG. 30(b), and the power-on stop image 283b with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern as shown in FIG. 30(c) during the period of the variation performance. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, and if it is a "jackpot display", the power-on stop image 283a shown in FIG. 30(b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops, and if it is a "loss display", the power-on stop image 283b shown in FIG. 30(c) is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image 282 using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and arcade personnel to check the power-on main image 282 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Thus, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, players and arcade personnel can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and can therefore wait until the initialization process is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 10 during its manufacture, the main image 282 is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64, the power-on variable image 283 is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to display the images shown in Figures 30(b) and 30(c) alternately on the third pattern display device 81. Thus, a simple variable presentation can be performed using the power-on variable image 283. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variable image 283 are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if a momentary power outage occurs and the data resident in the resident video RAM 235 remains, when power is restored, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variable image 283 can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data resident in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b.

Returning to FIG. 29, we continue the explanation. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be explained. FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 31(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "town stage", FIG. 31(b) showing rear B corresponding to the "sky stage", and FIG. 32 showing rear C corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 31, the back images corresponding to the backs A to C are prepared in the character ROM 234 and are horizontally longer than the display area displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right so that the back image is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as a display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as a display area in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled in a smooth connection in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage, the MPU 231 first sets the area between positions a and a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches an image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Thus, the images between positions a and c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left, in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, the rear image on rear side C is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 over time in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... in FIG. 32. Specifically, on rear side C, an image of a mountain towering over an island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the player's operation of the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 32(a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 32(a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 32(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 32(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 32(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 32(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually starts to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, the display returns to the rear image shown in FIG. 32(a), and the rear images of FIG. 32(a) to (c) are displayed again in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 31(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the city stage, which is displayed frequently, resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(b), for rear side B corresponding to the empty stage, only image data corresponding to a portion of that rear side, i.e., the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For rear side C corresponding to the island stage, image data corresponding to the rear side images between FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b), including FIG. 32(a) and excluding FIG. 32(b), is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on and remains resident.

The operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change stages is performed at any timing based on the player's will. Therefore, in order to instantly change the rear image when the frame button 22 is operated at any timing, it would be ideal to keep the full range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, doing so would require a RAM with a very large capacity to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' or the range of Figures 32(a) to 32(b), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including that initial position or the image between Figures 32(a) to 32(b) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the player operating the frame button 22, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be used to instantly display the initial position of rear B or rear C in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and can also be displayed while scrolling or changing color over time. In addition, for rear side B and rear side C, only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored, so the increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and increases in costs can be suppressed.

In addition, the range from position a to position b of the rear side B is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the rear side image stored in the normal video RAM 236 and displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear C, the range of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) is set so that after the image in the initial position is displayed, the transfer from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be completed while the image of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) is being displayed using image data resident in the rear image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. This allows image data corresponding to the images of Figures 32(b) to 32(c) and Figures 32(c) to 32(a) to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the images of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) are being displayed, so that after the images of Figures 32(a) to 32(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images of Figures 32(b) to 32(c) and Figures 32(c) to 32(a) can be displayed sequentially over time in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, for rear side B and rear side C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area (not shown) dedicated to rear side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 29) of the normal video RAM 236 described below. This prevents the rear side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear side images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear side images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on the back side B, the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the back side image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

The MPU 231 then controls the image controller 237 to use the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to display the image between positions c and d as the display area on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 then controls the image controller 237 to use the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to display the image between positions a and a' as the display area on the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the image between positions a and c to be displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth flow as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 29, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to a total of 11 main patterns (see FIG. 4), including the above-mentioned 10 main patterns numbered "0" to "9" as the third pattern and one main pattern with the word "challenge pattern" written on it. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, as main patterns without numbers from "0" to "9", main patterns consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, main patterns consisting of a rear pattern and additional patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, and image data corresponding to a main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it are also resident. A part of these image data is used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state as an update state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. As a result, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to draw a predetermined image in the image controller 237 by reading image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, rather than newly reading corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. As a result, since there is no need to read corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs within the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The reserved pattern area 235g is an area for storing data related to the display mode of the initial setting (default setting) of the execution pattern and reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81. That is, image data corresponding to the "white" "circle" pattern, which is the display mode of the initial setting (default setting) of the execution pattern and reserved pattern, is stored in the reserved pattern area 235g. As a result, when the execution pattern and reserved pattern are displayed in the execution pattern display area Db0 or the reserved pattern display areas Db1 to Db4 of the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that the execution pattern or reserved pattern can be quickly displayed in the third pattern display device 81 even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234. This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which multiple balls enter the first ball entrance 64, and the reserved pattern is displayed on the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, but the reserved pattern (executed pattern) is not displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81.

The cockpit image area 235h is an area for storing image data corresponding to the cockpit image displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81. In other words, image data corresponding to cockpit images other than the execution pattern and the reserved pattern displayed in the cockpit display area Db is stored in the cockpit image area 235h. As a result, when performing a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data corresponding to the cockpit display area Db from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if a NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the cockpit display area Db can be displayed quickly in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even if the cockpit display area Db continues to be displayed during the variable performance, or if the cockpit display area Db is redisplayed after executing the variable elements of the "Super Reach" or the "Special Reach", the cockpit display area Db can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h.

The cockpit display area Db is configured to be always displayed fixedly at a certain position (lower part of the display area) in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, even if the rear image of the main display area Dm is scrolled, unless the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is executed. Therefore, the cockpit display area Db is a display object that is displayed more frequently than a specific third pattern or a specific rear image. Therefore, by providing a cockpit image area 235h for the cockpit display area Db in the resident video RAM 235 and configuring the display control based on the cockpit image stored in the cockpit image area 235h, it is possible to display the cockpit display area Db, which is displayed more frequently, more smoothly than when it is directly read from the NAND flash memory 234a.

The sub-display image area 235i is an area for storing image data corresponding to each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data corresponding to the sub-display area Ds from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the sub-display area Ds can be displayed quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, even if the sub-display area Ds continues to be displayed during a variable performance or the sub-display area Ds is redisplayed after a "reach display" is performed, the sub-display area Ds can be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81 by reading the image data corresponding to the sub-display area Ds stored in the sub-display image area 235i.

In addition, the sub-display area Ds, like the cockpit display area Db, is configured to be always displayed fixedly at a certain position (upper part of the display area) in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, even if the back image of the main display area Dm is scrolled, unless the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is executed. Therefore, like the cockpit display area Db, the sub-display area Ds is a display object that is displayed more frequently than a specific third pattern or a specific back image. Therefore, by providing a sub-display image area 235i for the sub-display area Ds in the resident video RAM 235 and configuring the display control based on the image data corresponding to the sub-display area Ds stored in the sub-display image area 235i, it is possible to display the sub-display area Ds, which is displayed frequently, more smoothly than when it is directly read from the NAND flash memory 234a.

The character pattern area 235j is an area that stores image data corresponding to the initial setting (default setting) of the reach occurrence character display Se1 that is displayed when a "reach display" occurs in the variable presentation. That is, data related to the normal display color of the character display Se1, "white," and the character pattern of the "weak pattern" is stored in this character pattern area 235j. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when any of the "reach displays" are executed, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the character display Se1 corresponding to that "reach display."

Here, the display mode of the character display Se1 is determined by various counters 223g, etc. at the start of the variable performance, and the character display Se1 is required to be displayed promptly in the variable performance based on that determination.

In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to the initial setting (default setting) of the character display Se1 is pre-resident in the character pattern area 235j. Therefore, the display control device 114 can instantly draw the character display Se1 in the image controller 237 by reading image data corresponding to the character display Se1 pre-resident in the character pattern area 235j of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received display variation pattern command and display stop type command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the character display Se1 from the character ROM 234, so even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character display Se1 can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading image data corresponding to the character display Se1 stored in the character pattern area 235j.

The initial setting (default setting) of the character display Se1 is the display mode that appears most frequently. Therefore, by storing the character display Se1 that appears most frequently in the character design area 235j, the processing load of the display control related to the character display Se1 can be reduced.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is composed of a single-port DRAM. The normal video RAM 236 is used to temporarily store image data previously read out from the character ROM 234 when the image controller 237 uses image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. This normal video RAM 236 is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a number of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231, and has at least a data table storage area 232a.

The data table storage area 232a is an area that stores a display data table 232a1 as game information describing the display contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for one performance based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113), an additional data table 232a2 describing the display contents to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is added to one performance based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113), and a transfer data table 232a3 that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one performance displayed by the display data table 232a1.

The display data table 232a1 is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113). For example, display data tables 232a1 corresponding to a variable performance, a demo performance, a confirmed display performance, and a restart performance are prepared.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the variable effect 1 stopped, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The confirmation display effect is an effect that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the stopping pattern is confirmed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the variable effect. For example, if the stopping pattern is a losing pattern, an effect that emphasizes the "losing display" is displayed, if the stopping pattern is the big win type "time-saving A", an effect that emphasizes the "big win display" is displayed, and if the stopping pattern is any of the small win types "small win A", "time-saving B", "time-saving C", "small win B" or "time-saving D", an effect that emphasizes the respective "small win display" is displayed. By visually checking this confirmation display effect, the player can easily determine the game value that is awarded depending on the content of the stopping pattern.

The restart effect is an effect in which an image of the third pattern vibrating is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113) is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the third pattern was stopped and displayed following the end of the variable effect. When the player visually confirms that the third pattern is vibrating and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable third pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the stopped pattern has not been confirmed at that point.

The data table storage area 232a stores one display data table 232a1 each corresponding to a demo performance, a confirmed display performance, and a restart performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the display data table 232a1 for variable performance is prepared with one table for each variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Furthermore, the variable display data table 232a1 also includes a default variable display data table 232a1, which is a variable performance that is clearly different from the normal variable performance, and is used when the variable performance pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 does not match the stop pattern to be displayed when the variable performance is stopped, for example, when the variable performance pattern is a winning variable performance pattern and a losing stop pattern is instructed by the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). This default variable displays the third pattern at high speed until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and confirms a special stop pattern (for example, a pattern displayed as "9", "8", and "7" in order from the left column) that indicates a loss as the stop pattern in accordance with the reception of the confirmation command.

If the variable performance pattern instructed by the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 does not match the stopping pattern that should be displayed when the variable performance stops, the display control unit 114 may not be able to correctly reflect the results of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 and perform the variable performance or the final display performance.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a default variation effect is performed, and after the variation effect, a special stopping pattern indicating a special miss is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a confirmed display. This prevents the third pattern display device 81 from mistakenly displaying a confirmed big win or small win even if the result of the lottery in the main control device 110 is a miss.

In addition, even if the third symbol display device 81 displays a confirmed special stop symbol, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big win or a small win, the game state in the actual pachinko machine 10 will transition to a big win or small win state, so the player can continue playing with peace of mind.

Furthermore, by making the confirmation display a special stop pattern, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big win or small win state even if the confirmation display is a miss, so that the player is not made to feel uneasy by the pachinko machine 10 being in a big win or small win state even though the confirmation display is a miss.

Now, with reference to FIG. 33, the details of the display data table 232a1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the variable display data table 232a1 from the display data table 232a1. The display data table 232a1 corresponds to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit, and specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of an image to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table 232a1, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one back image, one cockpit image, eleven third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express light shining through the images, characters (character 1, character 2, ...) used for various effects such as boy images and characters, and character patterns (character pattern 1, character pattern 2, ...) such as character display Se1 when a reach occurs. One or more pieces of information regarding effects, characters, and character patterns are specified according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the character display Se1 that appears in the "reach display" is configured so that the display color of the character display Se1 is "white" as the initial setting (default setting) display mode, and the character pattern of the character display Se1 when the reach occurs is "weak pattern". Therefore, even if the lottery process for the chance-up pattern of the character display Se1 is not performed properly, the character display Se1 can be displayed in the initial setting display mode. Therefore, even if an error occurs in the lottery process of the character display Se1, the character display Se1 can be displayed. In addition, by displaying the initial setting display mode of the character display Se1 in the display color "white" which has the lowest advantageous suggestion degree, and the character pattern of the "weak pattern", it is possible to configure so that the expectation of a jackpot is not excessively increased even in the variable performance of a miss. Therefore, even if the lottery process for the character display Se1 is not performed properly due to an error or other reason, the display is configured not to raise the player's expectations, and the player can enjoy a comfortable game without feeling distrustful.

The initial setting for the display mode of the character display Se1 may be configured to not display the character display Se1. By not displaying the character display Se1 when the lottery process for the character display Se1 is not performed properly due to an error or the like, it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable gameplay without excessively raising their expectations for a jackpot or causing distrust, etc.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table 232a1 specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type specifies whether to display one of rears A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to C. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A to C is to be displayed, the rear type also specifies which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the backs A to C is to be displayed based on the back type, it determines the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among backs A to C as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back image different from backs A to C is to be displayed, it determines the back image to be displayed from the back type.

In this embodiment, the display data table 232a1 describes a case in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image. Alternatively, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table 232a1 was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display data table 232a1 and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, which is indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) started, or, together with the type of back surface and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table 232a1 (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) started) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

The display position of the cockpit image is fixed at the center of the bottom of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so in the variable display data table 232a1, just like the rear image, only the cockpit type, which is information for specifying the type of cockpit image, is specified. This cockpit type contains information specifying whether to continue to display the cockpit display area Db during the variable performance, or to erase the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the variable element of the "Super Reach" or the variable element of the "Special Reach".

When the cockpit type specifies that the cockpit display area Db is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db as the drawing target. On the other hand, when the cockpit type specifies that the cockpit display area Db is not to be displayed (erased), the MPU 231 specifies that the cockpit image corresponding to the cockpit display area Db is not to be drawn.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

Since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. During that time, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player can be prevented from noticing the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the variable display data table 232a1, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the variable display data table 232a1 ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 35) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address "02F0H" containing the "End" information, drawing contents corresponding to the presentation to be specified in that variable display data table 232a1 are contained.

The MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113, reads it out from the data table storage area 232a, and stores it in the display data table buffer 233b of the work RAM 233 described later, while initializing the pointer 233e described later to "0". Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233e is incremented by 1 by an update process, and the next image content to be drawn is specified based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, creating a drawing list (see FIG. 36) as game information described later, and issuing a drawing instruction for the image by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table 232a1 according to the update of the pointer 233e, so that the image as specified in the display data table 232a1 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 does not change the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, but rather the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed by simply performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases. This limits the processing power of the display control device 114, and there is a risk that the variety of controllable performance images will be limited.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table 232a1 with the display data table buffer 233b as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capabilities of the display control device 114.

The reason why a display data table 232a1 is prepared in this way for each effect, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set display data table 232a1 is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery that is performed based on the start winning.

In contrast, in gaming machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machine 10, the display content changes from one moment to the next based on the user's operation, making it impossible to predict the display content, and therefore it is not possible to provide a display data table 232a1 corresponding to each effect as described above. In this way, the configuration in which a display data table 232a1 is prepared corresponding to each effect, a display data table buffer 233b is set according to the effect to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set display data table 232a1 can only be realized based on the pachinko machine 10 being configured to determine in advance the effects to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the results of a lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the additional data table 232a2 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the additional data table 232a2. The additional data table 232a2 describes the display contents to be displayed over time for the performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in addition to the first performance based on a command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113). Here, "adding to one performance" means changing the display contents of one performance based on a command from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), and includes the concept of, for example, displaying an image that is not normally displayed in one performance and displaying another performance superimposed on the first performance, changing the color tone of part or all of the first performance, or changing the image displayed in the first performance.

In other words, the additional data table 232a2 pre-determines the drawing content required to add and display an image that is not normally displayed to one performance displayed by the display data table 232a1 selected based on a command from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113), the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one performance, and the drawing content required to change and display an image that is displayed as the initial setting (default setting) in one performance.

In this embodiment, the case will be described where the display content for displaying the change pattern to be additionally displayed for the "reach display" of the change performance displayed by the change display data table 232a1 selected based on the change pattern command (display change pattern command) from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113) is specified by the additional data table 232a2.

That is, the additional data table 232a2 is prepared in accordance with, for example, a change pattern such as the character pattern of the character display Se1 in the "reach display" of the variable performance, and specifically, a plurality of additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to the change patterns of the character display Se1 are stored in the data table storage area 232a.

In the first embodiment, the reach occurrence character display Se1 is configured to be capable of displaying two types of display modes: a "weak pattern" and a "strong pattern." Specifically, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 "weak pattern" is selected, a character pattern saying "Let's go!" is displayed. Also, when the reach occurrence character display Se1 "strong pattern" is selected, a character pattern saying "We can do it!", which is more optimistic than the "weak pattern," is displayed.

The reach occurrence character display Se1 is configured so that the displayed character color (display color) can be changed. Specifically, the reach occurrence character display Se1 displays characters in "white" as its normal display color. Also, the reach occurrence character display Se1 displays characters in "red" as its display color for a chance-up pattern with a higher chance of winning than the normal display color.

In this additional data table 232a2, the contents (drawing contents) of one frame's worth of image to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1 are specified in detail. The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object to be additionally displayed in one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the type of sprite.

For example, in the example of additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 34, the sprite type (character type, character type), display position, magnification rate, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified for one character (character 1) and one character design (character design 1) in association with the address "01F4H" specified in display data table 232a1. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be added at the time indicated by the address specified in display data table 232a1, Null data is specified in additional data table 232a2, which means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address (address "0001H" in FIG. 34).

The first address of the additional data table 232a2, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table 232a1, and the last address of the additional data table 232a2 ("02EFH" in the example of FIG. 34) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address "02EFH" containing the "End" information, drawing contents corresponding to the effects to be specified in the additional data table 232a2 are contained.

The additional data table 232a2 shown in FIG. 34 is an example of a table that corresponds to the change pattern of the variable presentation, which is the "normal reach only" variable pattern, and is set to a time corresponding to the variable time of the "normal reach only" variable presentation, i.e., a 15-second variable time. Specifically, "01F4H" is set as an address corresponding to 10 seconds from the start of the variable presentation, which is the start of the variable element of the "normal reach", and the change pattern (e.g., character pattern) between the display mode (e.g., change in hair color) of the character design displayed in the small central area Ds2 at the start of the variable element of the "normal reach" and the character display Se1 at the time of the reach occurrence emitted from the character design is set.

When the MPU 231 receives a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113, it reads out the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the change pattern of the variation performance indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command from the data table storage area 232a, and stores it in the additional data table buffer 233c of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is identified from one display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and one or more additional data tables 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the image content to be drawn next is identified to create a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later. Note that if the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the drawing list is configured to be created only from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

For example, in the example of FIG. 34, when pointer 233e is "0001H", null data is specified at address "0001H" in additional data table 232a2, so it is determined that no display object to be added exists, and a drawing list is generated based on the various sprites specified at address "0001H" in display data table 232a1. On the other hand, when pointer 233e becomes "01F4H", MPU 231 creates a drawing list by adding the sprites of character 1 and character design 1 specified at address "01F4H" in additional data table 232a2 to the various sprites specified at address "01F4H" in display data table 232a1, and instructs image controller 237 to draw the images.

Then, the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table 232a1 according to the update of the pointer 233e, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table 232a2 are added, so that the image specified in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, when the display control device 114 is to display another effect image (for example, a "strong pattern" image of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs) in addition to the effect image (for example, a variable effect image) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command (for example, a display variable pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the other effect image to be added and displayed can be set in the additional data table buffer 233c, so that the other effect image can be easily added and displayed in addition to the base effect image.

Therefore, for example, in a case where there are 32 types of original effect images and 5 types of other effect images to be added and displayed, if a separate display data table that specifies an image in which the other effect images are superimposed on each original effect image is prepared, 32 x 5 = 160 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, by separately specifying the data table corresponding to the other effect images as the additional data table 232a2 as in this pachinko machine 10, it is only necessary to prepare 32 + 5 = 37 types of display data tables 232a1 and additional data tables 232a2, and the increase in capacity of the data table storage area 232a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables 232a1 and 232a2 corresponding to various types of effects within the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 232a, and it is easy to further diversify the effect images.

In addition, by defining the other effect images to be added and displayed as the additional data table 232a2 as in this pachinko machine 10, even if it is decided to display the other effect images to be added after the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the original effect image is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed by simply setting the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the other effect image in the additional data table buffer 233c without changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Furthermore, since the additional data table 232a2 is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e can be easily identified from the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 set in the additional data table buffer 233c while updating the pointer 233e every time, and one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily generated from these. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on commands from the main control device 110, a wide variety of effects can be easily displayed by specifying the display contents of the effects to be additionally displayed in the additional data table 232a2 from the small number of data tables 232a1 and 232a2.

Next, the details of the transfer data table 232a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the transfer data table 232a3. The transfer data table 232a3 is prepared in correspondence with the display data table 232a1 prepared for each performance. In other words, the transfer data table 232a3 specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table 232a1 that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table 232a1 is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is not prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 232a.

The transfer data table 232a3 stores transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table 232a1 (addresses "0001H" and "01F4H" in FIG. 35 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table 232a1, and the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table 232a3 in association with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1, Null data is specified in the transfer data table 232a3, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table 232a1 (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 35).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table 232a3, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table 232a1, and the last address of the transfer data table 232a3 ("02EFH" in the example of FIG. 35) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address "02EFH" containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table 232a3 is contained.

When the MPU 231 selects the display data table 232a1 to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113, if a transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 exists, the MPU 231 reads out the transfer data table 232a3 from the data table storage area 232a and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233d of the work RAM 233 described later.

Then, each time the pointer 233e is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is identified from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described below is created. At the same time, transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when pointer 233e is "0001H" or "01F4H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in transfer data table 232a3 to the drawing list created based on display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233e is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in transfer data table 232a3, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data from which transfer should be started, and the transfer data information is not added to the created drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a provided in the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to the specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the specific sprite begins according to the display data table 232a1. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a specific sprite according to the display data table 232a1, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table 232a1.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Also, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the sound lamp control device 113, and at the same time, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Furthermore, the transfer data table 232a3 specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. And by controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table 232a3 has the same data structure as the display data table 232a1, and specifies transfer data information for image data to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table 232a1. Therefore, the timing of the transfer start can be specified so that the image data of a specific sprite is reliably stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to Figure 29 for further explanation, the work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. This work RAM 233 has at least a simple image display flag 233a, a display data table buffer 233b, an additional data table buffer 233c, a transfer data table buffer 233d, a pointer 233e, a drawing list area 233f, a time counter 233g, a stored image discrimination flag 233h, a drawing target buffer flag 233i, a character pattern memory 233j, and a red character flag 233k.

The simple image display flag 233a is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 should display the power-on image (power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283) shown in Fig. 30(a) to Fig. 30(c). This simple image display flag 233a is set to ON in response to an instruction to the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image 282 in order to display the power-on main image 282 on the third pattern display device 81 during the initialization process of the main process (see Fig. 71) executed by the MPU 231 after power is turned on (see S2004 in Fig. 71). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process (see Fig. 85(b)) of the transfer setting process (see Fig. 85(a)), the flag is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S2415 in Fig. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233a is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2021 in FIG. 72(b)). When the simple image display flag 233a is on, a simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 72(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 72(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233a is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 73 to 80) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 81 to 84) are executed so that various images are displayed according to the command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The simple image display flag 233a is also referenced in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). In this transfer setting process, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on, there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233a is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233b is a buffer for storing one display data table 232a1 corresponding to the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231 determines the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the voice lamp control device 113, selects the display data table 232a1 corresponding to that effect from the data table storage area 232a, and stores the selected display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233e (described later) by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 36) (described later) that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

The additional data table buffer 233c is a buffer for storing one or more additional data tables 232a2 corresponding to effects (changing patterns such as the display color of the character display Se1) to be added to the effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to commands from the voice lamp control device 113, etc. The MPU 231 stores the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, and at the same time, clears the contents of the additional data table buffer 233c by writing Null data, which means that there is no display object to be added and displayed.

Then, based on commands from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 uses the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b to determine whether or not there is an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, each time an effect to be displayed in addition occurs, the MPU 231 selects the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to that effect from the data table storage area 232a, and stores the selected additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233e (described later) by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 36) (described later) that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the additional data table buffer 233c.

As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1. Also, if the additional data table 232a2 is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 as is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be able to store multiple (e.g., 32) additional data tables 232a2. Therefore, each time a new effect is added, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to that effect is determined, and the additional data table 232a2 is added and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and multiple effects corresponding to the multiple additional data tables 232a2 can be added to and displayed in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1.

The transfer data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b in response to commands from the voice lamp control device 113, etc. The MPU 231 selects the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the display data table 232a1 from the data table storage area 232a in conjunction with storing the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, and stores the selected transfer data table 232a3 in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

When all image data of the sprites used in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233d by writing Null data, which means that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233e (described later) by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 36) (described later) that contains the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

In this way, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table 232a3 so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table 232a1. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table 232a1, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 without fail.

In addition, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1, the corresponding performance can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Also, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233e is used to specify an address from which to obtain the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or image data to be transferred from the display data table 232a1, additional data table 232a2, and transfer data table 232a3 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, additional data table buffer 233c, and transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively.

The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233e to "0" once as the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b. Then, during the display setting process (see FIG. 81) of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233e is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233e is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e from the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and creates a drawing list (see Figure 36) described below. At the same time, it obtains transfer data information relating to the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and if the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effect corresponding to the stored additional data table 232a2 can be added to the effect corresponding to the display data table 232a1 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b or the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table 232a3 is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a specific sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data table 232a3 and used to draw that sprite by the time the corresponding display data table 232a1 starts drawing that sprite.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1, the corresponding performance can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Also, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233f is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d.

Now, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of images. As shown in FIG. 36, for each sprite used in one frame of image, such as the back image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ...), the cockpit image, the execution pattern, the reserved pattern (reserved pattern 1, reserved pattern 2, ...), the character pattern (character pattern 1, ...), and the error pattern, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, the drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the ROM type (or information indicating the RAM type) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the ROM type (or RAM type) and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information.

The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information using a method specified by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i described later.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of images based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying an execution pattern or a reserved pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address of the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2, or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the character ROM 234 (or resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage ROM type (or RAM type) and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as defined in the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2. Note that in this embodiment, no other information is set for the rear image and cockpit image.

Furthermore, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ...), cockpit image, execution pattern, reserved pattern (reserved pattern 1, reserved pattern 2, ...), text pattern (text pattern 1, text pattern 2, ...), and error pattern.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffers 236b and 236c. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233e in the transfer data table 232a3 stored in the transfer data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list.

Then, if the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Returning to FIG. 29 for further explanation, the timing counter 233g is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b. When the MPU 231 stores one display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, it sets time data indicating the presentation time (variable presentation time) of the presentation displayed based on that display data table 232a1. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process (see FIG. 81) of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed, the timing counter 233g is decremented by one (see S2309 in FIG. 81). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233g becomes "0" or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image discrimination flag 233h is a flag indicating the storage status, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image discrimination flag 233h is generated by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233h generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated when a transfer instruction is set for the transfer target image data corresponding to sprite 1 during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to sprite 1 for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of image storage area 236a as sprite 1 will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of image data for sprite 1, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233h to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2454 in FIG. 87).

If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S2455 in FIG. 87), and the image controller 237 is caused to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process for that image data is stopped. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"). If the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", the MPU 231 specifies the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer, and if it is "1", the MPU 231 specifies the second frame buffer 236c. Then, information about this specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S2502 in FIG. 88).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233i, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see S2502 in FIG. 88).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The character pattern memory 233j is a memory for storing whether a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern" is to be displayed in the reach occurrence character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during a "reach display". Based on the contents stored in this character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines whether the character pattern in the reach occurrence character display Se1 should be a "weak pattern" or a "strong pattern", and sets the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern" to be displayed in the reach occurrence character display Se1 based on the contents of that determination.

This character pattern memory 233j is first initialized (i.e., cleared to 0) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the display control device 114 receives commands from the voice lamp control device 113 regarding the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs, the contents according to those commands are set (see S2192 in FIG. 79).

Specifically, for example, when a weak pattern command for display is received, data indicating a "weak pattern" is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 when a reach occurs. Also, when a strong pattern command for display is received, data indicating a "strong pattern" is set in the character pattern memory 233j as the character display Se1 when a reach occurs.

In this way, when the MPU 231 receives a weak display pattern command or a strong display pattern command (hereinafter, the weak display pattern command and the strong display pattern command may be collectively referred to as "pattern commands") from the voice lamp control device 113, it sets the character pattern memory 233j based on the received pattern commands. On the other hand, when the variable performance ends, that is, when the MPU 231 receives a display confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, it clears (turns off) the character pattern memory 233j to 0 together with the red character flag 233k etc. described below in the display setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S2314 in FIG. 81).

When the contents of a pattern-related command are set in the character pattern memory 233j, the MPU 231 determines the character pattern additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the memory contents of the character pattern memory 233j, and sets (stores) the character pattern additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c (see 2196 in FIG. 79). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the character pattern additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c.

As a result, by setting the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs in the variable performance is changed from the initial content defined by the display data table 232a1 (for example, the character display Se1 when a reach occurs is changed from a "weak pattern" to a "strong pattern") and displayed. Therefore, simply by storing the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns in the additional data table buffer 233c, the character pattern of the character display Se1 when a reach occurs that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of performances can be displayed.

In the first embodiment, even if the initial setting (default setting) character pattern of the character display Se1, i.e., the character pattern of the "weak pattern" is set for the character display Se1 when a reach occurs, in the character pattern memory 233j, the additional data table for character pattern 232a2 is selected based on the character pattern and stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. By configuring in this way, it becomes unnecessary to perform a process to check whether the display mode of the character display Se1 is the initial setting or not, and it is possible to standardize the process and reduce the number of steps in designing the program.

Instead of the above configuration, if the contents set in the character pattern memory 233j are the initial settings (default settings), the additional data table 232a2 may not be stored in the additional data table buffer 233c. In this configuration, a process is required to determine whether or not the initial settings are set, but since there is no need to store an unnecessary additional data table 232a2 in the additional data table buffer 233c, the processing load related to display control can be reduced.

The red character flag 233k is a flag for setting the display color of the character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during a "reach display" to "red." The MPU 231 sets the display color of the character display Se1 to "red" based on the setting contents of this red character flag 233k.

This red character flag 233k is first initialized (i.e., turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives a display red character command from the voice lamp control device 113, it sets this red character flag 233k on (see S2194 in FIG. 79). On the other hand, when the variable performance ends, that is, when the MPU 231 receives a display confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, it turns off (clears to 0) the red character flag 233k together with the character pattern memory 233j, etc. in the display setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S2314 in FIG. 81).

When the red-character flag 233k is set to ON, the MPU 231 determines the additional data table 232a2 for character color that corresponds to the red-character flag 233k being ON, and sets (stores) the additional data table 232a2 for character color in the additional data table buffer 233c (see S2196 in FIG. 79). Then, as described above, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list based on the display data table 232a1 set (stored) in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c.

When both the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2 are set (stored) in the additional data table buffer 233c, a drawing list is created based on the character pattern additional data table 232a2 and the character color additional data table 232a2.

As a result, by setting the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the red character flag 233k, the display color of the character display Se1 in the variable performance is changed from the initial content ("white") defined by the display data table 232a1 to "red" regardless of the character pattern. Therefore, simply by creating the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the setting content of the red character flag 233k and storing the additional data table 232a2 for character color in the additional data table buffer 233c, the display color of the character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of performances can be displayed.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 37 to 59. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are started when the power is turned on, main processes that are executed after the start-up processes, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 2 millisecond period in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This startup process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this startup process, first, the initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). For example, permission to access RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S102). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided on the main control unit 110 is turned on (S104). If the result of the determination is that the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), it is possible that the processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case, the processing proceeds to S116 to initialize the RAM 203.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of the power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S116.

As will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 39, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 203 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S107: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S108) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

In the process of S109, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503 is off and the setting key 501 is on when the power is turned on, so in order to start up the startup mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first the display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401 (S110), and then it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned off (S111), and the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is ended, and the process proceeds to S113. In addition, in the process of S109, if the setting key 501 is not turned on (S109: No), the process skips the processes of S110 to S112 and proceeds to S113 in order to start up the startup mode in "normal mode."

In the process of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S113), and the process proceeds to S163.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 does not have a power backup function, and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is initialized by the start-up process (see S1010 in FIG. 60), so each time the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a setting value command is set and sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

The setting value command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process described below (see S201 in FIG. 40). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this setting value command, it is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a setting value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223.

In the process of S163, processing related to the base display device is performed (S163), and then an interrupt is permitted (S114), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 39) described below. In this base display device-related process, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display provided on the base display device 401 are lit, and in this state, a wait process is performed for five seconds. As a result, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all segments (including dot segments) of the seven-segment display provided on the base display device 401 are lit continuously for at least five seconds, so that it is possible to check whether all segments can be lit normally, and it is easy to determine whether the display on the base display device 401 is normal.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S104 that the RAM clear switch 503 is on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on or not in order to determine whether the startup mode is to be the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode" (S115).

If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process proceeds to S116 to start up the startup mode in "RAM clear mode."

In the process of S116, the initialization process of RAM 203 (S116 and S117) is executed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, regardless of whether settings have been changed, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S116 and S117) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the RAM 203 initialization process (S116 and S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116 and S117), i.e., in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (e.g., the first reserved ball counter 203a is cleared to "0") (S117), and the process proceeds to S113.

In addition, in this RAM initialization process (S116 and S117), the used areas of the RAM 203 are cleared excluding the areas related to the base values displayed on the base display device 401 (total out counter, low probability payout counter, real-time base value data, etc. (none shown)). As a result, even if the RAM clear switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on, the measurement of the real-time base value that was being performed before the operation continues, and the measured real-time base value can be displayed on the base display device 401.

If it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), a setting change process is performed to change the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Now, referring to FIG. 38, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is executed when the launch mode is "setting change mode" and is a process for accepting and confirming changes (updates) to the probability setting value from hall personnel, etc.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of displaying the current probability setting value is set on the base display device 401 (S121), and the process proceeds to S122. By setting the start of displaying the probability setting value, the display of the probability setting value is started on the base display device 401.

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value, rather than the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off. In other words, when the start-up mode becomes the "setting change mode", the base display device 401 may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), "2", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values, or "3", which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. This allows hall personnel, etc. to change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the "setting change mode," the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. This allows hall personnel and others to change the probability setting value while taking into account the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

In addition, when the start-up mode becomes the "setting change mode", the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting value as "2" if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is "2" or more, and may start displaying the probability setting value set before the power was turned off if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is "1". For example, if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is high, such as "3", there may be many cases where it is desired to reduce the probability setting value slightly (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is displayed as the probability setting value set before the power was turned off, the following problem occurs. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and when the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "3", the probability setting value is returned to "1". Therefore, for example, if you want to change the probability setting value from "3" to "2", you must go through almost one cycle of the probability setting value while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. In contrast, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is high, the probability setting value can be displayed starting at "2," thereby updating the probability setting value while minimizing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "3" (S122), and if it is not in the predetermined range, i.e., the probability setting value is abnormal (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123) and the process proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "3"), "2", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values, or "3", which is the maximum value of the probability setting values. On the other hand, if the result of the process of S122 indicates that the probability setting value is in the range of "1" to "3" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is normal, so the process of S123 is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), it is then determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

If it is determined as a result of S125 that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S126) and the process returns to S122.

The update of the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, is performed by adding 1 to the probability setting value if the previous probability setting value is between "1" and "2", and by returning the probability setting value to "1" if the previous probability setting value is "3". The probability setting value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the base display device 401.

The loop process of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed until it is determined in the process of S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes). Then, if it is determined in the process of S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the upcoming game (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a is set according to that probability setting value (S128).

After the process of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 has been turned off (S129). In the process of S129, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off, or it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, as a result of the processing of S129, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S130), and this setting change processing (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 37), proceeds to S116, executes RAM 203 initialization process (S116 and S117), and erases (clears) the data in RAM 203. In this way, by having the hall staff turn on the RAM erase switch 503 in the process of S124 to confirm the probability setting value, the hall staff can be made strongly aware that the data in RAM 203 will be erased thereafter.

In addition, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value was confirmed by detecting that the RAM erase switch 503 is on, but it may be configured to confirm the probability setting value by detecting that the setting key 501 is off.

Next, referring to FIG. 39, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S151). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S151: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not interrupted. In such a case, therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, "9999" and "99"), the counter is cleared to "0". The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c of the RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in S207 (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process described later (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

While this main process is being executed, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) to be described later is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, a process to control the opening and closing of the variable winning device 65 is executed, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 83 is executed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the variable display on the special pattern display device 37 as the result notification device, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high probability or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at each time.

The above-mentioned processes of S152 and S153, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the regular hit counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, it is possible to provide randomness to the update of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular hit counter C4, which use these as the initial values for updating.

In the processing of S151, if power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power was interrupted due to a power outage or the power being turned off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 output a power outage signal SG1, which resulted in the execution of the NMI interrupt processing described later in FIG. 59. Therefore, the processing at the time of power interruption from S154 onwards is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S155). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and stored (S156), and access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed-up stack area and working area of RAM 203.

The process of S151 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). As a result, in the main process of the main control unit 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the power outage occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is completed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S151, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up process.

Therefore, in processing when the power is cut off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer saved; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S101), and processing can start from S151. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, referring to FIG. 40, the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and main process (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be sent to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, the signal is output to a device corresponding to the signal (for example, an external output terminal board (not shown) for connecting the hall computer and the pachinko machine 10, etc.). In the external output process of S201, the output data of the command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the signal is output to various devices.

After the process of S201, the winning ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then a winning process is executed to execute the process when each special symbol is hit (S203). This winning process (S203) will be described later in FIG. 48.

After S203, the normal electric role control process is executed to execute the drive control process of the normal electric role 72 (S204). In simple terms, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, if a winning symbol (e.g., a "○" symbol) of the normal symbol appears as a control judgment result and a winning state is reached, the normal electric role 72 is opened for a predetermined time, whereas if a losing symbol (e.g., an "X" symbol) of the normal symbol appears, the normal electric role 72 is maintained in a closed state. This normal electric role control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

After the processing of S204, the process of reading the various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Also, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of won balls to be sent to the payout control device 111 is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203. As a result, the predetermined prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "9999"), it is cleared to "0". The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in the first embodiment, "99"), it is cleared to "0", and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, the normal map counter C4, and the small win type counter CK are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, the normal map counter C4, and the small win type counter CK are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99", "99", respectively), they are each cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal map counter C4 has completed one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal map counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal map counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 and CK are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process is executed in response to the winning of the first start opening 64 and the second start opening 71 (S208). Details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, a gate passing process is executed to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S209). If it is determined in this gate passing process (S209) that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the regular hit counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the regular hit counter C4 is stored in the regular reserved ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 6), and the number of reserved variable displays of regular symbols is displayed on the regular symbol reserved lamp 84. Details of this gate passing process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying a special pattern by the special pattern display device 37 as a result notification device based on the process contents of the start winning process (S208) and a special pattern change process for setting a change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81 are executed (S210). Details of the special pattern change process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passing process (S209), a hit/miss judgment of the normal symbol is performed, and a normal symbol change process, which is a setting process for performing a variable display of the normal symbol based on the judgment result on the normal symbol display device 83, is executed (S211). In this normal symbol change process (S211), the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to either a high probability (e.g., 99/100) or a low probability (70/100) depending on the above-mentioned game state. Then, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the hit/miss result, and the display result according to the hit/miss result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83. Details of the normal symbol change process (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

After executing the normal map change processing (S211), the launch control processing is executed (S212), and then other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), and this timer interrupt processing is terminated.

The launch control process (S212) is a process that determines whether ball launch is on or off when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the control handle 51 and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When ball launch is on, the ball launch signal is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 in order to send a ball launch signal to the launch control device 112 acting as the launch device. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 acting as the launch device via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

In addition, in this embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. However, some or all of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., every 2 milliseconds) in the main process. For example, some or all of the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading process (S202), winning process (S203), normal electric control process (S204), and switch reading process (S205) executed by the timer interrupt process in this embodiment may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process, instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step may be provided in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at the predetermined time is executed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, and the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed in the remaining time of the processing to be executed at the predetermined time, but since the time required to execute the processing to be executed at the predetermined time changes depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 41, we will explain the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not a ball has won in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71, and if a win has occurred, executes a process to store (reserve) the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1, CK in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning start port 64, 71. It also executes a process to transmit the reserved values of each counter C1-C3, CS1, CK together with the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start winning) the first start hole 64 (S301). Here, the ball's entry into the first start hole 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40) based on the output signal of the first start hole switch (not shown) that detects the ball's entry (winning) into the first start hole 64, which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40).

If it is determined in S301 that the ball has entered the first starting hole 64 (a starting entry has occurred) (S301: Yes), then it is determined whether the game state is a "normal game state", that is, whether the game state is a state in which left-handed play is encouraged (S302). If it is not a "normal game state" (S302: No), this means that the ball was shot by a non-encouraged (prohibited) left-handed play, not an encouraged right-handed play, and entered the first starting hole 64. Therefore, an alarm is output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5), and a left-handed play error process is executed, such as displaying the text "Please hit right" on the third symbol display device 81 (S303), and the process proceeds to S304.

By configuring it in this way, if a ball is detected by the first start switch (not shown) in the "normal high probability time shortened state" or "normal low probability time shortened state" where left-handed play is not encouraged, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed, making the player avoid left-handed play in a play state where left-handed play is not encouraged (encouraging right-handed play), and eliminating play in a play format that differs from the encouraged play specifications as much as possible, making it possible to realize the playability expected in each play state.

If the game state is determined to be "normal game state" in the process of S302 (S302: Yes), the game state encourages left-handed play, so the process of S303 is skipped, the left-handed play error process of S303 is not performed, and the process proceeds to S304.

If it is determined as a result of the processing in S301 that a ball has entered the first starting hole 64 (a starting winning has occurred) (S301: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 in operation for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (in the first embodiment, "4") (S304). Then, if there has been a winning entry into the first starting hole 64 but the number of reserved balls in operation N1 is not less than 4 (S304: No), this starting winning processing (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N1 is less than 4 (S304: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is incremented by 1 (S305). Then, since the winning ball this time is the first starting hole 64 corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1, C3, CS1, and CK (S306), and the process proceeds to S311.

If it is determined in the process of S301 that the ball has not entered the first starting hole 64 (S301: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting hole 71 (starting entry) (S307). Here, as with the first starting hole 64, the entry of the ball into the second starting hole 71 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40) based on the output signal of the second starting hole switch (not shown) that detects the entry (entry) of the ball into the second starting hole 71, which is read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40).

If it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 71 (a starting winning has occurred) (S307: Yes), the process proceeds to S308.

In the process of S307, if it is determined that the ball has entered the second starting hole 71 (S307: Yes), it is determined whether the game state is a "normal game state", and if it is determined that the game state is a "normal game state", it is a game state in which left-handed play is encouraged, so a configuration may be made to perform normal right-handed play error processing.

When it is determined that a ball has entered the second start hole 71 (a start winning has occurred) (S307: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value (in the first embodiment, "4") (S308). Then, if there has been no winning in the second start hole 71 (S307: No), or if there has been a winning in the second start hole 71 but the number of activated reserved balls N2 is not less than 4 (S308: No), this start winning process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N2 is less than 4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is incremented by 1 (S309). Then, since the winning ball this time was in the second starting hole 71, which corresponds to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S310), and the process proceeds to S311.

In addition, in the processing of S301 and S307, if a ball enters the first start hole 64 and the second start hole 71 at the same time, the processing of the ball entering the first start hole 64 may be executed as a priority, the processing of the ball entering the second start hole 71 may be awaited, and the processing of the ball entering the second start hole 71 may be executed in the start entry processing (S208) in the next timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S311, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 and the small jackpot type counter CK are read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5) and stored in each reserved ball storage area. In other words, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the storage destination in S306, the values are reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, the variable type counter storage area 203d4 and the small jackpot type counter storage area d5 corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a (S311).

Specifically, for example, in the process of S306 based on winning at the first starting hole 64, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S305 is "1", the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 1. Also, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "2", the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 2, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "3", the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 3, and if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition is "4", the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area 4.

Similarly, in the process of S310 based on winning at the second starting hole 71, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition in the process of S309 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is "2", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved second area, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is "3", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after the addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area.

Next, in order to transmit a first reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, which includes the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition by the processing of S305 (operated reserved ball number N1) and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1 and small jackpot type counter CK stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the processing of S306, the first reserved ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S312). In addition, in order to transmit a second reserved ball number command including the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operated reserved ball number N1) after the addition by the process of S309 and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the small jackpot type counter CK stored (reserved) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the process of S310 to the voice lamp control device 113, the second reserved ball number command is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S312). As a result, the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S312 is completed, this start winning process (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

The values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK included in the first reserved ball count command or the second reserved ball count command in the processing of S312 may be the values read from counter buffer 203c in the processing of S312, or the values stored (reserved) in first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e in the processing of S312 may be read.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the gate passing process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this gate passing process (S209). The gate passing process (S209) determines whether or not the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed (entered), it executes a process to store (reserve) the value of the regular ball hit counter C4 in the regular ball reserved storage area 203h.

In this gate passing process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 (ball entering) read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40), the passage through the through gate 67 (ball entering) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S401, if the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), this gate passing process (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (entered the gate) (S401: Yes), it is then determined whether the game state is a "normal game state", that is, whether the ball is being played in a left-handed game and is encouraged to be released (S402). If the result of the determination is a "normal game state" (S402: Yes), it is then determined whether the dynamic display of the second special pattern is fluctuating or whether there is a reserved ball in the dynamic display of the second special pattern (S403). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the second special pattern is not changing and there are no reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (S403: No), this means that a ball shot by a right-hand hit, which is not encouraged (prohibited) but a left-hand hit, which is encouraged in "normal game state A", has passed through the through gate 67. Therefore, an alarm is output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5), and a text display of "Please return to left-hand hit" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a limited effect, and normal right-hand hit error processing is executed (S404), and processing proceeds to S405.

By configuring it in this way, if a ball is detected by the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" where right-hand play is not recommended, an error process such as an alarm sound is output, which discourages players from playing right-hand games in game states where right-hand play is not encouraged, and eliminates as much as possible gameplay that differs from the encouraged game specifications, thereby achieving the gameplay expected in each game state.

In addition, in the process of S402, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (S402: No), the game state is the "normal high probability time reduction state" or the "normal low probability time reduction state" in which right-hand play is encouraged, so the normal right-hand play error process of S404 is not performed, the processes of S403 and S404 are skipped, and the process moves to S405.

In the process of S405, it is determined whether the value of the regular reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of activated reserved balls HN of the variable display of regular patterns reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S404). Then, even if there is passage (entry of a ball) through the through gate 67, if the number of activated reserved balls HN is not less than 4 (S405: No), this gate passing process (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of active reserved balls HN is less than 4 (S405: Yes), the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g (number of active reserved balls HN) is incremented by 1 (S406). Then, the value of the regular per counter C4 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 5), and the read data is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the regular reserved ball count counter 203g among the regular reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular reserved ball storage area 203h (S407).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition in the processing of S406 is "1", the value of the regular prize hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular prize reserve first area. Also, if the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition is "2", the value of the regular prize hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular prize reserve second area, if the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition is "3", the value of the regular prize hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular prize reserve third area, and if the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g after the addition is "4", the value of the regular prize hit counter C4 is reserved in the regular prize reserve fourth area. After the processing of S407 is completed, this gate passing processing (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, the command for the number of reserved balls for normal symbols related to the variable display of normal symbols is not sent to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the command for the number of reserved balls for normal symbols related to the variable display of normal symbols may be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 to perform a performance (announcement) related to the reserved symbols related to the variable display of normal symbols. In this case, the value of the normal symbol hit counter C4 may be included in the command for the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and sent to the voice lamp control device 113, so that a so-called pre-reading process for normal symbols can be performed, and a variety of performances for normal symbols can be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 43, we will explain the special chart change processing (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this special chart change processing (S210).

This special pattern change process (S210) controls the dynamic display on the special pattern display device 37, which acts as a result notification device for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the change presentation on the third pattern display device 81 according to the game status.

In this special symbol change process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S501). The jackpot period includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot, a predetermined period before the jackpot game starts (i.e., a jackpot opening), and a predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (i.e., a jackpot ending). If the determination in S501 indicates that either special symbol is in a jackpot (S501: Yes), the special symbol change process (S210) ends and the timer interrupt process returns to FIG. 40.

If it is determined in the process of S501 that the player is not in a big win (S501: No), it is next determined whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a small win (S551). The small win includes the period during the small win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 as the result notification device at the time of the small win, the period during a predetermined time before the start of the small win game (i.e., the small win opening), and the period during a predetermined time after the end of the small win game (i.e., the small win ending). If the result of the determination in S551 is that the player is in a small win for any of the special symbols (S551: Yes), the special symbol change process (S210) is terminated as is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

If it is determined in the process of S551 that the small win is not occurring (S551: No), then it is determined whether or not the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is being dynamically displayed on the special pattern display device 37 (S502), and if the first special pattern or the second special pattern is not being dynamically displayed on the special pattern display device 37 (S502: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern on the special pattern display device 37 stopped (S503). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern stopped (S503: No), the special pattern change process (S210) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stopped pattern in the dynamic display (variable presentation) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is displayed on the special pattern display device 37 (third pattern display device 81) for a predetermined period of time, allowing the player to see the stopped pattern.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S503, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display was stopped (S503: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2 of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S504). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S504: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the second special pattern, and first, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S505). This is because the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable performance) related to the second special pattern is started by the variable start processing (S510) described later, and the number of reserved balls related to the second special pattern is reduced by one.

Then, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S506). This data shift process (S506) is a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, second reserved area 2 → second reserved area 1, second reserved area 3 → second reserved area 2, second reserved area 4 → second reserved area 3, etc.

On the other hand, in the process of S504, if it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is "0" (S504: No), then it is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1 of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S507). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S507: Yes), it is determined that it is the timing to start the execution of the dynamic display (variable performance) related to the first special pattern, and first, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S508). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variable performance) related to the reserved first special pattern is started by the later-described variable start process (S510), and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Then, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S509). This data shift process (S509) is a process for shifting the data stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, first reserved area 2 → first reserved area 1, first reserved area 3 → first reserved area 2, first reserved area 4 → first reserved area 3, etc.

After the data shift process of S506 or S509, a change start process is executed for the special pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 as the result notification device based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process (S510), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Now, with reference to FIG. 44, we will explain the change start process (S510), which is one process of the special chart change process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this change start process (S510).

As described above, this change start process (S510) involves determining whether or not to dynamically display each special symbol, and setting the dynamic display if each special symbol is to be dynamically displayed.

In this fluctuation start process (S510), first, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not there is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (S5101).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot has occurred is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the current game state (mode) by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability setting value. As described above, the jackpot random number table 202a specifies the jackpot random number value so that the jackpot probability is 2/10,000 for a setting value of "1" and 4/10,000 for a setting value of "3".

In the process of S5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, it is determined that there is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot as a result of the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b (see Figure 8) corresponding to each special symbol (S5102).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines whether the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is a "time-saving A" jackpot type that transitions to a "normal high probability time-saving state A" after a jackpot with a maximum number of 10 rounds. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot (the display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) of the reserved ball execution area 203f to determine whether it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If the data is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special chart 2 jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 8).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the random number that will result in a jackpot is not set in the special pattern 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 regardless of the set value (see FIG. 7), and the dynamic display of the first special pattern is configured so that it cannot result in a jackpot. Therefore, in the process of S5101 in the process of starting the change in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, the result of the determination is always S5101: No.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot is determined (S5103), and the process proceeds to S5109. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a presentation mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and from the selected presentation mode, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation presentation) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202e (see Figures 13 to 15) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f provided for each presentation mode set in the processing of S5103, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

If it is determined in the process of S5101 that the winning combination is not a jackpot (S5101: No), then a small jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not the winning combination is a small jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (S5104).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a small win occurs in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to be the same for all probability setting values. Also, whether or not a small win occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is set to be the same for all probability setting values. Specifically, in the special symbol 1 jackpot random number table 202a1, the small win random number value is specified so that the small win probability is 33/10000 in all settings. Also, in the special symbol 2 jackpot random number table 202a2, the small win random number value is specified so that the small win probability is 1550/10000 in all settings.

In the process of S5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, it is determined that it is a small jackpot of the first special pattern or the second special pattern. If it is determined that it is a small jackpot as a result of the process of S5104 (S5104: Yes), the display mode for the small jackpot is set based on the value of the small jackpot type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the small jackpot type table 202c (see Figure 9 (a) or Figure 9 (b)) (S5105).

In this process, the small win type table 202c determines the small win type associated with the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, i.e., "small win A" in which no big win state occurs, "time-saving B" in which the state transitions to "normal high probability time-saving state A" after a big win with a maximum number of rounds of 5, "time-saving C" in which the state transitions to "normal high probability time-saving state A" after a big win with a maximum number of rounds of 7, "small win B" in which no big win state occurs, or "time-saving D" in which the state transitions to "normal high probability time-saving state B" after a big win with a maximum number of rounds of 10. Then, based on the determined small win type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of a small win on the special symbol display device 37 as a result notification device is set.

Specifically, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) of the reserved ball execution area 203f to determine whether it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If the data is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the small win type is determined based on the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special chart 1 small win type table 202c1 (see FIG. 9(a)). Also, if the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the small win type is determined based on the value of the small win type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special chart 2 small win type table 202c2 (see FIG. 9(b)).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the small win is determined (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5109. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 as the result notification device, a presentation mode is selected based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of the small win and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and from the selected presentation mode, the dynamic time (fluctuation time) of the dynamic display (fluctuation presentation) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this small win, first, the stop pattern table 202e (see Figures 13 to 15) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small win.

Then, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f provided for each presentation mode set in the processing of S5106, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5104 that the result is not a small win (S5104: No), the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a miss, so the display mode for a miss is set (S5107). In the process of S5107, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the miss symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b, and the current game state, one of the "non-reach" presentation mode, "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, "special reach" presentation mode, and "special variation" presentation mode is set as the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202e is set so that the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each presentation mode differs depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the event of a loss in each game state is determined (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5108, the fluctuation time until the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 stop and display a losing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the stop pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (presentation mode) at the time of a losing symbol determined in the process of S5107, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time.

In the processing of S5109, a fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5103, S5106, or S5108, which notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 (S5109).

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the jackpot type is "time-saving A", and furthermore, if the variation pattern of the "super reach" presentation mode of "60 seconds" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the second special symbol, jackpot, "time-saving A", and "super reach" presentation mode of "60 seconds" (i.e., special symbol 1 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, the variation pattern command for the first special symbol may be referred to as the "special symbol 1 variation pattern command") is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery and the small jackpot lottery are lost in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and furthermore, if the variation pattern of the "super reach" presentation mode of "60 seconds" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the second special symbol, loss, and "super reach" presentation mode of "60 seconds" (i.e., special symbol 2 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, the variation pattern command for the second special symbol may be referred to as the "special symbol 2 variation pattern command") is set.

In this way, even if the variable performance has the same variation time, by setting the correct or incorrect performance and the general content of the variation pattern in the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the content of the performance mode, including whether it is correct or incorrect, and the variation time, and can determine a more detailed variation pattern of the variable performance based on that information.

Next, a stop type command is set (S5110) to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5102, S5105, or S5107 via the voice lamp control device 113, and this change start processing (S510) is terminated and the process returns to the special chart change processing (Figure 43).

Returning to FIG. 43, the explanation will continue. In the process of S507, if it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (operating reserved ball count N1) is "0" (S507: No), it is determined whether or not a demo performance is being performed in the third pattern display device 81, that is, whether or not a demo is in progress (S511). In this determination process, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that a demo is in progress until it is determined that either the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b (operating reserved ball count N1 or operating reserved ball count N2) is greater than "0".

If it is determined that a demo is not in progress (S511: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S512), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that a demo is in progress (S511: Yes), the process returns directly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S512 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (see S201 in FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it transmits a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance based on the reception of the display demo command.

As described above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation performance does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S511 that the demo is not in progress (S511: No), a further process may be executed to determine whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped, the process of S512 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation has stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo performance.

In the process of S502, if it is determined that the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the dynamic display of the first special pattern being executed has elapsed, or whether or not the change time of the dynamic display of the second special pattern being executed has elapsed, and a change stop process (S513) is performed to stop the dynamic display of the first special pattern or the dynamic display of the second special pattern depending on the determination result, and this special pattern change process (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Now, referring to FIG. 45, we will explain the change stop process (S513), which is one process of the special chart change process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this change stop process (S513).

In this variation stop process (S513), it is determined whether the variation time of the dynamic display of each special symbol has elapsed, and if the variation time has elapsed, the stop result corresponding to each stop type is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, and each confirmation command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, if it is in the "normal symbol high probability time reduction state" or "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", it is determined whether the time reduction end condition of the "time reduction function" has been met according to the counting result of the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has changed, and if the time reduction end condition of the "time reduction function" has been met, processing such as switching the "time reduction function" from enabled to disabled is performed. Also, if it is in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, and if the number of times the rescue condition has been met, processing is performed to set the number of times the time reduction is to be performed to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state".

In the change stop process (S513), first, it is determined whether the dynamic display time (change time) of the dynamic display of the special pattern being executed has elapsed (S5201). The display time during the dynamic display of the special pattern on the special pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 or the like (determined according to the special pattern 1 change pattern command or the special pattern 2 change pattern command), and if the dynamic display time (change time) of the dynamic display of the special pattern has not elapsed (S5201: No), the display of the special LED group 37b of the special pattern display device 37 according to the special pattern being executed is updated (S5202), the change stop process is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change process (see FIG. 43).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special pattern display device 37, a display mode is set in which the upper LED group 37b1 lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the first special pattern until the change time has elapsed, and a display mode is set in which the lower LED group 37b2 lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the second special pattern until the change time has elapsed.

On the other hand, in the process of S5201, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbols in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5201: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the dynamic display of the special symbols is stopped for the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 (S5203). The stopped symbol is preset by the process of S5102, S5105 or S5107 of the variation start process (see FIG. 44).

In the first embodiment, if the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a miss, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit, and if the result is a jackpot, the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the jackpot.

When the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stop pattern of the dynamic display of each special pattern is set in the process of S5203, a confirmation command is set (S5204) to confirm and display the stop pattern of the variable performance of each special pattern in the third pattern display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b in the special pattern display device 37, and the process proceeds to S5205. When the variable performance of the first special pattern is being executed in the third pattern display device 81, a confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variable performance of the first special pattern (i.e., special pattern 1 confirmation command. Hereinafter, the confirmation command for the first special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern 1 confirmation command") is set, and when the variable performance of the second special pattern is being executed in the third pattern display device 81, a confirmation command for confirming the variable performance of the second special pattern (i.e., special pattern 2 confirmation command. Hereinafter, the confirmation command for the second special pattern may be referred to as the "special pattern 2 confirmation command") is set.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this special pattern 1 confirmation command, it sends a display special pattern 1 confirmation command to the display control device 114 to stop the variable presentation of the first special pattern being executed by the third pattern display device 81, and when it receives the special pattern 2 confirmation command, it sends a display special pattern 2 confirmation command to the display control device 114 to stop the variable presentation of the second special pattern being executed by the third pattern display device 81. By receiving the display special pattern 1 confirmation command or the display special pattern 2 confirmation command, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable presentation of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern or the second special pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and display the stopped pattern as a confirmed display.

In the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not the game is in a "time-shortened state (either a "normal high probability time-shortened state" or a "normal low probability time-shortened state"), and if it is determined to be in a "time-shortened state" (S5205: Yes), a time-shortened counting process is executed to determine whether or not the time-shortened end condition in the "normal high probability time-shortened state" or the "normal low probability time-shortened state" is met (S5206), and then the process proceeds to S5207. Also, if it is determined in the determination of S5205 that the game is not in a "time-shortened state" (S5205: No), the process of determining the time-shortened end condition is not performed, and the process skips S5206 and proceeds to S5207.

The time-saving counting process (S5206) may be configured to be executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol starts (the change start process (S510)), or when the dynamic display of the special symbol is confirmed (when a predetermined time has elapsed in the special symbol change process (S210) (S503: Yes)).

Now, referring to FIG. 46, we will explain the time-saving counting process (S5206), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this time-saving counting process (S5206).

In this time-saving counting process (S5206), when the "time-saving function" is set to enabled, the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern, which is the end condition of the "time-saving function" (for example, the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes), is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result satisfies the time-saving end condition, and the "time-saving function" is changed from enabled to disabled depending on the determination result.

In this time-saving counting process (S5206), first, the type of dynamic display of the stopped special pattern is determined (S5301). If the result of the determination is that the dynamic display of the first special pattern has stopped (S5301: "Special pattern 1"), the dynamic display of the first special pattern has been executed once, so 1 is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m (S5302), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m is greater than "0" (S5303). If the result of the determination is that the value of the special pattern 1 time-saving counter 203m is greater than "0" (S5303: Yes), the time-saving termination condition based on the number of times the first special pattern has been dynamically displayed has not been established, so next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the total time-saving counter 203o (S5304), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5305). If the result of the determination is that the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5305: Yes), the time-saving end condition based on the total number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern are dynamically displayed has not been met, so S5310 to S5312 are skipped, this time-saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, in the process of S5303, if the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is not greater than "0" (S5303: No), that is, if the value of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving end condition based on the dynamic display count of the first special symbol is met, so the process proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function". Also, in the process of S5305, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is not greater than "0" (S5305: No), that is, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving end condition based on the total dynamic display count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is met, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function".

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S5301 that the dynamic display of the second special symbol has stopped (S5301: "Special symbol 2"), the dynamic display of the second special symbol has been executed once, so 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n (S5306), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is greater than "0" (S5307). If the result of the determination is that the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is greater than "0" (S5307: Yes), the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the second special symbol has been dynamically displayed has not been met, so next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the total time-saving counter 203o (S5308), and then it is determined whether the subtracted value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5309). If the result of the determination is that the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is greater than "0" (S5309: Yes), the time-saving end condition based on the total number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern are dynamically displayed has not been met, so the process skips steps S5310 to S5312, ends this time-saving counting process (S5206), and returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, in the process of S5307, if the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is not greater than "0" (S5307: No), that is, if the value of the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving end condition based on the dynamic display count of the second special symbol is met, so the process proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function". Also, in the process of S5309, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is not greater than "0" (S5309: No), that is, if the value of the total time-saving counter 203o is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving end condition based on the total dynamic display count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is met, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S5310 to disable the "time-saving function".

In the process of S5310, in order to determine whether the "normal high probability time shortening state" or the "normal low probability time shortening state" is in progress, it is determined whether the time shortening high probability flag 203k is on (S5310). If the time shortening high probability flag 203k is on as a result of the determination (S5310: Yes), in order to end the "normal high probability time shortening state", the time shortening high probability flag 203k is set to off (S5311), this time shortening counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time shortening high probability flag 203k is not set to on (S5310: No), the time shortening low probability flag 203j is set to on, and the "normal low probability time shortening state" is in progress, so the time shortening low probability flag 203j is set to off (S5312), this time shortening count process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45).

In this way, when the "time-saving function" is enabled, the "normal high probability time-saving state" or the "normal low probability time-saving state" can be ended depending on the end conditions of the "time-saving function", and the "time-saving function" can be appropriately enabled or disabled, providing more variety in the game and increasing the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 45, the explanation will continue. When the time-saving counting process of S5206 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S5205 that the state is not "time-saving state" (S5205: No), it is determined whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been satisfied, and in order to transition to the "normal symbol low probability time-saving state" based on the determination result, rescue achievement counting process is executed (S5207), this fluctuation stop process (S513) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 43).

The rescue achievement counting process (S5207), i.e., the determination of whether the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, may be configured to be executed when the dynamic display of the special symbol starts to be executed (the change start process (S510)), or when the dynamic display of the special symbol is confirmed (when a predetermined time has elapsed in the special symbol change process (S210) (S503: Yes)). Accordingly, the timing of transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" will also be a predetermined timing after the number of times the rescue condition has been met.

Now, referring to FIG. 47, we will explain the relief arrival counting process (S5207), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this relief arrival counting process (S5207).

In this rescue achievement counting process (S5207), the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result has reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, and depending on the determination result, a process is performed to set the number of times the time is reduced based on the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state."

In this relief arrival counting process (S5207), first, it is determined whether or not the relief setting flag 203s is on (S5401). If the relief setting flag 203s is on (S5401: Yes), since the state has already transitioned to the "normal low probability time shortening state" once, the process of S5402 to S5406 is skipped, this relief arrival counting process (S5207) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S5401 is that the rescue setting flag 203s is not on (S5401: No), the state has not yet transitioned to the "normal low probability time shortened state" since the special symbol became a low probability state, that is, the state is updated, so the value of the rescue counter 203r as game information is incremented by 1 (S5402). Next, a rescue counter command is set (S5451), and the process proceeds to S5403. The rescue counter command set in the process of S5451 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a rescue counter command, it stores the corresponding information in the sub rescue counter 223i, and when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", it compares the value of the sub rescue counter 223i at the time of the small win with the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k to determine whether the small win belongs to a big win priority notification period or a rescue priority notification period, and determines the content of the right-hit notification performance to be performed during the OP time when the small win is won.

In the process of S5403, it is determined whether the value of the rescue counter 203r incremented in the process of S5402 is smaller than the number of times the rescue condition has been met, i.e., the value stored in the rescue condition met number storage area 203q (S5403).

If the result of the judgment in S5403 is that the value of the rescue counter 203r incremented in the processing of S5402 is smaller than the number of times the rescue condition has been met (S5403: Yes), since the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed has not reached the number of times the rescue condition has been met, the processing of S5404 to S5406 is skipped, this rescue achievement counting processing (S5207) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if the value of the rescue counter 203r added in the process of S5402 is not smaller than the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied, that is, if the value of the rescue counter 203r is equal to or greater than the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied (S5403: No), the rescue condition is satisfied, so the values of the special chart 1 time-saving counter 203m, the special chart 2 time-saving counter 203n, and the total time-saving counter 203o are set to "100" (S5404), and the rescue setting flag 203s is set to ON to indicate that the game state has been transitioned to the "normal chart low probability time-saving state" (S5405). Then, a rescue setting flag command is set (S5452), and the time-saving low probability flag 203j is set to ON (S5406) to transition the game state to the "normal chart low probability time-saving state", and this rescue achievement counting process (S5207) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 45). This allows a "normal low probability time shortening state" to occur based on the satisfaction of the rescue condition. The rescue setting completed flag command set in the processing of S5452 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

The value of the rescue counter 203r as game information may be updated by subtracting 1 each time the dynamic display of a special symbol is executed once as a game condition, or by other methods. When the value of the rescue counter 203r is updated by subtraction, the rescue counter 203r is set to the value of the number of rescue conditions achieved, which is selected in the rescue condition achievement number selection process at the time of initial setting of the RAM 203 after power-on and at the time of the end of a jackpot.

Furthermore, the timing for updating the value of the rescue counter 203r does not have to be when the dynamic display of the special pattern is stopped, but may be configured to update the value when the dynamic display of the special pattern starts (see FIG. 44) or when the pattern determination time ends (see S503 in FIG. 43).

Next, referring to FIG. 48, we will explain the winning process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S203) as a benefit awarding control.

When a jackpot of each special symbol occurs, this winning process (S203) sets the number of times (number of rounds) the variable winning device 65 (large winning port) is opened depending on the type of jackpot, and sets the opening time of the variable winning device 65. Then, when the jackpot state (game) is reached, a jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is executed to open or close the variable winning device 65, and when the jackpot state ends, a jackpot end process (S622) is executed to set the end of the jackpot state.

In addition, this winning process (S203) sets the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened (number of rounds) according to the small win when a small win of each special symbol occurs, and sets the opening time of the variable winning device 65. Then, in the small win state (game), a small win opening/closing control process (S616) is executed to open or close the variable winning device 65, and at the timing when the small win state ends, a small win end process (S618) is executed to set the end of the small win state.

Furthermore, when the ball passes through a specific area 65d that can be opened during a small win game, this winning process (S203) sets the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened (number of rounds) according to the type of big win that occurs as a result of the ball passing through the specific area 65d, and sets the opening time of the variable winning device 65. Then, when the big win state (game) is based on passing through the specific area 65d, a big win opening/closing control process (S620) is executed to open or close the variable winning device 65, just as in the case of a big win with a special symbol, and at the timing when the big win state ends, a big win end process (S622) is executed to set the end of the big win state.

In the winning process (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S601). If the result of the determination is that a jackpot has been won (S601: Yes), in order to play the jackpot, the high probability of time-saving flag 203k, the low probability of time-saving flag 203j, and the rescue setting flag are set to OFF (S602). Then, the values of the special symbol 1 time-saving counter 203m, the special symbol 2 time-saving counter 203n, the total time-saving counter 203o, and the rescue counter 203r are cleared to "0" (S603). Next, the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type or the small jackpot type is set in a round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S605). Then, in order to send a jackpot opening command indicating that a jackpot is about to start to the sound lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203 (S606), and then an opening time (e.g., "30 seconds" or "10 seconds") corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S607), and the process proceeds to S615. As a result, the external output process of the timer interrupt process executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40) sends a jackpot opening command corresponding to the jackpot type or small jackpot type to the sound lamp control device 113.

The above-mentioned round counter is set to an initial value of "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter, and if a value is set in the round counter (i.e., "1" or more), it subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 in response to a jackpot game. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", it is configured to end the jackpot that is currently being played.

If it is determined in the process of S601 that the dynamic display of any special symbol has not resulted in a jackpot (S601: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203p is turned on based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d in the variable winning device 65 (S608). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot flag 203p is turned on (S608: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the specific area 65d in the variable winning device 65 during a small jackpot game, so first the jackpot flag 203p is set to off (S609), the process proceeds to S602, and the same process is performed as when a jackpot is won with a special symbol. In this case, the process of setting the round number according to the type of small jackpot to the round counter (S602) and so on is performed.

With this configuration, in addition to winning a jackpot in the dynamic display of the special symbol, a player can also win a small jackpot and play a jackpot game equivalent to the dynamic display of the special symbol by passing the ball through the specific area 65d during the small jackpot game. This increases the variety of jackpot games that can be awarded, and increases the excitement of the game. On the other hand, if the ball is not passed through the specific area 65d during the small jackpot game, the jackpot flag 203p remains off, the jackpot game is not executed, and the game state at the time the small jackpot was won can be restored. This increases the variety of game methods for the small jackpot game, and increases the excitement of the game.

If it is determined in the process of S608 that the big win flag 203p is not on (S608: No), it is then determined whether or not a small win has been won in the dynamic display of any special symbol (S610). If the result of the determination is that a small win has been won (S610: Yes), the number of times the variable winning device 65 has been opened according to the type of small win is set in an opening counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 in order to play a small win (S611).

Then, in order to send a small win opening command indicating that a small win is about to start to the sound lamp control device 113, the small win opening command is set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203 (S612), and then the opening time of the small win (for example, "5 seconds" or "10 seconds") is set (S613). Then, the winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S614), and the process proceeds to S615. As a result, the small win opening command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small win opening command, it executes the right-hit notification display process when a small win is won, and determines and executes the content of the right-hit notification display to be performed during the opening time (described later in Figure 70).

The above-mentioned opening counter is set to an initial value of "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the opening counter, and if a value is set in the opening counter (i.e., "1" or more), it subtracts 1 from the value of the opening counter while controlling the opening of the variable winning device 65 in response to the small win game. Then, when the value of the opening counter becomes "0", the small win currently being executed is terminated.

The above-mentioned winning counter is set to an initial value of "0" when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 checks the value of the winning counter, and if a value is set in the winning counter (i.e., "1" or more), it controls the opening of the variable winning device 65 depending on whether a big win game or a small win game is being played, while subtracting one from the winning counter value each time a ball is detected by the big win opening switch 65c. Then, when the winning counter value becomes "0", it is configured to end one round of the big win game or small win game being played.

In the process of S615, it is determined whether or not a small win is occurring (S615). If it is determined that a small win is occurring (S615: Yes), a small win opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 during the small win game (S616).

Now, with reference to FIG. 49, we will explain the small win opening/closing control process (S616), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this small win opening/closing control process (S616).

In this small win opening/closing control process (S616), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is performed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 has been opened (i.e., the opening counter) set in the winning process (S203).

In this small win opening/closing control process (S616), first, it is determined whether the value of the opening counter (not shown) is greater than "0" (S6001). If the result of the determination is that the opening counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the opening counter is "0" or less (S6001: No), there are no more openings of the variable winning device 65 during the small win game, so this small win opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S6001 is that the value of the opening counter is greater than "0" (S6001: Yes), then it is determined whether the opening time set in S613 of the winning process (S203) or the interval time set based on the small winning opening table 202h has elapsed (S6002). If the result of the determination is that the opening time or interval time for the small winning has not elapsed (S6002: No), it is not the time to open the variable winning device 65, so the processes of S6003 to S6005 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6006.

On the other hand, in the process of S6002, if the opening time or interval time at the time of the small win has elapsed (S6002: Yes), it is time to open the variable winning device 65, so first the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6003). Then, an opening time of 1 for the variable winning device 65 is set (S6004), and then a large winning port opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is generated and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S6005), and the process proceeds to S6006.

In the process of S6006, it is determined whether the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small win (S6006). If the result of the determination is that the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win (S6006: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open at the time of the small win, but is in the opening time or interval time, so the processes of S6007 and S6008 are skipped, this small win opening and closing control process (S616) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, in the process of S6006, if it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open at the time of the small win (S6006: Yes), first, a specific area device opening and closing control process is performed to control the opening and closing of the specific area 65d (S6007).

Now, with reference to FIG. 50, we will explain the specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007), which is one process of the small win opening/closing control process (S616) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007).

This specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007) controls the opening/closing of the specific area 65d during small win play.

In this specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007), first, it is determined whether the specific area 65d is open, i.e., whether the specific area solenoid 65f is turned on (S6101). If the result of the determination is that the specific area 65d is not open, i.e., if the specific area solenoid 65f is turned off (S6101: No), it is then determined whether the opening condition of the specific area 65d is met, i.e., whether the variable winning device 65 is open (S6102). If the result of the determination is that the opening condition of the specific area 65d is met, i.e., at the timing when the variable winning device 65 is opened (S6102: Yes), the specific area solenoid 65f is set from off to on to set the specific area 65d to open (S6103), and the process proceeds to S6104.

If it is determined in the process of S6101 that the specific area 65d is open, i.e., the specific area solenoid 65f is on (S6101: Yes), the processes of S6102 and S6103 are skipped and the process proceeds to S6104. Also, if the opening condition of the specific area 65d is not met in the process of S6102 (S6102: No), the processes of S6103 to S6105 are skipped, the specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the small winning opening/closing control process (see FIG. 49).

In the process of S6104, it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the specific area 65d is satisfied, i.e., if a ball is detected by the specific area switch 65g or if the opening time of the specific area 65d (for example, "30 seconds" since the opening of the specific area 65d) has elapsed (S6104: Yes), it is determined that the closing condition of the specific area 65d is satisfied, and in order to close the specific area 65d, the specific area solenoid 65f is set from ON to OFF, and the specific area 65d is set to be closed (S6105), and the specific area device opening/closing control process (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the small winning opening/closing control process (see FIG. 49).

In this way, the opening and closing control process for the specific area 65d is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the small win game, and the specific area 65d is opened during the small win game to allow the ball to pass through, making it possible to generate a jackpot game based on the small win game. Also, if the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d during the small win game, the game state at the time of the small win can be returned to without generating a jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 49, the explanation will continue. After the specific area device opening/closing control process of S6007, the large prize opening open process during a small win is then performed to determine the closing conditions of the open variable prize device 65 (S6008), and this small prize opening/closing control process (S616) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48).

Now, referring to FIG. 51, we will explain the process during the opening of the large prize opening during a small win (S6008), which is one process of the small prize opening/closing control process (S616) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the process during the opening of the large prize opening during a small win (S6008).

In this process for determining whether the large prize opening is open during a small win (S6008), a process is executed to determine whether the closing condition of the variable prize device 65 that is open during a small win game is met.

In this process (S6008) during the opening of the large prize opening during a small prize, first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of one of the variable prize winning devices 65 set in S6004 of the above-mentioned small prize opening/closing control process (S616) has elapsed (S6201). If the result of the determination is that the timing has not yet elapsed for the opening time of one of the variable prize winning devices 65 (S6201: No), it is then determined whether or not the large prize winning opening switch 65c has been turned on, i.e., whether or not a ball has entered the variable prize winning device 65 (S6202).

In the process of S6202, if the ball is detected by the large prize opening switch 65c and enters the variable prize device 65 (S6202: Yes), the prize counter value is decremented by 1 (S6203), and then it is determined whether the prize counter value after decrement is greater than "0" (S6204). If the prize counter value is not greater than "0" (S6204: No), that is, if the prize counter value is "0" or less, 10 or more balls have entered the variable prize device 65 and the end condition for the small prize game (the closing condition of the variable prize device 65) is met, so the process proceeds to S6205 to close the variable prize device 65.

In the closing process of the variable prize device 65 from S6205, first, the variable prize device 65 is set to be closed (S6205), then a large prize opening close command is set to the voice lamp control device 113 indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been closed (S6206), and the process proceeds to S6207. The large prize opening close command set in the process of S6206 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

Next, in the processing of S6207, since the condition for ending the small win game is met, the value of the opening counter is cleared to "0" (S6207), the processing for the large prize opening during the small win (S6008) is terminated, and the processing returns to the small win opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 49).

In the process of S6202, if it is determined that the large prize opening switch 65c is not turned on (S6202: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific area switch 65g is turned on (S6208). As a result of the determination, if the specific area switch 65g is turned on (S6208: Yes), since the ball passed through the specific area 65d while the specific area 65d was open during the small prize game, the large prize flag 203p is set to on (S6209) in order to generate a large prize game after the small prize game, and the process returns to the process during the large prize opening during the small prize game (S6008) and the small prize opening/closing control process (see FIG. 49). On the other hand, in the process of S6208, if it is determined that the specific area switch 65g is not turned on (S6208: No), the process of S6209 is skipped and the process returns to the process during the large prize opening during the small prize game (S6008) and the small prize opening/closing control process (see FIG. 49).

As a result, during a small win game, a big win game can be generated after the small win game based on the ball passing through the specific area 65d at the timing when the specific area 65d is open, thereby enriching the variety in which big win games are awarded and increasing the excitement of the game. On the other hand, if the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 65d during the small win game, the big win flag 203p will remain off, the big win game will not be executed, and the game state can be returned to the state it was in when the small win was won.

By configuring it in this way, the player can check the content of the right-hit notification when a small win is won, and if the player determines that, depending on the situation, a big win will not occur with that small win and that the expected number of balls that can be won would be higher if the player were to play with a left-hit when a small win is won, then the right-hit play will not be performed and the ball will not pass through the specific area 65d, thereby preventing the occurrence of a big win.

As a result, the content of the right-hit notification effect when a small win is won is switched depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed remaining until the rescue condition is met, and depending on the content of the right-hit notification effect, the player can choose between a right-hit playing method when a small win is won, or a left-hit playing method when a small win is won, creating new gameplay and increasing the excitement of the game.

If it is determined in the processing of S6201 that the opening time of one of the variable winning devices 65 has elapsed (S6201: Yes), the closing condition for opening one of the variable winning devices 65 is met, and it is time to close the variable winning device 65 during that opening, so the processing transitions to S6210 to close the variable winning device 65.

In the process of S6210, in order to close the variable winning device 65 that is open, the large winning opening solenoid 65b is turned from on to off, setting the variable winning device 65 to be closed (S6210), and then a large winning opening close command indicating the end of opening one of the variable winning devices 65 is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6211). The large winning opening close command set in the process of S6211 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the small prize opening close command, it executes a presentation to the effect that the variable prize device 65 has been closed. Note that since the variable prize device 65 opens and closes in a short time during a small prize game (opening in "0.1 seconds" and closing in "1.2 seconds"), the audio and lamp control device 113 may be configured not to execute a presentation associated with the opening and closing of one of the variable prize devices 65, even when it receives a large prize opening close command.

After the processing of S6211, the opening of one of the variable winning devices 65 has been completed, so the value of the opening counter is decremented by 1 (S6212), the processing during the opening of the large winning port during a small win (S6008) is terminated, and the process returns to the small win opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 49). This allows the variable winning device 65 to be opened the number of times set in the value of the opening counter during one round during a small win game.

Returning to the winning process (S203) in FIG. 48, the explanation will continue. After the small winning opening/closing control process of S616 (see FIG. 49) is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the opening counter is greater than "0" (S617). If the result of the determination is that the opening counter is greater than "0" (S617: Yes), the small winning is continued, so the process of S618, which is the small winning end setting process, is skipped, and this winning process (S203) is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S617, if the value of the opening counter is not greater than "0" (S617: No), that is, if the value of the opening counter is equal to or less than "0", all opening operations of the variable winning device 65 for this small win have been completed, so in order to end the small win state, small win end processing is performed (S618), and this win processing (S203) is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 52, we will explain the small win end process (S618), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this small win end process (S618).

In this small win end process (S618), first, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6301), and then, if the specific area 65d is open, a closing process for the specific area 65d is set (S6302). Then, a small win end setting process is performed (S6303) to execute various processes at the end of the small win, and this small win end process (S618) is ended, and the process returns to the win process (see FIG. 48).

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S615, if it is determined that the small win game is not being played (S615: No), it is then determined whether or not the big win game is being played (S619).
As a result of the determination, if it is determined that a jackpot is occurring (S619: Yes), a jackpot opening/closing control process is executed to control the opening/closing of the variable winning device 65 (S620).

Now, with reference to FIG. 53, we will explain the jackpot opening/closing control process (S620), which is one process of the winning process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620), the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 65 is performed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened, which was set in the winning process (S203).

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620), first, it is determined whether the opening time set in S607 of the winning process (S203) or the interval time set in S6510 (see FIG. 54) of the large prize opening open process (S6407) described later has elapsed (S6401). If the result of the determination is that the opening time or interval time at the time of the jackpot has not elapsed (S6401: No), it is not the timing to open the variable prize device 65, so the variable prize device 65 remains closed, and the process skips S6002 to S6005 and proceeds to S6406.

On the other hand, in the process of S6401, if the opening time or interval time at the time of the big win has elapsed (S6401: Yes), it is time to open the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6402), and then the winning counter (not shown) is set to "10" (S6403). Then, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 at the time of the big win ("30 seconds" in the first embodiment) is set (S6404), a big winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened is generated and set in the ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6406. The voice lamp control device 113 that receives this big winning opening opening command is configured to execute the fact that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third pattern display device 81, and to prompt the player to place a ball in the opened variable winning device 65.

In the process of S6406, it is determined whether the variable winning device 65 is open or not (S6406). If the result of the determination is that the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6406: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open, but is in the opening time or the interval time, so the process of S6407 is skipped, this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6406 that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6406: Yes), the process of the jackpot opening/closing control process is performed (S6407) to determine the closing condition of the open variable winning device 65, this jackpot opening/closing control process (S620) is terminated, and the process returns to the winning process (see FIG. 48).

Now, referring to FIG. 54, we will explain the process during the opening of the large prize opening (S6407), which is one process of the large prize opening control process (S620) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the process during the opening of the large prize opening (S6407).

In this large prize opening open process (S6407), a process is executed to determine whether the closing condition of the open variable prize device 65 is met.

In this large prize opening open process (S6407), first, it is determined whether the open time of the variable prize winning device 65 set in S6404 of the large prize opening/closing control process (S620) described above has elapsed (S6501). If the result of the determination is that the open time of the variable prize winning device 65 has elapsed (S6501: Yes), the closing condition of the variable prize winning device 65 is met, and it is time to close the variable prize winning device 65 in that round. Therefore, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6502), and the process proceeds to S6506 to close the variable prize winning device 65. The closing process of the variable prize winning device 65 from S6506 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6501, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has not elapsed (S6501: No), it is then determined whether the large winning port switch 65c has been turned on, i.e., whether a ball has entered the variable winning device 65 (S6503).

In the process of S6503, if it is determined that the large prize opening switch 65c has not detected a ball (S6503: No), this large prize opening open process (S6407) is terminated and the process returns to the large prize opening control process (see FIG. 53). On the other hand, if the large prize opening switch 65c detects a ball and the ball has entered the variable prize winning device 65 (S6503: Yes), the prize winning counter value is decremented by 1 (S6504), and then it is determined whether the prize winning counter value is greater than "0" (S6505). If the prize winning counter value is not greater than "0" (S6505: No), that is, if the prize winning counter value is less than "0", 10 or more balls have entered the variable prize winning device 65 and the closing condition of the variable prize winning device 65 is met, so the process proceeds to S6506 to close the variable prize winning device 65.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6505 that the value of the winning counter is greater than "0" (S6505: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not met, and in order to continue opening the variable winning device 65, the processes of S6506 to S6510 are skipped and this large prize opening open process (S6407) is terminated. After the large prize opening open process (S6407) is terminated, the process returns to the large prize opening control process (see FIG. 53).

In the closing process of the variable prize device 65 from S6506, first, the variable prize device 65 is set to be closed (S6506), then a large prize opening close command is set to the voice lamp control device 113 indicating that the variable prize device 65 has been closed (S6507), and the process proceeds to S6508. The large prize opening close command set in the process of S6507 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

Next, in the process of S6508, since one round of the variable winning device 65 has been consumed, the round counter value is decremented by 1 (S6508), and then it is determined whether the round counter value is greater than "0" (S6509). If the round counter value is greater than "0" (S6509: Yes), there is still a remaining number of rounds in the jackpot (remaining number of openings of the variable winning device 65), so the interval time (for example, "1 second") until the next variable winning device 65 is opened is set (S6510), this jackpot opening process (S6007) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 53).

On the other hand, in the processing of S6509, if the round counter value is not greater than "0" (S6509: No), i.e., if the round counter value is equal to or less than "0", all opening operations of the variable winning device 65 for this jackpot have been completed, so in order to end the jackpot state, no interval time is set (i.e., S6510 is skipped), the jackpot opening processing (S6007) is terminated, and the jackpot opening/closing control processing (see FIG. 53) is resumed.

Returning to the hit process (S203) in FIG. 48, the explanation will continue. After the jackpot opening/closing control process of S620 (see FIG. 53) is completed, it is then determined whether the round counter value is greater than "0" (S621). If the result of the determination is that the round counter value is greater than "0" (S621: Yes), the jackpot state is continued, so the process of S622, which is the jackpot end setting process, is skipped and this hit process (S203) is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S621, if the round counter value is not greater than "0" (S621: No), i.e., if the round counter value is equal to or less than "0", all opening operations of the variable winning device 65 for this jackpot have been completed, so in order to end the jackpot state, jackpot end processing is performed (S622), and this win processing (S203) is terminated.

Now, with reference to FIG. 55, we will explain the jackpot end process (S622), which is one process of the jackpot process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S610).

In this jackpot end process (S622), the values of each time-saving counter are set based on the type of jackpot that was won (a jackpot based on a small jackpot type) and the game state at the time of the win.

In this jackpot end process (S622), first, in order to activate the "high probability time-saving function", the time-saving high probability flag 203k is set to ON (S6601). Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot was won in the "normal gaming state" (S6602). If the result of the determination is that the jackpot was not won in the "normal gaming state" (S6602: No), the process proceeds to S6604.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S6602 is that the jackpot was won in the "normal game mode" (S6602: Yes), then it is judged whether or not the jackpot type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" (jackpot based on the small jackpot type) was won (S6603), and if the jackpot type "Time-saving B" or "Time-saving C" (jackpot based on the small jackpot type) was not won (S6603: No), the process proceeds to S6604.

In the processing of S6604, the special chart 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "7" (S6604), then the special chart 2 time-saving counter 203n is set to "5" (S6605), the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "12" (S6606), and the processing proceeds to S6610.

If it is determined in the processing of S6603 that a jackpot type "Time-saving C" (a jackpot based on a small jackpot type) has been won (S6603: Yes), the special chart 1 time-saving counter 203m is set to "7" (S6607), then the special chart 2 time-saving counter 203n is set to "1" (S6608), the total time-saving counter 203o is set to "8" (S6609), and processing proceeds to S6610.

In the process of S6610, an ending command indicating the start of the big win ending performance is set for the audio and lamp control device 113 (S6610). The ending command set in the process of S6610 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the audio and lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40). When the audio and lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it executes the big win ending performance.

After the processing of S6611 is completed, an ending time (e.g., "10 seconds") is set according to the game status (S6611), a jackpot end setting process is performed (S6613) to execute various processes at the end of the jackpot, this jackpot end process (S622) is terminated, and the process returns to the win process (see FIG. 48).

Next, referring to FIG. 56, we will explain the general map change processing (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this general map change processing (S211).

This normal symbol variation process (S211) controls the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83 due to the passage of the ball through the through gate 67.

In this normal symbol change process (S211), first, it is determined whether the normal electric role 72 is currently protruding (operating) or not, i.e., whether or not a normal symbol is winning (S701). If the result of the determination is that the normal electric role 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), since a normal symbol is winning, the normal symbol change process (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the normal electric role 72 is not projecting (S701: No), the normal symbol is not winning, so it is next determined whether the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is variable display of the normal symbol (S702). If the result of the determination is that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is not variable display of the normal symbol (S702: No), it is next determined whether a predetermined time (e.g., "1 second") has elapsed since the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stopped (S703). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the variable display stopped (S703: No), this normal symbol variable processing (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stopped symbol in the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the stopped symbol can be visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S703 is that a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped (S703: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the regular reserved ball count counter 203g (the number of reserved balls HN for the variable display operation related to the regular pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S704).

If the result of the processing in S704 is that the value of the regular reserved ball counter 203g (number of operating reserved balls HN) is not greater than "0" (S704: No), this means that there are no reserved balls for the variable display of the regular pattern to be executed, so this regular pattern change processing (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if the value of the regular reserved ball counter 203g (number of operating reserved balls HN) is greater than "0" (S704: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable display for the reserved regular pattern, and first, the value of the regular reserved ball counter 203g (number of operating reserved balls HN) is decremented by one (S705). This is because the number of reserved balls for the regular pattern is reduced by one as the execution of one of the variable displays for the reserved regular pattern is started by the processing described later (S706 to S712).

Then, the data stored in the regular map reserved ball storage area 203h is shifted (S706). This data shift process shifts the data stored in the regular map reserved areas 1 to 4 of the regular map reserved ball storage area 203h sequentially toward the regular map reserved ball execution area 203i, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: regular map reserved area 1 → regular map reserved ball execution area 203i, regular map reserved area 2 → regular map reserved area 1, regular map reserved area 3 → regular map reserved area 2, regular map reserved area 4 → regular map reserved area 3, etc.

After the data shift process of S706, in order to execute the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 based on the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i by the data shift process (i.e., the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4), first, it is determined whether the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on (S707). If the result of the determination is that the time-saving low probability flag 203j and the time-saving high probability flag 203k are not turned on (S707: No), it is determined that the "normal game state" in which the "time-saving function" is disabled is in effect, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "15 seconds" (S708), and the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S707: Yes), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is in an active "normal pattern high probability time-saving state" or "normal pattern low probability time-saving state," and the variable display time of the normal pattern is set to "0.1 seconds" (S709), and processing proceeds to S710.

In the process of S710, it is determined whether the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on (S710), and if the time-saving high probability flag 203k is not turned on (S710: No), that is, in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the normal pattern winning counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i is determined by referring to the group for the low probability state in the normal pattern winning random number table 202i, and the stopping pattern of the variable display of the normal pattern (i.e., the winning or losing of the normal pattern) is determined (S711). Also, if the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on (S710: Yes), that is, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the normal pattern winning counter C4 stored in the normal pattern reserved ball execution area 203i is determined by referring to the group for the high probability state in the normal pattern winning random number table 202i, and the stopping pattern of the variable display of the normal pattern (i.e., the winning or losing of the normal pattern) is determined (S712). After processing S711 and S712, this normal change processing (S211) ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

By changing the probability of winning or losing the normal symbol depending on the game state, when the player hits to the right, it is possible to create a difference in whether the normal electric role 72 is likely to open when the ball passes through the through gate 67. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric role 72 is likely to open (i.e., a high probability state of the normal symbol) and the ball is likely to flow into the second starting hole 71, or the normal electric role 72 is more difficult to open than it is easy to open (i.e., a low probability state of the normal symbol) and the ball flows down the front of the closed (submerged) normal electric role 72 and can flow into the variable winning device 65, depending on the game state, creating different playability for each game state.

In the process of S702, if it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is being variable displayed (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S713). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the process of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not elapsed (S713: No), the display of the normal symbol display device 83 is updated (S714), this normal symbol variable process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the variable display time for the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S713: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopping symbol previously set by S711 or S712 is set for the normal symbol display device 83 (S715), this normal symbol variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 is set based on this normal symbol variable process (S211), and the "○" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit from the start of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 until the variable display time has elapsed. Then, if the variable display result is a win, the "○" symbol is lit, whereas if it is a loss, the "X" symbol is lit.

Next, referring to FIG. 57, we will explain the normal electric control process (S204), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this normal electric control process (S204).

This normal electric role control process (S204) executes drive control for opening and closing (projecting and sinking) the normal electric role 72 according to the game state when a normal symbol win occurs. That is, it sets the opening (projecting) time of the normal electric role 72 according to the game state, drives the normal electric role 72 to open based on the set time, and executes control to close (retract) the open (projecting) normal electric role 72 when the set protruding time has elapsed.

In this normal electric role control process (S204), first, it is determined whether the normal electric role 72 is open (protruding), i.e., whether or not a normal symbol is winning (S801). If it is determined that the normal electric role 72 is not open (S801: No), i.e., if it is determined that the normal symbol is not winning, it is next determined whether or not the variable display of the normal symbol has ended (S802).

If the result of the determination in S802 is that the variable display of the normal symbols has not ended (S802: No), the normal electric control process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if the variable display of the normal symbols has ended (S802: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a winning combination has been achieved in the variable display (S803).

If it is determined in S803 that the variable display has not won (S803: No), the normal electric control process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display has won (S803: Yes), in order to execute control related to the winning win, it is first determined whether the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is turned on (S804).

If it is determined in S804 that the time-saving low probability flag 203j and the time-saving high probability flag 203k are not on (S804: No), it is determined that the state is a "normal game state" in which the "time-saving function" is disabled, and the opening time of the normal electric role 72 in the winning state is set to "0.1 seconds" based on the contents of the normal electric role opening table 202k (S805), and the value of the electric role counter (not shown) is set to "1" (S806) in order to open the normal electric role 72 based on the winning once, and the process proceeds to S809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S804 that the time-saving low probability flag 203j or the time-saving high probability flag 203k is on (S804: Yes), it is determined that the "time-saving function" is in an active "normal high probability time-saving state" or "normal low probability time-saving state", and the opening (immersion) time of the normal electric role 72 in the winning state is set to "5.8 seconds" based on the contents of the normal electric role opening table 202k (S807), and the value of the electric role counter (not shown) is set to "1" in order to open the normal electric role 72 based on the winning once (S808), and the processing proceeds to S809.

In the processing of S809, the normal electric switch 72 is opened (protruded) (S809), the normal electric switch 72 that was in a closed (retracted) state is driven to an open state, this normal electric switch control processing (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

In this way, when a player hits from the right, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 reaches the position of the normal electric role 72, and the time that the normal electric role 72 is open can be different. As a result, by varying the game state depending on whether the ball that passes through the through gate 67 is in a state where it is likely to be guided toward the second starting hole 71, or in a state where the normal electric role 72 is closed and the ball flows down the front of the normal electric role 72 toward the variable winning device 65, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

If it is determined in the process of S801 that the normal electric role 72 is open (S801: Yes), i.e., if it is determined that a normal symbol is winning, it is then determined whether the opening time of the normal electric role 72 set in S805 or S807 has elapsed (S810). If it is determined as a result of the determination that the opening time of the normal electric role 72 set has not elapsed (S810: No), in order to maintain the open state of the normal electric role 72, the processes of S811 to S813 are skipped, this normal electric role control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S810 that the set opening time of the normal electric role 72 has elapsed (S810: Yes), first, the closing (immersion) process of the normal electric role 72 is performed (S811), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the electric role counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether the subtracted electric role counter value is greater than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric role counter is greater than "0" (S813: Yes), since the number of openings of the normal electric role 72 based on the hit remains, the process proceeds to S809, and a predetermined interval process is performed, and then the opening process of the normal electric role 72 is performed again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the electric role counter is not greater than "0" (S813: No), that is, if the value of the electric role counter is less than or equal to "0", this means that all openings of the normal electric roles 72 based on the win have been completed, so the normal electric roles 72 are not reopened, the normal electric role control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

Next, the base value processing (S251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this base value processing (S251). In this base value processing (S251), the base value is calculated (measured) and the base value is displayed.

In this base value process (S251), first, a base value calculation process is executed (S851). In this base value calculation process, a real-time base value is calculated (measured), and when the total number of outs reaches 60,000, the real-time base value data is shifted to the previous real-time base value data.

Next, it is determined whether or not 5 seconds have passed since the last time the base value processing (S853) was executed (S852), and if 5 seconds have passed since the last time the base value processing (S853) was executed (S852: Yes), the base value display processing is executed (S853), processing is executed to display the base value on the base display device 401, and this base value processing (S251) is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S852, if 5 seconds have not elapsed since the last execution of the base value process (S853) (S852: No), the process of S853 is skipped and this base value process (S251) is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, we will explain the NMI interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 110 when a power outage or the like occurs. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power outage occurrence information is stored in RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 suspends the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power outage occurrence information in RAM 203 as the setting of the power outage occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Figs. 60 to 70. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into start-up processes (see Fig. 60) that are started when the power is turned on, and main processes (see Fig. 61) that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, referring to FIG. 60, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 61) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, it executes the power-off processing of S1116. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on to set the update end state, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1116 is in progress can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1116 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S1116 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No) and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S1116 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 61). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, so the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag on when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S1116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the working area of RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of RAM 223 (S1010), the break-even number "543" obtained from the break-even number table 222f is set in the break-even number storage area 223k (S1021), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. The working area of RAM 223 refers to the area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control unit 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off, the process reaches S1008 because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in a setting value memory (not shown) (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 61).

In this way, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, by waiting to transition to the main process (see FIG. 61) until receiving the setting value command generated at the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37), the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 and execute the main process and subsequent processes based on the probability setting value. Also, if a setting value command is not received from the main control device 110, the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 has not been reached and the startup process of the main control device 110 has not ended normally, so the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is not ended normally and the transition to the main process is not made. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp whether the startup process of the main control device 110 has been executed normally, and it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from running out of control when the main control device 110 has not started up normally.

Next, referring to FIG. 61, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the last execution of the process of S1101 (S1101). If "1 millisecond" or more has not passed (S1101: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1110 without executing the processes of S1102 to S1109. The reason for determining whether or not "1 millisecond" has passed in the process of S1101 is that, while S1102 to S1109 do not need to be executed in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond"), the variable performance process of S1110 and the command determination process of S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1110 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the settings related to the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If it is determined in the process of S1101 that "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was last executed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. Note that if the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 60, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107 described later is set (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without notifying the user by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a winning effect process is performed to execute an effect related to a big win set by the command determination process of S1111 described later (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106. Note that in the first embodiment, a predetermined effect (e.g., an effect indicating that the variable winning device 65 has been opened or an effect notifying a right hit) is executed while the variable winning device 65 is open for a big win and a small win with the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Details of this winning effect process (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect of the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed is monitored, and if input of the frame button 22 is confirmed during the valid period, a corresponding effect is set to be performed.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S1106) is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S1108, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S1109), and processing proceeds to S1110. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S1108 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1110, in order to display a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable performance process corresponding to the first special pattern or the second special pattern is executed based on the special pattern 1 variable pattern command and the special pattern 1 stop type command, or the special pattern 2 variable pattern command and the special pattern 2 stop type command received from the main control device 110 (S1110), and the process proceeds to S1111. Details of this variable performance process (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110 (S1111), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

At S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, the counter that determines the detailed change pattern of the change performance and the pending change counter (not shown) that draws the "pending change notice" are updated during this counter update process. The counter is updated by incrementing it by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, "0 to 99") and resetting it to "0" after it reaches the maximum value ("99").

After the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power outage processing is executed (S1116). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and the processing is then executed in an infinite loop. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 223 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 223 (S1114), and if RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

If it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display on the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. This allows the player to know that an abnormality has occurred, and he or she can call a hall attendant or the like and ask for repairs to the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 has been destroyed, the sound output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 110 in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). If the result of the determination is that a command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a command related to the dynamic display (variation performance) of the first special pattern (i.e., special pattern 1 variation pattern command, special pattern 1 stop type command, special pattern 1 determination command, etc.) has been received from the main control device 110 (S1202). Then, if it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variation performance) of the first special pattern has been received (S1202: Yes), a special pattern 1 command process is performed to execute each process related to the command (S1203), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 61) is returned to.

Here, referring to FIG. 63, we will explain the special chart 1 command processing (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this special chart 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special symbol 1 command processing (S1203), various setting processes are executed regarding the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110.

In the special symbol 1 command process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 1 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1231). If the result of the determination is that a special symbol 1 variation pattern command has been received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special symbol 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used in the variation presentation process (see FIG. 66) described below when setting a display special symbol 1 variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation presentation of the first special symbol and its variation pattern type depending on the game status. After that, this special symbol 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special chart 1 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type command has been received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special chart 1 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used when setting a display special symbol 1 stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the first special symbol variable performance according to the game status in the variable performance process (see FIG. 66) described later. After that, the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223a, which indicates that the variable performance of the first special symbol will start, is set to on (S1235), and the special symbol 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

The special symbol 1 stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control device 110 after the main control device 110 sends the special symbol 1 variation pattern command when starting the variation performance of the first special symbol, as a command indicating the stop type of the variation performance of the first special symbol whose variation pattern is indicated by the special symbol 1 variation pattern command. By setting the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a on by the processing of S1235, in the variation performance processing (see FIG. 66) executed later, a determination is made as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1, etc., included in the first reserved ball number command matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received special symbol 1 variation pattern command. Also, a determination is made as to whether or not the stop type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1, etc., included in the first reserved ball number command matches the stop type of the variation performance of the first special symbol extracted from the received special symbol 1 stop type command. If, as a result of these judgments, in the variation presentation of the first special pattern 1, the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the special pattern 1 variation pattern command, or if the stop type based on the first reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the special pattern 1 stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (for example, an abnormality in command reception due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

If it is determined that the special symbol 1 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1233 (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1236). The special symbol 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the first special symbol variable performance when the first special symbol variable performance is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), a display special symbol 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the first special symbol variable performance when the first special symbol variable performance is being executed is set to the display control device 114 (S1237), and this special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 62) is returned to.

When the display control device 114 receives a display special pattern 1 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, if the third pattern display device 81 is executing a variable performance of the first special pattern, it confirms and displays the variable performance of the first special pattern, but if the third pattern display device 81 is not executing a variable performance of the first special pattern, it is configured to ignore the display special pattern 1 confirmation command (do not execute processing based on, do not change the display content based on).

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1236 that the special symbol 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1236: No), processing related to other first special symbol variable performances is performed (S1238), the special symbol 1 command processing (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variable performance) of the first special symbol has not been received (S1202: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol (i.e., a special symbol 2 variable pattern command, a special symbol 2 stop type command, or a special symbol 2 determination command, etc.) has been received from the main control device 110 (S1204). Then, if it is determined that a command related to the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol has been received (S1204: Yes), a special symbol 2 command process is performed to execute each process related to the command (S1205), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 61) is returned to.

Here, referring to FIG. 64, we will explain the special chart 2 command processing (S1205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this special chart 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205), various setting processes are executed regarding the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control unit 110.

In the special symbol 2 command process (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1251). If the result of the determination is that a special symbol 2 variation pattern command has been received (S1251: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special symbol 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1252).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used in the variation presentation process (see FIG. 66) described below when setting a display special symbol 2 variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation presentation of the second special symbol and its variation pattern type depending on the game status. After that, this special symbol 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change pattern command has not been received (S1251: No), then it is determined whether or not the special pattern 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1253). Then, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 stop type command has been received (S1253: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special pattern 2 stop type command (S1254).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is used when setting a display special symbol 2 stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable performance of the second special symbol according to the game status in the variable performance process (see FIG. 66) described later. After that, the special symbol 2 variable start flag 223b, which indicates that the variable performance of the second special symbol will start, is set to on (S1255), and the special symbol 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

The special symbol 2 stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control unit 110 after the main control unit 110 sends the special symbol 2 variation pattern command when starting the variation performance of the second special symbol, as a command indicating the stop type of the variation performance of the second special symbol whose variation pattern is indicated by the special symbol 2 variation pattern command. By setting the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223b on by the processing of S1255, in the variation performance processing (see FIG. 66) executed later, a determination is made as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1, etc., included in the second reserved ball number command matches the variation pattern type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received special symbol 2 variation pattern command. Also, a determination is made as to whether or not the stop type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted based on the values of each counter C1, etc., included in the second reserved ball number command matches the stop type of the variation performance of the second special symbol extracted from the received special symbol 2 stop type command. If, as a result of these judgments, in the variation presentation of the second special pattern 1, the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the special pattern 2 variation pattern command, or if the stop type based on the second reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the special pattern 2 stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (for example, an abnormality in command reception due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

If it is determined that the special symbol 2 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1253 (S1253: No), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1256). The special symbol 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable performance of the second special symbol when the variable performance of the second special symbol is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that this special symbol 2 confirmation command has been received (S1256: Yes), a display special symbol 2 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variable performance of the second special symbol when the variable performance of the second special symbol is being executed is set to the display control device 114 (S1257), and this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 62) is returned to.

When the display control device 114 receives a display special pattern 2 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, if the third pattern display device 81 is executing a variable performance of the second special pattern, it confirms and displays the variable performance of the second special pattern, but if the third pattern display device 81 is not executing a variable performance of the second special pattern, it is configured to ignore the display special pattern 2 confirmation command (do not execute processing based on, do not change the display content based on).

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1256 that the special symbol 2 confirmation command has not been received (S1256: No), processing related to other second special symbol variable performance is performed (S1258), this special symbol 2 command processing (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1204, if it is determined that a command for the dynamic display (variable performance) of the second special pattern has not been received (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not a first reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1206). Then, if it is determined that a first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 5) of the main control unit 110 included in the first reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S1207). Then, the values of the big win random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the small win type counter CK, which are also included in the first reserved ball number command, are stored in the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c updated in S1207 (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command that notifies the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number for the variable performance of the first special pattern is set (S1209), and this command judgment process (S1111) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 61) is returned to.

Here, the first reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first start hole 64 (start winning), so each time there is a start winning, the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1207. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 when the start winning is detected.

The voice lamp control device 113 can also execute pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1, C3, CS, and CK stored in the first pending information storage area 223e. In other words, it can determine what the result of a pending first special symbol variable effect will be when it is executed (whether it will result in a jackpot, what the variable effect time will be, etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and can then decide to execute various effects.

If it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1206 (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1210). Then, if it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 5) of the main control unit 110 included in the second reserved ball number command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S1211). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the small jackpot type counter CK, which are also included in the second reserved ball number command, are stored in the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d updated in S1211 (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command that notifies the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number for the variable performance of the second special pattern is set (S1213), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 61) is returned to.

The second reserved ball count command is sent from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the second start hole 71 (start winning), so each time there is a start winning, the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 by processing in S1211. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 when the start winning is detected.

The voice lamp control device 113 can also execute pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1 to C3, CS, and CK stored in the second reserved information storage area 223f. In other words, it can determine the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what the variable time will be, etc.) when the variable performance of the reserved second special symbol is executed before the variable performance is executed, and decide to execute various types of performance.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1210 that the second reserved ball count command has not been received (S1210: No), then a rescue-related command reception process is executed to determine whether or not various rescue-related commands have been received from the main control unit 110 (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1215.

Now, referring to FIG. 65, we will explain the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this rescue-related command reception process (S1214).

In this rescue-related command reception process (S1214), various setting processes are performed based on each rescue-related command sent from the main control unit 110.

In the rescue-related command reception process (S1214), first, it is determined whether or not a rescue setting command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1277). If the result of the determination is that a rescue setting command has been received (S1277: Yes), the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is set to ON (S1278), the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

If it is determined in the processing of S1277 that a rescue setting command has not been received (S1277: No), then it is determined whether or not a rescue counter command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1279). If the result of the determination is that a rescue counter command has been received (S1279: Yes), the corresponding information is stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i (S1280), this rescue-related command reception processing (S1214) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S1279 that a rescue counter command has not been received (S1279: No), this rescue-related command reception processing (S1214) is terminated and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 62).

Returning to FIG. 62, the explanation will be continued. After the rescue-related command reception process of S1214 is completed, the process according to the other command is then executed (S1215), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 61). If the other command received is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223. If the other command is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a demo command for display by the process of S1215, temporarily stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S1102) of the main process.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, the variable performance process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this variable performance process (S1110).

This variable presentation process (S1110) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 61), and executes various processes for executing a variable presentation of the first or second special symbol in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third pattern display device 81 depending on the game status. Specifically, when the start condition for the variable presentation of the first special symbol is met, it is configured to perform a variable presentation of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. Also, when the start condition for the variable presentation of the second special symbol is met, it is configured to perform a variable presentation of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

In the change performance processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 change start flag 223a provided in RAM 223 is on or not (S1301). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), since both the special symbol 1 variation pattern command and the special symbol 1 stop type command have been received, the special symbol 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off to start the variation performance of the first special symbol (S1302), and then the data included in the first reserved information storage area 1 provided in the first reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g (S1303), and further the data included in the first reserved information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the first reserved information storage area 223e is shifted to the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 3 (S1304), the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306.

In other words, in this case, the number of reserved first special pattern variable performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first special pattern variable performance that is reserved first in time is started, so the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, CK stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first reserved information first area corresponding to the first reserved variable performance are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the first special pattern variable performance that is being executed. In addition, the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage first area, the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved information storage area 223e will store the same values as the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the first reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control unit 110, respectively.

In the process of S1306, the first reserved ball count command for display is set based on the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c subtracted in the process of S1305 (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307.

The first reserved ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 according to the reserved ball number for the variable performance of the first special pattern indicated by this first reserved ball number command for display.

Next, in the processing of S1307, a display special symbol 1 variation pattern command setting process is executed to display the variation performance of the first special symbol (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1308.

Now, referring to FIG. 67, we will explain the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307).

This display special symbol 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) is executed within the variation performance process (see FIG. 66), and based on the values of the counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, a variation pattern for the first special symbol variation performance to be executed is obtained, and a display special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set to display the first special symbol variation performance in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern.

In this process for setting the display special chart 1 variation pattern command (S1307), first it is determined whether or not it is in the "normal game state" (S1351), and if it is in the "normal game state" (S1351: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is a variation pattern for re-variation (see FIG. 16(b)) (S1355), and if it is a variation pattern for re-variation (S1355: Yes), a re-variation performance command for display is set (S1356), and the process proceeds to S1357.

Also, if the result of the determination in S1355 is that the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110 is not a variation pattern for re-variation (S1355: No), the process in S1356 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1357.

In the processing of S1357, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control unit 110 is a fluctuation pattern for promotion performance (see FIG. 16(b)) (S1357), and if it is a fluctuation pattern for promotion performance (S1357: Yes), a promotion performance command for display is set (S1358), this display special chart 1 fluctuation pattern command setting processing (S1307) is terminated, and the fluctuation performance processing (see FIG. 66) is returned to.

Also, if the result of the judgment in S1357 is that the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is not a fluctuation pattern for promotion performance (S1357: No), the process proceeds to S1359. Furthermore, if the process in S1351 judges that the game is not in a "normal game state" (S1351: No), the process also proceeds to S1359.

In the processing of S1359, other display special chart 1 variation pattern commands are set (S1359), this display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting processing (S1307) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation performance processing (see FIG. 66).

The display special pattern 1 change pattern command, display re-change performance command, and display promotion performance command set here are temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). The display control device 114 starts display control of the change performance of the first special pattern so that the change display of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is performed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 in the change pattern indicated by the display special pattern 1 change pattern command, display re-change performance command, and display promotion performance command.

In this embodiment, the display effect command is set according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, but the effect command may be set according to the game state. For example, a special effect may be executed from the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 until the variation display of a specific number of rotations is executed, or the effect may be changed according to the number of times the variation display has been executed since the previous big win (for example, the background is changed, the design is changed, or the variation effect itself is changed).

Returning to FIG. 66, the explanation will continue. When the display special symbol 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) is completed, in the process of S1308, in order to set the stop type command in the variation performance of the first special symbol, the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process is executed (S1308), this variation performance process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 61).

Now, referring to FIG. 68, the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308).

This display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) obtains the stop type of the first special symbol variable performance that is about to be executed based on the values of each counter C1, C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, and sets a display special symbol 1 stop type command to display the first special symbol variable performance in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type.

In addition, if a small win on special chart 1 is won, a stop type command is set when the small win on special chart 1 is won in order to distinguish the stop patterns after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the game status and various other conditions.

In this display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308), first, it is determined whether or not the special chart 1 small win, i.e., the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or "Time-saving C (small win A)" has been won (S1371). If the special chart 1 small win has not been won (S1371: No), a display special chart 1 stop type command based on the values of the other counters C1, C3, CS1, and CK is set (S1372), this display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 66).

If it is determined in the processing of S1371 that a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won (S1371: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the "normal game state A" is in effect (S1373), and if it is in "normal game state A" (S1373: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is turned on (S1374).

If the result of the judgment in S1374 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is in the off state (S1374: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process at power-on), so it is then judged whether the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1376), and the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or smaller than the break-even count storage area 223k. If the value is not smaller than the value stored in the count storage area 223k, i.e., if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1376: No), this means that a small win on special symbol 1 has been won during the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 28), so a display challenge symbol command is set (S1378) (see FIG. 89(c)), the display special symbol 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable presentation process (see FIG. 66).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1376, if the value of the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1376: Yes), this means that a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 28), and the process proceeds to S1377.

Also, if the result of the judgment in S1373 is not "normal game state A" (S1373: No), in this case too, the process proceeds to S1377. Furthermore, if it is judged in the processing of S1374 that the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is on (S1374: Yes), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has been reached once since the previous jackpot (or the initialization processing of RAM 203 when the power was turned on), and the game state cannot transition to the "normal low probability time shortened state", so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1377.

In the process of S1377, a small win pattern command for display is set (S1377) (see FIG. 89(a)), and the process of setting the display special pattern 1 stop type command (S1308) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 66).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to distinguish the stopped patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable performance depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A" (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met) and various other circumstances. As a result, when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won, the player is given the choice of whether to play right to generate a jackpot, or to not play right to generate a jackpot, and to return to "normal game state A" and execute the special pattern until the number of times the rescue condition is met, creating new gameplay and increasing the excitement of the game.

The display special symbol 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). When the display control device 114 is to confirm and display the first special symbol change effect executed by the display special symbol 1 change pattern command, the display re-change effect command, and the display promotion effect command set by the process of S1307, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display special symbol 1 stop type command.

Returning to the variation performance process (S1110) of FIG. 66, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), it is then determined whether or not the special chart 2 variation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1309). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 change start flag 223b is on (S1309: Yes), since both the special symbol 2 change pattern command and the special symbol 2 stop type command have been received, the special symbol 2 change start flag 223b is turned off to start the change performance of the second special symbol (S1310), and then the data included in the second reserved information storage first area provided in the second reserved information storage area 223f is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g (S1311), and further the data included in the second reserved information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second reserved information storage area 223f is shifted to the first reserved information storage first to third areas (S1312), the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314.

In other words, in this case, the number of reserved second special pattern change performances is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved second special pattern change performance is started, so the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the first reserved change performance are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the execution information storage area 223g corresponding to the second special pattern change performance currently being executed. In addition, the values of the counters C1-C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage first area, the values of the counters C1-C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of the counters C1-C3, CS1, and CK stored in the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1-223f5 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223g will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223f will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively.

In the process of S1314, a second reserved ball count command for display is set based on the value of the sub second reserved ball count counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1313 (S1314), and the process proceeds to S1315.

The second reserved ball number command for display set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved pattern in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 according to the reserved ball number for the variable performance of the second special pattern indicated by this second reserved ball number command for display.

Next, in the process of S1315, the change pattern of the change performance of the second special symbol to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, and a display special symbol 2 change pattern command is set to display the change performance of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the change pattern (S1315), and the process proceeds to S1316.

The display special symbol 2 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is then transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). The display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance of the second special symbol so that the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display special symbol 2 variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1316, the stop type of the variable performance of the second special pattern to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1, and CK stored in the execution information storage area 223g, and a display special pattern 2 stop type command is set to display the variable performance of the second special pattern in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type (S1316), and this variable performance process (S1110) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 61) is returned to.

The display special symbol 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 61). When the display control device 114 is to display the variable performance of the second special symbol executed by the display special symbol 2 variable pattern command set by the process of S1317, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display special symbol 2 stop type command.

Next, referring to FIG. 69, the winning effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this winning effect processing (S1105).

This winning effect processing (S1105) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and executes processing while the main control device 110 is playing a big winning game. In addition, in this winning effect processing (S1105), while the main control device 110 is playing a small winning game, a right-hit notification effect is executed based on the game state and various other conditions.

In this winning effect process (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won (S1401), and if a jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), the sub-rescue counter 223i is cleared to "0" as an initialization process (S1403).

Next, the sub-rescue setting completed flag 223j is set to OFF (S1404), other initialization processing is performed (S1405), and processing proceeds to S1406.

In the processing of S1406, processing related to the jackpot opening is executed (S1406), and then a right-hit notification command for jackpot display is set (S1407), and processing proceeds to S1411.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1401 that a big win has not been won (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not a small win has been won (S1408), and if a small win has been won (S1408: Yes), a right-hit notification display process is executed when a small win is won as display control to determine the content of the right-hit notification display to be performed when the small win is won (S1409), and the processing proceeds to S1410.

Now, referring to FIG. 70, we will explain the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won as display control.

This right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won is executed within the winning display process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the content of the right-hit notification display executed by the third pattern display device 81 during the opening time when a small win is won.

In this right-hit notification processing (S1409) when a small win is won, first it is determined whether or not it is in "normal game state A" (S1501), and if it is in "normal game state A" (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the type of small win that was won is a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)", i.e., whether or not it is a special chart 1 small win (S1502).

As a result of the judgment in S1502, if the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won (S1502: Yes), it is next judged whether the sub-rescue set flag 223j is on or not (S1503). If the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, that is, if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is in the off state (S1503: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the initialization process of RAM 203 when the power was turned on), so the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is then set to be smaller than the value stored in the break-even number storage area 223k. It is determined whether the value is equal to or larger than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1505), and if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k, that is, if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or larger than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1505: No), a special chart 1 small win has been won during the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 28), so a rescue priority notification command for display is set (S1509) (see FIG. 89(d)), the right-hit notification performance process (S1409) for when this small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning performance process (see FIG. 69).

In addition, in the process of S1505, if the value of the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1505: Yes), the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 28), so the process proceeds to S1506.

Furthermore, if the result of the judgment in S1501 is not "normal game state A" (S1501: No), even if any small win type is won, the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher if the player plays a right-hand hit to generate a big win, so the process moves to S1506. Also, if it is judged in S1502 that the won small win type is not a special chart 1 small win (S1502: No), in this case, too, the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher if the player plays a right-hand hit to generate a big win, so the process moves to S1506. Furthermore, if the sub-rescue setting flag 223j is turned on in the process of S1503 (S1503: Yes), the number of times the rescue condition has been established has been reached once since the previous big win (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power is turned on), and the game state cannot be transitioned to the "normal chart low probability time shortening state", and the expected value of the balls that can be won is higher if the player plays a right-hand hit to generate a big win, so the process moves to S1506.

In the processing of S1506, a big win priority notification command for display is set (S1506) (see FIG. 89(b)), the right-hit notification effect processing (S1409) when a small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning effect processing (see FIG. 69).

By configuring it in this way, the type of right-hit notification presentation to be executed by the third pattern display device 81 during the opening time when a small jackpot is won can be determined based on the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed when a small jackpot is won on special pattern 1 in "normal game state A" (the number of times remaining until the rescue condition is met) and various other circumstances. As a result, the player is given the choice of whether to execute a right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, or a left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, creating new gameplay possibilities and increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, if a special chart 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period and the rescue priority notification display (see Figure 89 (d)) is executed, and the player returns to "normal game state A" without performing right-hand play on that small win, even if the player wins the special chart 1 small win again before reaching the rescue condition establishment count and transitioning to the "normal chart low probability time shortened state", the right-hand notification display for that small win will be the rescue priority notification display.

In other words, if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A" and the rescue priority notification effect is executed in the right-hit notification effect of the small win, from then on, until a jackpot is generated, the right-hit notification effect when the small win on Special Chart 1 is won will be the rescue priority notification effect, and will not switch to the jackpot priority notification period effect.

On the other hand, let us assume that a player wins a small win on Special Chart 1, and a rescue priority notification is executed during the right-hand hit notification of the small win, and then wins a second small win on Special Chart 1 while playing using the left-hand play method when the small win was won, and a big win priority notification is executed during the second small win. In this case, even though the player avoided transitioning to a big win game in accordance with the rescue priority notification during the first small win on Special Chart 1 and continued playing with the left hand hit using the balls he had, the big win priority notification is executed during the second small win on Special Chart 1, which may cause the player to distrust the pachinko machine 10 and stop playing with the pachinko machine 10.

However, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, even if a player wins a small win on Special Chart 1 during the rescue priority notification period and then wins a small win on Special Chart 1 again while playing using the left-hand play method when a small win is won, the rescue priority notification period performance (see FIG. 89(d)) is executed in the same way as the previous time, so the player can feel at ease and continue to aim for the "shortened normal chart low probability time state."

Returning to the winning effect process (S1105) in FIG. 69, the explanation will continue. After the right-hit notification effect process in the case of a small winning in S1409 is completed, the other small winning effect process is then executed (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the processing of S1411, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is occurring (S1411), and if a jackpot is occurring (S1411: Yes), jackpot performance processing is executed (S1412), and this jackpot performance processing (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S1411 is that the big win is not occurring (S1411: No), then it is judged whether or not a small win is occurring (S1413), and if a small win is occurring (S1413: Yes), small win presentation processing is executed (S1414), and this winning presentation processing (S1105) is ended and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

If it is determined in the processing of S1413 that a small win is not occurring (S1413: No), the processing of S1414 is skipped, this winning presentation processing (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 61).

Next, with reference to Figs. 71 to 88, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 as display control will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into a main processing (see Fig. 71) that is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing (see Fig. 72(a)) that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing (see Fig. 72(b)) that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that if the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 71, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

When this main process is started by the MPU 231 when the power is turned on, it first executes the initial setting process associated with power-on (S2001). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initialized, and processing is performed to clear the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236. In addition, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2002). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 (see FIG. 30) is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231 indicating the end of the transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can determine that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so that it will not be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside the image controller 237. The MPU 231 may then read the information from this register or partial area of the built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby determining that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image 282 to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2002, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003).

This transfer instruction includes the starting address of character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to power-on variable image 283 is stored, the data size of that image data, destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and the starting address of the destination power-on variable image area 235b, and image controller 237 transfers image data corresponding to power-on variable image 283 from character ROM 234 to power-on variable image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image 283 to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2003, the simple image display flag 233a is then turned on (S2004). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) is executed, which instructs the image controller 237 to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described later (see FIG. 85(b)).

The simple image display flag 233a is also kept on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)). As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 72(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 72(b)) are executed so that the image-on image (power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283) shown in FIG. 30 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)).

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, and due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variable image 283 are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall staff can check the power-on main image 282 displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image 282 is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems when the power is turned on. Therefore, even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the main image 282 can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and a decrease in the efficiency of the operation check can be prevented.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transfer the power-on variable image 283 together with the power-on main image 282 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Therefore, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are received, the power-on variable image 283 shown in FIG. 30(b) and FIG. 30(c) can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image 282 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player can confirm that the lottery has been drawn reliably by the simple variable performance of the power-on variable image 283.

As described above, the power-on main image 282 continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the time for which the power-on main image 282 continues to be displayed after the power is turned on is also long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image 283 transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image 282 is being displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S2004, interrupt permission is set (S2005), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2005, command interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(a)) and V interrupt processing (see FIG. 72(b)) are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 72(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 72(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2011), and the command interrupt process is terminated. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process (see S2022 in FIG. 72(b)) or the simplified command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 72(b)) of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 72(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 72(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the start of drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or the development of an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then each process will be described in detail with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 72(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233a is on or not (S2021). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2021: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, a simple command determination process (S2028) is executed to determine whether the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed or not, so that the power-on image shown in FIG. 30 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Next, a simple display setting process (S2029) is executed to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, and the process proceeds to S2404.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2021, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, i.e., is off (S2021: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in FIG. 30, a command determination process (S2022) is executed, then a display setting process (S2023) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S2024.

In the command determination process (S2022), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process (see FIG. 72(a)) are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table 232a1 or the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Furthermore, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the set display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. If a command related to the character display Se1 displayed during "reach display" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "character command") is stored, the additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the display mode of the character display Se1 is set in the additional data table buffer 233c.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds.

In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that display variable pattern commands, display stop type commands, character commands, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the display mode of the variable performance or the "reach display" character display Se1 selected by the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that a performance image corresponding to that display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 73 to 80.

In the display setting process (S2023), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table 232a1 and the additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table buffer 233c by the command determination process (S2022) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the determined effect is set in the display data table buffer 233b. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 81 to 84.

After the display setting process (S2023) is executed, task processing is then executed (S2024). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S2023) or the simplified display setting process (S2029), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2025). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233a is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233a is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Furthermore, when a character-related command or a rear image-related command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the character pattern used in a display mode other than the initial setting (default setting) of the character display Se1 or image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of this transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 85 to 87.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2026). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 36 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S2024), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2025), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Note that details of this drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88.

Next, an update process is performed on various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S2027). Then, this V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter that is updated by the process of S2027 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S2022), when reception of a display stop type command is detected, a stop type table (not shown) corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command ("10R time-saving big win", "9R time-saving big win", "4R time-saving big win", "small win (big win pattern)", "small win (challenge pattern)", "normal reach" presentation mode when missing, "super reach" presentation mode when missing, "special reach" presentation mode when missing, "non-reach" presentation mode, "special change" presentation mode) is compared with the stop pattern counter, and the stop pattern after the change presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

Next, with reference to Figs. 73 to 80, the details of the command determination process (S2022) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 73 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 73, in this command determination process, first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2101: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), it indicates that the new command has been processed, and the new command flag determined in the display setting process (S2023) is set to ON (S2102), and then the type of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S2103).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a command for displaying the number of reserved balls among the unprocessed commands (S2104). If there is a command for displaying the number of reserved balls (S2104: Yes), the command for displaying the number of reserved balls is processed (S2105), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2105) will be described with reference to FIG. 74(a). FIG. 74(a) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing executes processing corresponding to the reserved ball number command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the reserved ball count command process (S2105), first, a new reserved ball count command flag is turned on (S2121), which indicates that the reserved ball count command for display has been processed, and is determined in the display setting process (S2023). Next, the reserved ball count information contained in the reserved ball count command for display is obtained (S2122). Note that in the process of S2122, if two or more reserved ball count commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball count information is obtained from the reserved ball count command for display that was last stored. This makes it possible to obtain the latest reserved ball count information.

Then, among the number discrimination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number discrimination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls obtained in the processing of S2122 is turned on, and the number discrimination flags corresponding to the other numbers of reserved balls are turned off (S2123), this number of reserved balls command processing (S2105) is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing (see Figure 73).

As a result, in the display setting process (S2023), when the new reserved ball count command flag, which is in the update end state, is on, the reserved image data is expanded by referring to the number discrimination flag so that the reserved ball count pattern for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag that is set to on is displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 73, if it is determined in the processing of S2104 that there is no pending ball count command for display (S2104: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a demo command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2106), and if there is a demo command for display (S2106: Yes), demo command processing is executed (S2107) and processing returns to S2101.

Here, the demo command processing (S2107) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 74(b). FIG. 74(b) is a flowchart showing the demo command processing. This demo command processing executes processing corresponding to a display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the demo command process (S2107), first, the demo display data table 232a1 corresponding to the demo performance is selected from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2131). Next, Null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233c to clear its contents, and Null data is also written into the transfer data table buffer 233d to clear its contents (S2132). This is because the image drawing is specified in the demo display data table 232a1 so that image data required for drawing does not need to be newly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and therefore the corresponding transfer data table 232a3 is not prepared in the data table storage area 232a.

Then, the time data corresponding to the demo display is set in the timing counter 233g (S2133), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2134). Then, a demo display flag (not shown) indicating that a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the on state is set to on, a final command flag (not shown) indicating that a final display performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the on state is set to off, and further, the final display flag indicating that a final display performance is being performed in the on state is set to off (S2135), the demo command process (S2107) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 73).

When this demo command process (S2107) is executed, the display setting process (see FIG. 81) updates the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2134, extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e from the demo display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2131, and identifies the content of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the time of the demo effect defined in the demo display data table 232a1 is timed using the timing counter 233g, to which time data corresponding to the demo display has been set by the process of S2133. In addition, based on the state of the demo display flag and the final display flag set by the process of S2135, when it is determined in the display setting process that the demo effect in the demo display data table 232a1 has ended by the timing of the timing counter 233g, the demo effect is controlled to be displayed again as the effect to be displayed next.

Returning to FIG. 73 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2106 that there is no demo command for display (S2106: No), then it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, or a display determination command (hereinafter, the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the display determination command may be collectively referred to as "variable performance command") among the unprocessed commands (S2108), and if there is a variable performance command (S2108: Yes), variable performance command processing is executed (S2109), and processing returns to S2101.

Here, the variable performance command processing (S2109) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the variable performance command processing. As described above, this variable performance command processing executes processing corresponding to the variable performance command received from the voice lamp control device 113, which is the display variable pattern command, the display stop type command, or the display confirmation command.

In the variable performance command processing (S2109), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands (S2141), and if there is a display confirmation command (S2141: Yes), the confirmation command processing is executed (S2142), the variable performance command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2142) will be described with reference to FIG. 76(a). FIG. 76(a) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the confirmation command processing (S2142), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2151), which notifies the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) that a display confirmation command has been received in the ON state, and the confirmation command processing (S2142) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance command processing (see FIG. 75).

As a result, the display setting process (see FIG. 81) monitors the state of the confirmation command flag, and when the flag is turned on, executes the display setting process so that the display of the confirmation display effect begins on the third pattern display device 81. Also, when processing the display setting of the variable effect, if the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for that variable effect has elapsed, executes the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 75 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2141 that there is no display confirmation command (S2141: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2143), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2143: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2144), this variation performance command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2144) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76(b) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing (S2144), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display promotion performance pattern command set in the display special chart variation pattern command setting processing in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1356 in FIG. 67) among the unprocessed commands (S2161). If there is a display promotion performance pattern command (S2161: Yes), then the variation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display promotion performance pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table 232a1 is read out from the data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2162).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process (see FIG. 73), it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a risk that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2162, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table 232a1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

If the display data table for change 232a1 corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233b, if the main control device 110 actually instructs a change presentation with a shorter change time than the set display data table for change 232a1, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) will be received from the main control device 110 (audio lamp control device 113) while the change presentation according to the set display data table for change 232a1 is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the third pattern that is changing will suddenly be displayed as stopped, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the first embodiment, by setting the display data table for change 232a1 corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233b, even if the main control device 110 has actually instructed a change performance with a change time longer than the set display data table for change 232a1, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process (S2023) so that the restart performance is displayed until a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113) after the change performance according to the display data table buffer 233b has ended. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the restart performance as part of the change performance and continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling uncomfortable until the stop display of the third pattern is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to the variable display data table 232a1 set in S2162 is determined and read from the data table storage area 232a, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2163). Then, null data is written to the additional data table buffer 233c to clear its contents (S2164).

Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each display data table 232a1 for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table 232a1 for fluctuation set by the processing of S2162 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other display data tables 232a1 for fluctuation are set off (S2165). In the display control in the display control device 114, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S2165, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the display data table 232a1 for fluctuation set in the display data table buffer 233b corresponds to. Then, the display control device 114 determines whether there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set display data table 232a1 for fluctuation and the stop pattern set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the default fluctuation is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the processing of S2162, time data representing that variation time is set in the timing counter 233g (S2166), and the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2167). Then, the confirmation command flag, demo display flag, and confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2168), and further, the restart timer counter used in the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) is initialized to "0" (S2169), this variation pattern command processing (S2144) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation performance command processing (see FIG. 75).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2161 that there is no display promotion effect pattern command (S2161: No), other change pattern command processing is executed (S2170), this change pattern command processing (S2144) is terminated, and the process returns to the change effect command processing (see FIG. 75).

When this variable pattern command process (S2144) is executed, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), while updating the pointer 233e initialized by the process of S2167, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e are extracted from the variable display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the process of S2162, and the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are identified, and at the same time, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233e is extracted, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table 232a1 is controlled so that it is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table 232a1 is timed using the timing counter 233g, in which time data has been set based on the variable display data table 232a1 by the process of S2166. Then, when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table 232a1 has ended, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 (voice lamp control device 113), the confirmation display performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the variable performance has ended, the display settings are controlled so that a restart performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, prioritizing the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command would result in the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command not being performed, so it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

In contrast, in this variable performance command processing (S2109), the presence or absence of a display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command processing, which is the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the processing corresponding to the display variable pattern command is executed later, and as in the processing of S2168, the confirmation command flag set by the display confirmation command can be overwritten and set to off. Therefore, the processing of the display variable pattern command can be given priority over the display confirmation command, and the variable performance associated with the display variable pattern command can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with priority.

Similarly, if both a display demo command and a display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, prioritizing the processing corresponding to the display demo command would result in the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command not being performed, so it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

In contrast, in the command determination process (see FIG. 73), the presence or absence of a display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the process corresponding to the display variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the process of S2162, the demo display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b by the display demo command can be overwritten with the variation display data table 232a1. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be given priority over the display demo command, and the variation performance associated with the display variation pattern command can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with priority.

Returning to FIG. 75 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2143 that there is no display variable pattern command (S2143: No), the unprocessed command related to the variable performance is a display stop type command, so stop type command processing is executed (S2145), this variable performance command processing (S2109) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2145) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command ("10R time-saving big win", "9R time-saving big win", "4R time-saving big win", "small win (big win pattern)", "small win (challenge pattern)", "normal reach" presentation mode when missing, "super reach" presentation mode when missing, "special reach" presentation mode when missing, "non-reach" presentation mode, "special variation" presentation mode) is determined (S2175), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variation presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S2176).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S2176 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (S2177), this stop type command processing (S2145) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance command processing (see FIG. 75).

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table 232a1, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the variable display data table 232a1, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S2176 is described as type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S2176 is specified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S2177, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing (see FIG. 81) described later is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this specified third pattern is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least a few seconds apart, so the display control device 114 will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process (see FIG. 73), it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but it is possible that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S2175, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be "non-reach" and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern (for example, "456") corresponding to "non-reach", which is a "miss display", is set by the process of S2176.

If a stop pattern corresponding to a jackpot were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a jackpot stop pattern even if the result was actually a miss, which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 had reached a jackpot, lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, as in this embodiment, by setting a stop pattern corresponding to the "non-reach" presentation mode of the "miss display," if the result is actually a jackpot, the game state of the pachinko machine 10 will transition to a jackpot state even if the third pattern display device 81 displays a stop pattern corresponding to the "miss display," making the player happy.

Returning to FIG. 73 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2108 that there is no variable performance command (S2108: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit command among the unprocessed commands (S2110), and if there is a hit command (S2110: Yes), hit command processing is executed (S2111), and processing returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the win-related command processing (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the win-related command processing. This win-related command processing executes processing corresponding to commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 during a big win or small win.

In the winning command processing (S2111), first, it is determined whether or not there is a big win priority notification command for display that is set in the right-hit notification performance processing (see FIG. 70) of the voice lamp control device 113 when a small win is won among the unprocessed commands (S2181), and if there is a big win priority notification command for display (S2181: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2185. S2185 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2181 that there is no jackpot priority notification command for display (S2181: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rescue priority notification command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2183), and if there is a rescue priority notification command for display (S2183: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2185.

In the processing of S2185, the small win right hit notification command flag is set to ON (S2185). Then, among the small win right hit notification image discrimination flags provided for each small win right hit notification effect, the small win right hit notification image discrimination flag corresponding to the small win right hit notification effect indicated by the small win right hit notification command is set to ON, and the small win right hit notification image discrimination flags corresponding to the other small win right hit notification effects are set to OFF (S2186), this win-related command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the command determination processing (see FIG. 73) is returned to.

When the normal image transfer setting process (see Figures 86 and 87) detects that the small win right hit notification command flag set by the processing of S2185 is on, the small win right hit notification image type is identified from the small win right hit notification image discrimination flag set by the processing of S2186. Then, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to the identified small win right hit notification image type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the type of small win right hit notification image is identified from the small win right hit notification image discrimination flag set by the processing of S2186 based on the small win right hit notification command flag set by the processing of S2185, and the right hit notification image corresponding to that small win right hit notification image type is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined in the processing of S2183 that there is no display rescue priority notification command among the unprocessed commands (S2183: No), other hit command processing is executed (S2184), this hit-related command processing (S2111) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

Returning to FIG. 73 for further explanation, if it is determined in the process of S2110 that there is no winning command (S2110: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a command related to the character display Se1 displayed on the third pattern display device 81, such as a pattern command for weak pattern display, a pattern command for strong pattern display, or a color command for red character display (hereinafter, the pattern command and color command may be collectively referred to as "character command") among the unprocessed commands (S2112), and if there is a character command (S2112: Yes), character command processing is executed (S2113), and the process returns to S2101.

Here, the details of the character-based command processing (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the character-based command processing. This character-based command processing executes processing corresponding to the character-based command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the character command processing (S2113), it is first determined whether or not there is a pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2191), and if there is a pattern command (S2191: Yes), the character pattern memory 233j is set based on the received pattern command (S2192). Then, the process proceeds to S2195, and the character change command flag is set to ON (S2195). The character change command flag is configured to notify the normal image transfer setting process (see Figures 86 and 87), described later, that a character command including a pattern command has been processed in the ON state.

Next, the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is determined, the determined additional data table 232a2 for character patterns is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2196).

As a result, in the display setting process (see Figure 81), the display content of the next frame of image in the third pattern display device 81 is specified so that the display mode of the character display Se1 corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 for character patterns based on the character pattern memory 233j stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the processing of S2196 is additionally displayed for the performance corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, among the character change discrimination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change discrimination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the character pattern memory 233j is set to ON (S2197), this character-based command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 73).

The character change discrimination flag set here is configured to be set to off when the currently executed variable effect ends, i.e., when the confirmation command flag indicating that a display confirmation command has been received is on during the display setting process (see FIG. 81) (see S2314 in FIG. 81).

If it is determined in the process of S2191 that there is no pattern command (S2191: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a red text display command among the unprocessed commands (S2193), and if there is a red text display command (S2193: Yes), the red text flag 233k is set to ON (S2194), and the process proceeds to S2195.

In the processing of S2195 after S2194, just as in the case where a pattern-related command is received, the character change command flag is set to ON (S2195), which notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) described below that a character-related command, including a display red character command, has been processed in the ON state.

Next, the additional data table 232a2 for character color that corresponds to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k and the variable performance to be executed (display data table 232a1) is determined, the determined additional data table 232a2 for character color is read from the data table storage area 232a, and the additional data table 232a2 for character color is set in the additional data table buffer 233c (S2196).

As a result, in the display setting process (see Figure 81), the display content of the next frame of image in the third pattern display device 81 is specified so that the display mode of the character display Se1 corresponding to the additional data table 232a2 for character color based on the red character flag 233k stored in the additional data table buffer 233c by the processing of S2203 is additionally displayed for the performance corresponding to the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, among the character change discrimination flags provided for each character change image type, the character change discrimination flag corresponding to the character change image type indicated by the red character flag 233k is set to ON (S2197), this character-based command process (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 73).

Therefore, for example, if a pattern command and a display red character command have been received for the change performance, the character change discrimination flag will be set to on based on the pattern command and the character change discrimination flag will be set to on based on the display red character command.

Specifically, in the variation performance of 1, an example is shown in which a strong pattern command for display has been received as a pattern command, and a red character command for display has been received. In this case, the character change discrimination flag is set to a value indicating that when a reach occurs, the character display Se1 is displayed in a "strong pattern" and the display color of the character display Se1 is displayed in "red." Therefore, as the additional data table 232a2, an additional data table for character patterns 232a2 and an additional data table for character colors 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c.

If it is determined in the processing of S2193 that there is no red character display command (S2193: No), then other character command processing is executed (S2198), this character command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

When the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the first embodiment detects that the character change command flag set by the processing of S2195 is on in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) described below, it determines that a specified character change additional data table 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c by the character command processing (S2113), and identifies the character change image type corresponding to the character change additional data table 232a2 set in the additional data table buffer 233c from the character change determination flag set by the processing of S2197. It then issues an instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data required to display the identified character change image type.

Returning to FIG. 73 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2112 that there is no text-based command (S2112: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear-image-based command among the unprocessed commands (S2114), and if there is a rear-image-based command (S2114: Yes), rear-image-based command processing is executed (S2115), and processing returns to S2101.

Here, the rear image system command processing (S2115) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image system command processing. This rear image system command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image system command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image command processing (S2115), first, a rear image change flag is set to ON (S2202), which notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) described below of the change in the rear image resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the ON state, and processing proceeds to S2205.

In the processing of S2205, the rear image command flag is set to ON (S2205), and among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (rear image A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S2206), this rear image change command processing (S2113) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing (see FIG. 73).

In the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86), when it is detected that the rear image command flag set by the process of S2205 is on, the changed rear type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2206. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing (S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table 232a1, the back face type to be displayed at that time is identified from the back face image discrimination flag set by S2206, and further, the range of the back face image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which the image data corresponding to that range of the back face image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process (see FIG. 73), there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 73 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2114 that there is no rear-image related command (S2114: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2116), and if there is an error command (S2116: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2117), and the processing returns to S2101.

Here, the error command processing (S2115) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (S2117), first, an error occurrence flag that is in the ON state and indicates that an error has occurred is set to ON (S2211). Then, of the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag that corresponds to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S2212), the error command processing (S2117) is terminated, and the processing returns to the command judgment processing (see FIG. 73).

In the display setting process (Figure 81), when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2211, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2212, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S2212 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence situation.

Returning to FIG. 73 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S2116 that there is no error command (S2116: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2118), and processing returns to S2101.

In the process of S2101, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2101: Yes), the processes of S2102 to S2118 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2101 to S2118 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2101 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process (S2022) is terminated.

The simple command determination process (S2028) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) is similar to the command determination process (S2022). However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 30, i.e., the display table determination command, the display variation pattern command, and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the determination command process (see FIG. 76(a)), the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 76(b)), and the stop type command process (see FIG. 77), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to the commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 76(b)) executed in this case, the display data table 232a1 corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image 283 is set in the display data table buffer 233b in the processing of S2162, and since the image data of the power-on main image 282 and the power-on variation image 283 required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S2163, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233d and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figs. 81 to 84, the above-mentioned display setting process (S2023), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see Fig. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. Figs. 81 and 82 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process (S2023), first, as shown in FIG. 81, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2301). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S2301: No), it is determined that a new command was not processed in the command determination process executed earlier (see FIG. 73), and the processes of S2302 to S2306 are skipped and the process moves to S2307. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2301: Yes), it is determined that a new command was processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S2302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S2303 to S2306.

In the processing of S2303, it is determined whether the new reserved ball count command flag is on or not (S2303), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2303: Yes), it is determined that the reserved ball count command for display has been processed in the previous command determination processing (see FIG. 73), and the reserved image setting processing is executed (S2304).

Now, referring to FIG. 83(a), the details of the reserved image setting process (S2304) will be described. FIG. 83(a) is a flowchart showing the reserved image setting process. This reserved image setting process is a process for expanding image data for displaying the reserved patterns and execution patterns for the number of reserved balls notified by the voice lamp control device 113 in the initial setting (default setting, i.e., a "circle" pattern in "white") on the third pattern display device 81 in conjunction with the processing of the reserved ball number command for display.

In the reserved image setting process (S2304), first, the number discrimination flag is referenced, and reserved image data is expanded (S2341) to display the reserved patterns and execution patterns for the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number discrimination flag that is set to ON in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4(a)) of the third pattern display device 81. In the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the reserved image is identified based on this expanded reserved image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the new reserved ball count command flag is set to OFF (S2342), the reserved image setting process (S2304) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 81).

Returning to FIG. 81 for further explanation, after the reserved image setting process (S2304), or in the process of S2303, if the new reserved ball count command flag is not on (S2303: No), it is then determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2305). If the result of the determination is that the error occurrence flag is on (S2305: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2306).

Here, the warning image setting process (S2306) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 83(b). FIG. 83(b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81.

In the warning image setting process (S2306), first, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data is expanded (S2351) to display error warning images corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the third pattern display device 81. In the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S2352), the warning image setting process (S2306) is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 81).

Returning to FIG. 81 for further explanation, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., off, after the warning image setting process (S2306) or in the process of S2305 (S2305: No), then the pointer update process is executed (S2307).

Now, referring to FIG. 84, the details of the pointer update process (S2307) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is a process for updating the pointer 233e that specifies the address from which the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table 232a1, additional data table 232a2, and transfer data table 232a3 stored in the display data table buffer 233b, additional data table buffer 233c, and transfer data table buffer 233d, respectively.

In this pointer update process (S2307), first, the pointer 233e is incremented by 1 (S2361). That is, the pointer 233e is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) is executed. As described above, the various data tables 232a1 to 232a3 have "Start" information written at address "0000H" and the actual data is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" when the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b, the value is updated to "1" by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each of the data tables 232a1 to 232a3 in order from address "0001H".

After the value of pointer 233e is updated by the process of S2361, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233e in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b is "End" information (S2362). If the data is "End" information (S2362: Yes), this means that the pointer 233e has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363), and if it is the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: Yes), the pointer 233e is set to "1" (S2364), and further, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b is set in the timing counter 233g (S2365), and the process proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table 232a1 or the restart display data table 232a1, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo performance or the restart performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S2363, if it is determined that the display data table 232a1 stored in the display data table buffer 233b is neither the demo display data table 232a1 nor the restart display data table 232a1 (S2363: No), the value of the pointer 233e is decremented by 1 (S2366), and the process proceeds to S2367. As a result, in the display setting process (see FIG. 81), if a display data table 232a1 other than the demo display data table 232a1 and the restart display data table 232a1, for example, the variable display data table 232a1 or the final display data table 232a1, is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the "End" information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be displayed in a stopped state with the last image specified in the display data table 232a1.

Note that, in the process of S2362, if it is determined that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233e after updating in the process of S2361 in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b is not "End" information (S2362: No), the processes of S2363 to S2366 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2367.

In the process of S2367, it is determined whether the confirmation command flag is on (S2367), and if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2367: No), the pointer update process (S2307) is terminated as it is and the process returns to the display setting process (see FIG. 81). On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2367: Yes), this means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, so the value of the pointer 233e is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the "End" information is stored in the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2368). Then, the value of the time counter 233g is set to "1" (S2369), the pointer update process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when a confirmation command is received, the display setting process can develop the drawing content specified at the end of the set display data table 232a1 and control the start of the confirmation display performance.

Returning to FIG. 81 for further explanation, after the pointer update process (S2307), the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table 232a1 and additional data table 232a2 set in the display data table buffer 233b and additional data table buffer 233c (S2308). In the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is identified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S2308 together with the previously expanded pending image, warning image, etc., and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

In the first embodiment, when the display data table 232a1 is stored in the display data table buffer 233b and the additional data table 232a2 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233c, if drawing of the same sprite is set at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents indicated by the additional data table 232a2. As a result, the drawing contents of the sprite defined in the display data table 232a1 can be redefined in the additional data table 232a2, and the drawing contents of the display data table 232a1 can be changed to the drawing contents of the additional data table 232a2 and displayed.

In the first embodiment, the additional data table buffer 233c is configured to be able to store multiple additional data tables 232a2, but when multiple additional data tables 232a2 are stored in the additional data table buffer 233c and drawing of the same sprite is set at the address indicated by the pointer 233e, the drawing list is generated with priority given to the drawing contents indicated by the most recently stored additional data table 232a2. In other words, the storage order of the additional data tables 232a2 is stored, and the drawing contents of the most recently stored additional data table 232a2 can be displayed with priority, so that if the display contents are changed and then further changed, they can be displayed accurately.

When Null data is written in the additional data table 232a2, the subsequent processes are executed assuming that there is no sprite to add. Also, when the additional data table buffer 233c is cleared with Null data, Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233c.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233g is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233g after decrement is equal to or less than "0" (S2310). If the value of the timing counter 233g is not equal to or less than "0", that is, if the value is equal to or greater than "1" (S2310: No), the display setting process (S2023) is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2310, if the value of the timing counter 233g is "0" or less (S2310: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) should be sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 in conjunction with the end of that performance, so in the subsequent processing of S2311, it is checked whether the confirmation command flag is on (S2311).

If the result of the judgment in S2311 is that the confirmation command flag is on (S2311: Yes), this means that a confirmation command (display confirmation command) has been received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, so first, the confirmation display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the contents of the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are cleared by writing Null data to each of them (S2312).

Then, since the variable performance currently being performed ends, the contents set for that variable performance are cleared, i.e., the small win right hit notification command flag and the back image change flag are turned off (S2313), and the character pattern memory 233j, the red character flag 233k, and the character change discrimination flag are turned off (S2314). By configuring in this way, the contents set for that variable performance can be initialized each time one variable performance ends, so that, for example, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring such as the settings for the character display Se1 set in the previous variable performance appearing in the next variable performance.

Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time of the final display is set in the timing counter 233g (S2315), and furthermore, the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2316). Then, the final command flag is set to OFF (S2317), and then the final display flag, which indicates that the final display presentation is in progress in the "0" state (OFF state), is set to ON (i.e., "1") (S2318), and the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S2319), this display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)).

As a result, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 in conjunction with the end of the performance when the variable display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, the drawing content can be set so that the confirmation display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display unit 81.

In addition, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table 232a1 set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table 232a1. Compared to the conventional method of changing the display content by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load. Therefore, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S2319 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and the variable display data table 232a1 contains pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the display data table 232a1.

Therefore, in the task processing (see S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the stopping pattern of the previous fluctuation performance is identified from the previous stopping pattern discrimination flag set by S2319, and the third pattern to be actually displayed is identified by adding the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing to the identified stopping pattern. As a result, the fluctuation performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous fluctuation performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S2311, if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2311: No), the process proceeds to the process of S2320 shown in FIG. 82, and it is determined whether the confirmation display flag is on or not (S2320). Then, if the confirmation display flag is on (S2320: Yes), the fact that the value of the timing counter 233g is determined to be "0" or less in the process of S2310 (S2310: Yes) means that the confirmation display performance has ended. Therefore, after setting the confirmation display flag to off (S2321), the demo display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2322), and then the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display is set in the timing counter 233g (S2323). Then, the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2324), the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed when it is on, is set to on (S2325), the process moves to FIG. 81, this display setting process (S2023) ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)).

This allows the drawing content to be set so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance or a display demo performance command indicating the start of a demo performance is not received before the final display performance ends, the demo performance will be automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S2320, if it is determined that the confirmation display flag is on, that is, if the branch condition of Yes in S2320 is satisfied, the confirmation display effect is being performed, and in this case, the contents of both the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are cleared by the process of S2312. Therefore, in the process of S2322, the process of clearing these data table buffers 233c, 233d is omitted. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the MPU 231.

On the other hand, in the process of S2320, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2320: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S2326). If the demo display flag is on (S2326: Yes), the value of the timing counter 233g is determined to be "0" or less in the process of S2310 (S2310: Yes), which means that the demo performance has ended. Therefore, the process moves to FIG. 81, the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72 (b)). In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again as described above by the pointer update process (S2307) executed in the display setting process of the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

On the other hand, in the process of S2326, if the demo display flag is not on but off (S2326: No), the determination in the process of S2310 that the value of the timing counter 233g is equal to or less than "0" (S2310: Yes) means that the variable performance has ended. Therefore, if a confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the variable performance ended, in order to start the restart performance, the restart timer counter, which has been initialized to "0", is incremented by 1 in conjunction with the variable display data table 232a1 corresponding to the variable performance being set in the display data table buffer 233b (S2327), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after the increment has reached a predetermined value (for example, "100") (S2328).

If the restart timer counter is not the predetermined value (S2328: No), the process proceeds to FIG. 81, the display setting process (see FIG. 81) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). On the other hand, if the restart timer counter is the predetermined value (S2328: Yes), the restart display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b, and the contents of the additional data table buffer 233c and the transfer data table buffer 233d are cleared by writing Null data to each of them (S2329). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the restart performance is set in the timing counter 233g (S2330), and the value of the pointer 233e is initialized to "0" (S2331), the process proceeds to FIG. 81, the display setting process (S2023) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)).

In this way, in the display control device 114, if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the third pattern was stopped and displayed with the end of the variable presentation, the drawing content can be set so that the restart presentation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the restart presentation is a presentation in which an image of the third pattern vibrating is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so when the player visually confirms that the third pattern is vibrating and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable third pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can recognize that the stopped pattern has not been confirmed at that point.

After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table 232a1 is expanded, the above-mentioned pointer update process (S2307) expands the drawing content again from the top of the restart display data table 232a1. Therefore, the restart performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received.

In addition, the simple display setting process (S2029 in FIG. 72(b)) executed when the simple image display flag 233a is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) is similar to the display setting process (S2023). However, in the simple display setting process, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 after the performance time of the power-on variable image 283 has ended, a process is performed to set the display data table 232a1 in the display data table buffer 233b, which specifies that one image (either FIG. 30(b) or FIG. 30(c)) of the power-on variable image 283 corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time.

Furthermore, after the time for the power-on variable image 283 to perform the variable performance ends, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should have been received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is not received, a process is performed in which the display data table 232a1, which specifies that the variable performance of the power-on variable image 283 is to be restarted, is set in the display data table buffer 233b.

Next, with reference to Figures 85 to 87, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2025), which is one process of the V interrupt process (see Figure 72 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Figure 85 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process (S2025), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233a is on or not (S2401). If the simple image display flag 233a is on (S2401: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S2402), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if the simple image display flag 233a is not on, i.e., is off (S2401: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2403), this transfer setting process (S2025) is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87.

Now, with reference to FIG. 85(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S2402), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S2411). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S2411: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S2412). In this S2412 process, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, in the S2412 process, if it is determined that the transfer process has not been completed (S2412: No), the image controller 237 is still transferring images, so this resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is terminated and the process returns to the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2412 that the transfer process has ended (S2412: Yes), the process proceeds to S2413. Also, if in the process of S2411 an instruction to transfer the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S2411: No), the process proceeds to S2413.

In the processing of S2413, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S2413), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S2413: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S2414), the resident image transfer setting processing (S2402) is terminated, and the processing returns to the transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(a)).

As a result, the drawing list (see FIG. 36) sent to the image controller 237 during the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.

The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area in resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address in the specified resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is complete, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, if all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S2413 (S2413: Yes), the simple image display flag 233a is set to OFF (S2415), the resident image transfer setting process (S2402) is terminated, and the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)) is returned to. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)), instead of the simple command determination process (see S2028 in FIG. 73(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2029 in FIG. 72(b)), the command determination process (see FIG. 73 to FIG. 80) and the display setting process (see FIG. 81 to FIG. 84) are executed, so that the drawing of the image during normal times is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see Figures 86 and 87) (see S2401: No in Figure 85 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process (S2402), the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, except for the power-on main image 282 and power-on variable image 283 that have already been transferred during the main process (see FIG. 71). The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 will remain resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. As a result, the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, error messages, cockpit images, and secondary display images, as well as image data of reserved patterns and character patterns that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to Figs. 86 and 87, the normal image transfer setting process (S2403), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2025) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Figs. 86 and 87 are flowcharts showing this normal image transfer setting process (S2403).

In this normal image transfer setting process (S2403), first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233e updated by the pointer update process (S2307) of the previously executed display setting process (see FIG. 81) is obtained from the transfer data table 232a3 set in the transfer data table buffer 233d (S2421).

Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S2422), and if it is transfer data information (S2422: Yes), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S2423). Furthermore, a transfer start flag is set to ON, which indicates that image data that should be transferred is present when in the ON state (S2424), and the process proceeds to S2425.

On the other hand, in the process of S2422, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is null data (S2422: No), the processes of S2423 and S2424 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2425.

In the processing of S2425, in order to end the image transfer, image transfer detailed processing is executed (S2425), this normal image transfer setting processing (S2403) is terminated, and the process returns to the transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(a)).

Now, with reference to FIG. 87, we will explain the image transfer detail process (S2425), which is one process of the normal image transfer setting process (S2403) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this image transfer detail process (S2425).

In this image transfer detailed process (S2425), it is first determined whether an image data transfer instruction was set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S2441), and if a transfer instruction was set (S2441: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S2442).

In this process of S2442, after setting an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S2442 that the transfer process has not ended (S2442: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this image transfer detail process (S2425) is ended and the process returns to the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86). On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S2442: Yes), the process proceeds to S2443. Also, if the result of the process of S2441 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S2441: No), the process proceeds to S2443.

In the processing of S2443, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S2443). If the transfer start flag is on (S2443: Yes), image data for which transfer should be started is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S2444), and the image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S2423 of the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) is set as the image to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S2454. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is off rather than on (S2443: No), it is then determined whether the small win right hit notification command flag is on or not (S2445).

If the small win right hit notification command flag is on (S2445: Yes), this means that the presentation command related to the right hit notification in the event of a small win is processed and the right hit notification additional data table 232a2 has been set in the additional data table buffer 233c. Therefore, after setting the small win right hit notification command flag to off (S2446), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the small win right hit image corresponding to the small win right hit notification discrimination flag that is in the on state among the small win right hit notification discrimination flags provided for each small win right hit image type are stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is identified (S2447). The image data indicated by this identified various information is then designated as the image to be transferred, and processing proceeds to S2454. In addition, in S2447, if the image data of the small win right hit image corresponding to the small win right hit notification discrimination flag in the ON state is the image to be transferred, the small win right hit notification discrimination flag in the ON state is configured to be set to OFF.

In the process of S2445, if the small win right hit notification command flag is not on but off (S2445: No), then it is determined whether the rear image command flag is on or not (S2448). If the rear image command flag is on (S2448: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so after setting the rear image command flag to off (S2449), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear type is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are identified (S2450), and the image data indicated by the identified various information is designated as the image to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S2454.

Note that if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, all corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the processing of S2448, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, the rear image command flag is deemed to be OFF (S2448: No), and the processing proceeds to S2451.

If the background image command flag is not on but off in the processing of S2448 (S2448: No), then it is determined whether the character change command flag is on or not (S2451). Then, if the character change command flag is off (S2451: No), this image transfer detailed processing (S2425) is terminated and the processing returns to the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 87).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2451, if the character change command flag is on (S2451: Yes), this means a change in the character design (character display Se1 when a reach occurs), so after setting the character change command flag to off (S2452), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the character design corresponding to the character change discrimination flag that is in the on state among the character change discrimination flags provided for each character change image type are stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are identified (S2453), and the image data indicated by this identified various information is designated as the image to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S2454.

In the process of S2454, it is determined whether the image to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2454). This determination in the process of S2454 is made by referencing the stored image discrimination flag 233h. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image to be transferred is read from the stored image discrimination flag 233h, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S2454 is that the image to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2454: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, so the image transfer detailed processing (S2425) ends and the processing returns to the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 87). This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S2454 is that the image to be transferred is not stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S2454: No), a transfer instruction for the image to be transferred is set (S2455). As a result, the transfer data information for the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.

The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred should be stored). The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After processing of S2455, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated (S2456), this image transfer detailed processing (S2425) is terminated, and processing returns to the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 87). As described above, the stored image discrimination flag 233h is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process (S2403), processing for a character-based command or the like is executed in the previously executed command determination process (see FIG. 73), and when an additional data table 232a2 corresponding to the character-changed image indicated by that character-based command is set in the additional data table buffer 233c, the image data of the character-changed image used in that additional data table 232a2 can be transferred without delay from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command during the previously executed command determination process (see FIG. 73), image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table 232a1 is set in the display data table buffer 233b in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) from the voice lamp control device 113, and at the same time, the transfer data table 232a3 corresponding to that display data table 232a1 is set in the transfer data table buffer 233d. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in that display data table 232a1 can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, in the transfer data table 232a3, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specified sprite begins according to the display data table 232a1. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table 232a3, when drawing a specified sprite according to the display data table 232a1, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table 232a1. Also, by writing to the transfer data table 232a3, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, the transfer data table 232a3 specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while also allowing for detailed control of the transfer of image data. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load imposed by the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 88, the details of the drawing process (S2026) as the above-mentioned update process, which is one process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process (S2026), a drawing list as shown in FIG. 36 is generated (S2501) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (see S2024 in FIG. 72(b)), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 72(b)).

In other words, in the process of S2501, from the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task processing, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored is identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the image for one frame from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed foreground, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the rearranged sprite order, the type of storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the address and parameters required for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one variable performance (variable pattern) is executed in the third pattern display device 81, the drawing list can be updated by executing a drawing process (S2026) as an update process based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition (i.e., the passage of 20 milliseconds, which is the drawing period for one frame).

That is, for example, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol wins a jackpot and the changing pattern of the dynamic display is in progress, the drawing process is executed until the end of the changing pattern as the update end state, and the confirmation command is executed, ending the dynamic display that becomes the jackpot and generating a jackpot game state as a awarded benefit.

In addition, when one variation performance is executed, the number of times the drawing list is updated, i.e., the variation pattern, is determined by lottery from among the multiple variation patterns shown in the variation pattern table 202f (see Figures 16 and 17).

For example, when a dynamic display that indicates winning the jackpot type "Time-saving A" is selected by drawing lots from among the multiple patterns shown in the Special Chart 1 Small Win Variation Pattern Table 202f2 (see FIG. 16(b)), and is executed with the "E6: Normal Reach (Promotion Effect)" variation pattern of "'High-speed Variation (Long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed Variation' variable element + 'Normal Reach' variable element + 'Re-variation' variable element + 'Promotion Effect' variable element," a variation effect is executed in which it is not possible to determine that a jackpot (a jackpot based on a small win) has been won (i.e., a miss display is displayed) until the end of the "Normal Reach" variable element, and then a "jackpot display" is displayed until the end of the "Re-change" variable element that is executed.

In addition, until the end of the variable element of the "re-variation" at the specified time, the same main pattern with a number such as "2" or "8" in each pattern row that cannot be confirmed as winning the small win type "Time-saving C" (7-round time-saving jackpot) (i.e., winning the small win type "Time-saving B" (5-round time-saving jackpot)) (hereinafter, the same main pattern with a number that cannot be confirmed as winning the small win type "Time-saving C" (7-round time-saving jackpot) (i.e., winning the small win type "Time-saving B" (5-round time-saving jackpot)) Three symbols (sometimes called "5R symbols") are stopped, and then, at the end of the variable elements of the "promotion effect" that is executed at a specific time, the 5R symbols change to three of the same main symbols (i.e., main symbols that confirm that a small win type "time-saving C" (7-round time-saving big win) has been won (hereinafter, main symbols that confirm that a small win type "time-saving C" (7-round time-saving big win) has been won may be referred to as "7R symbols")) that have been stopped.

In this way, in the variable element of the "promotion effect" as a limited effect that is performed between the end of the variable element of the "re-variation" and the end of the variation pattern, the first notification state is a state in which three 5R main symbols are lined up in each symbol row, and the second notification state is a state in which three 7R main symbols are lined up in each symbol row, and the display switches multiple times to show whether the reel will stop at the 5R symbol or the 7R symbol, and finally the variable pattern currently being executed ends with three 7R main symbols lined up in each symbol row.

When the control judgment result indicates that the small win type "Time-saving C" is established and a big win game starts, the player can win a prize ball as a prize value by winning the variable winning device 65, which is in an open state, as a profit-granting condition.

In this way, in the case of a jackpot (jackpot based on a small win) variation as an updated state, when a jackpot result is announced, the state is controlled to continue as a jackpot state. In this jackpot state, the large prize winning hole that is not open except in the jackpot state and small win state is opened, providing the player with an opportunity to win a prize ball. And, it is configured so that a prize ball is generated when the ball enters the variable prize winning device 65 by the player's ball shooting operation.

The effect of switching the main symbol in the variable element of the "promotion effect" may be any effect as long as it is possible to switch the main symbol that was displayed up until the end of the variable element of the "re-variation" to another main symbol in the variable element of the "promotion effect". For example, it may be configured so that the 5R symbol and the 7R symbol are displayed simultaneously, one of the main symbols disappears, and the remaining main symbol becomes the main symbol of the final big win. It may also be configured to display an effect in which the 7R symbol that has entered from the outside tries to push aside the 5R symbol displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and ultimately display whether the 7R symbol will be displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. It may also be configured so that the effect of cutting the 5R symbol is displayed each time the frame button 22 is pressed by the player, and ultimately display whether the 5R symbol can be destroyed to display the 7R symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the 5R and 7R symbols are used as examples of the "promotion effect", but any effect may be used as long as the game value suggested by the main symbol displayed before the start of the variable element of the "promotion effect" is changed to a main symbol with a higher game value. For example, the effect may be a big win round symbol other than 5R and 7R, a normal symbol may be changed to a time-saving symbol, a normal symbol may be changed to a probability variable symbol, a time-saving symbol may be changed to a probability variable symbol, or a symbol that transitions to a more advantageous game state may be changed, or a third symbol different from the 5R and 7R symbols may be changed.

Furthermore, during the execution of the variable pattern in the dynamic display of 1, after the main pattern, which is the 7R pattern, switches to a state in which three are lined up in each pattern row before the variable pattern ends, the main pattern, which is the 5R pattern, will not switch to a state in which three are lined up in each pattern row until at least a jackpot occurs and a prize ball is generated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "promotion effect" is described as switching from a 5R symbol to a 7R symbol, but it may be configured to execute a failure effect as a "promotion effect" in which the result of executing the "promotion effect" is not to switch to a 7R symbol, but to end the variable effect with three main symbols that are 5R symbols lined up. In this case, regardless of whether the 5R symbol or the 7R symbol appears, a right-hit notification effect is executed after the variable effect ends, and a suggestion on how to hit is given to the player.

Furthermore, even if the dynamic display indicating that the small prize type "Time-saving B" has been won ends and three 5R main symbols are lined up in each symbol row (first notification mode), if you do not play with the right hand and the ball does not enter the variable prize-winning device 65, no prize ball (specified profit) will be generated, and the ball will not pass through the specified area 65d, so the game will return to the playing state when the small prize was won and a new variable display will be executed.

Next, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2025 in FIG. 72(b)), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233i are sent to the image controller (S2502). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "0", the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233i is "1", the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information. The image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is transferred in order to the area indicated by the destination start address of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image data stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S2502, the drawing process (S2026) updates the drawing target buffer flag 233i (S2503). Then, this drawing process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)). The drawing target buffer flag 233i is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

The drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 72(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.

As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is performed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b.

After that, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A."

In more detail, Figure 89(a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) when a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Figure 89(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 89(a).

Furthermore, Figure 89(c) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period) when a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Figure 89(d) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 89(c).

Figure 89 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 89(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", which indicates that the variable presentation is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special 1 small jackpot has been won. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that during the jackpot priority notification period, the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won gives the player a higher expected number of winning balls than the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 89(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b in order to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small win game that will be executed afterwards, and generate a big win game.

Next, FIG. 89(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being performed from the state shown in FIG. 89(a). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game in the small win game.

In addition, the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c "Hit right," and the lower right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character image 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

Next, Figure 89(c) shows a state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 89(c), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "637", indicating that this is a variable presentation during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that during the rescue priority notification period, the expected number of balls that the player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 89(c), in order to suggest that the expected number of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win game is not generated in the small win game that is executed afterwards, the same pattern (here, the number "2") is stopped in each pattern row on the left and right of the third pattern 81b, and the main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it is stopped in the central pattern row.

Next, FIG. 89(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in FIG. 89(c).

The upper part of the main display area Dm displays a text message 81f stating "The number of times the rescue condition is met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by executing several rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the number of times the rescue condition is met will be reached and the state will transition to a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81c in FIG. 89(b), this text message gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a text message 81h saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81d in FIG. 89(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character pattern 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and compared to the character pattern 81e in FIG. 89(b), this display also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Note that a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed on the top right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal game state A" wins the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" or the small win type "Time-saving B (small win A)" (i.e., special symbol 1 small win), comparing the two cases of executing a right-hand hit game during the small win game to pass the ball through the specific area 65d and generate a big win game, and executing the dynamic display of the special symbol the number of times that the rescue condition is met and transitioning to the "normal symbol low-probability time-saving state", the latter case of transitioning to the "normal symbol low-probability time-saving state" is configured to have a higher expected value of the balls that the player can win.

In addition, in the right-hit notification effect that is executed in the small win opening when a special symbol 1 small win is won during "normal game state A", the number of times the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met) and various other conditions (the state of the rescue setting flag 203s, the value of the rescue counter 203r) are determined, and the content of the right-hit notification effect is configured to differ depending on whether the expected number of balls to be dispensed is higher with a right-hit play method when a small win is won, or whether the expected number of balls to be dispensed is higher with a left-hit play method when a small win is won.

By configuring it in this way, when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," it is possible to choose between two game methods: a right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won, and a left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

As a result, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", by checking the contents of the right-hit notification effect executed during the OP time of the small win game, it is possible to determine whether the right-hit play method when a small win is won or the left-hit play method when a small win is won will result in a greater average number of balls won, giving the player a choice of play methods and increasing the fun of the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 90 to 98. The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won during "normal game state A", a break-even number is set to determine whether a right-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected number of balls being dispensed, or whether a left-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected number of balls being dispensed, and the break-even number is compared with the number of times the special symbol is executed when a small win is won, and the content of the right-hitting notification performance when a small win is won is changed.

However, when actually playing pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall, the difference in expected value of balls dispensed when winning a small jackpot on special chart 1 near the breakeven number of times between playing with a right-hand hit when a small jackpot is won and playing with a left-hand hit when a small jackpot is won is small and may change depending on the playing situation, so further improvement of the suggestion content is required.

Specifically, for example, the winning rate for each winning slot may change depending on the condition of the nails and the player's playing method (such as how the ball is struck), and some players may decide on their playing method based on their past playing results with the pachinko machine 10 or their own past playing results.

The second embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above problems, and is intended to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous game conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the magnitude of the profits the player will obtain if an advantageous game condition occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set in the predetermined period before switching from the big win priority notification period to the rescue priority notification period, and when a small win on special chart 1 is won during the ambiguous notification period, the right-hit notification performance suggests that there is little difference between the right-hit playing method when a small win is won and the left-hit playing method when a small win is won, and the purpose is to provide a gaming machine in which the player himself judges and decides the playing method.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, an alarm control means for issuing a predetermined alarm in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode, and a warning control means for displaying a warning when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing that is a specific period before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing. The gaming machine includes a third display execution means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the specific timing and the specific timing.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A", if the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed is less than the break-even number, it is determined that the right-hitting game method when a small jackpot is won will result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win, and a jackpot priority notification effect is executed in the right-hitting notification effect. Also, if the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed is equal to or greater than the break-even number, it is determined that the left-hitting game method when a small jackpot is won will result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win, and a rescue priority notification effect is executed in the right-hitting notification effect.

However, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won) near the break-even point is small (for example, cases No. 2 and No. 3 in Figure 27), the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won is clearly greater by using either playing method.

In addition, there may be slight individual differences between the pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall due to the condition of the game nails and ball launching unit 112a, etc., and furthermore, since the playing methods of the players are not the same, if these factors cause the starting ball entry rate or the ball entry rate into the large prize slot to differ from the rate at the time of manufacture, the actual number of break-evens at the time of play may differ from the break-even number at the time of manufacture (i.e., "543 times"). For this reason, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won) near the break-even number may become less clear.

Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the period until the number of times the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state A" is composed of only two periods, the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, and when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, it is determined which of the two periods it falls into and one of the two right-hit notification effects is executed, some players may have doubts about the content of the right-hit notification effect, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is small near the break-even number.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set as a period in which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected, within a range of 20 spins before and after the break-even number in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (hereinafter, the period between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, which is 20 spins before and after the number of times the special pattern is executed, in which the average number of balls won by the right-hand playing method when a small jackpot is won is approximately the same as that by the left-hand playing method when a small jackpot is won, may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification period". Also, the right-hand hitting notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 during the ambiguous notification period may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification effect").

Then, in the right-hit notification performance when a special chart 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment during the ambiguous notification period, the third notification mode is configured to reuse and display both image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the big win priority notification performance (see FIG. 89(b)) and the rescue priority notification performance (see FIG. 89(d)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity and maintain the quality of the image data.

In addition, depending on the player, they can choose which style to play based on their own "streak" status on that day, the status of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

First, referring to FIG. 90, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. The differences between the block diagram of the first embodiment and the block diagram of the second embodiment are that the break-even count storage area 223k has been deleted from the RAM 223, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m has been added, and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

The jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is one of the discrimination conditions for determining the content of the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A", and is an area that stores the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that is the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the ambiguous notification period.

This jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is set to "524", which is the number of rotations that marks the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the ambiguous notification period, during the RAM initial value setting process in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1022 in Figure 92).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A", the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is referenced (see S1515 in FIG. 95), and compared with the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i, a command for the right-hit notification effect to be executed in the right-hit notification effect of the small jackpot is set (see S1506, S1508, or S1509 in FIG. 70).

The ambiguous notification count storage area 223n is one of the discrimination conditions for determining the content of the right-hit notification effect that is performed when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", and is an area that stores the number of rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol that is the boundary between the ambiguous notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

This ambiguous notification count storage area 223m is set to "564", which is the number of rotations that marks the boundary between the ambiguous notification period and the relief priority notification period, during the RAM initial value setting process in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1023 in Figure 92).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", this ambiguous notification count storage area 223m is referenced (see S1507 in FIG. 95), and compared with the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i, a command for the right hit notification effect to be executed in the right hit notification effect of the small win is set (see S1506, S1508, or S1509 in FIG. 70).

Next, the break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the break-even number table 222f stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

The break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment is set based on the table of expected balls won for each state in FIG. 27. The break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment also specifies the break-even number, the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the rescue priority notification period. When a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", the voice lamp control device 113 compares the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won with the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the rescue priority notification period specified in the break-even number table 222f, and determines the content of the right-hit notification performance to be executed during the OP time of the small win game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A", the break-even number table 222f of the first embodiment is referenced, and if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is less than the break-even number, a jackpot priority notification effect (see FIG. 89(b)) is executed as the right-hit notification effect, and if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is equal to or greater than the break-even number, a rescue priority notification effect (see FIG. 89(d)) is executed as the right-hit notification effect.

However, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won) near the break-even point is small (for example, cases No. 2 and No. 3 in Figure 28), the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won is clearly greater by using either playing method.

In addition, there may be slight individual differences between the pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall due to the condition of the game nails and ball launching unit 112a, etc., and since the playing methods of the players are not the same, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won) near the break-even number may become even less clear.

Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the period until the number of times the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state A" is composed of only two periods, the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, and when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, it is determined which of the two periods it falls into and one of the two right-hit notification effects is executed, some players may have doubts about the content of the right-hit notification effect, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is small near the break-even number.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set up as a period within 20 spins before and after the break-even number, during which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected.

By configuring it in this way, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use, taking into account their own "streak" state on that day, the state of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the fun of playing.

In other words, the break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment specifies three periods: a jackpot priority notification period from the time of initialization processing of the RAM 203 when the power is turned on or from the end of a jackpot game to the number of spins obtained by subtracting 20 from the break-even number; an ambiguous notification period ranging from 20 spins before and after the break-even number; and a rescue priority notification period from the number of spins obtained by adding 20 to the break-even number to the number of times the rescue condition is met.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the break-even number table 222f of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to "800 spins", the break-even number is set to "543 spins", the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 523 spins", the ambiguous notification period is set to "524 to 563 spins", and the rescue priority notification period is set to "564 to 800 spins".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won is compared with the big win priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period specified in the break-even count table 222f, and the content of the right-hit notification performance to be executed during the OP time of the small win game is determined.

In other words, if a small special 1 win is won as a result of the control judgment during the jackpot priority notification period, a jackpot priority notification display is performed as the first notification mode (see FIG. 97(b)), if a small special 1 win is won during the rescue priority notification period, a rescue priority notification display is performed as the second notification mode (see FIG. 97(d)), and if a small special 1 win is won during the ambiguous notification period, an ambiguous notification display is performed as the third notification mode consisting of a jackpot priority notification display and a rescue priority notification display (see FIG. 98(b)).

Here, if the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the ambiguous notification effect (see FIG. 98(b)) were composed of completely different image data from the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the jackpot priority notification effect (see FIG. 97(b)) and the rescue priority notification effect (see FIG. 97(d)), it would be necessary to store new image data for the ambiguous notification effect, which would put a strain on memory capacity and require other image data to be deleted or the quality of the image data (i.e., image quality) to be reduced, which could reduce the interest of the pachinko machine 10.

However, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, by reusing the image data used in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect as ambiguous notification effects, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity and maintain the quality of the image data.

Next, referring to Figures 92 to 95, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described. The main differences between the control processes in the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment and the control processes in the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment are that the process related to the break-even count storage area 223k has been deleted, and that the process related to the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

First, referring to FIG. 92, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of the second embodiment. The start-up process of the first embodiment differs from the start-up process of the second embodiment in that the process related to the break-even count storage area 223k has been deleted, and that the process related to the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

In the start-up process of the second embodiment, when the process of S1010 is completed, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is set to "524" (S1022), the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n is set to "564" (S1023), and the process proceeds to S1011.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the second embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the second embodiment is that the step (S1381) of referencing the value of the breakeven count storage area 223k is changed to refer to the value of the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m.

In the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1381) of the second embodiment, if the result of the judgment in S1374 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, that is, if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is in the off state (S1374: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power is turned on), so next, it is judged whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority number of times storage area 223m (S1381), and if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority number of times storage area 223m, that is, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the jackpot priority number of times storage area 223m (S1381: No), this means that a special chart 1 small win has been won during the ambiguous notification period or the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 91), so the process proceeds to S1378.

On the other hand, in the process of S1381, if the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority number of times storage area 223m (S1381: Yes), this means that a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 91), and the process proceeds to S1377.

Next, referring to FIG. 94, the winning effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing (S1105) in the second embodiment. The difference between the winning effect processing (S1105) in the first embodiment and the winning effect processing (S1105) in the second embodiment is that a process for resetting the values in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

In the winning effect process (S1105) of the second embodiment, if the result of the determination in S1401 is that a jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), as an initialization process, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m is reset to "524" and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n is reset to "564" (S1421), and the process proceeds to S1403.

Next, referring to FIG. 95, the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the second embodiment. The difference between the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the first embodiment and the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the second embodiment is that the process of referencing the break-even count storage area 223k has been deleted, and a process of referencing the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been added.

In the second embodiment, in the right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won, if the result of the determination in S1503 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1503: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous big win (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), so it is next determined whether or not the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the big win priority count storage area 223m (S1515), and if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the big win priority count storage area 223m, i.e., if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the big win priority count storage area 223m (S1515: No), the process proceeds to S1507.

In the process of S1507, it is determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1507). If the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n, that is, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1507: No), a special chart 1 small win has been won during the rescue priority notification period (see FIG. 91), so a rescue priority notification command for display is set (S1509) (see FIG. 97(d)), the right-hit notification performance process (S1409) when this small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning performance process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1507, if it is determined that the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1507: Yes), since a special chart 1 small win has been won during the ambiguous notification period (see FIG. 91), an ambiguous notification command for display is set (S1508) (see FIG. 98(b)), the right-hit notification performance processing (S1409) when this small win is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning performance processing (see FIG. 94).

In addition, in the processing of S1515, if it is determined that the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority number storage area 223m (S1515: Yes), since a small jackpot on special chart 1 has been won during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 91), a jackpot priority notification command for display is set (S1506) (see FIG. 97(b)), the right-hit notification performance processing (S1409) for when this small jackpot is won is terminated, and the process returns to the winning performance processing (see FIG. 94).

Next, referring to FIG. 96, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2111) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing (S2111) in the second embodiment. The difference between the hit-related command processing (S2111) in the first embodiment and the hit-related command processing (S2111) in the second embodiment is that a process for determining the ambiguity notification command for display has been added.

In the second embodiment of the hit command processing (S2111), if it is determined in S2181 that there is no big hit priority notification command for display (S2181: No), it is then determined whether there is an ambiguous notification command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2182), and if there is an ambiguous notification command for display (S2182: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2185. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2182 that there is no ambiguous notification command for display (S2182: No), the processing proceeds to S2183.

Next, referring to Figures 97 and 98, the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Figures 97 and 98 are diagrams showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A".

In more detail, Fig. 97(a) shows the state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) when a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Fig. 97(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 97(a).

Furthermore, Figure 97(c) shows the state in which the special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Figure 97(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 97(c).

Figure 98(a) shows the state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period) when a special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Figure 98(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 98(a).

Note that Figures 97(a) and 97(b) are similar to Figures 89(a) and 89(b), and are intended to show that the right-hit notification effect executed when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period in "normal game state A" is similar in the first and second embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In addition, Figures 97(c) and 97(d) are similar to Figures 89(c) and 89(d), and are intended to show that the right-hit notification effect executed when a special chart 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period in "normal game state A" is similar in the first and second embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Figure 98 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), a small special symbol 1 win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 98(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "551", which indicates that the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 91 is a variable presentation during the ambiguous notification period.

In addition, the third pattern 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special chart 1 small win has been won. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the special chart 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period, the difference between the expected number of balls that the player can win when playing with the right-hand hitting method when a small win is won and when playing with the left-hand hitting method when a small win is won is small, so the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won will be clearly greater by using either hitting method.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 98(a), in order to suggest that there is no significant difference in the expected value of the balls that can be won in the small win game that is executed afterwards, regardless of whether or not a right-hand play is executed, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row.

Next, Figure 98(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in Figure 98(a).

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81c in FIG. 97(b), this text message gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a text message 81h saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81d in FIG. 97(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

The left center section of the main display area Dm displays a character pattern 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand, and the lower right section of the main display area Dm displays a character pattern 81i of a boy facing downward. These two character patterns 81e and 81i are the character patterns displayed in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect (see 81e in FIG. 97(b) and 81i in FIG. 97(d)).

In this way, by reusing the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the ambiguous notification effect from the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, it is possible to reduce memory capacity and maintain the quality of the image data.

These two character designs are distinctively depicted in Fig. 97(b), which strongly suggests that right-hand play will be performed during a small win game in the big win priority notification period to generate a big win, and Fig. 97(d), which suggests that right-hand play will not be performed during a small win game in the rescue priority notification period to generate a big win. By displaying these two character designs simultaneously, it is suggested that there is little difference between whichever play style is used.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the ambiguous notification period is set as a period during which the difference between the expected value of balls dispensed in the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" and the expected value of balls dispensed in the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is small. Then, in the right-hand hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 during the ambiguous notification period, both the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect are displayed.

This configuration can reduce memory capacity and maintain the quality of image data. Also, by displaying both the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, it is possible to suggest that either method of play is acceptable.

As a result, depending on the player, they can choose which style to play based on their own "streak" status on that day, the status of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Third Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Fig. 99. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won during "normal game state A", a break-even number is set to determine whether a right-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected number of balls being dispensed, or whether a left-hitting play method when a small win is won will result in a higher expected number of balls being dispensed, and the break-even number is compared with the number of times the special symbol is executed when a small win is won, and the content of the right-hitting notification performance when a small win is won is changed.

However, when actually playing pachinko machine 10 in an amusement hall, the difference in expected value of balls dispensed when winning a small jackpot on special chart 1 near the breakeven number of times between playing with a right-hand hit when a small jackpot is won and playing with a left-hand hit when a small jackpot is won is small and may change depending on the playing situation, so further improvement of the suggestion content is required.

Specifically, for example, the winning rate for each winning slot may change depending on the condition of the nails and the player's playing method (such as how the ball is struck), and some players may decide on their playing method based on their past playing results with the pachinko machine 10 or their own past playing results.

The third embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above problems, and is intended to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous game conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the magnitude of profits the player will obtain if an advantageous game condition occurs, and heighten the player's interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set in a predetermined period before switching from the big win priority notification period to the rescue priority notification period, and when a small win on special chart 1 is won during the ambiguous notification period, the right-hit notification performance does not clearly indicate whether the right-hit playing method when a small win is won or the left-hit playing method when a small win is won, but rather the player himself judges and decides the playing method, thereby providing a gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes in a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry area, and a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the fact that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a specific timing that is a specific period before the specific information reaches the specified update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing. The gaming machine includes a third display execution means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the specific timing and the specific timing, and the third display mode includes a specific mode that switches between the first notification mode and the second notification mode multiple times.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A", if the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed is less than the break-even number, it is determined that the right-hitting game method when a small jackpot is won will result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win, and a jackpot priority notification effect is executed in the right-hitting notification effect. Also, if the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed is equal to or greater than the break-even number, it is determined that the left-hitting game method when a small jackpot is won will result in a greater average number of balls that the player can win, and a rescue priority notification effect is executed in the right-hitting notification effect.

However, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won) near the break-even point is small (for example, cases No. 2 and No. 3 in Figure 27), the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won is clearly greater by using either playing method.

In addition, there may be slight individual differences between the pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall due to the condition of the game nails and ball launching unit 112a, etc., and since the playing methods of the players are not the same, the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won and left-handed playing method when a small jackpot is won) near the break-even number may become even less clear.

Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the period until the number of times the rescue condition is met in the "normal game state A" is composed of only two periods, the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, and when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won, it is determined which of the two periods it falls into and one of the two right-hit notification effects is executed, some players may have doubts about the content of the right-hit notification effect, since the difference in the average number of balls won between the two (right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won and the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) is small near the break-even number.

For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set as a period in which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected, within a range of 20 spins before and after the break-even number in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (hereinafter, the period between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, which is 20 spins before and after the number of times the special pattern is executed, in which the average number of balls won by the right-hand playing method when a small jackpot is won is approximately the same as that by the left-hand playing method when a small jackpot is won, may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification period". Also, the right-hand hitting notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 during the ambiguous notification period may be referred to as the "ambiguous notification effect").

Then, in the right-hit notification effect when a special chart 1 small win is won as a result of the control judgment during the ambiguous notification period, the third notification mode is configured to alternately display both the big win priority notification effect (see FIG. 89(b)) and the rescue priority notification effect (see FIG. 89(d)) multiple times.

This configuration allows the storage capacity to be reduced and the quality of image data to be maintained. In addition, by displaying both the big win priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, the player can easily understand that no matter which playing method (i.e., the right-hand play method when a small win is won and the left-hand play method when a small win is won) is selected, the difference between the two methods is minimal.

Furthermore, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "streak" status on that day, the status of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

The differences between the configuration and processing contents of the first embodiment and the configuration and processing contents of the third embodiment are similar to the differences between the configuration and processing contents of the first embodiment and the configuration and processing contents of the second embodiment, and are the same as those in Figures 90 to 96 of the second embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Now, referring to Figure 99, we will explain the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. Figure 99 is a diagram showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A".

In more detail, FIG. 99(a) shows a state in which the special chart 1 small win is won during the period when the value of the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is "524 to 563 spins" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period (see FIG. 91)), and the opening of the small win game is being executed. FIG. 99(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is still being executed from the state of FIG. 99(a), and the content of the right-hit notification performance is switched after a certain period of time has passed since the state of FIG. 99(a). FIG. 99(c) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game continues from the state of FIG. 99(b) and the content of the right-hit notification display has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state of FIG. 99(b), and FIG. 99(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game continues from the state of FIG. 99(c) and the content of the right-hit notification display has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state of FIG. 99(c).

Figure 99 (a) shows a state in which a special chart 1 small win has been won during the period when the value of the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is between "524 and 563 spins" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period (see Figure 91)), and the opening of the small win game is in progress.

In Figure 99(a), the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c "Hit right," and the lower right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. In addition, the left side of the main display area Dm displays a character image 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand, which also suggests right-hand play.

The content of the presentation in FIG. 99(a) is the same as the right-hit notification presentation (i.e., the jackpot priority notification presentation) (see FIG. 89(b)) when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period.

Next, 99(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is still being carried out from the state in FIG. 99(a), and the content of the right-hit notification presentation has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in FIG. 99(a).

In FIG. 99(b), a text message 81f saying "The number of times the rescue condition is met will soon be reached" is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, which literally suggests that by executing several rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the number of times the rescue condition is met will be reached and the state will transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g saying "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a text message 81h saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, which also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character image 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, giving the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. In addition, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed on the top right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

The content of the presentation in Figure 99 (b) is the same as the right-hit notification presentation (i.e., the rescue priority notification presentation) (see Figure 89 (d)) when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the rescue priority notification period.

Next, Figure 99(c) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is still being carried out from the state in Figure 99(b), and the content of the right-hit notification presentation has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in Figure 99(b).

Note that the content of the presentation in Figure 99(c) is the same as that in Figure 99(a), so a detailed explanation is omitted.

Next, Figure 99(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is still being carried out, following the state in Figure 99(c), and the content of the right-hit notification presentation has changed after a certain period of time has passed since the state in Figure 99(c).

Note that the content of the presentation in Figure 99(d) is the same as that in Figure 99(b), so the explanation will be omitted.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the right-hit notification display when a special chart 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period, the big win priority notification display and the rescue priority notification display are displayed in alternating fashion multiple times, and even after Figure 99 (d), this switching display is repeated until the end of the small win game.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the ambiguous notification period is set as a period during which the difference between the expected value of balls dispensed in the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won in the "normal game state A" and the expected value of balls dispensed in the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is small. Then, in the right-hand hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 during the ambiguous notification period, the two effects, the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, are configured to be displayed alternately multiple times.

This configuration allows the storage capacity to be reduced and the quality of image data to be maintained. In addition, by displaying both the big win priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect, the player can easily understand that no matter which playing method (i.e., the right-hand play method when a small win is won and the left-hand play method when a small win is won) is selected, the difference between the two methods is minimal.

Furthermore, depending on the player, they can choose which playing style to use based on their own "streak" status on that day, the status of the pachinko machine 10 they are playing, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 100 and 101. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, transition to a game state that is predefined and advantageous to the player, thereby granting the player a profit. In the advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met by the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In these gaming machines, the suggestions given to the player regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions during a specified period of time are not sufficiently satisfactory, and there is a demand for further improvement in the content of the suggestions.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state are uniform over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. In addition, the player will not be able to obtain the interest that arises from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can generate a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal game state A," the gameplay is provided with the option of whether or not to generate a big win with the small win, with the aim of enriching the gameplay variation and providing the player with a gaming machine that can notify the player of a hitting method that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

In order to achieve this object, the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, an alarm control means for issuing a predetermined alarm in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode, and a predetermined judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before the specific information becomes the specified update state by a specific period of time, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a new variable display without generating the specific profit when the judgment means reaches the specific judgment result and displays the first notification mode in the specific game state.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

First, referring to FIG. 100, the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fourth embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fourth embodiment is that a display left hit command setting process has been added.

In the process of setting the display special symbol 1 variation pattern command (S1307) of the fourth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the state is "normal gaming state" (S1351: Yes), it is then determined whether the variation display of the first special symbol to be executed is the first variation display after the end of a right-hit gaming state (i.e., a big win gaming state, a small win gaming state, or a "time-shortened state") (S1361), and if it is the first variation display after the end of a right-hit gaming state (S1361: Yes), a left-hit command for display is set (S1362), and the process proceeds to S1355.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1361 is that this is not the first variable display since the end of the right-hit gaming state (S1361: No), the processing in S1362 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1355.

Next, referring to FIG. 101, the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won during the rescue priority notification period in the "normal game state A".

In more detail, Fig. 101(a) shows a state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Fig. 101(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 101(a). Fig. 101(c) shows a state in which, from the state of Fig. 101(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to the jackpot state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

Figure 101 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 101(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", which indicates that the variable presentation is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that, in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, like the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 101(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b in order to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small win game that will be executed afterwards, and generate a big win game.

Next, FIG. 101(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in FIG. 101(a).

In addition, the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c "Hit right," and the lower right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character image 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

Next, Figure 101(c) shows a state in which, from the state in Figure 101(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A," and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

In Fig. 101(c), the upper right part of the main display area Dm in the third pattern display device 81, the reserved number display 87a for special pattern 1 displays "2", indicating that the number of reserved balls for the variable display of the first special pattern has been reduced by 1 from the state in Fig. 101(a). Also, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special pattern 1 displays a flashing state, indicating that the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed.

Furthermore, a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "59", which is a value that is one more than the text message 81a shown in FIG. 101(a). In other words, after winning a small win in the "normal game state A" shown in FIG. 101(a), in the small win game shown in FIG. 101(b), the player did not perform a right-hand hit game, and the ball did not pass through the specific area 65d, suggesting that the small win game ended and the game returned to the "normal game state A" without transitioning to the big win state.

In addition, the text message 81m "Hit Left" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the game has returned from a small win state, which suggests right-handed play, to "normal game state A," which suggests left-handed play.

By configuring it in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in a specific game state, "normal game state A" where the rescue condition can be established (the rescue setting flag 203s is in an OFF state), if a small win on special symbol 1 is won as a result of the control judgment, the player can avoid a big win state as an awarded value by not performing a right-hand hit game, and the dynamic display of the next special symbol can be executed without generating any prize balls.

Therefore, even if you win a special chart 1 small jackpot in "normal game state A" where the rescue condition can be met, you can return to "normal game state A" without triggering a big jackpot state and try to meet the rescue condition again.

As a result, the player can check the content of the right-hit notification effect when winning a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A" (i.e., big jackpot priority notification effect or rescue priority notification effect), and decide which playing method to execute (right-hit playing method when winning a small jackpot or left-hit playing method when winning a small jackpot) and play accordingly, creating new gameplay and increasing the interest of the game.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is configured to be a winning type of jackpot, and so that a jackpot can occur unconditionally regardless of the player's playing method, the player may avoid the occurrence of a jackpot based on a small jackpot by playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won in accordance with the right-hit notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1, and even if the player uses his or her balls to hit left-handed in order to achieve the rescue condition, the jackpot may occur before the rescue condition is met the number of times, and the consumed balls may be wasted. And the player may decide that there is a possibility that he or she will lose his or her balls even if he or she plays according to the suggestions of the right-hit notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1, and thereafter play without considering the right-hit notification when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an event from occurring, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so that in the "normal game state A" in which the rescue condition can be established, only a small special 1 win can be won, and even if the small special 1 win is won, the game returns to the "normal game state A" without generating a jackpot state, and the rescue condition can be established again.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A" where the rescue condition can be established (the rescue setting flag 203s is in an OFF state), the player does not execute a right-hand hit game, so that a big win state does not occur, and the next special symbol can be dynamically displayed without generating any prize balls.

By configuring it in this way, even if you win a small special jackpot in "normal game state A" where the rescue condition can be met, you can return to "normal game state A" without triggering a big jackpot, and try to meet the rescue condition again.

As a result, the player can confirm the content of the right-hit notification effect when winning a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 in "normal game state A" (i.e., a big jackpot priority notification effect or a rescue priority notification effect), and decide which playing method to execute (the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, or the left-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won) and play accordingly, creating new gameplay and increasing the interest of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 102 to 105. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals as those of the first and second embodiments, and description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, an ambiguous notification period is set within a range of 20 spins before and after the break-even number, during which there is no clear difference regardless of which playing method is selected, and in the right-hit notification performance when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won during the ambiguous notification period, the ambiguous notification performance (see FIG. 98(b)) is executed by reusing both image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the big jackpot priority notification performance (see FIG. 89(b)) and the rescue priority notification performance (see FIG. 89(d)), and is configured to suggest that the expected value of balls will be small in either playing method (right-hitting playing method when a small jackpot is won or left-hitting playing method when a small jackpot is won).

When configured in this way, the player must check the right-hit notification effect that is displayed during the small jackpot opening time (i.e., 10 seconds (see Figure 19)) when the special chart 1 small jackpot is won, and then must decide which playing method to select, so further improvements in the content of the suggestions are required.

Specifically, for example, even if a player wins a special chart 1 small win during the ambiguous notification period and an ambiguous notification effect is displayed as a right-hit notification effect, the player may not be able to fully understand the suggested content of the notification effect during the small win opening time during which the effect is displayed (i.e., 10 seconds (see Figure 19)), and may be confused as to which playing method to execute.

Even if a player sees the ambiguous notification and understands what it suggests, he or she must make a decision based on the remaining playing time during the opening time, the opening hours of the hall, the number of balls remaining, the remaining amount of money, etc., which may lead to a wrong decision.

The fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to appropriately suggest a predetermined game state during a variable presentation over a predetermined period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain when a favorable game state occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the dynamic display of the special pattern during the ambiguous notification period, a presentation is executed to indicate that the ambiguous notification period is in progress, and the player can determine in advance the playing method (right-hand play method when a small win is won or left-hand play method when a small win is won) in the event that a special pattern 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that allows the player to play smoothly without confusion when playing a small win.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, an alarm control means for issuing a predetermined alarm in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area. The gaming machine includes a judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the entry of a skill ball, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means and a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing a specific period before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing. The gaming machine includes a special effect execution means for executing a special effect during the variable display between the specific timing and the specific timing.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", a "specific time" as a "specific timing", and a "limited effect" as a "special effect".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The "special effect" may be anything that can suggest the current state when announcing the result of a lottery for a specific pattern, and may include an effect that enlarges a pattern, an effect that shrinks a pattern, an effect that changes the shape of a pattern, an effect that changes the color tone of a pattern, an effect that changes a specific pattern to another pattern, an effect that changes the background, an effect that changes, adds, or erases background music, an effect that changes, adds, or erases sound effects, an effect that changes the way in which light-emitting elements are turned on, blinking, or turned off, an effect that changes the effect display area, an effect that displays a specific character for a certain period of time, an effect that makes a specific character perform an action different from normal times for a certain period of time, an effect that displays a specific string of characters for a certain period of time, an effect that displays a specific picture for a certain period of time, an effect that changes the display area of a specific picture for a certain period of time, an effect that changes the display color of a specific picture for a certain period of time, an effect that increases or decreases a specific number, an effect that moves or stops a specific movable object for a certain period of time, and the like.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

First, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the first embodiment and the block diagram of the fifth embodiment is that an ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m has been added.

The ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m is a flag for displaying and setting (see FIG. 104(a)) the text "During ambiguous notification period" in the background of the variable presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the ambiguous notification period (see FIG. 91) in "normal gaming state A". Based on the setting of the ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m, the MPU 231 sets the text "During ambiguous notification period" in the background of the variable presentation as a limited presentation.

This ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m is first initialized (i.e., turned off) by the initial setting process (see S2001 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. Then, when the MPU 231 receives an ambiguous notification period suggestion command from the voice lamp control device 113, it sets this ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m to on (see S2204 in FIG. 104).

When the MPU 231 detects that the rear image command flag is on, it identifies the corresponding image type from the ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m (see S2450 in FIG. 87). It then sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the identified image type from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S2455 in FIG. 87).

Next, referring to FIG. 103, the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fifth embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) in the fifth embodiment is that a setting process for a suggestion command during an ambiguous notification period is added.

In the fifth embodiment, in the process of setting the display special chart 1 variation pattern command (S1307), if it is determined in the process of S1351 that the game is in the "normal game mode" (S1351: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m (S1352).

In the processing of S1352, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m, i.e., the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m (S1352: No), then it is determined whether the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1353).

If the result of the judgment in S1353 is that the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1353: Yes), the number of times the variable performance of the current special pattern has been executed is within the ambiguous notification period, so a suggestion command is set during the ambiguous notification period (S1354) (see 81k in Figure 105 (a)), and the process proceeds to S1355.

By setting this command to indicate that the ambiguous notification period is in progress, during the period in which the special pattern variable presentation is being executed during the ambiguous notification period, a display indicating that the ambiguous notification period is in progress is always displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a limited presentation (see 81k in FIG. 105(a)).

If there is no indication that the special symbol variation effect is in the ambiguous notification period during its execution, the player will win the special symbol 1 small win and will only realize that the current number of times the special symbol variation effect is being executed is in the ambiguous notification period when he or she checks the right-hit notification effect (see FIG. 105(c)) displayed during the small win opening. Then, during the opening time (i.e., "10 seconds"), the player must decide whether or not to generate a jackpot in the small win game. At this time, the player must make a decision taking into account the player's own remaining play time, the opening hours of the hall, the number of remaining balls in hand, the remaining amount of money, etc., and in some cases, he or she may make an incorrect decision. Also, while considering which shot to use, the small win game may end, making it impossible to generate a jackpot state, resulting in a result that is different from the original intention.

However, by configuring the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the player can recognize that the current number of times the special pattern variable performance is being performed is the ambiguous notification period by checking the variable performance of the third pattern display device 81, and if the player wins the special pattern 1 small win during the ambiguous notification period, the player can determine in advance whether or not a big win should be generated in the small win game, and can play the small win game smoothly without confusion.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1352 that the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m (S1352: Yes), the number of times the variable performance of the current special symbol is executed is a value within the jackpot priority notification period, so the processes of S1353 and S1354 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1355. Also, if the result of the determination in S1353 is that the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (S1353: No), the number of times the variable performance of the current special symbol is executed is a value within the rescue priority notification period, so in this case too, the process of S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1355.

Next, referring to FIG. 104(a), the rear image system command processing (S2115) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image system command processing (S2115) in the fifth embodiment. The difference between the rear image system command processing (S2115) in the fifth embodiment and the rear image system command processing (S2115) in the fifth embodiment is that an update process for the ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m has been added.

In the rear image command processing (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2201). If there is a rear image change command (S2201: Yes), a rear image change flag is set to ON (S2202) to notify the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) described below of the change in the rear image resulting from receiving the rear image change command in the ON state, and processing proceeds to S2205.

If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2201: No), then it is determined whether there is a command suggested during the ambiguous notification period among the unprocessed commands (S2203), and if there is a command suggested during the ambiguous notification period (S2203: Yes), the ambiguous notification period suggestion flag 233m is set to on (S2204), and the processing proceeds to S2205.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won during the ambiguous notification period of the "normal game state A".

In more detail, Fig. 105(a) shows a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period), Fig. 105(b) shows a state in which the variable display of the special symbol that was being executed from the state of Fig. 105(a) has won the special symbol 1 small win, the variable performance has ended, and the third symbol has stopped, and Fig. 105(c) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 105(b).

Figure 105 (a) shows a state in which the display of the first special symbol is being changed when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "551" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period).

In FIG. 105(a), the upper right portion of the main display area Dm in the third pattern display device 81, the special pattern 1 variable area 87b, is displayed blinking, indicating that the variable display of the first special pattern is in progress. In addition, the central portion of the main display area Dm displays the third pattern as being variable.

In addition, a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "551", which indicates that the performance is a variable during the ambiguous notification period, as shown in the break-even count table 222f in FIG. 91.

Furthermore, a text message 81k is displayed in the upper part of the main display area Dm, with the words "During Ambiguous Period" scrolling from right to left. This text message 81k is configured to be constantly displayed while the variable presentation is being performed during the ambiguous notification period (see FIG. 91). By checking this text message 81k, the player can recognize that the currently running variable display of the special pattern is being performed during the ambiguous notification period, and can consider in advance whether or not to play to the right to generate a jackpot state in a small prize game when the variable display of the special pattern wins the special pattern 1 small prize.

Next, Figure 105(b) shows the state in which the special symbol changing display that was in progress from the state shown in Figure 105(a) has won the special symbol 1 small win, the changing performance has ended, and the third symbol has stopped.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that a special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the ambiguous notification period, when comparing the expected number of balls that a player can win when playing with a right-handed play method when a small jackpot is won and when playing with a left-handed play method when a small jackpot is won, the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won will be clearly greater by using either play method.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 105(b), in order to suggest that there is no significant difference in the expected value of the balls that can be won in the small prize game that will be played afterwards, regardless of whether or not a right-hand play is played, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row. Also, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 variable area 87b, is stopped in blue, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates that a small prize has been won.

Next, FIG. 105(c) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in FIG. 105(b).

In addition, a text message 81g saying "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a text message 81h saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, which also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

The left center section of the main display area Dm displays a character pattern 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand, and the lower right section of the main display area Dm displays a character pattern 81i of a boy facing downward. These two character patterns 81e and 81i are the character patterns displayed in the jackpot priority notification effect and the rescue priority notification effect (see 81e in FIG. 97(b) and 81i in FIG. 97(d)).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the ambiguous notification period, which is the period between the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a message indicating that the ambiguous notification period is in progress while the special pattern variable presentation is being performed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the number of times the special pattern variable performance has been performed is within the ambiguous notification period by checking the variable performance on the third pattern display device 81.

As a result, if a player wins a special chart 1 small win during the ambiguous notification period, it will be possible to determine in advance whether or not a big win should occur during the small win game, allowing the player to play the small win game smoothly without confusion.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 106 and 107. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, transition to a game state that is predefined and advantageous to the player, thereby granting the player a profit. In the advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met by the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In these gaming machines, the suggestions given to the player regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions during a specified period of time are not sufficiently satisfactory, and there is a demand for further improvement in the content of the suggestions.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state are uniform over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. In addition, the player will not be able to obtain the interest that arises from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can generate a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal game state A," the gameplay is provided with the option of whether or not to generate a big win with the small win, with the aim of enriching the gameplay variation and providing the player with a gaming machine that can notify the player of a hitting method that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

In order to achieve this object, the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, an alarm control means for issuing a predetermined alarm in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode, and a notification control means for issuing a notification in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode based on the entry of a gaming ball into the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing that is a specific period before the specific information becomes the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the gaming machine is configured not to switch to the first notification mode at least until the specific profit is generated after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

Now, referring to Fig. 106 and Fig. 107, the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. Fig. 106 and Fig. 107 are diagrams showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A".

In more detail, Fig. 106(a) shows the state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) when a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Fig. 106(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 106(a).

Furthermore, Fig. 106(c) shows a state in which, from the state of Fig. 106(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "550" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Fig. 106(d) shows a state in which, from the state of Fig. 106(c), the opening of the small win game is being executed.

Furthermore, Fig. 107(a) shows a state in which, from the state of Fig. 106(d), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops. Fig. 107(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 107(a).

Figure 106 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 106(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", which indicates that the variable presentation is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special 1 small jackpot has been won. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the jackpot priority notification period, the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player a higher expected number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 106(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b in order to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small win game that will be executed afterwards, and generate a big win game.

Next, FIG. 106(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being performed from the state shown in FIG. 106(a). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game in the small win game.

In addition, the middle right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81c "Hit right," and the lower right part of the main display area Dm displays the text message 81d "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest right-hand play. Furthermore, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a character image 81e of a boy facing to the right and raising his hand is displayed, which also suggests right-hand play.

Next, FIG. 106(c) shows a state in which, from the state in FIG. 106(b), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 106(c), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "550", indicating that the state has returned to "normal gaming state A" from the state shown in FIG. 106(a) and FIG. 106(b) without transitioning to a jackpot state, and that the first special symbol has been displayed in the "normal gaming state A" multiple times. Also, the variation presentation in FIG. 106(c) indicates that the variation presentation is during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even frequency table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 106(c), in order to suggest that the expected number of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win game is not generated in the small win game that is executed afterwards, the same pattern (here, the number "2") is stopped in each pattern row on the left and right of the third pattern 81b, and the main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it is stopped in the central pattern row.

Next, FIG. 106(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in FIG. 106(c).

The upper part of the main display area Dm displays a text message 81f stating "The number of times the rescue condition is met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by executing several rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the number of times the rescue condition is met will be reached and the state will transition to a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81c in FIG. 106(b), this text message gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a text message 81h saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81d in FIG. 106(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character pattern 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and compared to the character pattern 81e in FIG. 106(b), this display also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. In addition, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed on the top right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

In this way, the right-hit notification display shown in FIG. 106(d) indicates that the display has switched from the right-hit notification display when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the jackpot priority notification period (i.e., the jackpot priority notification display) shown in FIG. 106(b) to the right-hit notification display when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period (i.e., the rescue priority notification display).

Next, FIG. 107(a) shows a state in which, from the state of FIG. 106(d), the ball does not pass through the specific area 65d, the small win state ends without transitioning to a big win state, and the game returns to "normal game state A", and when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), a special chart 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 107(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "637", indicating that the state has returned to "normal gaming state A" from the state shown in FIG. 106(c) and FIG. 106(d) without transitioning to a jackpot state, and that the variable display of the first special symbol has been executed multiple times in the "normal gaming state A". In addition, the variable presentation in FIG. 107(a) indicates that the variable presentation is a variable presentation during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even frequency table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

Furthermore, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. Note that, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small jackpot is won than when playing right-handed when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 107(a), in order to suggest that the expected number of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win game is not generated in the small win game that is executed afterwards, the same pattern (here, the number "2") is stopped in each pattern row on the left and right of the third pattern 81b, and the main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it is stopped in the central pattern row.

Next, FIG. 107(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in FIG. 107(a).

The upper part of the main display area Dm displays a text message 81f stating "The number of times the rescue condition is met will soon be reached," which literally suggests that by executing several rotations of the dynamic display of the special symbol, the number of times the rescue condition is met will be reached and the state will transition to a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81c in FIG. 106(b), this text message gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a text message 81h saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm, and compared to the text message 81d in FIG. 106(b), this text message also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character pattern 81i of a boy looking down is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, and compared to the character pattern 81e in FIG. 106(b), this display also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. In addition, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed on the top right side of the main display area Dm, suggesting that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

In this way, the right-hit notification effect shown in Figure 107 (b) is executed in the same manner as the right-hit notification effect (i.e., the rescue priority notification effect) when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period shown in Figure 106 (d), which shows that the content of the right-hit notification effect has not changed since a small win on Special Chart 1 was won during the rescue priority notification period.

By configuring it in this way, if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A" and a rescue priority notification is executed in the right-hit notification of the small win, from then on, until a jackpot is generated, the right-hit notification when the small win on Special Chart 1 is won will be a rescue priority notification, and will not switch to a jackpot priority notification.

As a result, even if a player wins a small special 1 jackpot during the rescue priority notification period, and then wins a small special 1 jackpot again while playing using the left-hand play method used when a small jackpot was won, the rescue priority notification will be executed in the same way as the previous time, so the player can feel at ease and continue to aim for the "shortened normal 1 jackpot time state."

On the other hand, if the right-hand hit notification display is configured to be able to execute a jackpot priority notification display when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period, there is a possibility that the small jackpot on Special Chart 1 will be won and the jackpot priority notification display will be executed while attempting to establish the rescue condition by executing the left-hand hit playing method for when a small jackpot is won during the rescue priority idle period.

When such a situation occurs, the player avoids the occurrence of a jackpot based on a small jackpot by playing from the left when a small jackpot is won, in accordance with the rescue priority notification effect when a small jackpot is won on Special Chart 1, and although the player uses his or her balls to play from the left in an attempt to satisfy the rescue condition, the jackpot priority notification effect is executed on the next small jackpot on Special Chart 1, suggesting a transition to a jackpot state, which confuses the player and makes him or her unsure of which method to use, which may lead to the player ceasing play on the pachinko machine 10.

To avoid such a situation, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, if the right-hit notification display when a small win on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A" switches from a big win priority notification display to a rescue priority notification display, the right-hit notification display when a small win on special chart 1 is won will be a rescue priority notification display thereafter, and will not switch to a big win priority notification display, until a big win occurs.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the right-hit notification effect is executed when a small win on special chart 1 is won during the jackpot priority notification period, and the right-hit notification effect is executed when a small win on special chart 1 is won during the rescue priority notification period.

By configuring it in this way, if the right-hit notification display when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A" switches from a big win priority notification display to a rescue priority notification display, the right-hit notification display when a small win on Special Chart 1 is won will be a rescue priority notification display thereafter, and will not switch to a big win priority notification display until a big win occurs.

As a result, even if a player wins a small special 1 jackpot during the rescue priority notification period, and then wins a small special 1 jackpot again while playing using the left-hand play method used when a small jackpot was won, the right-hand play notification for the rescue priority notification period will be executed in the same way as the previous time, so the player can rest assured and continue to aim for the "shortened normal 1 jackpot time state."

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 108 to 123. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of 1 (i.e., "800 times"), and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are set based on the number of times the rescue condition is met (see FIG. 91), and each period is compared with the number of times the special pattern is executed when a small jackpot is won, and the content of the right-hit notification presentation when a small jackpot is won is configured to differ.

However, if the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to 1, depending on the actual operating conditions of the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming hall, play on the pachinko machine 10 may be stopped early after the gaming hall opens, which may result in a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, further improvements are required regarding the setting of the rescue condition.

Specifically, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 is played from the time the amusement parlor opens, and the player wins a small special symbol 1 jackpot in "normal play state A," depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, it may be possible to determine that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a state immediately after the RAM is cleared when the amusement parlor opens, and it may be determined that the settings of the pachinko machine 10 have not been changed since the previous operating day, which may result in play being suspended on the pachinko machine 10.

The seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to optimally control the establishment of rescue conditions and prevent a decline in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

In order to achieve this object, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a game ball entering the start ball entry area. The gaming machine includes a judgment means for making a predetermined judgment based on the ball entering the game, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means and a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing a specific period before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the gaming machine determines the number of updates until the specific information reaches the specific update state by lottery, with one update number being determined from a plurality of update numbers.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

First, referring to FIG. 108, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the second embodiment and the block diagram of the seventh embodiment is that a rescue condition satisfaction count table 202n has been added to the ROM 202, and a rescue condition satisfaction count storage area 203q has been added to the RAM 203.

Here, the rescue condition satisfaction count table 202n of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the rescue condition satisfaction count table 202n stored in the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment.

The table 202n of the number of times a rescue condition has been met is referenced during the initialization process of the RAM 203 when the power is turned on and at the end of a big win game, and one rescue condition is met at random from among three rescue condition met numbers (i.e., "700 times," "800 times," or "900 times") regardless of the game state and other circumstances. Then, in the low probability state of the special symbol, when the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed reaches the number of rescue conditions met thus drawn, the system is configured to transition to a "normal symbol low probability time shortened state."

Thus, although details will be described later, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that different values are set for the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the relief priority notification period depending on the number of times the selected relief condition is met (see FIG. 113).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 in which the dynamic display of the special pattern is performed is configured not to display the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met. For this reason, the player is not able to know which rescue condition has been met in the current game state, and is not able to know the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of only 1 (i.e., "800 times"), so if the pachinko machine 10 is played from the time the game parlor opens, it is easy to determine whether the setting has been changed, which may result in a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

To explain in more detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of 1 (i.e., "800 times"), and the break-even number is set to "543 spins" (see FIG. 91). Therefore, when the RAM of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared or the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed after the end of the jackpot is between "0 spins and 523 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won, a jackpot priority notification effect is executed as a right-hit notification effect.

Therefore, let us assume that the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is played from the time the game hall opens, and that a small special 1 symbol win occurs when the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed for "430 spins" since the start of play, and an ambiguous notification effect is executed as the right-hit notification effect. In this case, since the ambiguous notification effect is executed, it can be determined that the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol has been executed when the RAM of the pachinko machine 10 is cleared during play or after the end of a big win is "524 to 563 spins" (see FIG. 91).

However, since the player only performed 430 spins of the dynamic display of the special symbols, it can be inferred that the pachinko machine 10 in play was not in a state immediately after the RAM had been cleared or immediately after the end of a jackpot when the gaming hall opened.

In addition, if the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed before the game hall opens, the pachinko machine 10 will enter a RAM clear state (see S118 and S117 in FIG. 37), making it possible to determine that the settings of the pachinko machine 10 have not been changed before the game hall opens.

In such a situation, if the operation data of the pachinko machine 10 from the previous operating day shows that not many balls were won and is not attractive data, the player may infer that the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are set low. Furthermore, since the settings of the pachinko machine 10 have not been changed based on the state of the operation data, the player may determine that the current settings of the pachinko machine 10 also make it difficult to win balls and may stop playing, which may lead to a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, as in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, a case is assumed in which the number of times the rescue condition is met is randomly selected from three values ("700 times", "800 times", or "900 times"). If the pachinko machine 10 is played from the time the game hall opens, and a small win is won when the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed for "430 spins" from the start of the game, and an ambiguous notification effect is executed as a right-hit notification effect, if the number of times the rescue condition is met of the current pachinko machine 10 is set to "700 times", the ambiguous notification period will be "424 to 463 spins" (see FIG. 113), and it is possible that the pachinko machine 10 at the time the game hall opens is immediately after the RAM is cleared or immediately after the end of a jackpot, and the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 has been changed since the previous operating day, and it is possible that the setting value has been changed to one that makes it easier to win balls, so at least there are fewer reasons to stop playing, and the possibility of continuing playing increases.

In this way, by configuring the number of times the rescue condition is met to be randomly selected from multiple values, it becomes difficult to determine whether the setting value has been changed when playing on the pachinko machine 10 begins when the game parlor opens, and a decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1 in "normal game state A", a right-hand hit is performed during the small jackpot game of the first round to pass the ball through the specific area 65d and generate a jackpot game, transitioning to "normal symbol high probability time shortening state A"; and when the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in "normal game state A" reaches the number of times the rescue condition is met and transitions to "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", the latter transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state" is configured to have a higher expected value of the balls that the player can win.

Therefore, when the number of times the rescue condition is met is set to a value of 1 (i.e., "800 times"), as in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the rescue priority notification period are each set to a value of 1 (see FIG. 91), so that the player may be able to determine which hitting method to execute by checking the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed on a data display or the like installed in the hall, without checking the right-hit notification effect executed when a small jackpot is won on special pattern 1.

However, as in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the number of times the rescue condition is met is randomly selected from the three values set in the rescue condition met number table 202n, and the number of times the rescue condition is met that is set at that time is not known to the player. This allows the player to check the right-hit notification effect that is executed during the OP time when a small jackpot is won and to decide which hit to use, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the rescue condition satisfaction count storage area 203q stored in the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 of the seventh embodiment will be described. The rescue condition satisfaction count storage area 203q is a memory that stores the rescue condition satisfaction count for determining whether or not to transition to the "normal low probability time shortening state" based on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed.

When the RAM 203 is initialized after power-on and when a jackpot is ended, the MPU 201 executes a lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition has been met (see S161 in FIG. 114 and S161 in FIG. 117), and stores the value of the number of times a rescue condition has been met, which is determined in the lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition has been met, in the rescue condition met number storage area 203q (see S142 in FIG. 115). In addition, the value is cleared as an initialization process upon a jackpot (see S604 in FIG. 116). The value stored in the rescue condition met number storage area 203q is referenced in the rescue reach count process in the process of determining whether or not the number of times a rescue condition has been met (see S5403 in FIG. 47).

Next, referring to FIG. 110, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the block diagram of the second embodiment and the block diagram of the seventh embodiment is that a sub-rescue condition satisfaction storage area 223h and a sub-base value storage area 223o have been added to the RAM 223, and an RTC 245 has been added.

The sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h is a memory that stores the number of times the current rescue condition of the pachinko machine 10 has been fulfilled.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a rescue condition fulfillment count command sent from the main control device 110 when the power is turned on or when a jackpot ends, it stores the corresponding information in the sub rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h (see S1274 in FIG. 120). In addition, this sub rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h is cleared when a jackpot is won (see S1422 in FIG. 122).

The sub-base value storage area 223n is an area in which a value similar to the real-time base value displayed on the base display device 401 by the main control device 110 is stored.

This sub-base value storage area 223n is cleared during the RAM initial value setting process during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1010 in FIG. 119). Then, when a base value command sent from the main control device 110 is received, the received real-time base value is stored (see S1272 in FIG. 120).

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the current break-even number for the pachinko machine 10 is calculated based on the real-time base value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223o and the number of times the rescue condition is satisfied stored in the sub-rescue condition satisfaction number storage area 223h, and further, the number of jackpot priority notifications (the number of rotations that is the boundary between the jackpot priority notification period and the ambiguous notification period) and the number of ambiguous notifications (the number of rotations that is the boundary between the ambiguous notification period and the rescue priority notification period) are calculated from the break-even number (see S1275 and S1276 in FIG. 120), and the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the rescue priority notification period are set (details will be described later in FIGS. 111 to 113).

Next, the RTC 245 has a function that can clock the current date and time, and is composed of an RTC control unit 246, a register 247, and an RTC power supply 248. The RTC control unit 246 uses (controls) the register 247 to perform various controls such as clocking the current date and time. The register 247 has a register table, and this register table includes a clock register 247a.

The clock register 247a is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In this embodiment, the current date and time information in the clock register 247a includes information that can identify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second".

The RTC power supply 248 is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 245, separate from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control unit 246 and the register 247 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the clock register 247a can update the current date and time information even when the power supply is cut off. In this embodiment, a button battery is used for the RTC power supply 248.

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal game state A", the current time is referenced by the RTC 245, and if the current time is after 8:00 p.m., a big win priority notification is made regardless of the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won (details will be described later in FIG. 113).

Next, referring to Fig. 111 and Fig. 112, the expected number of balls obtained in each state will be described in the case where a jackpot is obtained when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is selected during the "normal game state A" in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, and where a jackpot is not obtained during the small jackpot game, and the game returns to the "normal game state A" and the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met. Fig. 111 and Fig. 112 are tables summarizing the difference in the average number of balls obtained in two different game states for the average number of balls obtained when a special symbol 1 small jackpot is obtained in the "normal game state A" of the seventh embodiment, and a jackpot is generated by playing right-hand when the small jackpot is obtained, and when a right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is obtained, the game returns to the "normal game state A" to execute the dynamic display of the special symbol again, and the number of times the rescue condition is met and the game transitions to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state".

In the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the break-even number table 222f (see FIG. 113) is set based on the break-even number calculated from the tables in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112. The voice lamp control device 113 also refers to the break-even number table 222f when the power is turned on and when the rescue condition satisfaction number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received at the end of the jackpot, and sets values in the jackpot priority notification number storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification number storage area 223n based on the real-time base value and the rescue condition satisfaction number at that time, and sets the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period.

When a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", the set big win priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are compared with the number of spins at the time of the small win, and the content of the right-hit notification performance to be performed during the OP time at the time of the small win is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a break-even number is set to 1, and a jackpot priority notification period, an ambiguous notification period, and a rescue priority notification period are set to 1 based on the break-even number (see FIG. 91). When a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed is compared with the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the rescue priority notification period to determine the content of the right-hit notification presentation when the small win is won.

However, there may be slight individual differences between the pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall due to the condition of the game nails and the ball launching unit 112a, etc., and furthermore, the playing methods of the players are not the same, so there may be an error between the break-even number set in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment and the break-even number in the pachinko machine 10 that is actually being played.

More specifically, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the break-even number is set to 1, assuming that the base value in the "normal game state" is "30". On the other hand, for example, it is conceivable that the state of the game nails and ball launching unit 112a, etc., may change due to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 for a long period of time, and the winning rate for the first starting hole 64 and the general winning hole 63 during left-handed play may change.

If the base value in the "normal game mode" changes (for example, to "36"), the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine for a specific number of balls fired during left-handed play in the "normal game mode" will change, and the number of balls used (reduced) until the number of times the rescue condition is met will also change.

In such a case, for example, even if a jackpot priority notification effect is executed as a right-hit notification effect when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1 in "normal game state A" (i.e., the expected number of balls that can be won is higher when playing with a right-hit method when a small jackpot is won than when playing with a left-hit method when a small jackpot is won), it is also expected that the expected number of balls that can be won is actually higher when playing with a left-hit method when a small jackpot is won than when playing with a right-hit method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the break-even number is set based on the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met, which are sent as commands from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are calculated.

By configuring it in this way, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won in "normal game state A", a more accurate right-hit notification effect can be executed.

As shown in the case of No. 1 in FIG. 111, when the real-time base value (the value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n, the "base value" column in FIG. 111) is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met (the value stored in the sub-rescue condition met storage area) is "700 spins," if a small win is won on special chart 1 and the number of spins at the time of winning the small win (the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i) is "400 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win by the end of the consecutive wins when the right-handed play is performed in the small win game and the ball passes through the specific area 65d to win the jackpot will be about 4000 balls (the average number of balls won in this case is "α").

The end of a winning streak here means that when a small jackpot is won on special 1 in "normal game state A," right-hand play is started to transition to a jackpot state, and then the state goes through the "normal game state with reduced time for high probability (normal game state with reduced time for high probability A and normal game state with reduced time for high probability B)" and "normal game state B," before returning to "normal game state A" again (see Figure 11).

On the other hand, if the right-hand play is not performed when the small jackpot is won and the big jackpot is not generated, the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins", and the number of spins when the small jackpot is won is "400 spins", so the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met is "300 spins".

In addition, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the balls shot in left-handed play are configured to enter the first starting hole 64 at about 6 balls per minute (so-called S1 = 6), so if left-handed play is continued, the time required until the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached (i.e., until the remaining "300 spins" are executed) is about 50 minutes (see the "Time (minutes) until the number of times the rescue condition is met" column in FIG. 111). Therefore, the number of balls shot in about 50 minutes of left-handed play is about 5,000, and since the real-time base value is "30", the number of balls paid out as prize balls during this period is about 1,500. In other words, the number of balls consumed by left-handed play for about 50 minutes (when about 5,000 balls are shot) is about 3,500 (see the "Number of balls used until the number of times the rescue condition is met" column in FIG. 111).

In addition, when the rescue condition is met enough times and the game transitions to the "normal low probability time shortened state", the average number of balls the player can win by the end of the winning streak will be approximately 7,000 balls (the "average number of balls won when rescue condition is met" column in Figure 111).

Here, the number of balls consumed from when the special 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A" until the number of times the rescue condition is met without generating a big win in the small win is about 3500 balls, so the average number of balls acquired when the number of times the rescue condition is met is reached and the "normal low probability time shortening state" is transitioned from the time of the special 1 small win winning is about 3500 balls (the average number of balls acquired in this case is "β"), which is "the average number of balls acquired when the rescue condition is met (7000) - the number of balls used until the number of times the rescue condition is met (3500)" (the "average number of balls acquired (β)" from the time of winning the small win A to the end of the consecutive win" column in Figure 111). In addition, the time from the time of the special 1 small win winning until the number of times the rescue condition is met and the "normal low probability time shortening state" is transitioned to and the consecutive win ends is about 70 minutes (the "average time consumed (minutes) from the time of winning the small win A to the end of the consecutive win" column in Figure 111).

Therefore, in case No. 1, the average number of balls won by playing with the right hand when a small jackpot is won is about 4,000 (α), and the average number of balls won by playing with the left hand when a small jackpot is won is about 3,500 (β), so the difference in the average number of balls won for 2 (α-β) is about 500 (see the "Difference (α-β)" column in Figure 111).

In other words, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "30", the number of times the rescue condition has been met is "700 spins", and a special symbol 1 small win is won when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "400 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Similarly, in the case of No. 2, when the real-time base value is "30", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "442 spins", if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 3, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "443 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately two fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 4, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 667 fewer when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won than when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A" with a real-time base value of "30" and the number of times the rescue condition has been met of "700 spins," if the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is within 442 spins, the right-hand play method at the time of the small win is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method at the time of the small win.

On the other hand, when the real-time base value is "30" and the rescue condition has been met "700 spins" and a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," if the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is 443 spins or more, the left-handed play method at the time of the small win is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method at the time of the small win.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "443 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 5, when the real-time base value is "30", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins", if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 6, when the real-time base value is "30", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "542 spins", if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player about 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 7, when the real-time base value is "30", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "543 spins", if a small jackpot is won on special symbol 1, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately two fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 8, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 667 fewer when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won than when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A" with the real-time base value being "30" and the number of times the rescue condition has been met being "800 spins," if the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is within 542 spins, the right-hand play method at the time of the small win is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method at the time of the small win.

On the other hand, when the real-time base value is "30" and the rescue condition has been met "800 spins" and a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A," if the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol at the time of the small win is 543 spins or more, the left-handed play method at the time of the small win is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method at the time of the small win.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "543 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 9, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 500 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 10, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "642 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 10 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 11, when the real-time base value is "30", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "643 spins", if a small jackpot for special symbol 1 is won, the right-hand play method (α) when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately two fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 12, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "700 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 667 fewer when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won than when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 642 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 643 spins or more, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "643 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 13, when the real-time base value is "32", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "400 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 400 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 14, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "435 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player about three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 15, when the real-time base value is "32", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "436 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 16, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 733 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 435 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 436 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "436 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 17, when the real-time base value is "32", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 400 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 18, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "535 spins" and a small win is won on special symbol 1, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 19, when the real-time base value is "32", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "536 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 20, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 733 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 535 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 536 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "536 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 21, when the real-time base value is "32", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 400 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 22, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "635 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player about three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 23, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "636 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 8 balls less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won, compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 24, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "700 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 733 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 635 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 636 spins or more, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "636 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 1 as shown in FIG. 112, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win for special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "400 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 300 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 2, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "427 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player about three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 3, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "428 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to win about 8 fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 4, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 800 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 427 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 428 spins or later, the left-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-hand play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "428 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 5, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 300 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 6, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "527 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player about three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 7, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "528 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 8 balls less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 8, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 800 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 527 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 528 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "528 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described later (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 9, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 300 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 10, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "627 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player about three more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 11, when the real-time base value is "34", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "628 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 12, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "700 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 800 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 627 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 628 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "628 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 13, when the real-time base value is "36", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "400 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 200 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 14, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "418 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 15, when the real-time base value is "36", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "419 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player about three fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 16, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 867 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 418 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 419 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," "419 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 17, when the real-time base value is "36", the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins", and the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "500 spins", the right-hand play method (α) when the small jackpot is won is configured to give the player approximately 200 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when the small jackpot is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 18, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "518 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 19, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "519 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to win about three fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 20, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 867 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 518 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 519 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," "519 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

Next, in case No. 21, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "600 spins," the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 200 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 22, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "618 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to give the player approximately 8 more balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

Furthermore, in the case of No. 23, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time of "619 spins" in the low probability state of the special symbol, the right-hand play method (α) when a small win is won is configured to win about three fewer balls on average than the left-hand play method (β) when a small win is won.

In addition, in the case of No. 24, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," if a small win on special symbol 1 is won at the time when the number of spins in the low probability state of the special symbol is "700 spins," the average number of balls that the player can win is configured to be approximately 867 less when playing with a right-handed play method (α) when a small win is won compared to when playing with a left-handed play method (β) when a small win is won.

Therefore, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins of the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is within 618 spins, the right-hand play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when the small win is won.

On the other hand, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," and the number of spins for the dynamic display of the special symbol when the small win is won is 619 spins or later, the left-handed play method when the small win is won is configured to give the player a greater average number of balls that can be won than the right-handed play method when the small win is won.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," "619 spins" is stored as the break-even number in the break-even number table 222f described below (see FIG. 113).

In this way, by referencing the number of times the rescue condition is met and the real-time base value, the break-even number can be calculated more accurately, and the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period can be determined more accurately. As a result, a more accurate suggestion effect can be executed in the right-hit notification effect when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won.

Next, the break-even number table 222f of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the break-even number table 222f stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. As described above, the break-even number table 222f is set based on the expected number of balls acquired table for each state in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112. In addition, the break-even number table 222f specifies the break-even number, the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the relief priority notification period based on the real-time base value and the number of times the relief condition is established. When a special symbol 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", the sound lamp control device 113 compares the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won with the big win priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period specified in the break-even number table 222f, and determines the content of the right-hit notification performance to be executed during the OP time of the small win game.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 113, when the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "443 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 423 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "424 to 463 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "464 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "543 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 523 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "524 to 563 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "564 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "643 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 623 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "624 to 663 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "664 to 900 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "436 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 416 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "417 to 456 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "457 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "536 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 516 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "517 to 556 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "557 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "32" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "636 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 616 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "617 to 656 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "657 to 900 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "428 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 408 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "409 to 448 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "449 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "528 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 508 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "509 to 548 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "549 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "34" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "628 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 608 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "609 to 648 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "649 to 900 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 spins," the break-even number is set to "419 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 399 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "400 to 439 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "440 to 700 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "800 spins," the break-even number is set to "519 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 499 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "500 to 539 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "540 to 800 spins."

Next, if the real-time base value is "36" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "900 spins," the break-even number is set to "619 spins," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 599 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "600 to 639 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "640 to 900 spins."

If the real-time base value is less than "30", it is configured to refer to "30", if it is "31", it is configured to refer to "32", if it is "33", it is configured to refer to "34", if it is "35", it is configured to refer to "36", and if it is a value greater than "37", it is configured to refer to "36".

Also, as mentioned above, if the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when a small jackpot is won is greater than the break-even number, and the left-hand play method is executed when a small jackpot is won, the average time consumed from the time the small jackpot is won to the end of the winning streak due to the transition to the "normal symbol low probability time shortened state" is approximately 60 minutes (see Figures 111 and 112).

Therefore, for example, if a pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment is played in a pachinko hall and a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the rescue priority notification period 30 minutes before the pachinko hall closes, the average number of balls that the player can win would normally be greater if the left-hand play method was used when the small jackpot was won. However, if the left-hand play continues in this situation without generating a jackpot, the hall may close before the rescue condition is met, or while the rescue condition is met and the player is in the middle of a winning streak in which the state transitions to the "normal chart low probability time shortening state," and as a result the player may end up with fewer balls than they could have won.

For this reason, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to take into account the closing time of a normal pachinko hall, and when a small win on special symbol 1 is won in "normal gaming state A", the current time is referenced from the RTC 245 (see FIG. 110), and if the current time is after 8 p.m., a big win priority notification is made regardless of the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed when the small win is won.

By configuring it in this way, players can play the pachinko machine 10 with peace of mind, even if the pachinko hall is nearing closing time.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 114 to 118. The main differences between the control processes in the second embodiment and the seventh embodiment are that a lottery process for the number of times a rescue condition is met is added, and that a process for sending commands related to the number of times the rescue condition is met and the base value to the voice lamp control device 113 is added.

First, FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the start-up process in the first embodiment and the start-up process in the seventh embodiment is that a lottery process for determining the number of times a rescue condition is met has been added.

In the start-up process of the seventh embodiment, when the process of S117 is completed, a lottery process for determining the number of times the rescue condition is met is executed (S161) to set the number of times the rescue condition is met, and the process proceeds to S113.

Now, referring to FIG. 115, the rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process (S161) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the rescue condition fulfillment count lottery process (S161) in the seventh embodiment.

This process for drawing the number of times the rescue condition is met (S161) is executed when the RAM 203 is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and when a big win ends, i.e., when the number of times the rescue condition is met is initialized, and is a process for newly setting the number of times the rescue condition is met.

In this lottery process (S161), the number of times the rescue condition is met is first determined by lottery (S141). In this lottery process, a value of 1 is randomly selected from the three values (either "700 times," "800 times," or "900 times") set in the rescue condition met number table 202n (see FIG. 109).

Next, the lottery result in the processing of S141 is stored in the rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 203q (S142), this rescue condition fulfillment count lottery processing (S161) is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up processing (see FIG. 114).

Returning to the startup process in FIG. 114, the explanation will continue. When the process of S113 is completed, a rescue condition satisfaction count command is generated and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S162), and the process proceeds to S163.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 does not have a power backup function, and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 is initialized by the start-up process (see S1010 in FIG. 119), so each time the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, a setting value command and a rescue condition satisfaction count command are set and transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

The rescue condition fulfillment count command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the rescue condition fulfillment count command, it calculates the number of jackpot priority notifications and the number of ambiguous notifications from the rescue condition fulfillment count, and stores each piece of information in each area provided in the RAM 223 (described later in FIG. 120).

Next, referring to FIG. 116, the hit process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the hit process (S203) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the hit process (S203) in the second embodiment and the hit process (S203) in the seventh embodiment is that a process for clearing the rescue condition satisfaction count storage area 203q is added when a jackpot occurs.

In the winning process (S203) of the seventh embodiment, when the process of S603 is completed, the rescue condition satisfaction count storage area 203q is cleared (S604), and the process proceeds to S605.

Next, referring to FIG. 117, the jackpot end process (S622), which is one process of the win process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (S610) of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the jackpot end process (S610) of the second embodiment and the jackpot end process (S610) of the seventh embodiment is that a process related to the number of times a rescue condition is met has been added.

In the seventh embodiment, when the process of S6611 is completed in the jackpot end process (S610), a lottery process for determining the number of times the rescue condition is met is executed (S161) to set the number of times the rescue condition is met, a rescue condition met number command is generated based on the set number of times the rescue condition is met, and this is set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S162), and the process proceeds to S6613.

Next, referring to FIG. 118, the base value processing (S251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the base value processing (S251) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the base value processing (S251) in the second embodiment and the base value processing (S251) in the seventh embodiment is that a command setting process for sending to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the calculated base value is added.

In the base value processing (S251) of the seventh embodiment, when the processing of S853 is completed, a base value command is set (S854) and this base value processing (S251) is terminated. The base value command set in the processing of S854 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a base value command, it stores the received real-time base value in the sub-base value storage area 223n. Then, when the power is turned on and when the jackpot ends, it calculates the number of jackpot priority notifications and the number of ambiguous notifications based on the real-time base value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n and the number of times the rescue condition is met stored in the sub rescue condition met number storage area 223h (described later in FIG. 120).

Next, referring to Figs. 119 to 123, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. The main difference between the control processes in the second embodiment and the seventh embodiment is that processes related to the base value command and the rescue condition satisfaction count command have been added.

First, referring to FIG. 119, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the start-up process of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the start-up process of the second embodiment and the start-up process of the seventh embodiment is that the process of storing values in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n has been deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the jackpot priority notification period, the ambiguous notification period, and the rescue priority notification period are each set to a value of 1, so that during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, values are stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n (see FIG. 92).

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period are determined by the current number of times the rescue condition is met and the base value, so values are not stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, but are instead stored during the rescue-related command reception process (described later in FIG. 120).

Next, referring to FIG. 120, the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) in the second embodiment and the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) in the seventh embodiment is that processing related to the base value command and the rescue condition satisfaction count command has been added.

In the seventh embodiment, the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) first determines whether or not a base value command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1271). If the determination results in a base value command being received (S1271: Yes), the received real-time base value is stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n (S1272), the rescue-related command reception process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

In the process of S1271, if it is determined that the base value command has not been received (S1271: No), then it is determined whether or not a rescue condition fulfillment count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1273). If the determination result is that the rescue condition fulfillment count command has been received (S1273: Yes), the received rescue condition fulfillment count is stored in the sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h (S1274). After that, the break-even count table 222f (see FIG. 113) is used to calculate the number of jackpot priority notifications and the number of ambiguous notifications from the rescue condition fulfillment count and the real-time base value stored in the sub-base value storage area 223n, and these are stored in the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n, respectively (S1275 and S1276), and this rescue-related command reception process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 62).

As mentioned above, the processes of S1275 and S1276 are calculated by referring to the break-even number table 222f (see FIG. 113). For example, if the real-time base value is "30" and the number of times the rescue condition is met is "700 times," the jackpot priority notification period is set to "0 to 423 spins," the ambiguous notification period is set to "424 to 463 spins," and the rescue priority notification period is set to "464 to 700 spins," so "424 spins" is stored in the jackpot priority notification number storage area 223m and "464 spins" is stored in the ambiguous notification number storage area 223n.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1273 that the rescue condition satisfaction count command has not been received (S1273: No), the processing proceeds to S1277.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the seventh embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the second embodiment and the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308) of the seventh embodiment is that a current time determination process is added.

In the seventh embodiment, in the display special chart 1 stop type command setting process (S1308), if the result of the determination in S1374 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is in the off state (S1374: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous jackpot (or the RAM 203 initialization process at power-on), so the current time is then read from the clock register 247a of the RTC 245, and it is determined whether the current time is after 8 p.m. (S1375).

In the process of S1375, if it is determined that the current time is not after 8 p.m. (S1375: No), the current time is before 8 p.m., and the dynamic display of special symbols is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is time to end the consecutive win state by transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", and the process transitions to S1381.

On the other hand, in the process of S1375, if it is determined that the current time is after 8 p.m. (S1375: Yes), the special symbols are dynamically displayed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is no time to end the consecutive win state by transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", and the process transitions to S1377.

Next, referring to FIG. 122, the winning effect processing (S1105) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing (S1105) in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the winning effect processing (S1105) in the second embodiment and the winning effect processing (S1105) in the seventh embodiment is that a process for clearing the sub-rescue condition establishment count storage area 223h has been added.

In the winning effect process (S1105) of the seventh embodiment, if the result of the determination in S1401 is that a jackpot has been won (S1401: Yes), as an initialization process, the sub-rescue condition fulfillment count storage area 223h, the jackpot priority notification count storage area 223m, and the ambiguous notification count storage area 223n are cleared (S1422), and the process proceeds to S1403.

Next, referring to FIG. 123, the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won, which is executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the seventh embodiment. The difference between the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the second embodiment and the right-hit notification display process (S1409) when a small win is won in the seventh embodiment is that a process for determining the current time has been added.

In the seventh embodiment, in the right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won, if the result of the determination in S1503 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., if the sub-rescue set flag 223j is off (S1503: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous big win (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), so the current time is then read from the clock register 247a of the RTC 245 to determine whether the current time is after 8 p.m. (S1504).

In the process of S1504, if it is determined that the current time is not after 8 p.m. (S1504: No), the current time is before 8 p.m., and the dynamic display of special symbols is executed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is time to end the consecutive win state by transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time shortening state", and the process transitions to S1515.

On the other hand, in the process of S1504, if it is determined that the current time is after 8 p.m. (S1504: Yes), the special symbols are dynamically displayed until the number of times the rescue condition is met, and it is determined that there is no time to end the consecutive win state by transitioning to the "normal symbol low probability time reduction state", and the process transitions to S1506.

As described above, the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to refer to the rescue condition fulfillment count table 202n when the RAM 203 is initialized when the power is turned on and when the jackpot game ends, and to randomly select one rescue condition fulfillment count from multiple rescue condition fulfillment counts (i.e., "700 times," "800 times," or "900 times") regardless of the game state and other circumstances.

By configuring it in this way, the values for the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and relief priority notification period will no longer be unique, and multiple types of periods can be set.

As a result, it becomes difficult to determine whether the settings have been changed when playing on the pachinko machine 10 begins after the game parlor opens, and this makes it possible to reduce any decline in the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met calculated by the main control device 110 are sent as a command to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to calculate the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period from the real-time base value and the number of times the rescue condition is met.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to grasp the jackpot priority notification period, ambiguous notification period, and rescue priority notification period more accurately. As a result, it is possible to execute a more accurate suggestion effect in the right-hit notification effect when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Fig. 124. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the same components and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and second embodiments are given the same reference numerals as those of the first and second embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, transition to a game state that is predefined and advantageous to the player, thereby granting the player a profit. In the advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met by the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In these gaming machines, the suggestions given to the player regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions during a specified period of time are not sufficiently satisfactory, and there is a demand for further improvement in the content of the suggestions.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state are uniform over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. In addition, the player will not be able to obtain the interest that arises from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can generate a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal game state A," the gameplay is provided with the option of whether or not to generate a big win with the small win, with the aim of enriching the gameplay variation and providing the player with a gaming machine that can notify the player of a hitting method that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

In order to achieve this object, the eighth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, an alarm control means for issuing a predetermined alarm in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode, and a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific game result is reached by the determination means, the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific game result is reached by the determination means, notifying the player of the specific game result in the first notification mode until a specific timing that is a specific period before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the profit generating means generates the specific profit in the specific game state only when the specific game condition is established based on the specific game operation by the player when the specific game result is reached by the determination means.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

Now, referring to FIG. 124, we will explain the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A".

In more detail, Fig. 124(a) shows the state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "550" (i.e., the ambiguous notification period) when a special symbol 1 small win is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Fig. 124(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 124(a).

Figure 124(c) shows a state in which the ball has passed through a specific area 65d due to the player's right-handed play, from the state shown in Figure 124(b), and Figure 124(d) shows a transition from the state shown in Figure 124(c) to a jackpot state.

Figure 124 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period), a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 124(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "550", which indicates that the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 91 is a variable presentation during the ambiguous notification period.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special chart 1 small jackpot has been won. In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, when comparing the expected number of balls that a player can win when playing a right-handed game when a small jackpot is won and when playing a left-handed game when a small jackpot is won during the ambiguous notification period, the difference is so small that it is difficult to say that the average number of balls won will be clearly greater by using either game method.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 124(a), in order to suggest that there is no significant difference in the expected value of the balls that can be won in the small win game that is executed afterwards, regardless of whether or not a right-hand play is executed, the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row on the left and right of the third symbol 81b, and the main symbol with the words "challenge symbol" written on it is stopped in the central symbol row.

Next, FIG. 124(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state shown in FIG. 124(a).

In addition, a text message 81g asking "Right hit?" is displayed in the middle right part of the main display area Dm, which gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a text message 81h is displayed in the lower right part of the main display area Dm saying "Get a V and you'll win the jackpot," which is also a text message that gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested.

In addition, a character image 81j of a woman tilting her head is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm, which also gives the impression that right-hand play is not strongly suggested. In addition, a main display right-hand play instruction 89 is displayed on the top right side of the main display area Dm, which suggests that right-hand play will be used in the small win game.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the right-hit notification display when a small special chart 1 win is won during the ambiguous period is configured to execute a completely different notification display from the right-hit notification display when a small special chart 1 win is won during the big win priority period and the rescue priority period (see Figures 97(b) and 97(d)).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that this is a period that is different from the jackpot priority period and the rescue priority period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, FIG. 124(c) shows a state in which the player is notified that the ball has passed through the specific area 65d due to a right-handed play from the state in FIG. 124(b). In the center of the main display area Dm, a text message 81o saying "V acquired" is displayed, indicating that the ball has passed through the specific area 65d due to the player's right-handed play and is transitioning to a jackpot state.

Next, FIG. 124(d) shows a transition from the state in FIG. 124(c) to a jackpot state. A jackpot round display 81o of "2R" is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm, indicating that a transition to a jackpot state has occurred based on the ball passing through a specific area 65d during a small jackpot game, and that the second round has begun. Also, a character image 81j of a dancing woman is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a small win on special chart 1 is won in the "normal game state A," the machine is configured to transition to the big win state only if the ball passes through the specific area 65d by the player's right-handed play.

By configuring it in this way, even if a small win on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," the game will not transition to a big win state unless the player plays with the right hand and the ball passes through the specific area 65d.

As a result, the player can confirm the right-hit notification effect that is executed when a small win on special chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," and the player can decide whether or not to generate a big win state by playing right and passing through specific area 65d, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and thus achieves the same effects.

Ninth embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a ninth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Fig. 125. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that, after a predetermined period of time has passed, transition to a game state that is predefined and advantageous to the player, thereby granting the player a profit. In the advantageous game state, if a predetermined condition is met by the player's play, the player can obtain prize balls.

In these gaming machines, the suggestions given to the player regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions during a specified period of time are not sufficiently satisfactory, and there is a demand for further improvement in the content of the suggestions.

Specifically, for example, if the hints regarding the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state are uniform over a given period of time, the player will not be able to understand the magnitude of the profit that the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming state occurs. In addition, the player will not be able to obtain the interest that arises from changing the hints depending on the magnitude of the profit.

The present invention was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide optimal suggestions regarding the occurrence of advantageous gaming conditions within a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit the player will obtain if an advantageous gaming condition occurs, and increase the interest in the suggestions.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a small win that can generate a big win (i.e., a small win that can pass through the specific area 65d) is won in "normal game state A," the gameplay is provided with the option of whether or not to generate a big win with the small win, with the aim of enriching the gameplay variation and providing the player with a gaming machine that can notify the player of a hitting method that will increase the expected value of the balls that can be won.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, an alarm control means for issuing a predetermined alarm in a first alarm mode or a second alarm mode different from the first alarm mode, and a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific game result is reached by the determination means, the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific game result is reached by the determination means, notifying the player of the specific game result in the first notification mode until a specific timing that is a specific period before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the profit generating means generates the specific profit in the specific game state only when the specific game condition is established based on the specific game operation by the player when the specific game result is reached by the determination means.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

Now, referring to FIG. 125, we will explain the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A".

In more detail, Fig. 125(a) shows the state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the big win priority notification period) when a small win on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Fig. 125(b) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Fig. 125(a).

Furthermore, Figure 125(c) shows the state in which the special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops, and Figure 125(d) shows the state in which the opening of the small win game is being executed from the state of Figure 125(c).

Figure 125 (a) shows a state in which the rescue counter 203r in "normal game state A" is at "58" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), a small jackpot on special symbol 1 is won, the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 125(a), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "58", which indicates that the variable presentation is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small jackpot has been won. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, during the jackpot priority notification period, the right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won is configured to give the player a higher expected number of balls that can be won than the left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 125(a), the same symbol (here, the number "2") is stopped in each symbol row of the third symbol 81b in order to suggest that the player will play a right-hand hit in the small win game that will be executed afterwards, and generate a big win game.

Next, FIG. 125(b) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being performed from the state shown in FIG. 125(a). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game in the small win game.

In addition, the upper right part of the main display area Dm displays a text message 81c saying "Hit right," and the upper left part of the main display area Dm displays a text message 81d saying "Aim for V," both of which are messages that suggest playing with a right hand. Furthermore, a V acquisition suggestion display 81q is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. This V acquisition suggestion display 81q is composed of a V acquisition ball payout suggestion message 81q1 and a V acquisition ball payout suggestion pattern 81q2 displayed on the left side, and a post-jackpot ball payout suggestion message 81q3 and a post-jackpot ball payout suggestion pattern 81q4 displayed on the right side.

The upper left part of the V acquisition suggestion display 81q displays a V acquisition ball output suggestion message 81q1 saying "Get a ball by acquiring a V," and the lower left part of the V acquisition suggestion display 81q displays a symbol of an acquired ball in a money box and a V acquisition ball output suggestion symbol 81q2 with a "circle" in front of the symbol. Both the V acquisition ball output suggestion message 81q1 and the V acquisition ball output suggestion symbol 81q2 indicate the number of balls that can be acquired if a right-handed hit is performed in the currently active small win game to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 65d and generate a big win.

In addition, the upper right part of the V-acquired suggestion display 81q displays a message 81q3 suggesting post-jackpot payout, "Enter rush after jackpot?", and the lower right part of the V-acquired suggestion display 81q displays a pattern suggesting a larger amount of balls than the V-acquired ball payout suggestion pattern 81q2, and a post-jackpot payout suggestion pattern 81q4 with a "?" mark in front of the pattern. Both the post-jackpot payout suggestion message 81q3 and the post-jackpot payout suggestion pattern 81q4 suggest the payout that can be obtained in the game state after the jackpot has been generated in the currently executed small jackpot game (i.e., "normal high probability time shortened state A" (see FIG. 11)), but since the post-jackpot payout suggestion pattern 81q4 has a "?" mark attached, it suggests that the possibility of obtaining a large amount of balls is unclear in the game state after the jackpot.

Therefore, while Figure 125(b) suggests that a jackpot will be generated in the currently ongoing small jackpot game, making it possible to win a certain amount of balls, it is unclear how many balls will be won in the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot, suggesting that it is unclear whether a large amount of balls will be won in total.

Next, FIG. 125(c) shows a state in which a special symbol 1 small win is won when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "637" (i.e., rescue priority notification period), the variable presentation ends, and the third symbol stops.

In FIG. 125(c), a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "637", indicating that this is a variable presentation during the rescue priority notification period, as set in the break-even count table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

The third symbol 81b is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, indicating that the special symbol 1 small win has been won. In addition, in the ninth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, during the rescue priority notification period, the expected value of the balls that the player can win is higher when playing left-handed when a small win is won than when playing right-handed when a small win is won.

Therefore, in the situation of FIG. 125(c), in order to suggest that the expected number of balls that can be won will be higher if the right-hand play is not performed and a big win game is not generated in the small win game that is executed afterwards, the same pattern (here, the number "2") is stopped in each pattern row on the left and right of the third pattern 81b, and the main pattern with the words "challenge pattern" written on it is stopped in the central pattern row.

Next, FIG. 125(d) shows a state in which the opening of the small win game is being performed from the state of FIG. 125(c). A main display right-hit instruction 89 is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the player perform a right-hit game in the small win game.

In addition, a text message 81c saying "Right hit?" is displayed in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, and a text message 81d saying "Get a V for a jackpot" is displayed in the upper left part of the main display area Dm, giving the impression that right-hitting play is not strongly suggested. Furthermore, a suggestion display 81r for when a V is not acquired is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. This suggestion display 81r for when a V is not acquired is composed of a message 81r1 suggesting the amount of balls to be dispensed when a V is not acquired and a pattern 81r2 suggesting the amount of balls to be dispensed when a V is not acquired, displayed on the left side, and a message 81r3 suggesting the amount of balls to be dispensed when a rescue condition is met and a pattern 81r4 suggesting the amount of balls to be dispensed when a rescue condition is met, displayed on the right side.

The upper left part of the V acquisition suggestion display 81q displays a V non-acquired ball output suggestion message 81r1, "No balls if V does not pass," and the lower left part of the V acquisition suggestion display 81q displays a symbol of an acquired ball in a money box and a V non-acquired ball output suggestion symbol 81r2 with an "X" in front of the symbol. Both the V non-acquired ball output suggestion message 81r1 and the V non-acquired ball output suggestion symbol 81r2 indicate the balls that can be acquired if a right-hand hit is not performed in the currently active small win game, and the ball is not passed through the specific area 65d to generate a big win. The "X" in front of the V non-acquired ball output suggestion symbol 81r2 indicates that it will be impossible or difficult to acquire balls by not passing the ball through the specific area 65d.

In addition, the upper right part of the V acquisition suggestion display 81q displays a message 81r3 suggesting the release of balls when the rescue condition is met, which reads "Enter rush when rescue condition is met." The lower right part of the V acquisition suggestion display 81q displays a pattern suggesting the release of a larger number of balls than the V acquisition suggestion pattern 81q2, and a pattern 81r4 suggesting the release of balls when the rescue condition is met, which has a "○" in front of it. Both the message 81r3 suggesting the release of balls when the rescue condition is met and the pattern 81r4 suggest the release of balls that can be obtained in the game state (i.e., the "normal low probability time shortened state" (see FIG. 11)) to which the game is transitioned when the rescue condition is met by continuing the left-hand hit game without generating a jackpot in the currently executed small win game, and the pattern 81r4 suggesting the release of balls when the rescue condition is met, which suggests that it is easy or possible to win a large number of balls in the game state after the rescue condition is met, because a "○" is attached to the pattern 81r4 suggesting the release of balls when the rescue condition is met.

Thus, although Figure 125(d) suggests that a jackpot will not be generated in the currently ongoing small jackpot game and a certain amount of balls will not be acquired, it also suggests that a large amount of balls will be easily or possibly acquired in the game state to which the player transitions when the rescue condition is met by continuing left-handed play, which may ultimately result in the acquisition of more balls than the game state shown in Figure 125(b) (i.e., "Normal High Probability Time-Shortened State A" (see Figure 11)).

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, in the right-hit notification presentation (i.e., the jackpot priority notification presentation) when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period, a certain number of balls can be won by using the right-hit playing method when a small jackpot is won, but the balls won in the game state to which the player transitions after a jackpot based on a small jackpot win are unclear, and the possibility of a large number of balls being won overall is unclear.

In addition, in the right-hit notification presentation (i.e., the rescue priority notification presentation) when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the rescue priority notification period, by not generating a jackpot state based on a small jackpot winning, it is configured to suggest that although a certain amount of balls cannot be won, it is easy or possible to win a large amount of balls in the game state to which a left-hit play method is entered when a small jackpot is won, and that this may ultimately lead to the winning of more balls than a right-hit play method when a small jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, when a small jackpot on Special Chart 1 is won in "normal game state A," it is possible to choose between two game methods: a right-hand play method when a small jackpot is won, and a left-hand play method when a small jackpot is won.

As a result, when a special chart 1 small win is won in "normal game state A", by checking the content of the right-hit notification effect executed during the OP time of the small win game, it is possible to determine whether the right-hit play method when a small win is won or the left-hit play method when a small win is won will result in a larger average number of balls, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Figures 126 to 129. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, during dynamic display of special symbols in the "normal game state A", the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a text message 81a indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r (see FIG. 89(a)).

However, the display format of the relief counter 203r in the first embodiment is uniform, and further improvement in the suggested content is required.

Specifically, for example, if the display mode of the rescue counter 203r is uniform, it will be difficult for the player to understand the meaning of the text message 81a. In addition, the player will not be able to enjoy the excitement of the change in the value of the rescue counter 203r.

The tenth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to appropriately change the display mode of specific information during a specified period of time, deepen the player's understanding of the level of profit that the player can obtain when an advantageous gaming state occurs, and increase the interest in the display mode of the specific information.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the display mode of the rescue counter 203r is changed depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in the "normal game state A" (i.e., the big win priority notification period or the rescue priority notification period), thereby aiming to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to guess and consider the game method to be used if the player wins the special symbol 1 small win in the current game state.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for displaying a predetermined notification when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. The notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before a specific period of time before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing. The display means includes a specific display means for displaying based on the specific information, and the specific display means changes the display mode depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the specific game state.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, the gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", a "specific time" as a "specific timing", and an "alert function" as a "specific display means".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

The "specific display means" may be anything that has a display function based on specific information, such as a display based on the values of various counters that count specific parameters, a display based on the contents stored in various memory locations that store specific calculation results, a display based on the updated contents of a list that is updated constantly or when specific conditions are met, a display based on various flags that identify specific states, etc.

Now, referring to FIG. 126, the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) of the tenth embodiment. The difference between the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) of the first embodiment and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) of the tenth embodiment is that a sub-rescue counter display process has been added.

In the tenth embodiment, when the processing of S1358 or S1359 is completed in the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307), a sub-rescue counter display process is executed (S1361) to perform display processing of the sub-rescue counter 223i, and the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation performance process (see FIG. 66).

Now, referring to FIG. 127, the sub-rescue counter display process (S1361) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing this sub-rescue counter display process (S1361).

This sub rescue counter display process (S1361) sets a command to set the display mode of the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i that is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol in the "normal game state".

In this sub rescue counter display process (S1361), first, it is determined whether the sub rescue setting flag 223j is on (S1362). If the sub rescue setting flag 223j is on (S1362: Yes), the number of rescue conditions has been met once since the previous big win (or the RAM 203 initialization process when the power was turned on), and the game state is such that it is not possible to transition to the "normal low probability time reduction state", so there is no need to display the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i. Therefore, the processes of S1363 to S1367 are skipped, this sub rescue counter display process (S1361) is terminated, and the process returns to the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (see FIG. 126).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment in S1362 is that the sub-rescue set flag 223j is not on, i.e., the sub-rescue set flag 223j is in an off state (S1362: No), the number of times the rescue condition has been met has never been reached since the previous big win (or the initialization process of RAM 203 when the power was turned on), so next, it is judged whether the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition has been met (i.e., "800") is less than 10 (S1363), and if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition has been met (i.e., "800") is not less than 10, i.e., if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition has been met (i.e., "800") is 10 or more (S1363: No), the number of remaining spins until the rescue condition is met is 10 or more, so the process proceeds to S1365.

In the process of S1365, it is determined whether the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even number storage area 223k (i.e., "543 spins" (see FIG. 28)) (S1365). If the value stored in the sub rescue counter 223i is smaller than the value stored in the break-even number storage area 223k (S1365: Yes), the variable display of the special symbol during the jackpot priority notification period is being executed, so a normal display command for display is set (S1366) (see 81a in FIG. 128(a)), this sub rescue counter display process (S1361) is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol 1 variable pattern command setting process for display (see FIG. 126).

On the other hand, in S1365, if the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i is not smaller than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k, i.e., if the value of the sub-rescue counter 223i is equal to or greater than the value stored in the break-even count storage area 223k (S1365: No), the display of the special pattern change during the relief priority notification period is in progress, so a display command for displaying the special pattern change is set (S1367) (see 81a in FIG. 128(d)), this sub-rescue counter display process (S1361) is terminated, and the process returns to the display special pattern 1 change pattern command setting process (see FIG. 126).

In addition, in the processing of S1363, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the sub-rescue counter 223i from the number of times the rescue condition is met (i.e., "800") is less than 10 (S1363: Yes), the number of rotations remaining until the rescue condition is met is less than 10 rotations, so a display countdown command is set (S1364) (see 81a and 81n in FIG. 129(b)), this sub-rescue counter display processing (S1361) is terminated, and the processing returns to the display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting processing (see FIG. 126).

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i can be made to differ depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met. As a result, the player can check the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i that is displayed while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and infer which period (big win priority notification period or rescue priority notification period) the current game state is in. If the variable display being executed wins a special symbol 1 small win, the player can consider in advance which game method to execute, which can increase the interest of the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 128 and Fig. 129, the presentation performed by the third symbol display device 81 as a notification function in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. Fig. 128 and Fig. 129 are diagrams showing the progression of presentation on the third symbol display device 81 when a variable display of a special symbol is executed in "normal game state A".

In more detail, FIG. 128(a) shows the state in which the display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), and FIG. 128(b) shows the state in which the display of the next first special symbol has begun to change from the state shown in FIG. 128(a).

Figure 128(c) shows the state from Figure 128(b) where the display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped, and Figure 128(d) shows the state from Figure 128(c) where the display of the next first special symbol has begun to change.

Furthermore, Figure 129(a) shows the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped from the state shown in Figure 128(d), and Figure 129(b) shows the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol has begun when the rescue counter 203r is at "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period).

Figure 128 (a) shows the state in which the display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped when the rescue counter 203r in the "normal game state A" is at "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period).

In FIG. 128(a), a text message 81a is displayed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification function indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "541" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), indicating that the variable presentation is occurring during the jackpot priority notification period, as set in the break-even frequency table 222f shown in FIG. 28.

In addition, the third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the variable display of the first special symbol was a miss. Also, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special symbol 1, is stopped in white, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol was a miss.

Next, FIG. 128(b) shows the state where the variable display of the next first special symbol has started from the state of FIG. 128(a). In the upper left part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81a is displayed as a notification function showing the value of the rescue counter 203r, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "542" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period), which is an increment of 1 from the state of FIG. 128(a). In addition, in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special symbol 1 is displayed flashing, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

Next, Figure 128 (c) shows the state from Figure 128 (b) where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped. The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss. In addition, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area for special symbol 1 87b, is stopped in white, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss.

Next, FIG. 128(d) shows a state where the next variable display of the first special symbol has started from the state of FIG. 128(c). In the upper left part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81a is displayed as a notification function showing the value of the rescue counter 203r, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "543" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period), which is a state where 1 has been added from the state of FIG. 128(c). In addition, the text size of the text message 81a is larger than that of the text message 81a in FIG. 128(c), suggesting that there has been a change in the situation of the remaining number of spins until the rescue condition is established (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period or the rescue priority notification period). In addition, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 variable area 87b, is displayed in a flashing state, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed.

Next, Figure 129 (a) shows the state from Figure 128 (d) where the variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the third symbol has stopped. The third symbol 81b is stopped in the center of the main display area Dm, suggesting that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss. In addition, the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the variable area 87b for special symbol 1, is stopped in white, indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol has resulted in a miss.

Next, FIG. 129(b) shows a state in which the display of the first special symbol has started to change when the rescue counter 203r is at "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period). In the upper left part of the main display area Dm, a text message 81a is displayed as a notification function indicating the value of the rescue counter 203r, and the value of the rescue counter 203r is "791" (i.e., the rescue priority notification period). In addition, in the center part of the main display area Dm, the rescue counter remaining spin count 81n is displayed as "10 remaining", suggesting that the remaining spin count until the rescue condition is met is "10 spins". In addition, in the upper right part of the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 variable area 87b is displayed as flashing, indicating that the display of the first special symbol is being changed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the rescue counter 203r depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed in the "normal game state A" (i.e., the jackpot priority notification period or the rescue priority notification period).

By configuring it in this way, the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i can be made to differ depending on the number of spins remaining until the rescue condition is met. As a result, the player can check the display mode of the sub rescue counter 223i that is displayed while the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and infer which period (big win priority notification period or rescue priority notification period) the current game state is in. If the variable display being executed wins a special symbol 1 small win, the player can consider in advance which game method to execute, which can increase the interest of the game.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to Fig. 130. The following describes the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the same components and processes as those in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that when a right-hand hit is performed during a small win, it becomes easy or possible to win the variable winning device 65, and the ball passes through the specific area 65d, easily generating a big win state (see Figure 3).

In addition, when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period, the right-hit notification performance has a different notification format, but all of them display a display that suggests right-hit play (see right-hit instruction 89 for main display in Figure 89 (b) and right-hit instruction 89 for main display in Figure 89 (d)).

For this reason, some players, when they see a right-hit notification effect during the rescue priority notification period (i.e., a rescue priority notification effect (see FIG. 89(d)), may not fully understand the intent of the right-hit notification effect and may execute a right-hit play, causing the ball to pass through the specific area 65d and triggering a jackpot state, and further improvements are required in the configuration of the game board 13.

Specifically, for example, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the ball's flow path when playing with a right-handed shot is approximately uniform. Therefore, if the ball is shot so that it flows down the right side area of the game board 13 during a small win game, it will be possible for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65 no matter how it is shot.

The eleventh embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 was invented in consideration of the above problems, and aims to realize a configuration of the game board 13 that branches the ball flow path in the right area of the game board 13 into multiple paths, and corresponds to the right-hit notification performance when a small jackpot on special chart 1 is won during the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

More specifically, for example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the entry paths to the right area of the game board 13 are branched, and balls that enter one entry path flow down toward the variable winning device 65, while balls that enter the other entry path do not flow down to the variable winning device 65 side, but flow down to the first starting port 64 side, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that supports a right-hit notification performance when a special chart 1 small jackpot is won during the jackpot priority notification period and the rescue priority notification period.

In order to achieve this object, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area into which gaming balls can flow, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further comprising: an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display; a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes in a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state; a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode; a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start ball entry area; and and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, and the notification control means is provided with a switching means for notifying the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before the specific information becomes the specific update state for a specific period of time when the judgment means reaches a specific judgment result, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and this gaming machine is capable of establishing the specific game condition when a game operation is performed based on the suggested content of the first notification mode when the judgment means reaches the specific judgment result, and making it impossible or difficult to establish the specific game condition when a game operation is performed based on the suggested content of the second notification mode.

As a specific configuration of the present invention, this gaming machine includes an "ejection device" as a "launching means", a "start detection area" as a "starting ball entry area", a "result notification device" as a "display means", a "movable device" as a "variable ball entry means", a "game condition" as an "update condition", a "game information" as "specific information", an "update process" as an "update means", an "update state" as a "specific game state", an "update end state" as a "predetermined update state", a "granted benefit" as a "predetermined benefit state", a "notification mode" as a "notification mode", a "display control" as a "notification control means", a "discrimination control" as a "judgment means", a "control judgment result" as a "specific judgment result", a "benefit granting condition" as a "predetermined game condition", a "granted value" as a "specific benefit", a "benefit granting control" as a "benefit generating means", a "predetermined time" as a "predetermined timing", and a "specific time" as a "specific timing".

The launching means may be any device capable of launching a game ball so that the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the starting ball entry area, and examples of such devices include an electric launch control device or a manual launching device.

The specified benefit state may be anything that can provide some benefit to the player, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specified number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific bonus image, the output of a specific bonus sound, light emission control of a specific light-emitting means, etc.

Furthermore, the "specific timing" may be any specific time that indicates the update state of the specific information, and examples of such timing include the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern begins, a timing during the execution of the dynamic display of the special pattern, the timing when the dynamic display of the special pattern stops, the timing when the pattern of the dynamic display of the special pattern is determined, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, a timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data, a timing when all of the data sets have been used, and the timing when all of the predetermined set of data has been used.

The variable ball entry means may be any means capable of performing multiple variable operations, such as a variable winning device (large winning port), small winning port, regular electric winning port, non-electric winning port, or other movable ball entry means.

Furthermore, the specific benefit may be any benefit that is awarded based on the fulfillment of a specific game condition, such as a "probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "latent probability fluctuating state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, a "time-shortening state" until a jackpot occurs a specific number of times or at least, other specific game states that are more advantageous than the "normal game state," the jackpot game state itself, the small jackpot game state itself, the awarding of prize balls, the display of a specific image, the output of a specific sound, light emission control of a specific emission means, etc.

In addition, the specific information is information whose contents are updated to new contents when an update condition occurs in the gaming machine, and which is capable of identifying a predetermined period of time based on the update state, and which is sufficient to realize the gist of the present invention, and may be, for example, the value of a counter provided in RAM, information stored at a predetermined address in RAM, each buffer, flag, a predetermined series of data groups, or a pointer for grasping the current update position in a data group, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has started to be executed, the time since the dynamic display of a special pattern has stopped to be executed, the number of times the dynamic display of a special pattern has been executed in a specific gaming state, the dynamic display of a special pattern until a transition is made from the current gaming state to another gaming state, These include the remaining number of times the display is to be executed, the operating time of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening, the time after the operation of one of the movable bodies such as the large prize opening has stopped, the number of wins when one of the winning openings such as the large prize opening is opened, drawing information for displaying the lottery results of a specified pattern by the display means, the time from the start of the start-up process of the gaming machine, the setting value of the gaming machine, command information to be sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, command information to be sent from the sub-control unit to the display control unit, the number of balls paid out from the gaming machine in response to the release of a specific number of balls (base value), error information or notification mode for notifying hall personnel that some abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, information on the occurrence of a power outage, the current time, and whether or not a frame button has been pressed.

Furthermore, the update means for updating the specific information may be anything that can update the content of the specific information to new content, and may be, for example, software-based update control, overwrite control, write control, loading, etc., or an update by a hardware circuit.

The determination means may be any means that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area, such as start ball entry processing, special pattern change processing, change start processing, winning processing, gate passing processing, and regular pattern change processing.

Furthermore, the specified update state may be any state in which it is possible to know that the result of updating specific information by the update means has become a specified result, such as the counter value becoming "0" after a specified number of updates, the counter value becoming equal to or greater than a specified value after a specified number of updates, a specified flag being turned on, a specified flag being turned off, a specified time having passed, a specified period of time having passed, the entirety of a predetermined series of data being used, a ball entering a specified area being detected, or a frame button input by the player being detected.

The start ball entry area may be any area that allows a predetermined pattern to be displayed in a variable manner when a game ball enters it, such as a special ball 1 start hole, a special ball 2 start hole, or a normal ball start hole.

Furthermore, the display means may be anything capable of notifying the result of the lottery for a specific pattern, and may be, for example, a third pattern display device, a segment display device, a drum display device, an optical light guide plate, or a control device for displaying on each display device.

In addition, the specific game state may be any game state that can generate a specified profit state when the specific information is updated by the update means to a specified update state, and excludes, for example, game states in which the specific information is not updated even when an update condition occurs, and game states in which the update means is not activated. Examples of specific game states include a "normal game state" in which specific information can be updated by so-called fluctuations, a jackpot game state, a small jackpot game state, a "probability fluctuation state", a "time-shortened state", a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot occurs, a state from when the power is turned on until a specific jackpot ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol begins until the dynamic display ends, a state from when the dynamic display of a specific special symbol ends until the next dynamic display can be started, a state from when the dynamic display of a special symbol that will result in a jackpot ends until the jackpot game starts, a state from when the jackpot game starts until the jackpot game ends and the dynamic display of the special symbol can be executed, a state waiting for the ball to enter the ball entry hole that will start the jackpot game, a state in which the dynamic display of the special symbol is not being executed and waiting for the ball to enter the starting ball entry area, and a state waiting for the player to input the frame button while the dynamic display of the special symbol is being executed.

Furthermore, the specific judgment result may be any result derived by the judgment means, and may be, for example, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of jackpot, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a specific type of small prize, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a miss, the dynamic display of a special pattern winning a time-saving pattern, the dynamic display of a special pattern falling into a drop lottery, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed a specific number of times, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a win, the variable display of a normal pattern winning a miss, transitioning to a specific game state, etc.

The specified game conditions may be any conditions that are established when a player performs a specified game operation, such as firing a game ball, stopping the firing of a game ball, a fired game ball entering a specified area, a specified number of fired game balls entering a specified area, a fired game ball not entering a specified area, a lottery being held when a ball enters a specified area resulting in a specified lottery result, a player operating a performance button, a lottery being held when a player operates a performance button resulting in a specified lottery result, etc.

Furthermore, the update conditions may be any that can determine whether the variable display of a specified pattern has reached a predetermined state, and examples of such conditions include the dynamic display of a special pattern starting to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being executed, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being equal to or longer than a certain period, the execution period of the dynamic display of a special pattern being within a certain period, the dynamic display of a special pattern stopping to be executed, the period from when the dynamic display of a special pattern stops to when the next dynamic display of a special pattern can start to be executed, the dynamic display of a special pattern being unable to be executed, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern reaching a certain number, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of a special pattern falling below a certain number, the start-up process of the gaming machine being executed, a command being sent from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, the sub-control unit receiving a command, the display control unit receiving a command, the period for executing various processes elapses, an instruction to execute various processes is generated, and a command to execute various processes is generated.

The "predetermined timing" may be any timing that indicates the update state of specific information, such as the timing when the gaming machine is turned on, the timing when the gaming machine is started up, the timing when waiting for the ball to enter the starting gate, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns begins, one timing during the execution of the dynamic display of special patterns, the timing when the dynamic display of special patterns stops, the timing when the patterns of the dynamic display of special patterns are finalized, the timing when the counter value becomes "0" after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when the counter value reaches a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, one timing when the counter value becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value after a predetermined number of updates, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned on, the timing when a predetermined flag is turned off, the timing when a predetermined time has passed, the timing when a predetermined period has passed, the timing when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined data from a predetermined set of data groups, one timing from when a predetermined data is reached from a predetermined set of data groups until all of the data groups have been used, the timing when all of the predetermined set of data groups have been used, and the like.

Furthermore, the notification mode may be one that allows the player to distinguish at least two types of events, and by varying, for example, the type of text information, the content of the numeric information, the type of picture, the type of character, their colors, their display area, their display density, their display time, and their number of times of display, it may be possible to distinguish indications of the launch mode, indications of whether or not a launch can be made, indications of whether or not a game can be played, indications of the timing of performing operations on the operating means, indications of the game state, indications of the number of winning balls, indications of the number of rounds, indications of special rate patterns and normal patterns, indications of time-saving patterns and normal patterns, and indications of special rate patterns and time-saving patterns.

Now, with reference to FIG. 130, the specific configuration of the game board 13 of the 11th embodiment will be described. The main difference between the game board 13 of the first embodiment and the game board 13 of the 11th embodiment is that the access path in the right area of the game board 13 is branched.

As shown in FIG. 130, the right side area of the game board 13 in the 11th embodiment has two branching entry paths. One entry path is a weak right hit path 74 that is entered when a right hit game is performed with a strength that does not cause the ball to hit the return rubber 69 (hereinafter, the path entered when a right hit game is performed with a strength that does not cause the ball to hit the return rubber 69 may be referred to as a "weak right hit path"), and the other entry path is a strong right hit path 75 that is entered when a right hit game is performed with a strength that causes the ball to hit the return rubber 69 (hereinafter, the path entered when a right hit game is performed with a strength that causes the ball to hit the return rubber 69 may be referred to as a "strong right hit path").

When a ball enters the weak right-hand hit path 74, the ball cannot flow down the flow path where the through gate 67, the normal electric role 72, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged, and flows down toward the first starting port 64.

Therefore, a ball that enters the weak right-hand hit path 74 cannot or will have difficulty entering the through gate 67, the normal electric role 72, and the variable winning device 65, but can enter the first starting gate 64 and the general winning gate 63.

In addition, when a ball enters the strong right hit path 75, the ball flows down the flow path where the through gate 67, the normal electric role 72, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged. Therefore, a ball that enters the strong right hit path 75 can enter the through gate 67, the normal electric role 72, and the variable winning device 65, but cannot or will have difficulty entering the first starting hole 64 or the general winning hole 63.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the right-hit notification effect at the time of a small win on special chart 1 during the jackpot priority notification period (see FIG. 28) is an effect that suggests a right-hit play corresponding to the strong right-hit path 75, and is configured to suggest that by executing a hit that enters the strong right-hit path 75, the ball will enter the variable winning device 65 and pass through the specific area 65d to generate a jackpot.

In addition, the right-hit notification effect at the time of a small win on special chart 1 during the rescue priority notification period (see Figure 28) is an effect that suggests a right-hit play corresponding to the weak right-hit path 74, and is configured to suggest that by executing a hit that enters the weak right-hit path 74, it will be impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65, and the ball will not pass through the specific area 65d, and a big win will not be generated.

By configuring it in this way, whether a right-hit notification of a jackpot priority notification effect or a rescue priority notification effect is executed, a right-hit game can be executed in accordance with the instructions of the main display right-hit instruction 89 (see FIG. 89), and a game can be realized in which the jackpot priority notification effect and rescue priority notification effect are displayed during the right-hit game, allowing the player to distinguish the game mode (launch mode). As a result, there is no discrepancy between the notification effect and the actual game method, and the player can play without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, in the right area of the game board 13, the entry path in the right area is branched into two, one of which makes it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65, and the other entry path makes it possible for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65.

By configuring it in this way, even if right-hand play is performed when a small jackpot is won on special chart 1, if the ball enters one of the entry paths, it will be impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65, and it will not pass through the specific area 65d, making it impossible or difficult for a jackpot to occur, but if the ball enters the other entry path, it will be possible for the ball to enter 65, and it will be possible for the ball to pass through the specific area 65d and cause a jackpot.

As a result, the right-hit notification during the jackpot priority notification period can be made to correspond to a game method in which the ball can enter the other entry path, and the right-hit notification during the rescue priority notification period can be made to correspond to a game method in which the ball can enter one entry path.

Otherwise, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and thus achieves the same effects.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above form, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the spirit of the present invention. For example, each embodiment may be modified by adding a part or parts of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment, or by replacing a part or parts of the configuration of that embodiment. Furthermore, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is of course possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation function is provided only for the normal symbols, and the probability variation function is not provided for the special symbols. In contrast, the probability variation function may be provided for each of the special symbols and the normal symbols, or the probability variation function may be provided for the special symbols while the probability variation function is not provided for the normal symbols, or the probability variation function may be not provided for either the special symbols or the normal symbols. In addition, when the probability variation function is provided for the special symbols, the probability variation function may be set to be effective until the next big win or small win occurs (so-called loop type), the probability variation function may be set to be effective until the special symbols are executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big win (so-called ST type), or a pachinko machine (so-called fall type) in which the "probability variation state" ends (so-called fall function) when a predetermined lottery result other than the big win is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbols may be used. By configuring in this way, the variation of the game can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is configured to end by the number of times the dynamic display of the special pattern is executed or by winning the next jackpot. On the other hand, each time the number of consecutive wins of the special pattern jackpot (including the jackpot based on the small win type) reaches a predetermined number, the game state after the jackpot ends when the predetermined number of times is reached may be configured to always transition to a game state in which the "time-saving function" is not given (i.e., "normal game state"), thereby prohibiting the transition to the high probability state of the normal pattern (time-saving limiter). Also, the number of consecutive wins of the jackpot that prohibits the transition to the high probability state of the normal pattern may be configured to be of multiple types.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, the normal electric role 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of the normal symbol or the special symbol. In contrast, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage hole that opens a movable role (so-called non-electric role) that blocks other winning holes when a ball passes through may be used.

<Modification 4>
In the above embodiment, when any jackpot (including a jackpot based on a small jackpot type) is won, a game state in which a "time-saving function" is granted after the jackpot ends is generated. In contrast, when a predetermined pattern (e.g., a time-saving pattern) other than a jackpot (small jackpot) is derived in the dynamic display of the special pattern, the game state may be configured to transition to a state in which the "time-saving function" is granted without going through a jackpot. By configuring in this way, the variety of cases in which the "time-saving function" is granted can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when the total number of times that the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed in the low probability state of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (700 times, 800 times, or 900 times) without transitioning to a jackpot state, the "time-saving function" is granted without going through a jackpot (so-called ceiling function). In contrast, the predetermined number of times may be counted separately for the cumulative number of times that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed and the cumulative number of times that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, the predetermined number of times may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed in priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority change). In contrast, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel (so-called special symbol 12 simultaneous change), and each dynamic display may be controlled, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be configured to be executed in priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol (so-called special symbol 1 priority change), and each dynamic display may be controlled, or the dynamic display may be executed in the order of winning (so-called winning order change), and each dynamic display may be controlled.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the "time-saving function" is configured to end based on a predetermined number of times of dynamic display of a special symbol or winning a big win. In contrast, the "time-saving function" may be configured to end based on winning a small win game or deriving a time-saving end symbol different from a big win. By configuring in this way, the end conditions of the winning assistance state can be diversified, the game can be varied, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the "time-saving function" is active, the "time-saving function" may be configured to end when a predetermined number of reserved balls of a special symbol (for example, reserved full (i.e., 4 balls) or a certain number of reserved balls in relation to the reserved full (for example, 2 balls)) are reserved, or when the number of times the normal electric role is operated reaches a certain number, or when the number of times the variable display of a normal symbol is executed reaches a certain number.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, the normal symbol is configured to win at a 70/100 chance in a low probability state, and the normal electric role 72 can be moved. In contrast, the normal symbol may not win at a low probability state, and may be configured to win only at a high probability state (for example, 100% win). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the normal electric role 72 from moving in a low probability state of a normal symbol and the ball from entering the second starting hole 71. As a result, it is possible to reliably realize the playability according to the game specifications.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened in a big win game. However, a plurality of winning holes that can be opened in a big win game may be provided, and the plurality of winning holes may be opened according to the big win type or the small win type.

<Modification 10>
In the above embodiment, one type of variable display time for the normal symbol is provided for each game state. In contrast, the variable display time for the normal symbol may be selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of variable display time depending on the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined by lottery from among "1 second", "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "30 seconds". By configuring in this way, in the "normal game state" in which right-hand play is not encouraged, even if a ball is passed through the through gate 67 by right-hand play to perform variable display of the normal symbol, and a ball is fired toward the normal electric role 72 that can be opened according to the derivation timing, the opening timing of the second start hole 71 becomes multiple, so that winning in the second start hole 71 can be suppressed.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, the winning role is selected from the big win or the miss in the drawing of the first special symbol, and the winning role is selected from the big win or the miss in the drawing of the second special symbol. On the other hand, a small win may be provided only in the drawing of the first special symbol, and the winning role may be selected from the big win, the small win, or the miss, or a small win may be provided only in the drawing of the second special symbol, and the winning role may be selected from the big win, the small win, or the miss, or a small win may not be provided in the drawing of any special symbol, and the winning role may be selected from the big win or the miss, or a small win may be provided in the drawing of any special symbol, and the winning role may be selected from the big win, the small win, or the miss.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, the game state is changed (for example, from "normal high probability time shortening state" to "normal game state") depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. In contrast, the game state may be changed depending on the number of times a predetermined effect (for example, "reach display" or a specific effect based on a specific combination win) other than the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed.

<Modification 13>
In the above embodiment, the number of reserved balls is counted for each of the first and second special symbols, and the variation time and reach probability of each special symbol are changed for each reserved ball number. In contrast, the variation time and reach probability of each special symbol may be changed according to the total reserved ball number of the first and second special symbols.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, when a special symbol 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A", the content of the right-hit notification effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different depending on the number of times the special symbol is executed remaining until the rescue condition is satisfied at the time of the small win. In contrast, only the sound content by the sound output device 226 when the right-hit notification effect is executed may be different, only the performance content by the lamp may be different, or only two of the performance content, sound content, and lamp content by the third symbol display device 81 may be different, or all of them may be configured to be different.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, the right-hit notification effect when the jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" is won in the "normal game state A" is different from the right-hit notification effect when the special chart 1 small win is won in the "normal game state A". In contrast, the right-hit notification effect when the special chart 1 small win is won during the jackpot priority notification period of the "normal game state A" may be configured to be the same as the right-hit notification effect when the jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" is won in the "normal game state A". By configuring it in this manner, it becomes clear that in both cases where a special chart 1 small win is won during the jackpot priority notification period in "normal game state A", and where a jackpot type "time-saving A" or "time-saving B" is won in "normal game state A", it is a jackpot or small win that requires right-hit play.As a result, the difference between the right-hit notification performance executed during the rescue priority notification period and ambiguous notification period, and the jackpot priority notification period, becomes clear, making it possible to further differentiate the suggested content for right-hit play.

In the above embodiment, there is one type of small win type for the small win game in the dynamic display of the first special pattern, or one type of small win type for the small win game in the dynamic display of the second special pattern. Alternatively, there may be multiple types of small win types for the small win game in the dynamic display of the first special pattern and/or the small win types for the small win game in the dynamic display of the second special pattern. Furthermore, it may be configured so that whether or not to end the "time-saving function" varies depending on the type of small win. This configuration increases the variety of games and increases the interest in the games.

In the above embodiment, the variable performance of the special symbol encouraged for each game state is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable performance of the special symbol not encouraged is not executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, the variable performance of the special symbol not encouraged may be executed in a predetermined manner in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, the variable performance of the encouraged special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm so as to be conspicuous (center part, most part, area larger than the variable performance of the special symbol not encouraged, pattern display mode executed darker, etc.), while the variable performance of the special symbol not encouraged is executed in the main display area Dm so as to be less conspicuous than the variable performance of the special symbol encouraged (corner, small part, area smaller than the variable performance of the special symbol encouraged, pattern display mode executed lighter, etc.). By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to grasp the execution mode of the variable performance of multiple special symbols by the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is configured to change according to the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and the variation time of the dynamic display of the second special pattern is configured to change according to the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of the second special pattern. In other words, the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of the first special pattern only affects the dynamic display of the first special pattern, and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of the second special pattern only affects the dynamic display of the second special pattern. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of one special pattern may be configured to affect the variation time of the dynamic display of the other special pattern. Specifically, the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special pattern is configured to change according to the total number of reserved balls of the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls of the dynamic display of the second special pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to select a unique change time when the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special pattern and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special pattern are mixed, thereby enriching the variety of the game and increasing the interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in three stages from "1" to "3" to change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the second symbol, but the stages in which the probability setting value can be changed are not limited to three stages and may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiment, the probability of winning a big prize is changed by changing the probability setting value, but the probability of winning a normal symbol or the probability of winning a small prize may also be changed.

Also, if it is determined during the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (e.g., "1") from the range of "1" to "3" may be forcibly set as the probability setting value. Note that if it is determined during play (e.g., during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent players from suffering any disadvantages due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during play.

In the above embodiment, the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum) includes the probability setting value, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, a setting change process may be forcibly executed to have the hall staff change the probability setting value, or the hall staff may be prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or a specific probability setting value within the normal range may be forcibly set as the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch, but this can also be done with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is configured to be rotatable from the on state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the off side, and is configured to automatically return the setting key 501 to the on state when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position. Then, the probability setting value is updated each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position. This also makes it easy to change the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is confirmed by turning off the setting key 501 or by turning on the RAM erase switch 503, but this may also be done by operating a separately provided switch, for example a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch for confirming the probability setting value, for example, by being operated during the "setting change mode", and may be provided protruding from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, so that it can be operated by hall personnel, etc., without having to open the board box 100. This also makes it easy to confirm the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and started up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," the start-up mode is set according to the detection state of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. In contrast, it may be configured so that at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is a required condition, and the start-up mode is set according to the detection state of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. It may also be configured so that the hall can select whether or not to make the opening of the inner frame 12 a condition for changing the settings or confirming the settings.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main control device 110. However, the RAM erase switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to change the probability of a big win, etc. In contrast, the setting key 501 may be configured to change the number of prize balls paid out when one winning slot is won (e.g., changing from 3 to 5 balls), the drive time of the movable part that assists the winning slot to win (3 seconds to 5 seconds) and the drive width (e.g., changing from 20 mm to 30 mm), the inclination of the part that affects the flow of the ball (e.g., the stage or crane on which the ball can roll) (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), the inclination of the pachinko machine 10 itself (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees), and other settings related to the degree of advantage to the player in multiple stages.

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, the keyhole of the setting key 501 may be configured to face laterally (left or right) of the pachinko machine 10, diagonally of the pachinko machine 10, or toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, the small jackpot random numbers, and the losing random numbers are consecutive values, and the range of whether or not a jackpot or a small jackpot is reached can be determined (for example, whether or not it is between "0" and "49"), thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110. In contrast, the random numbers that provide the game value (i.e., the jackpot random numbers and the small jackpot random numbers) may be arranged in a dispersed (dissipated) manner rather than in a continuous arrangement. Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot random number counter C1 that is updated from "0 to 999", the jackpot random number may be "7,341,555,777,831", and the small jackpot random number may be "77,175,223,315,415,526,634,717,845".

Here, if there are consecutive values that become jackpot random numbers regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, in low and high probability states, a value between 0 and 50 is a jackpot), the value may be predictable from the outside, which may increase the possibility of winning a jackpot illegally. Therefore, by configuring it as in the above modified example, it is possible to make each random number that awards game value more difficult to predict from the outside, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraud and improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state may be set separately so that they do not overlap. By configuring in this way, the random number value for the jackpot can be changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), making it difficult to predict the random number value for the jackpot, thereby improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, etc. were configured to be updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random numbers). In contrast, the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. may be configured to be updated by a random number generation IC that has a faster update cycle than the above-mentioned soft random numbers (so-called hard random numbers). By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from outside, and security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value was configured to increase evenly with each increase in the setting value. In contrast, the jackpot random number value (or small jackpot random number value) may be configured to increase unevenly or at a predetermined rate with each increase in the setting value. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value increases by "2" from setting value "1" to "2", while the jackpot random number value increases by "5" from setting value "2" to "3". By configuring in this way, the game value that can be awarded varies greatly depending on the setting difference, making it possible to provide a game with a sense of rhythm (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and improving the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the corresponding role in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 was changed for each set value. In contrast, it may be configured to change the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small jackpot type counter (not shown), which determines the contents of the small jackpot, for each set value, so that setting differences occur due to changes in the selection ratio of the jackpot type or small jackpot type.

In the above embodiment, the random number value that awards game value (i.e., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a change in the setting, and the change is compensated for from random number values that do not award game value (i.e., losing random number values). In contrast, when a random number value that awards game value (e.g., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a change in the setting, the change may be compensated for from random number values that award other game value (e.g., small win random number value). By configuring in this way, differences can be created in the game value that can be awarded for each setting, providing a game with a sense of rhythm (sharpness) for each setting, and improving the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a were specified (set) in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of miss random number", and "range of small win random number". In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured to specify (set) each random number in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of small win random number", "range of jackpot random number (hereinafter referred to as "range of re-jackpot random number")", and "range of miss random number". Here, the "range of re-jackpot random number" is configured to correspond to the increase in the jackpot random number due to the setting change. By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the miss random number value), and the range of random numbers that do not change due to the setting change (i.e., the jackpot random number value and the small win random number value that do not change even due to the setting change) can be fixed. This allows, for example, in a control program for winning/losing judgment, the basic winning/losing judgment of a fixed random number value can be made common across all settings, while the increase in the jackpot random number value resulting from a change in settings can be additionally judged according to the settings, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers were specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of losing random number", and "range of small winning random number". In contrast, the random numbers may be specified (set) in order of the number of random numbers.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers were specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in the order of "range of jackpot random number", "range of miss random number", and "range of small win random number". In contrast, the "range of jackpot random number" that increases with the setting change may be specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a so that it is adjacent to the random number value that decreases with the setting change (i.e., "range of miss random number"). Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the random numbers are specified (set) in the order of "range of small win random number", "range of jackpot random number", and "range of miss random number". By configuring in this way, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the miss random number), and the range of the random number value that does not change with the setting change (i.e., the small win random number value) can be fixed. This allows, for example, in a control program for determining whether a small win has been won or not, to standardize the determination of the small win random number value for all settings, while additionally determining the increase in the big win random number value resulting from a change in settings according to the settings, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the probability of winning a small win game with the second special symbol was configured to be higher than the probability of winning a small win game with the first special symbol. In contrast, the probability of winning a small win game with the first special symbol and the probability of winning a small win game with the second special symbol may be configured to be equal, or the probability of winning a small win game with the second special symbol may be configured to be lower than the probability of winning a small win game with the first special symbol.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number is compensated for by the miss random number. Alternatively, the jackpot random number may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number is compensated for by the small win random number and the miss random number. By configuring in this way, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers based on a setting change from each of the small win random number and the miss random number, and there is no need to compensate for the change in the jackpot random number from a fixed predetermined random number of 1. Therefore, there is no need to secure the number of the above-mentioned predetermined random numbers from the change in the jackpot random number and the predetermined random number of 1, so there are no constraints when designing the game specifications, which increases the design freedom of the game specifications and improves the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the game play of the present invention is realized by changing the timing and time of sinking of the normal electric role 72 in each game state using the normal electric role 72 that can be displaced between a protruding state and a sinking state. In contrast, the game play of the present invention may be realized by changing the timing and time of operation of the blade member in each game state using a rotating blade member. Specifically, for example, the blade members are arranged on both the left and right sides of the second starting hole 71, and when the blade member is in an inoperative state (for example, in an upright state), the ball collides with the outside (non-rolling side) of the blade member and flows downstream as it is. On the other hand, when the blade member is in an operational state (tilted 120 degrees to the right from the upright state) in which the blade member is rotated, the ball collides with the inside (rolling side) of the blade member and the inside of the blade member rolls toward the second starting hole 71. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to recognize whether the area in which the blade members themselves operate has been driven larger than the driving mode caused by the appearance and disappearance of the normal electric role 72, making it easier for the player to recognize whether or not they have won with the variable display of the normal pattern.

The display mode and display position of the fourth pattern display area 87 for special pattern 1 and the fourth pattern display area 88 for special pattern 2 may be changed according to the first or second special pattern being variable in the main display area Dm. Specifically, for example, the fourth pattern display area 87, 88 that is being executed is positioned at the top, displayed in Arabic numerals, or displayed in red, and the fourth pattern display area 88, 87 that is not being executed is positioned at the bottom, displayed in a different notation from the Arabic numerals (e.g., Chinese numerals or Roman numerals), or displayed in a different color from red (e.g., blue). By configuring in this way, the variable performance being executed is identified and displayed, while being configured to make it difficult to recognize which special pattern is being executed, and by configuring it to make it difficult for the player to recognize the current game state, a game of guessing the game state is created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Regarding the alarm sound, rather than being output whenever a ball passes through the through gate 67 in a game state in which left-handed play is recommended, the alarm sound may be configured to be output when specific conditions are met. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for malicious players who are intentionally trying to get more balls out than the game specifications allow, and an alarm sound is not output for inexperienced players or players who play well-intentioned right-handed games due to operating errors, thereby suppressing fraudulent play while also suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to play, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

The winning probability of a normal symbol may be configured to be approximately the same in any game state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "normal symbol high probability time shortened state" where the jackpot probability of a special symbol is low, the winning probability of a normal symbol is set to 50/100, and in the "probability variable state" or "latent probability variable state" where the jackpot probability of a special symbol is high, the winning probability of a normal symbol is configured to be 50/100 or 51/100, etc., which is the same or approximately the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the "normal game state". By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to calculate the winning rate of a normal symbol without considering the winning probability of a normal symbol, taking into account the variable display time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the normal electric role 72, with respect to the opening of the normal electric role 72 based on a win of the normal symbol, and to facilitate the design of the game specifications in each game state.

For each winning jackpot symbol, the variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol selected after the winning jackpot may be configured to be different. Specifically, for example, among the winning symbols 1, 3, 5, and 7 that can generate the "probability variation state", when the winning symbol 1 is selected, the "probability variation state" transitions to a "both long variation probability variation state" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both likely to have a relatively long variation time. When the winning symbol 3 is selected, the "probability variation state" transitions to a "special 1 long and special 2 short variation probability variation state" in which the first special symbol is likely to have a relatively long variation time, while the second special symbol is likely to have a relatively short variation time. When the winning symbol 5 is selected, the "probability variation state" transitions to a "both short variation probability variation state" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both likely to have a relatively short variation time. In addition, when the 7 symbol is selected, the "probability change state" is configured to transition to a "special 1 short special 2 long change probability change state" in which a relatively short change time is likely to be selected for the first special symbol, while a relatively long change time is likely to be selected for the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, the special symbol that can be derived first in the game state after the jackpot can be made different depending on the type of symbol that has been hit. For example, the probability that a jackpot will appear first can be made different for each game state depending on which special symbol stops first. This can increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the game.

The special symbol change pattern group (change time) may be configured to differ based on the number of times the special symbol changes. Specifically, for example, in the "latent probability change state," a relatively long change time is likely to be selected for the first to tenth special symbol change presentations after the end of a jackpot, and a relatively short change time is likely to be selected for the eleventh and subsequent special symbol change presentations. This configuration can provide more variety to the game while adding variety to it, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

There may be multiple types of winning types for normal symbols. Specifically, for example, there may be a 1-time winning type where the normal electric symbol 72 is released once, a 3-time winning type where the in/out board 72a is released three times, and a 3-time long winning type where the normal electric symbol 72 is released three times for a long period of time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to enrich the variety of the game in the "probability changing state" and the "normal symbol high probability time shortening state", and to increase the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the game states that are advantageous to the player are in the order of "normal game state" → "normal high probability time shortening state" → "normal low probability time shortening state" → "probability fluctuating state". In contrast, the game specifications may be set so that the "normal high probability time shortening state", "latent probability fluctuating state", and "probability fluctuating state" are positioned as game states that are more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". Specifically, for example, the start port of the first special symbol is provided upstream of the start port of the second special symbol to which the normal electric role 72 is attached, and in the "normal game state", the normal electric role 72 is difficult to operate, making it easier to receive the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, which is more advantageous to the player than the second special symbol, while in the "normal high probability time shortening state", the normal electric role 72 is easy to operate, making it easier to receive the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first special symbol. This configuration allows for greater variety in the games and increases the excitement of the games.

The display position of the fourth symbol display areas 87, 88 may be changed when a right-hit suggestion display that suggests right-hit play appears. Specifically, in a "normal play state" where left-hit play is encouraged, the fourth symbol display areas 87, 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, whereas in a "probability-changing state" where right-hit play is encouraged, the right-hit suggestion display is displayed in the right small area Ds3, while the fourth symbol display areas 87, 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications according to the game state.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of multiple special symbols that can be executed simultaneously, the variable presentation of the special symbols that are encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variable presentation of the non-encouraged special symbols is not performed in the main display area Dm. In contrast, regarding the presentation of multiple symbols that can be executed simultaneously (for example, special symbols and normal symbols), a priority order of the presentation to be executed may be set in advance according to the game state, game specifications, the game value awarded, or the execution frequency, and the presentation according to the priority order may be executed preferentially. For presentations with low priority, the scale of the presentation may be reduced or the presentation itself may not be executed, so that the player may not recognize them more easily than presentations with high priority. Specifically, when the variable presentation of the first special symbol is being performed in the main display area Dm, the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226 may not perform or display a smaller scale of the presentation regarding the variable presentation of the normal symbol, which has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol, and when the variable presentation of the second special symbol is being performed in the main display area Dm, the third symbol display device 81 or the audio output device 226 may not perform or display a smaller scale of the presentation regarding the variable presentation of the normal symbol, which has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a presentation that the player does not find annoying by giving priority to the presentation that the player wants to recognize when playing the game, while reducing (eliminating) the presentation scale of the presentation with a lower priority.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display, but the main control device 110 may send commands directly to the display control device 114. Also, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and commands instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be sent from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Furthermore, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as a single control device. By configuring them as a single control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, if any of the stop type commands is received, the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a, 223b are always set to ON. However, if each fluctuation pattern command is received and then the corresponding stop type command is received, each fluctuation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON. This makes it possible to prevent strange fluctuation performances from being executed in cases where each fluctuation pattern command is not received and any of the stop type commands are received.

Also, at the timing of receiving each fluctuation pattern command, each fluctuation start flag 223a, 223b may be set to ON. In this case, in the fluctuation performance process (S1110) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, based on the fact that each fluctuation start flag 223a, 223b is turned ON, each display fluctuation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by each fluctuation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to execute each fluctuation performance based on each display fluctuation pattern command for the display control device 114 without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive each stop type command. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving each stop type command, and transmit it to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 may then determine the stop pattern for the variable performance executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the demo performance may be a frozen display of a third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9". Also, a third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number may be frozen and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Also, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image that is completely different from the third pattern and back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous notice performance may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided, and the fourth symbol may be displayed on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed by the third symbol display device 81 to execute the continuous notice performance. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the continuous notice performance may be executed by providing a role that operates according to various performances in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the role in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance. In addition, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or the continuous notice performance may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable performance is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37), symbols are displayed in succession on the fourth symbol display device, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of expectation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues playing while gazing at the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the continuous advance notice performance is performed by the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33, so that the player can easily recognize that a different performance from the normal has been performed. In addition, the continuous advance notice performance can be easily performed with simple control such as the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33.

In addition, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the continuous preview performance performed by the audio lamp control device 113, and having the fluctuation performance performed by the display control device 114, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each process. This prevents the load from being concentrated on one control device, and the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be performed by combining and controlling at least two of the following: display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, display of the symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, operation of the reel in a predetermined manner, audio output from the audio output device 226, and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. This allows a wider variety of continuous preview performances to be performed. In addition, by changing the method of performing the continuous preview performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the reel, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected according to the game state after the continuous preview performance ends.

In addition, when a continuous preview performance is performed, an image for the continuous preview performance other than the variable performance may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous preview performance may be performed by displaying a combination of predetermined patterns, so-called "chance eyes", as the stopping pattern displayed when the variable performance ends. In this case, when the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous preview command has been received, the stopping pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eye may be turned on, and other stopping pattern discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, the process corresponding to the continuous preview command is executed in the other command process after the stop identification command process, so that the chance eye is set as the stopping pattern instead of the stopping pattern set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eye can be displayed as a confirmed stop when the variable stop occurs. And if the chance eye is displayed consecutively as the stopping pattern for each variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that he will eventually win a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when a winning ball is entered into the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 (start winning), the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the reserved ball count that has been increased by "1" including each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in response to the start winning. However, the type of counter included in the reserved ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. In addition, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in response to the start winning, information indicating the value of each counter may not be included in the reserved ball count command, but information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command other than the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The other command may be a dedicated command to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, or the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning may be added to a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a change pattern command or a stop pattern command. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending counts the notified counter values relate to. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in any of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to that pending count, based on the information on the pending count included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 indicated by the reserved ball count command in the RAM 223, or when it receives a reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter), it may determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot, the type of miss if there is a miss, etc. based on the values of each counter indicated in the command, and store these determination results in the RAM 223 in place of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the values of the counters.

In the above embodiment, the winning entry into the first starting gate 64 or the second starting gate 71 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for winning the first starting gate 64 or the second starting gate 71 may be set separately for each starting gate, and the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting gate may be any number other than "4". In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting gate does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on the winning entry into the first starting gate 64 or the second starting gate 71 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different manner (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is one type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be performed by moving the pattern horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above embodiments, when performing a variation effect, a high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 scroll so quickly that the player cannot see them. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size that is so small that they cannot be seen, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are displayed randomly.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, the operation lever is operated to change the symbols, and the stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the finalized identification information, in which the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and finalized due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out by bonuses (gimmicks) to the total number of gaming media (coins, medals) paid out during a specified period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of gaming media paid out when each winning combination is achieved may be stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of a prize ball number table, and the bonus ratio management chip or a control device that executes a function equivalent to the bonus ratio management chip may be used to count the number of winning combinations (patterns aligned on an active line) achieved during non-bonus game periods (normal periods), the number of winning combinations achieved during bonus game periods, and the number of winning combinations achieved during AT periods to manage the bonus ratio and consecutive bonus ratio.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed. If the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, various inventive concepts that are included in the above-mentioned embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown. Note that each of the various inventive concepts shown below may be modified by adding a part or multiple parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept or by replacing a part or multiple parts of the configuration of another inventive concept with the inventive concept.

<Group A: Switching the right-hand hit notification method at break-even point>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery for winning or the like is held based on the establishment of a specified start condition, and when a winning prize is won, a specified gaming medium is paid out to the player in accordance with the establishment of a specified acquisition condition.

This gaming machine is configured to be able to generate at least a predetermined first gaming state (e.g., a low probability state of a special symbol) and a second gaming state (e.g., a high probability state of a special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and some are configured to be able to win a winning game in the second gaming state and to generate the second gaming state again in succession (e.g., Patent Document 1 (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

There is a need to improve the entertainment value of gaming machines such as those listed above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group A were made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, a switching means is provided which notifies the player that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a specified timing a specified period before the specific information reaches the specified update state, and which switches the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specified timing.

According to the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a starting ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, and a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode. The game system includes a notification control means for performing a notification control on the specific information, a determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the entry of a game ball into the start entry area, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means. The notification control means includes a switching means for notifying the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the specified update state when the determination means reaches a specific determination result, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. This makes it possible to vary the notification content by the notification control means depending on the timing of establishment of the specific determination result when a specific determination result is reached in a specific game state. As a result, when a specific determination result is reached in a specific game state, a gameplay is created in which a specific profit is generated by performing a predetermined game operation, or a specific profit state is generated by not performing a predetermined game operation and entering a specified update state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Group B: Multiple notifications between each timing>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a third display execution means (e.g., an ambiguous notification command for display) that displays a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the specified timing and the specific timing.

According to the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment means for making a predetermined decision based on the entry of a gaming ball into the start entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the fact that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes in the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the gaming machine includes a third display executing means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing. Thereby, when the timing at which a specific judgment result is reached is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, it is possible to notify the fact that the specific judgment result has been reached in a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode. As a result, when the timing of the specific judgment result falls between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period can be set in which there is not much difference in the expected value of the profit that can be obtained, regardless of whether the game method is to perform a predetermined game operation to generate a specific profit, or to not perform the predetermined game operation and to generate a predetermined profit state by entering a predetermined update state, thereby creating new gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

<Group C: Notification mode is switched multiple times>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
a third display execution means for displaying a third display mode in which the first notification mode and the second notification mode are displayed between the predetermined timing and the specific timing,
The third display mode is
A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first notification mode and the second notification mode are displayed by switching between them multiple times.

According to the gaming machine C1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on the entry of a gaming ball into the start entry area, and a specific judgment by the judgment means. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the player of the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the gaming machine includes a third display execution means for displaying a third display mode that displays the first notification mode and the second notification mode between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the third display mode including a predetermined mode that switches between the first notification mode and the second notification mode multiple times. Thus, when the timing of the specific judgment result is between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are displayed in a switching manner multiple times, and the player can be notified of the specific judgment result in the third notification mode. As a result, when the timing of the specific judgment result falls between the predetermined timing and the specific timing, a period can be set in which there is not much difference in the expected value of the profit that can be obtained, regardless of whether the game method is to perform a predetermined game operation to generate a specific profit, or to not perform the predetermined game operation and to generate a predetermined profit state by entering a predetermined update state, thereby creating new gameplay and increasing the interest in the game.

<Group D: Displaying fluctuations without generating specific profits>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that, when, in the specific gaming state, the judgment means determines the specific judgment result and displays the first notification mode, a new variable display can be executed without generating the specific benefit.

According to the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the fact that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a specific timing before a specific period before the specific information becomes the specified update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a new variable display without generating the specific profit when the judgment means has reached the specific judgment result and the first notification mode is displayed in the specific game state. As a result, even if a specific judgment result is reached and the first notification mode is displayed, a new variable display can be executed without generating a specific profit by not performing a specific game operation. As a result, even if a specific judgment result occurs and the first notification mode is displayed, by not performing the specified game operation, it is possible to reach a specified update state and generate a specified profit state by repeating the execution of the variable display without generating a specific profit, thereby creating new gameplay and increasing the interest of the game.

<Group E: Execute specific performances during each timing>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine E1 characterized by being equipped with a special effect execution means (e.g., a display special chart 1 variation pattern command setting process (S1307)) that executes a special effect (e.g., a suggestion command during an ambiguous notification period) during the varying display between the specified timing and the specific timing.

According to the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the notification control means includes a switching means for notifying the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a specific timing before the specific information becomes the specific update state in a specific period of time when the judgment means results in a specific judgment result, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the specific timing, and the gaming machine includes a special effect executing means for executing a special effect during a variable display between the specific timing and the specific timing. This allows a special effect to be executed during a variable display between the specific timing and the specific timing. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable effect being executed is a variable effect between the specific timing and the specific timing by checking the special effect, and when the variable effect being executed becomes a specific judgment result, the player can consider before the specific judgment result is derived whether to perform a specific game operation to generate a specific profit, or to not perform a specific game operation and to cause the game to become in a specific update state to generate a specific profit state.

<Group F: Restriction on switching of the first notification mode after switching>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine F1 is configured such that after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the gaming machine will not switch to the first notification mode until at least the specific benefit is generated.

According to the gaming machine F1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment is made based on the gaming ball entering the start ball entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by a player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the gaming machine is configured such that after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the gaming machine does not switch to the first notification mode at least until the specific profit is generated. As a result, after switching to the second notification mode at the specific timing, the second notification mode can be continued without switching to the first notification mode until the specific profit is generated. As a result, after switching to the second notification mode at a specific timing, it will not switch back to the first notification mode until a specific benefit is generated, so when the variable presentation results in a specific judgment result, the player can rest assured that they do not need to perform a specific game operation, and can simply allow the game to enter a specific update state to generate a specific benefit state.

<Group G: Renewal Lottery>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine includes:
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state is determined by lottery from among a plurality of update numbers.

According to the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a notification control means for controlling a game when a gaming ball enters the start entry area. The gaming machine includes a determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the predetermined information, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a predetermined game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by a player when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, notifying the player of the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before the specific information reaches the predetermined update state for a predetermined period of time, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the gaming machine determines the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state by lottery to one from among multiple update numbers. As a result, the specific information is determined to be one update number by lottery from among multiple update numbers. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to determine the number of updates until the specific information reaches the predetermined update state, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

<Group H: With a specific judgment result, a specific profit occurs only when a specific game condition is met>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The profit generating means is
The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that, in the specific gaming state, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the specific profit is generated only when the specified gaming condition is fulfilled based on the specified gaming operation by the player.

According to the gaming machine H1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on a gaming ball entering the start entry area. , and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for, when a specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, notifying the fact that the specific judgment result has been reached in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the specified update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the profit generating means generates the specific profit in the specific game state only when the specific game condition is established based on the specified game operation by the player when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means. This makes it possible to generate a specific profit only when a specific game condition is established based on a specified game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is reached. As a result, even if a specific judgment result is reached, unless a specified game operation is performed by the player, the specified game condition cannot be established, and the generation of a specific profit in a specific game state can be avoided, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine H1,
A gaming machine H2, characterized in that when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, the execution of a specific gaming operation is notified by a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode.

Gaming machine H2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine H1. That is, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, a third notification mode different from the first notification mode and the second notification mode is used to notify the player of the execution of a specific gaming operation. This has the effect of making the game more interesting by notifying the player of the execution of a specific gaming operation different from a predetermined gaming operation by the third notification mode when a specific judgment result is reached.

<Group I: The second notification is more valuable than the first notification>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The second notification mode is
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the notification corresponds to a gaming state in which a higher value can be obtained than in the first notification mode.

According to the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a control means for controlling a game when a gaming ball enters the start entry area. The game includes a judgment means for executing a predetermined judgment based on the ball entering the ball, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a predetermined game operation by the player when a specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for notifying the specific judgment result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state in a predetermined period of time when the judgment means obtains a specific judgment result, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the second notification mode is a notification corresponding to a game state in which a higher value can be obtained than in the first notification mode. As a result, the average number of balls obtained is greater in a game state that can be entered when playing according to the suggested contents of the second notification mode than in a game state that can be entered when playing according to the suggested contents of the first notification mode. As a result, even if a specific judgment result is obtained, when the game is notified in the second notification mode, the average number of balls obtained can be increased by not performing the predetermined game operation and not generating a specific profit, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group J: Specific information display changes depending on the number of times it is executed>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The display means includes:
A specific display means (e.g., a main display right-hit instruction 89) is provided to display based on the specific information,
The specific display means is
A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the display mode is changed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed at the start of the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine J1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls, a start ball entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming balls can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern variably when a gaming ball enters the start ball entry area, and a variable ball entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined updated state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment is executed based on the gaming ball entering the start ball entry area. The game device includes a determination means for determining whether a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by the player when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for notifying the specific determination result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state, and switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and the display means includes a specific display means for displaying based on the specific information, and the specific display means changes the display mode depending on the number of times the variable display is executed at the start of the specific game state. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the specific information displayed based on the specific display means depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the specific game state. As a result, when a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, the display mode of the specific information displayed based on the specific display means makes it possible to guess which of the first notification mode or the second notification mode should be used to execute the game operation, thereby improving the interest in the game.

<Group K: First and second notifications both suggest launching to one side of the play area>
A launching means (e.g., a ball launching unit 112a) capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area (e.g., a first starting hole 64) provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A display means (e.g., a special symbol display device 37) for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when a game ball enters the starting ball entry area;
A gaming machine including a variable winning means (e.g., a variable winning device 65) provided in the gaming area and performing a plurality of variable operations,
An update means for updating specific information (e.g., a relief counter 203r) based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display (e.g., the stopping of the dynamic display of a special symbol);
A profit state generating means generates a predetermined profit state (e.g., a "normal low probability time shortening state") at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state (e.g., the number of times a rescue condition is satisfied) in a specific game state (e.g., a game state from an initialization state to a jackpot execution);
A notification control means (e.g., a right-hit notification process (S1409) when a small win is won) for performing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a big win priority notification period) or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (e.g., a right-hit notification during a relief priority notification period);
A determination means (e.g., MPU 201) that executes a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry area;
and a profit generating means (e.g., winning process (S203)) for generating a specific profit (e.g., a big win game) when a specific game condition (e.g., a game ball passing through a specific area switch 65g) is established based on a specific game operation (e.g., right-hitting game) by the player when a specific judgment result (e.g., a small win type "time-saving B (small win A)" or a small win type "time-saving C (small win A)" is won) is obtained by the judgment means,
The notification control means
a switching means for notifying the user of the fact that a specific determination result has been reached by the determination means in the first notification manner until a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined updated state, and for switching the notification manner to the second notification manner at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing,
The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that, in either the situation where the first notification mode appears or the situation where the second notification mode appears, the gaming machine K1 suggests to the player that the launching means will launch a gaming ball to one side of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a start entry area provided in a gaming area where the gaming ball can flow down, a display means for displaying a predetermined pattern in a variable manner when a gaming ball enters the start entry area, and a variable entry means provided in the gaming area for performing a plurality of variable operations, and further includes an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display, a profit state generating means for generating a predetermined profit state at a predetermined timing after the specific information becomes a predetermined update state in a specific gaming state, a notification control means for issuing a predetermined notification in a first notification mode or a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and a predetermined judgment means for making a predetermined decision based on the entry of a gaming ball into the start entry area. and a profit generating means for generating a specific profit when a specific game condition is established based on a specific game operation by a player when a specific game result is determined by the determination means, and the notification control means includes a switching means for notifying the player of the specific game result in the first notification mode until a predetermined timing before a predetermined period before the specific information becomes the predetermined update state when the determination means determines a specific game result, and for switching the notification mode to the second notification mode at a specific timing after the predetermined timing, and suggests to the player that the game ball is launched by the launching means to one side of the game area in either the situation where the first notification mode appears or the situation where the second notification mode appears. Thus, when a specific game result is determined by the determination means, even if a predetermined game operation is performed based on the first notification mode and the second notification mode, a predetermined game condition can be established only when a predetermined game operation based on the first notification mode is performed. As a result, the first and second notification modes suggest a specific game operation, and a specific benefit is generated only when the specific game operation based on the first notification mode is performed, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

The configuration of the gaming machine A1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine B1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine C1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine D1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine E1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine F1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine G1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, H1 to H2, I1, J1, and K1.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, I1, J1, and K1 may be applied to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H2.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine I1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, J1, and K1.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine J1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, and K1.

The configuration of the gaming machine K1 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1 to H2, I1, and J1.

In these cases, further benefits can be achieved by applying each configuration.

Gaming machine X1 is any one of gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1, characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

A gaming machine X2 is a pachinko gaming machine among the gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which launches a ball into a predetermined gaming area in response to the operation of the control handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (a large winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Gaming machine X3 is a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine among gaming machines A1, B1, C1, D1, E1, F1, G1, H1-H2, I1, J1, and K1. The basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine that includes a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the dynamic display of the identification information is a specific identification information, a ball is used as a gaming medium, a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
37 Special symbol display device (part of the display means)
64 First starting hole (part of the starting ball entry area)
65 Variable winning device (part of the variable winning means)
65g Specific area switch (part of the specified game conditions)
89 Right-hit instruction for main display (part of specific display means)
112a Ball launching unit (part of the launching means)
201 MPU (part of the determination means)
203r Relief counter (part of specific information)
S203 Winning process (part of profit generating means)
S1307 Display special chart 1 variable pattern command setting process (part of special performance execution means)
S1409: Right-hit notification process when a small win occurs (part of the notification control means)

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball;
A starting ball entry area provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down;
A determination means for executing a predetermined determination based on the game ball entering the start ball entry area;
A display means for variably displaying a predetermined pattern when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry area;
a variable ball entry means provided in the game area, which can switch between a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the game area and a first state in which the game ball can enter the game area from the second state when a specific judgment result is made by the judgment means;
and an update means for updating specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition in the variable display,
This gaming machine is
In a specific game state in which the specific information can be updated by the update means, when the specific information reaches a predetermined updated state, a specific display is performed;
When a profit state generating condition is satisfied after the specific display, a predetermined profit state is generated.
a notification control means for executing a predetermined notification mode display in a first notification mode display or a second notification mode display different from the first notification mode display,
This gaming machine is
A specific benefit is generated when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the variable ball entry means in the first state and a predetermined game condition is established,
in a predetermined gaming state before the occurrence of the predetermined advantageous state, when the specific judgment result is reached by the judgment means, executing a first predetermined gaming operation thereafter may be more disadvantageous to the player than executing a second predetermined gaming operation;
The notification control means
a notification switching means for switching the notification mode display so that, when the determination means has reached the specific determination result, the first notification mode display is executed at a predetermined timing that is a predetermined period before the specific information reaches the specific update state, and the second notification mode display is executed at a specific timing that is after the predetermined timing and before the specific information reaches the specific update state,
The notification switching is configured to be executable when the game state becomes the predetermined game state,
This gaming machine is
When the specific determination result is reached in the specific game state, the specific notification mode display is executed in the second notification mode display for the specific determination result, thereby encouraging the player to execute the second specific game operation;
This gaming machine is
At least, between the predetermined timing and the specific timing when the notification switching is executed, a predetermined game operation notification display that is different from the first notification mode display and the second notification mode display and notifies the player that a predetermined game operation can be executed based on the player's judgment, rather than a game operation instruction display from the gaming machine to the player, can be executed;
The specific information is configured to set a predetermined period information in a predetermined memory area, the predetermined period information being information corresponding to a period from an initial state to the predetermined update state based on at least the game ball entering the starting ball entry area,
The period until the specific information reaches the specific timing from the initial state is changed based on the type of the specific period information,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when a player executes the first predetermined gaming operation while being urged to execute the second predetermined gaming operation, the player is configured to be able to obtain a lower profit than when the player executes the second predetermined gaming operation while being urged to execute the second predetermined gaming operation.